Orthographic Drawings

User's Guide

Version 2016 (11.0)

November 2016
Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2016 Intergraph® Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2016. All Rights Reserved.
Portions of the user interface are copyright © 2012-2016 Telerik AD.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758

Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.

Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.

Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and
for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 2

The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b. To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporation’s Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, ISOGEN, SmartSketch,
SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, SupportModeler, Sapphire, and Intergraph Smart are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered
trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a
registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl,
ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl, ActiveListBar Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are
trademarks of Infragistics, Inc. Incorporates portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management
Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. Gigasoft is a registered trademark, and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc.
VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either registered trademarks or trademarks of ComponentOne LLC 1991-2013, All rights reserved.
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a
trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and act/cut are trademarks of the Alma company. Other brands and product names are
trademarks of their respective owners.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 3

Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................. 11
What's New in Drawings and Reports .............................................................................................. 11

Drawings and Reports ......................................................................................................................... 16

ISO Standards in Marine Drawings .................................................................................................. 18

Delivered Drawing Types..................................................................................................................... 21

Drawings by Rule Types .................................................................................................................. 23

Interface Overview ............................................................................................................................... 24

Menus and Toolbars ........................................................................................................................ 25
Icons for Components and Drawings................................................................................................ 25
Permissions Overview ..................................................................................................................... 27

View Menu ............................................................................................................................................ 28

Management Console (View Menu) ................................................................................................. 28
Detail View (View Menu) .................................................................................................................. 29
Specify columns in the detail view.............................................................................................. 30
Column Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 31
Workspace Explorer (View Menu) .................................................................................................... 32
Refresh (View Menu) ....................................................................................................................... 32

Shortcut Menus.................................................................................................................................... 33
Root Shortcut Menu ......................................................................................................................... 34
Folder Shortcut Menu ...................................................................................................................... 34
Component Shortcut Menu .............................................................................................................. 35
Drawing Document Shortcut Menu................................................................................................... 36
New................................................................................................................................................. 37
Add a drawing document ........................................................................................................... 37
Batch Commands ............................................................................................................................ 37
Copy Command............................................................................................................................... 38
Copy an item ............................................................................................................................. 38
Cut Command ................................................................................................................................. 38
Cut an item................................................................................................................................ 39
Create Drawing(s) Command........................................................................................................... 39
Delete Command............................................................................................................................. 39
Delete an item ........................................................................................................................... 40
Edit Command................................................................................................................................. 40
Edit Template Command ................................................................................................................. 41
New Command ................................................................................................................................ 41
Add a folder ............................................................................................................................... 41
Add a package of components................................................................................................... 42

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 4

 Contents

Add a component ...................................................................................................................... 42

Add a Drawings by Rule component .......................................................................................... 42
Add Component Dialog Box....................................................................................................... 43
Open Command .............................................................................................................................. 43
Open a document ...................................................................................................................... 43
Paste Command .............................................................................................................................. 43
Paste an item ............................................................................................................................ 44
Paste Special Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 44
Print Command................................................................................................................................ 45
Print a document ....................................................................................................................... 45
Print a document as a PDF file .................................................................................................. 46
Select Printer (File Menu) .......................................................................................................... 46
Configure SmartPlant PDF Converter for Windows .................................................................... 46
Select Printer Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 47
Setting Properties ............................................................................................................................ 47
Properties Command................................................................................................................. 48
Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 49
Choose Label Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 69
Rename Command.......................................................................................................................... 69
Rename an item ........................................................................................................................ 70
Run Query (Shortcut Menu) ............................................................................................................. 70
Save As Command .......................................................................................................................... 70
Save to a file ............................................................................................................................. 71
Retrieve piping component file data (PCF) ................................................................................. 72
Save as SmartPlant Foundation (*.xml) ..................................................................................... 73
Save As Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 75
Save Package Command ................................................................................................................ 76
Save a package......................................................................................................................... 77
Save Package Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 77
Setup Command.............................................................................................................................. 78
Updating Documents ....................................................................................................................... 78
Refresh (Shortcut Menu) ........................................................................................................... 79
Update Now .............................................................................................................................. 80
Update ...................................................................................................................................... 83
Conditional Drawing Update ...................................................................................................... 86
Restore............................................................................................................................................ 87
Create a backup to use for restoration ....................................................................................... 87
Restore a document from a backup model................................................................................. 87
View Log Command ........................................................................................................................ 88

Components Overview ........................................................................................................................ 89

Drawings by Rule Components ........................................................................................................ 92

Drawings and Reports Naming Rules ................................................................................................. 95

Document and Sheet Naming Rules in Drawings by Rule ................................................................ 96
View Naming Rules in Drawings by Rule.......................................................................................... 99

Drawings by Rule ............................................................................................................................... 102

Setup (Drawings by Rule Component) ........................................................................................... 104

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 5

 Contents

Set up a Drawings by Rule package ........................................................................................ 105

Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Rule Component) ................................................................... 108
Edit Template (Drawings by Rule) .................................................................................................. 128
Edit a Drawings by Rule Template ........................................................................................... 129
Assembly Drawings ....................................................................................................................... 129
Create an assembly drawing ................................................................................................... 131
Create an assembly method drawing ....................................................................................... 133
Create an assembly sequence drawing ................................................................................... 135
Hull Lines Drawings ....................................................................................................................... 137
Create a hull lines drawing....................................................................................................... 141
Manufacturing Drawings ................................................................................................................ 144
Create a profile sketch drawing................................................................................................ 145
Create a multiple profile sketch drawing ................................................................................... 147
Create a pin jig drawing ........................................................................................................... 149
Create a template set drawing ................................................................................................. 151
Scantling Drawings ........................................................................................................................ 153
Create automated major views for steel order scantling drawings ............................................ 154
Place a manual view by selecting parts.................................................................................... 155
Place a manual view by selecting a reference plane or offset ................................................... 157
Create a shell profile steel order scantling drawing .................................................................. 158
Create weld symbol with double bevel and fillet ....................................................................... 161
Edit a scantling drawing ........................................................................................................... 162
Update a manual view ............................................................................................................. 163
Filter Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 164
Shell Expansion Drawings ............................................................................................................. 173
Create a shell expansion drawing ............................................................................................ 173
Offshore Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 175
Create a member part drawing ................................................................................................ 175
Create a pipe support drawing ................................................................................................. 177
Create a piping drawing ........................................................................................................... 179

3D Model by Query ............................................................................................................................ 183

3D Model by Query Component Common Tasks............................................................................ 183
Setup (3D Model by Query Component)......................................................................................... 184
Set up a 3D Model By Query component ................................................................................. 184
Setup Dialog Box (3D Model by Query Component)................................................................. 185
Setup (Drawings By Query Manager Component) .......................................................................... 185
Set up a Drawings by Query Manager component ................................................................... 186
Setup Dialog Box (Drawings By Query Manager Component) .................................................. 187
Export color and transparency styles ....................................................................................... 187

3D Model Data .................................................................................................................................... 188

3D Model Data Component Common Tasks .................................................................................. 189
Setup (3D Model Data Component) ............................................................................................... 190
Setup a 3D Model Data component ......................................................................................... 191
Setup Dialog Box (3D Model Data Component) ....................................................................... 192

Exporting 3D Model Graphics to MicroStation ................................................................................. 194

Setup (MicroStation DGN Files) ..................................................................................................... 194

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 6

 Contents

Setup Dialog Box (MicroStation DGN Files) ............................................................................. 194

Create Drawing (MicroStation DGN Files) ...................................................................................... 195
Create MicroStation DGN files ................................................................................................. 195

Generic Module Folder ...................................................................................................................... 198

Setup (Generic Module Folder Component) ................................................................................... 198
Use a Generic Module Folder component ................................................................................ 199
Setup Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder Component) ........................................................... 199
Select Module Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder Component) .............................................. 199

Composed Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 201

Composed Drawings Common Tasks ............................................................................................ 203
New Drawing ................................................................................................................................. 205
Create a New Composed Drawing ........................................................................................... 205
Create a drawing using WBS objects ....................................................................................... 208
Drawing Sheet General Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................... 209
Select Template Dialog Box..................................................................................................... 210
Switch Border ................................................................................................................................ 210
Drawing Sheet Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 211

Orthographic Drawings by Query ..................................................................................................... 213

Orthographic Drawings by Query Common Tasks .......................................................................... 214
Drawings by Query Filters .............................................................................................................. 216
Setup (Orthographic Drawing by Query Component)...................................................................... 217
Setup an Orthographic Drawing by Query component.............................................................. 218
Setup Dialog Box (Orthographic Drawing by Query Component).............................................. 218
Select Filter ................................................................................................................................... 219
Setup (Drawings by Query Manager Component Shortcut Menu)................................................... 219
Set up a Drawings by Query Manager component ................................................................... 219
Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Query Manager Component) .................................................. 220
Run Query (Shortcut Menu) ........................................................................................................... 221
Create Orthographic Drawings by Query for volumes ..................................................................... 221
Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Drawing by Query) ............................................................... 223
View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) ...................................................................... 223

Volume Drawings............................................................................................................................... 225

Volume Drawings Common Tasks ................................................................................................. 227
Defining Drawing Volumes ............................................................................................................. 228
Create Drawing (Volume Drawings) ............................................................................................... 229
Create a volume drawing ......................................................................................................... 229
Edit Template (Volume Drawings Component) ............................................................................... 230
Edit a volume drawing template ............................................................................................... 231
Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Volume Drawings) ............................................................... 231

Search Folders ................................................................................................................................... 232

Create a search folder ................................................................................................................... 233
Setup (Search Folder).................................................................................................................... 234
Setup Dialog Box (Search Folder) .................................................................................................. 234

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 7

 Contents

Search Folder Filters ..................................................................................................................... 234

Imported Folders................................................................................................................................ 237

Create an imported folder .............................................................................................................. 238
Setup (Imported Folder) ................................................................................................................. 239
Setup Dialog Box (Imported Folder) ............................................................................................... 239
Browse for Folder Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 239

Tools Menu......................................................................................................................................... 240

Convert Legacy Snapshots ............................................................................................................ 240
Convert Legacy Snapshots Dialog Box .................................................................................... 241
Batch Processing - Intergraph Smart Batch Services ..................................................................... 241
Drawings Batch Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 241
Add Actions to Queue.............................................................................................................. 242
Create a Template................................................................................................................... 243
Schedule [Task] Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 244
Custom Commands ....................................................................................................................... 245
Create custom commands ....................................................................................................... 248
Add custom commands ........................................................................................................... 249
Run a custom command .......................................................................................................... 249
Edit a custom command .......................................................................................................... 249
Delete a custom command ...................................................................................................... 249
Custom Commands Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 250
Add Custom Command Dialog Box.......................................................................................... 250
Edit Custom Command Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 251
Delivered Custom Commands ................................................................................................. 251

Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor ......................................... 253
Drawings View Explorer ................................................................................................................. 256
Move Sheet(s) ......................................................................................................................... 258
Dimensions.................................................................................................................................... 259
Automatic Dimensioning .......................................................................................................... 259
Manual Dimensioning .............................................................................................................. 266
Dimensioning in 3D Drawings .................................................................................................. 267
Save As MicroStation or AutoCAD Format ..................................................................................... 270
Edit Sheet Properties Command .................................................................................................... 272
Change the Border Template for an Existing Sheet.................................................................. 273
Sheet Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 273
Drawings Compose Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 275
Place View Command ............................................................................................................. 275
Place Region Command .......................................................................................................... 296
Place Snapshot View Command.............................................................................................. 299
Associate Objects to View Command ...................................................................................... 300
Remove Associated Inputs Command ..................................................................................... 319
Place Report View Command .................................................................................................. 319
Place a Label Command ......................................................................................................... 322
Group Selected Labels ............................................................................................................ 339
Place Detail Envelope Command ............................................................................................ 343
Place Cutting Plane/Section View Command ........................................................................... 346

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 8

 Contents

Place Detail View Command ................................................................................................... 358

2D/3D Selection Command ..................................................................................................... 361
Using Scaled Sketching ........................................................................................................... 363
Retain Edits made inside a Drawing View ................................................................................ 372
Hide/Show Object Command................................................................................................... 372
Copy and Paste View Command ............................................................................................. 375
Move View Command ............................................................................................................. 375
Highlight Annotations Command.............................................................................................. 376
Clear Manual Edits Command ................................................................................................. 379
Associate Graphics to Graphic View Command ....................................................................... 379
Template Toolbar .......................................................................................................................... 381
Place Drawing View Command (Template Toolbar) ................................................................. 381
Place Report Command (Template Toolbar) ............................................................................ 386
Place Key Plan Command (Template Toolbar) ........................................................................ 388
Edit Border Template Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 391
Place Drawing Property Label Command (Drawing Labels Toolbar)......................................... 391
Place Drawing Area Command ................................................................................................ 396
Change the Border for an Individual Drawings by Rule Sheet .................................................. 397
Edit Layout Template ..................................................................................................................... 398
Edit Border Family Command .................................................................................................. 398
Preview Layout Command....................................................................................................... 399
Shortcut Menus ............................................................................................................................. 399
Update View Command ........................................................................................................... 399
Switch Border .......................................................................................................................... 400
Add a Sheet to Drawing ........................................................................................................... 401
Layers (SmartSketch Drawing Editor Tools Menu) ......................................................................... 402
Modify an Existing Border File ................................................................................................. 402
Custom Commands ....................................................................................................................... 403
Convert Excel Spreadsheet Reports to Native Text Box Format Custom
Command ............................................................................................................................... 403
Edit a Composed Drawing ............................................................................................................. 404
Edit the Drawing Template ............................................................................................................. 406
Modify View Ribbon ....................................................................................................................... 406
Crop a Drawings by Rule 2D Drawing View and the 3D Model Volume .................................... 406
Remove Cropping on a Drawings by Rule View ....................................................................... 407
Place an Unassigned View ............................................................................................................ 408
Section View Orientation Rules in Drawings by Rule ...................................................................... 409
Update and Full Update Commands .............................................................................................. 414
Run Update or Full Update ...................................................................................................... 415
Delete Views ................................................................................................................................. 415

Save as SmartPlant Review File ........................................................................................................ 417

Save 3D model data for SmartPlant Review................................................................................... 418
Save as SmartPlant Review Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 419

Revising ............................................................................................................................................. 421

Revise ........................................................................................................................................... 421
Revise a document.................................................................................................................. 422
Revise Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 422

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 9

 Contents

Publishing Documents ...................................................................................................................... 424

Publishing Title Blocks ................................................................................................................... 425
Publish Common Tasks ................................................................................................................. 426
Publish .......................................................................................................................................... 427
Set properties for publishing documents .................................................................................. 428
Support for Handling Large Publishes ...................................................................................... 428
Publish documents .................................................................................................................. 431
Publish Workflows ................................................................................................................... 432
Publish a large 3D model to SmartPlant Foundation ................................................................ 434
Issue request documents......................................................................................................... 434
Publish Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 435
Document Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 440
Find Documents to Publish ............................................................................................................ 441
Find documents to publish ....................................................................................................... 441
Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box .................................................................................... 442
Manage Projects ............................................................................................................................ 442
Select Active Project Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 443

Appendix: Troubleshooting Drawings and Reports ......................................................................... 444

Troubleshooting Linked Servers ..................................................................................................... 447

Index ................................................................................................................................................... 448

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 10

Preface
This document is a user's guide for the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Drawings and Reports task and
provides command reference information and procedural instructions.
The Drawings and Reports user documentation is delivered in three separate documents:
 Orthographic Drawings User's Guide
 Isogen Isometric Drawings User's Guide
 Reports User's Guide

Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, comments or suggestions about this
documentation, and documentation updates for supported software versions, please visit
Intergraph Smart Support (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com).

What's New in Drawings and Reports

The following changes have been made to the Drawing and Reports task.
Version 2016 (11.0)

Drawings (General)
 You can now transfer the ownership of drawings between permission groups. For more
information, see Configuration Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 68). (P1 CP:278233)
 A new 3D Dimension ribbon in SmartSketch Drawing Editor overrides manual 2D
dimensions with 3D dimensions. For more information, see Dimensioning in 3D Drawings
(on page 267) and 3D Dimension Ribbon. (P1 CP:139408)
 You can copy a drawing view only by using the Copy and Paste View command. For more
information, see Copy and Paste View Command (on page 375). (P2 CP:226825)
 You can perform Update Selected on both full and cropped views. For more information,
see Drawings View Explorer (on page 256). (P2 CP:230723)
 Added a new ribbon, Generic View Ribbon, to the Associate Objects to View command
that allows you to specify options on a selected graphic view with a generic rule set view
style. For more information, see Associate Objects to View Command (on page 300). (P2
CP:244388)
 You can now customize the shortcut menu on a folder in the Management Console. For
more information, see New Command (on page 41). (P2 CP:255695)
 You can now either delete a manual view placed by rule, or move the view to the
UnAssigned Folder. For more information, see Delete Views (on page 415). (P2
CP:256645)
 You can now customize Drawings by Rule Steel Order rulesets in .NET to generate
drawings. For more information, see Drawings by Rule Components (on page 92). (P2
CP:266707)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 11

 Preface

 In drawings by rule, view annotations, such as the ruler and view name, are automatically
adjusted in relation to the View Offset value. For more information, see View Tab (Drawing
View Properties Dialog Box - Drawings View Explorer) (on page 283). (P2 CP:267889)
 Smart 3D displays a warning telling you to use Copy and Paste View rather than the
traditional Cut, Copy, and Paste commands with views. For more information, see Copy
and Paste View Command (on page 375). (P2 CP:226825, CP:275427, and CP:284427)
 You can now prevent landing curves from occluding other landing curves using the
AddSolidForVHL flag. For more information, see Generic Stiffener Landing Curve. (P2
CP:296036)
 Group Selected Labels stacks selected objects without overlapping the leader lines. For
more information, see Group Selected Labels (on page 339). (P2 CP:265171 and P3
CP:271343)
 You can select multiple objects with the Place a Label command, and place a group label
for the objects. For more information, see Place a Label Command (on page 322) and
Group Labels (on page 326). (P3 CP:181864)
 Drawing by Rule view properties only display applicable drawing by rule view styles. For
more information, see View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box - Drawings View
Explorer) (on page 283). (P3 CP:215229)
 You can place a manual view for non-shell plates in Marine mode. For more information,
see Place a Manual View for Non-Shell Plates (on page 292).
 You can now update all drawings by rule documents with the Full Update action in
Intergraph Smart Batch Services. For more information, see Full Update Action. (P1
CP:160700) (P3 CP:199390)
 A new property, View Cone Angle, displays the cone angle value. For more information,
see View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box - Drawings View Explorer) (on page
283). (P3 CP:266696)
 Added a new Warning view state to the Drawings View Explorer. For more information, see
Drawings View Explorer (on page 256). (P3 CP:271093)
 In ruleset views, if you change the view style before editing View Offset for the first time,
View Offset displays the offset value as defined in the .xml template of the view style. For
more information, see View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 277). (P3
CP:272849)
 A new file option, File Already Exists Action, specifies how to save the hierarchy if a file
with the same name already exists. For more information, see Save As Command (on page
70) (P4 CP:273965)
 Any time you update a 3D model document, the software now generates a single log file
containing status information and any errors encountered during the process. The log file
location is %TEMP%\EFUpdateCache\[3D Model ID]\[3D Model ID].log. For more
information, see Updating Documents (on page 78). (P2 CP:292733)
 Added information about hiding plant view styles when working in marine mode. For more
information, see View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box - Drawings View Explorer)
(on page 283). (P3 CP:293501)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 12

 Preface

Orthographic Drawings
 You can now export 3D model graphics directly to MicroStation V8 DGN file format. For
more information, see Exporting 3D Model Graphics to MicroStation (on page 194). (P4
CP:251155)
 Added a new MicroStation Version option to Setup dialog box (MicroStation DGN Files).
For more information, see Setup Dialog Box (MicroStation DGN Files) (on page 194). (P4
CP:112450)
 Added information about the working units supported by the seed file when exporting
graphics to MicroStation V7 DGN file format. For more information, see Create MicroStation
DGN files (on page 195) .(P2 CP:75204)
 Highlight Annotations and Clear Manual Edits commands are available on the Drawings
Compose toolbar. For more information, see Highlight Annotations Command (on page
376) and Clear Manual Edits Command (on page 379). (P2 CP:256406)
 You can now associate manually placed objects to graphic views. For more information, see
Associate Graphics to Graphic View Command (on page 379). (P2 CP:247816)

Isogen Isometric Drawings

 You can now produce cable tray and HVAC isometric drawings. To support this
enhancement, the Style list on the Setup dialog box now enables you to filter styles
according to the isometric drawing type. For more information, see Setup Dialog Box (Isogen
Isometric Drawing by Query Component).(P2 CP:273785 and CP:209035)
In this version of the software, cable tray and HVAC isometric drawing
options are limited to beta access. As such, isometric options specific to cable tray and
HVAC drawings are not visible in Isogen Configuration by default. To turn on cable tray
and HVAC options so that you have access to the full array of isometric drawing settings
provided by the software, please contact Intergraph Support
(http://www.intergraph.com/support).
 To support the creation of cable tray and HVAC isometric drawings, two new drawing styles
are delivered with the software: Iso_CableTray and Iso_HVAC. For more information, see
Isometric Drawing Styles.
 The function of the piping component file (PCF) has been extended. In addition to piping
content, the PCF now supports the transfer of HVAC and cable tray content and
configuration information between Smart 3D and Isogen.
 You can now associate manually placed objects to graphic views. For more information, see
Associate Graphics to Graphic View Command (on page 379). (P2 CP:247816)
 In previous versions of the software, you used TreatTapsOnPipeAsTeeStubs to specify
whether the software managed taps as tee stubs or as regular taps when generating a
piping isometric drawing or when creating a piping component file (PCF). The software now
treats all radial taps placed on pipe as set-on tees, or tee stubs. All non-radial taps remain
as taps. (P2 CP:255192)
 Previous versions of Smart 3D refer to Piping Isometric Drawings. Because the software
now supports the production of cable tray and HVAC isometric drawings, the UI now reflects
the generic term Isogen Isometric Drawings. This document has been updated to reflect this
change in the UI. (P2 CP:259784)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 13

 Preface

 The Isometric Style Options Browser, which enabled you to control all of the options
related to the appearance and information content of the isometric drawing, has been
replaced with Isogen Configuration. For more information, see Isogen Configuration. (P2
CP:255749)
 You can now show the slope symbol without any angle/ratio for sloped lines. (P3
CP:157751)
 Isogen Configuration supports the ability to import a style fragment. For more information,
see Import data from a style XML file. (P2 AL:14940)
 You can export a customized set of isometric drawing properties, Alternative Text, and
report definitions to a style .xml file. For more information, see Export an isometric drawing
style fragment and Export Style Fragment Dialog Box. (P2 AL:14965)
 Isogen Configuration supports a new file path macro, $SYMBOLSHARE$. This macro
enables you to reference the SharedContent folder when specifying any path within an
isometric drawing style. Previous versions of the software required you to specify a
hard-coded path to reference any file located in the SharedContent folder. (P2 CP:105056)
 PCF syntax now supports the following material attributes: GEOMETRIC-STANDARD,
MATERIAL-OF-CONSTRUCTION,OUTSIDE-DIAMETER, OUTSIDE-DIAMETER2, RATING,
RATING2, SCHEDULE, SCHEDULE2, WALL-THICKNESS, and WALL-THICKNESS2. (P2
CP:248316)
 A new PDF document is delivered with the software. The Isometric Drawing Options
Reference Guide contains descriptions and general information for working with the Isogen
and Smart 3D isometric drawing properties. In previous versions of the software, this content
was delivered as part of the Piping Isometric Drawings User's Guide. The new document
(IsometricDrawingOptionsReferenceGuide.pdf) is available in the [Product
Folder]:\Documentation\Help folder and from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
 Added guidelines for creating a dotted dimensioned label. For more information, see Create
a dotted dimensioned label.
 The following changes are specific to the isometric drawing properties supported by the
software. For more information, see What's New in the Isometric Drawing Options Reference
Guide. You can access this document using the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
 A new options group, Grouping, has been added to Drawing Area > Graphics. (P2
AL:10443)
 The Group graphics by UCI property allows you to control how graphics are grouped
in the output CAD file. (P2 AL:10443)
 The Welds and Joints style category has been re-organized to improve its overall layout.
(P2 AL:14803)
 The software now supports horizontal positioning of the dimension standout. (P2
AL:11970)
 The software supports the ability to pull properties directly from the Drawing Sheet
object. (P2 CP:123112)
 The number of user-definable Alternative Text (AText) strings that the software supports
has been expanded. (P2 CP:74293)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 14

 Preface

 A new OidType called Drawing Sheet enables you to pull properties directly from the
Drawing Sheet object.(P2 CP:123112)
 The software supports output of a double-banked material list on the isometric drawing.
Previous versions of the software supported offsetting the material list section only
along the Y (or vertical) direction of the drawing using Section2 Y Offset and Section3
Y Offset. Now you can also offset the material list section along the X (or horizontal)
direction of the drawing using Section2 X Offset and Section3 X Offset. You can set
this option using Materials > Drawing Material List > User Defined. (P3 CP:250733)
You can also use the Drawing Setup Tool to set the horizontal offset for the
report data contained in Section 2 and Section 3 of the material list. For more
information, see X under Section Two and Section Three in Drawing Areas Page and
Material List Page.
 The software supports user-specified reference dimension placement locations on a
piping isometric drawing. As part of this new functionality, the Placement property is
renamed to Automatic Placement, and a new setting, Off, has been added. (P3
CP:176166)
 Added information about using pipeline data text attributes to dynamically name Isogen
output files.

Reports
 You can now specify a unit delimiter between primary and secondary units in a report. For
more information, see Parameters (Report Shortcut Menu). (P2 CP:140982)
 Added a new report, Designed Member Itemized Material Take-off. For more information,
see Designed Member Itemized Material Take-off. (P2 CP:234498)
 Added the trench run report. For more information, see Trench Run Report (Civil). (P2
CP:259491)
 Added a new report, Diagnostic Synch Workspace Report (Diagnostic). For more
information, see Diagnostic Synch Workspace Report (Diagnostic). (P2 CP:269935)
 Added information on using the Reporting Requirement property to exclude objects from
reports. For more information, see Report Queries to Extract Data. (P3 CP:85240)
 Added the workflow for configuring and running personal reports. For more information, see
Run Report. (P4 CP:281013)

Customer Support
Anti-Piracy Statement
Copyright © 1999-2016, Intergraph ® Corporation
Documentation updates available from Smart Support
9/20/2016 Version 2016 (11.0)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 15

SECTION 1
Drawings and Reports
The Intergraph SmartTM 3D Drawings and Reports task creates orthographic drawings (by a
variety of methods), isometric drawings, and reports from the model. When the 3D model
changes, you can update your drawings and reports.
The Drawings and Reports task is also responsible for publishing your drawings and reports.
When your model is registered using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, you can publish
volume and composed drawings, orthographic drawings, isometric drawings, and reports. You
can also publish 3D model data using the 3D Model Data component.
The Management Console organizes the different document types into a customizable
hierarchy. Using the component functionality of the console, you can create, edit, update, print,
save, and publish the deliverables. This hierarchy of components and documents is also
available in many of the 3D tasks, such as Common, by using the Tools > Drawing Console
command. You can perform nearly all of your document operations using this command. For
more information, see the Common User's Guide.
Before you can create components for drawings and reports, your administrator must organize
the Management Console hierarchy with folders for each component type. Then, the
administrator must complete several setup steps, including setting up drawing and report
templates, creating view styles, creating appropriate filters, and specifying isometric drawing
options. Default templates and view styles are delivered with the software, and you can
customize them to suit your needs.
It is possible to customize templates and view styles before any objects exist in the model.
However, to create drawings and reports, objects must exist in your model. For example, if you
want to generate Isogen isometric drawings, you must have piping, cable tray, or HVAC data in
your model.

Composed Drawings
Composed drawings are orthographic drawings created in a 3D task such as Common. The
composed drawing component, available in the Drawing and Reports task Management
Console, manages the composed drawings you create. Composed drawings are flexible,
allowing you to have views that are managed by a drawing region and associate the views to
volumes and other views.

Volume Drawings
Volume drawings are useful for creating general arrangement or construction drawings of areas
within the model. In the Volume Drawing workflows, you or your administrator must create or
edit border templates. You can place drawing property labels in the title block of the template to
fit your company or project. You also must configure the view styles, which are sets of rules that
determine how the graphics in the three-dimensional model are represented on the drawings.
View styles use filters. You can create a folder of drawing filters, with new, existing, and future
filters for each discipline. You place drawing volumes in the Space Management task. You can
publish Volume drawings when they are up-to-date.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 16

 Drawings and Reports

Orthographic Drawings by Query

The Orthographic Drawing by Query component, in conjunction with the Drawings by Query
Manager component, creates drawings in mass by specifying a filter-based query to collect
objects for drawings. This drawing type is appropriate for creating detail drawings of particular
objects within the model. They are especially useful when creating drawings that use the same
style or format for large numbers of similar objects, such as hangers or supports.
Just like composed and volume drawings, you can print, update, save into MicroStation J (V7
and V8) or AutoCAD formats, or publish Orthographic Drawings by Query. When you publish
Orthographic Drawings, a viewable graphic file is created; no physical data is published.

Orthographic Drawings by Rule (marine mode and material handling mode)

Drawing by Rule types include design and detail drawings, manufacturing drawings, and
assembly drawings. You can use the Drawings by Rule component to create custom drawings,
or select a delivered Drawings by Rule package to create your drawings.

Isogen Isometric Drawings by Query

Like Orthographic Drawings by Query, you create Isogen Isometric Drawings by Query by
specifying a filter-based query to collect the objects. The workflow requires that you create or
edit border templates to fit your company or project. You or your administrator also must set the
isometric options for each of the isometric styles that you need in your project.
When you publish Isogen Isometric Drawings by Query, they are published as viewable
graphics. No physical data is published.

Reports
In the Spreadsheet Reports workflow, you create report templates, which control the content
and format of reports. The default file format of reports in the software is Microsoft Excel®
format. The Report Template Editor provides the ability to configure your reports to use queries
and special formatting.
You can publish Spreadsheet Reports just like drawings. However, the Spreadsheet Reports are
published as Excel spreadsheets; no physical data is published.

 Microsoft Excel 2003 is the minimum supported version for the Drawings and Reports task.
 Microsoft Excel 2007 has a file format and extension of .xlsx. However, the delivered report
templates still use the old .xls extension. If you create a report template with the .xlsx
extension, only machines with Excel 2007 will be able to handle (edit, update, or open) the
report. If you attempt to open an .xlsx file with an older version of Excel, an error message
displays stating that the file is not compatible with the version of Excel.
 If you use Office 2003, in Microsoft Excel under Tools > Macro > Security > Trusted
Publishers tab, check the Trust Access to Visual Basic Project option.
 If you use Office 2007 and Office 2010, click the Microsoft Office button to open Excel
Option. Go to the Trust Center category and select the Trust Center Settings button.
Select the Macro Settings category and check Trust access to the VBA project object
model.
 For more information about Microsoft Office and service packs, refer to the Microsoft web
site (http://www.microsoft.com/) (http://www.microsoft.com/).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 17

 Drawings and Reports

ISO Standards in Marine Drawings

Intergraph SmartTM 3D marine drawings are ISO compliant. Several ISO templates are delivered
with the product.
Below is a list of ISO Reference numbers and the description of the document.

ISO 128-20:1996(E) Technical Drawings – General principles of presentation Basic

conventions for lines

ISO 128-21:1997(E) Technical Drawings – General principles of presentation Preparation of

lines by CAD systems

ISO 128-22:1999(E) Technical Drawings – General principles of presentation Basic

conventions for applications for leader lines and reference lines

ISO 128-23:1999(E) Technical Drawings – General principles of presentation Lines on

construction drawings

ISO 128-24:1999(E) Technical Drawings General principles of presentation Lines on

mechanical engineering drawings

ISO 128-25:1999(E) Technical Drawings General principles of presentation – Part 25: Lines
on shipbuilding drawings

ISO 128-30:2001(E) Technical Drawings – General principles of presentation – Part 30: Basic
conventions for views

ISO 128-40:2001(E) Technical Drawings – General principles of presentation – Part 40: Basic
conventions for cuts and sections

ISO 128-50:2001(E) Technical Drawings – General principles of presentation – Part 50: Basic
conventions for representing areas on cuts and sections

ISO 5457:1999(E) Technical product documentation – Sizes and layout of drawing sheets

ISO 7200:2400(E) Technical product documentation – Data fields in title blocks and
document headers

ISO 5261:1995(E) Technical Drawings – Simplified representation of bars and profile

sections

ISO 2553:1992(E) Welded, brazed and soldered joints – Symbolic representation on

drawings

ISO 5572:1987(E) Shipbuilding and marine structures – Numbering of equipment and

structural elements in ships

ISO 7462:1985(E) Shipbuilding – Principal ship dimensions. Terminology and definitions for
computer applications

ISO 8193:1984(E) Shipbuilding – Shell plating information

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 18

 Drawings and Reports

ISO 9203-1:1989(E) Shipbuilding – Topology of ship hull structure elements – Part 1:

Location of elements

ISO 9203-2:1989(E) Shipbuilding – Topology of ship hull structure elements – Part 2:

Description of elements

ISO 9203-3:1989(E) Shipbuilding – Topology of ship hull structure elements – Part 3:

Relations of elements

ISO 129-1:2004(E) Technical drawings – Indication of dimensions and tolerances – Part 1:

General principles

ISO 6428:1982(E) Requirements for microcopying

ISO 3898:1997(E) Bases for design of structure – Notations – General symbols

ISO 3098-0:1997(E) Technical product documentation – Lettering – Part 0: General

requirements

ISO 3098-2:2000(E) Technical product documentation – Lettering – Part 2: Latin alphabet,

numerals and marks

ISO 3098-5:1997(E) Technical product documentation – Lettering – Part 5: CAD lettering of

Latin alphabet, numerals and marks

By default, the following metric drawing templates are delivered in the ISO format.
LARGE
 Paper Format (ISO 5457)
 A0 (valid for A1 and enlarged formats)
 Title-block (ISO 7200)
 Lines (ISO 128 Part.25, ISO 6428)
 Wide 0.7 mm
 Narrow 0.35 mm
 Characters (ISO 3098-5, ISO 6428)
 Titles 7 mm (ISO 3098 BVL – 7)
 Labels 3.5, bold or 5 (ISO 128 Part.22)
 Dimensions 3.5, values rounded to 1 mm (ISO 129)
 Symbols to match above lines and characters for
 Relative positions of structural elements (BL, CL,...)
 Sections and details (Section plane, Section and Detail Titles)
 Profile cross-sections (ISO 5261)
 Profile end-cuts re-symbolization

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 19

 Drawings and Reports

 Section and plates butt joints

 Welds (ISO 2553)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 20

SECTION 2
Delivered Drawing Types
The delivered drawing types are drawing templates that include drawing borders, documentation
annotation, note areas, and selection and resymbolization criteria.
Several drawing types are delivered and fully designed to meet particular drawing requirements.
You can use the delivered types to create new drawing types and to modify the view styles or
border templates as needed. You can copy a template from an existing drawing or you can copy
volumes only, allowing you to create multiple drawings with the same border graphics. To copy
a drawing type component, select the item on the Management Console hierarchy, and then
select Copy. To paste the item, right-click a location in the hierarchy or in the Detail View and
select Paste.
All of the delivered drawing types provide customizable templates and view styles. The delivered
Equipment Plan drawing type is provided as an example below:
 The Equipment Plan is a single view drawing plan. It includes the location of equipment,
structural columns, building walls, equipment steel, vessel and mechanical steel, and roads.
 The Equipment Plan includes general information for coordinate systems, sheet scales,
and modifications. The drawing border provides the border graphics, title block graphics, and
the title block labels.
The document annotation includes the following:
 North Arrow - Indicates the orientation of the model. The large symbol is used, which is
typical for single view drawings. The north arrow is placed on each drawing view. Click and
drag the symbol to position it within the Note Area if required.
 Key Plan - Shows the geographic position of the single grid relative to the rest of the grids
of the same type in the single block.
 Drawing Notes - Shows the collection of notes, which consists of general notes applicable
to all drawings, notes applicable to a discipline, notes applicable to a category of drawings,
and notes specific to a single drawing (such as an element or a border report).

Note Area
The Note Area is used to display drawing notes and key plans. The note area on the Equipment
Plan is five inches on the right-hand side of the drawing border. This area extends from the top
of the border down to the top of the title area border. The Note Area is optional, and is not a
required element in the template.

View Regions
The View Region defines the drawing view arrangements. The Equipment Plan defaults to a
single view with a five-inch Note Area and one-inch margins around the drawing view.

Drawing View
The Equipment Plan is a single view plan. The following specifications are set:
 Direction - Set to Plan view (Looking Plan).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 21

 Delivered Drawing Types

 Rotation - Depends on the volume type and the Coordinate System defined, based on the
grid section's X and Y size. For example, a volume placed by four points in the Space
Management task will rotate the view.
 Scale - Set to 1/4" = 1' or 1 = 50.
 North Arrow - One symbol included per drawing view. Click and drag the symbol to the
Note Area.
 Annotation - The plan uses matchline labels to indicate the appropriate coordinate of that
segment of the grid boundary along with continuations. The matchlines are lines that outline
the boundaries of a grid by following the exterior boundaries of the collection of sectioning
elements defining the grid represented in the view.
 Drawing Volumes - The drawing volume is the queried 3D volume in the model.

View Styles
The view style specifies the object filters included in the drawing if present in the queried 3D
volume. It specifies how objects are displayed, including graphical representation, labeling, and
dimensioning. In the Equipment Plan, the volume and composed drawing view style definitions
are the same.

Title Blocks
The title block generally displays at the bottom of a drawing template. It can include signatures,
revision and issue information, and other properties associated with the drawing.

You can add drawing properties to the title block using the Place Drawing Property Label
command when editing a template.
See Also
Place a Drawing Property Label on a Template (on page 393)
Drawings and Reports Naming Rules (on page 95)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 22

 Delivered Drawing Types

Drawings by Rule Types

The delivered marine mode drawings by rule components provide easy starting points for more
complex drawings. You can also use the generic Drawings by Rule component to create custom
drawings.

Drawings by Rule
 Assembly drawings
 Hull Lines drawings
 Scantling drawings
 Expansion drawings
 Manufacturing drawings
 Offshore drawings
For information more information, see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

Other Drawing Types

You can also use the following drawing types to create outfitting drawings:
 Composed and Volume drawings - See Composed Drawings (on page 201) and Volume
Drawings (on page 225).
 Orthographic Drawings by Query - See Orthographic Drawings by Query (on page 213).
 Isogen Isometric Drawings by Query - See Isogen Isometric Drawings by Query in the
Isogen Isometric Drawings User's Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 23

SECTION 3
Interface Overview
This task includes different windows or views within its interface. You can toggle the display of
these windows using commands on the View menu. For more information, see View Menu (on
page 28).

The Management Console contains a hierarchy of folders and components that you create. If
you right-click an item in the Management Console, the available menu commands vary,
depending on the item and your permissions. For more information on managing folders and
components in the Management Console, see Shortcut Menus (on page 33). The
Management Console only displays in the Drawings task.
The Detail View shows the children of the selected item in the Management Console. You can
select multiple components or documents by pressing Ctrl or Shift while selecting. To specify
the columns in the Detail View, right-click a column heading and click More. The Detail View is
overlaid by other windows depending on the current operation. For example, when reviewing
drawings using the Open command, a 2D viewer displays. When you edit report templates, a
tabular editor displays. For more information on setting the appearance of the Detail View, see
Detail View (View Menu) (on page 29).
In plant mode, the Workspace Explorer is the tabbed view of systems, assemblies, spaces,
and Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) items in the software. For more information about the
Workspace Explorer, see the Common User's Guide available from the Help > Printable
Guides command in the software. The Workspace Explorer does not display in the Drawings
task.
Another window you use while working in this task is the SmartSketch Drawing
Editor window, which displays as a separate application window. It allows you to edit border
templates, drawing templates, and backing sheets for all types of drawings.
See Also
Menus and Toolbars (on page 25)
Icons for Components and Drawings (on page 25)
Permissions Overview (on page 27)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 24

 Interface Overview

Menus and Toolbars

In this task, the commands available change according to the active window, selected
Management Console or Detail View item, and the specific workflow.
For example, when you edit a drawing template or open a drawing, you control the template with
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. You use SmartSketch Drawing Editor menus and toolbars to
edit the open drawing template. When you edit report templates, the report menus and
commands are available.
In addition, the shortcut menu that displays when you right-click an item in the Management
Console or in the Detail View differs according to the type of item. For example, some of the
commands on the shortcut menu for an Isogen isometric drawing are different from the
commands on the shortcut menu for a composed drawing component.
For the root node of the Management Console hierarchy and Folder items that have no child
items beneath them, the shortcut menu includes Batch..., Copy, Paste, Delete, Rename,
New..., Save Package..., and Properties. If there are any child items beneath the root node or
beneath the selected folder, the following commands are added: Create Drawing(s), Refresh,
Run Query, Update Now, Print, and Save As. If you are registered with SmartPlant
Foundation, the Publish and Revise commands are added as well.
Also, keep in mind that the main menu bar available in the application varies by task. Some
commands available in other tasks may not be available in this one.
See Also
Interface Overview (on page 24)
Detail View (View Menu) (on page 29)

Icons for Components and Drawings

The Management Console and Detail View display different icons to show the type and status
of packages, components, and documents.

Drawing Type Icons

- Root of the model hierarchy
- Folder
- Search folder

- Imported folder
- Query manager
- Generic module folder

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 25

 Interface Overview

- Drawing by Rule component (marine mode and material handling mode only)
- Volume Drawing component
- Composed Drawing component
- Orthographic Drawing component
- Isogen Isometric Drawing component
- Spreadsheet Report component
- 3D Model Data component
- MicroStation 3D DGN drawing component
- Package of drawing components (in the Add Component dialog box)

- Drawings by Rule package (in the Add Component dialog box) (marine mode and material
handling mode only)
- Drawing document. A status icon is always superimposed over this icon.

Document Status Icons

These icons are superimposed on the document icon and indicate document status.
- Submitted or scheduled for batch processing. These documents are either submitted or
scheduled for batch processing.
- Updating or publishing. A document also displays this icon if an error occurred and forced
the machine to end the update process before it completed. Right-click the drawing document,
and select View Log for more information, or update the document again.

- Out-of-date. This document has been altered in SmartSketch Drawing Editor or the drawing
properties have been changed. A document is not marked out-of-date if the 3D model has been
changed. For example, changing the view style of a drawing view causes the document to be
out-of-date, while moving a pump in the 3D model does not affect the drawing status (unless a
Refresh is performed).

- Up-to-date. This document is an accurate representation of the 3D model based on the last
update performed. If an object in the 3D model that is included in the drawing view has been
moved inside the 3D environment, the document is still up-to-date unless Refresh is performed.
A change must be made to the drawing properties or inside the drawing in order for it to be
marked out-of-date without a Refresh.

- Error status. An error has occurred during the update process. Right-click the drawing, and
select View Log for more information.

- No graphic objects in the model associated with this drawing document. For example, the
drawing is a piping isometric drawing document created from a Pipeline System that has no
piping parts associated with it.

- The drawing document is a version 6.1 legacy Snapshot drawing. You should use the
Tools > Convert Legacy Snapshots command to convert this document to a Composed
Drawing for use in the current version of the software. If you do not convert the legacy snapshot

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 26

 Interface Overview

drawing, you cannot perform edit operations on the drawing, including update, revise, and
publish.
See Also
Components Overview (on page 89)
Interface Overview (on page 24)
Menus and Toolbars (on page 25)
Update Now (on page 80)
Convert Legacy Snapshots (on page 240)

Permissions Overview
Your site administrator sets permissions and creates permission groups in the Project
Management task. These permissions are used in the different tasks in the software to control
user access.
You can see your current permission group in the dropdown box in the upper left-hand corner of
the window when in the Drawings and Reports task.

The permission group to which an item belongs can affect the actions allowed against that item.
For example, the propagation of properties down the hierarchy, from parent to child, is
interrupted when a node or document in a read-only permission group is encountered.
The following list shows the actions relating to drawings and reports that are affected by
permission groups:
 Accessing shortcut menu commands in the Management Console and Detail View
 Creating items, such as drawings, drawing views, and drawing volumes
 Propagating properties down through the hierarchy
 Deleting items
 Updating items, such as re-extracting drawings
In addition, access to the SharedContent share on the server computer affects actions such as
creating and editing view styles and graphic rules.
See Also
Interface Overview (on page 24)
Menus and Toolbars (on page 25)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 27

SECTION 4
View Menu
In This Section
Management Console (View Menu) ............................................ 28
Detail View (View Menu) ............................................................. 29
Workspace Explorer (View Menu) ............................................... 32
Refresh (View Menu) .................................................................. 32

Management Console (View Menu)

Toggles the display of the Management Console. By default, the Management Console is
visible when you enter this task.
The Management Console contains a hierarchy of folders and components that you create. If
you right-click an item in the Management Console, the available menu commands vary,
depending on the item and your permissions. For more information on managing folders and
components in the Management Console, see Shortcut Menus (on page 33).
When you switch to a different task and then return to the Drawings and Reports task,
the Management Console remembers the node you last selected on the console hierarchy.

See Also
Interface Overview (on page 24)
Detail View (View Menu) (on page 29)
Workspace Explorer (View Menu) (on page 32)
Refresh (View Menu) (on page 32)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 28

 View Menu

Detail View (View Menu)

Turns the display of the Detail View on and off. This command is located on the View menu.
When checked, the Detail View is visible in the application window. When you right-click folders
or documents in the Detail View, shortcut menus display. The items on the shortcut menu vary
depending on the selected item, as shown in the following examples. For more information on
the commands, see Shortcut Menus (on page 33).
Plant mode example:

Marine mode example:

To modify the headings in the Detail View, right-click the column-heading area. Select More on
the shortcut menu to display the Column Settings dialog box.

See Also
Specify columns in the detail view (on page 30)
Column Settings Dialog Box (on page 31)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 29

 View Menu

Specify columns in the detail view

1. Right-click a column heading in the Detail View. The shortcut menu shows the currently
displayed columns with a checkmark .

2. Add and remove columns automatically by checking and unchecking them on the shortcut
menu.
3. To modify the appearance and order of the columns, click More on the shortcut menu.

4. On the Column Settings dialog box, select the columns you want to include in the Detail
View. Clear, or uncheck, the ones you do not want to include. You can also use the Show
and Hide buttons to add and remove columns.
5. To change the order of the columns, click Move Up and Move Down on the Column
Settings dialog box.
6. Specify the width of a column by selecting it and typing an integer in the Width of selected
column box. You can also resize columns by dragging the edge of the column in the Detail
View.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 30

 View Menu

See Also
Interface Overview (on page 24)
Management Console (View Menu) (on page 28)
Refresh (View Menu) (on page 32)
Menus and Toolbars (on page 25)
Column Settings Dialog Box (on page 31)

Column Settings Dialog Box

Specifies the columns you want to see in the Detail View. You also can specify the order and
width of the columns. You access this dialog box when you right-click in the column heading
area of the Detail View and select More on the shortcut menu.

Move Up
Moves the selected column up one position. The column displays one position to the left in
the Detail View.
Move Down
Moves the selected column down one position. The column displays one position to the right
in the Detail View.
Show
Displays the column in the Detail View.
Hide
Hides the column in the Detail View.
In addition to the Show and Hide commands, you can use the checkboxes
beside the column names to add and remove them from the Detail View. Checked indicates
that the column displays in the Detail View.
Width of selected column
Specifies the width of the column in pixels. You can specify a different column width for each
column.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 31

 View Menu

See Also
Interface Overview (on page 24)
Detail View (View Menu) (on page 29)
Management Console (View Menu) (on page 28)
Refresh (View Menu) (on page 32)
Menus and Toolbars (on page 25)

Workspace Explorer (View Menu)

Toggles the display of the Workspace Explorer as a viewer only in the Drawings and Reports
task. By default, the Workspace Explorer is visible when you enter this task. The Workspace
Explorer displays the contents of the workspace in a classification hierarchy that reflects the
various relationships defined for the design objects. The content represents the current objects
loaded from the database into the active workspace.

Icons display at the left of the window objects to indicate the type of the object. For example, a
file folder icon represents the model, an equipment icon represents equipment, an I-beam icon
represents a structural system, and so forth.
See Also
Interface Overview (on page 24)
Detail View (View Menu) (on page 29)
Management Console (View Menu) (on page 28)
Refresh (View Menu) (on page 32)

Refresh (View Menu)

Updates the loaded (expanded) content of the Console hierarchy, when others are concurrently
adding folder, components, or drawings to the hierarchy. The entire hierarchy does not refresh
unless you have all the nodes completely expanded. You can also press F5 to update the
content.
See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
Interface Overview (on page 24)
Detail View (View Menu) (on page 29)
Management Console (View Menu) (on page 28)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 32

SECTION 5
Shortcut Menus
When you right-click nodes in the Management Console and nodes or documents in the Detail
View, shortcut menus display. The items on the shortcut menu vary depending on the selected
item.

Root Shortcut Menu (on page 34)

Folder Shortcut Menu (on page 34)
Component Shortcut Menu (on page 35)
Drawing Document Shortcut Menu (on page 36)

 By default, the Management Console and Detail View display when you enter the task.
You can turn the views on or off on the View menu.
 When you switch to a different task and then return to the Drawings and Reports task, the
Management Console remembers the node you last selected on the console hierarchy.
 If you are registered with SmartPlant Foundation, the Publish and Revise commands are
added as well. You can also set up batch printing and updating for documents using the
Batch commands available on the shortcut menus.
See Also
Components Overview (on page 89)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 33

 Shortcut Menus

Root Shortcut Menu

The Root shortcut menu displays the commands that you use to manage drawings at the Model
level. It is available when you right-click the Model root node in the Management Console.
You must first create a new folder using the New command on the Folder shortcut menu. The
commands of the Folder shortcut menu change after adding a folder.

Before Adding Folders After Adding Folders

New (see "New Command" on Create Drawing(s) Command (on page 39)
page 41)
Refresh (see "Refresh (Shortcut Menu)" on
Properties (see "Properties page 79)
Command" on page 48)
Run Query (see "Run Query (Shortcut Menu)"
on page 70)
Update (on page 83) (Drawings by Rule in
marine mode and material handling mode only)
Update Now (on page 80) (All other drawing
types)
Batch (see "Batch Commands" on page 37)
 Print
 Update
 Update Document(s)
 Refresh
Print (see "Print Command" on page 45)
Save As Command (on page 70)
New (see "New Command" on page 41)
Properties (see "Properties Command" on page
48)

See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)

Folder Shortcut Menu

The Folder shortcut menu displays the commands that you use to manage drawings at the
folder level. It is available when you right-click a folder node in the Management Console.
After creating a new folder from the Root shortcut menu, you must first create a new component
or another new folder using the New command on the Folder shortcut menu. The commands of
the Folder shortcut menu change after adding an item to the folder.

Before Adding Folders or Components After Adding Folders or Components

Batch (see "Batch Commands" on page 37) Create Drawing(s) Command (on page 39)
 Print Refresh (see "Refresh (Shortcut Menu)" on

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 34

 Shortcut Menus
 Update page 79)
 Update Document(s) Run Query (see "Run Query (Shortcut Menu)"
on page 70)
 Refresh
Update (on page 83) (Drawings by Rule in
Copy (see "Copy Command" on page 38)
marine mode and material handling mode only)
Paste (see "Paste Command" on page 43)
Update Now (on page 80) (All other drawing
Delete (see "Delete Command" on page 39) types)
Rename (see "Rename Command" on page Batch (see "Batch Commands" on page 37)
69)
 Print
New (see "New Command" on page 41)
 Update
Save Package (see "Save Package
 Update Document(s)
Command" on page 76)
 Refresh
Properties (see "Properties Command" on
page 48) Print (see "Print Command" on page 45)
Save As Command (on page 70)
Copy (see "Copy Command" on page 38)
Paste (see "Paste Command" on page 43)
Delete (see "Delete Command" on page 39)
Rename (see "Rename Command" on page
69)
New (see "New Command" on page 41)
Save Package (see "Save Package
Command" on page 76)
Properties (see "Properties Command" on
page 48)

See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)

Component Shortcut Menu

The Component shortcut menu displays the commands that you use to manage drawings at the
component level. It is available when you right-click a component node in the Management
Console.
The commands of the Component shortcut menu change after creating drawings using the
Create Drawing(s) command.

Before Creating Drawings After Creating Drawings

Setup (see "Setup Command" on page 78) New (on page 37)
New (on page 37) Create Drawing(s) Command (on page 39)
Create Drawing(s) Command (on page 39) Refresh (see "Refresh (Shortcut Menu)" on
page 79)
Update (on page 83) (Drawings by Rule in

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 35

 Shortcut Menus
marine mode and material handling mode only) Run Query (see "Run Query (Shortcut Menu)"
on page 70)
Delete (see "Delete Command" on page 39)
Update (on page 83) (Drawings by Rule in
Rename (see "Rename Command" on page
marine mode and material handling mode only)
69)
Update Now (on page 80) (All other drawing
Save As Command (on page 70)
types)
Edit Template (see "Edit Template Command"
Batch (see "Batch Commands" on page 37)
on page 41)
Save Package (see "Save Package
 Print
Command" on page 76)  Update
Properties (see "Properties Command" on  Update Document(s)
page 48)
 Refresh
Print (see "Print Command" on page 45)
Save As Command (on page 70)
Copy Command (on page 38)
Delete (see "Delete Command" on page 39)
Rename (see "Rename Command" on page 69)
Save Package (see "Save Package Command"
on page 76)
Setup (see "Setup Command" on page 78)
Edit Template (see "Edit Template Command"
on page 41)
Properties (see "Properties Command" on page
48)

See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)

Drawing Document Shortcut Menu

The Drawing Document shortcut menu displays the commands that you use to manage
drawings at the individual document level. It is available when you right-click a drawing in the
Detail View of the Management Console.
After creating a new component from the Folder shortcut menu, you must first create drawings
using the Create Drawing(s) command on the Model Root, Folder, or Component shortcut
menus. The Drawing Document shortcut menu contains the following commands:
Open Command (on page 43)
Edit (see "Edit Command" on page 40)
Refresh (see "Refresh (Shortcut Menu)" on page 79)
View Log (see "View Log Command" on page 88)
Batch (see "Batch Commands" on page 37)
Update (on page 83) (Drawings by Rule in marine mode and material handling mode only)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 36

 Shortcut Menus
Update Now (on page 80) (All other drawing types)
Rename (see "Rename Command" on page 69)
Delete (see "Delete Command" on page 39)
Print (see "Print Command" on page 45)
Save As Command (on page 70)
Properties (see "Properties Command" on page 48)
See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)

New
Generates an empty drawing containing no views. This command is available on the right-click
menu for a component in the Management Console hierarchy.
The empty drawing uses the layout styles assigned to the component. After you add drawing
documents, you can open them and add unassigned views as needed.
When the component uses document or sheet "No Assignment" rules in the Tools >
Define Layout Style command, you can use the New command to create an empty drawing in
a component without views, and manually add all views.

Add a drawing document

1. Right-click the component, and select New.
A drawing document using the document naming rule displays in the Detail View of the
Management Console, or as a child of the component in the Drawing Console.
2. Repeat the New command to create the number of needed drawing documents.

 Document Naming and Sheet Naming rules are customizable items.

 For more information about sheet properties and naming rules, see "Edit Sheet Command"
in SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
 All unassigned views in SmartSketch Drawing Editor are available for placement on
documents created with New command.

Batch Commands
Batch commands are only available on shortcut menus if batch processing and a batch
processing server have been set up by an administrator. For more information, see Batch
Processing.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 37

 Shortcut Menus

Copy Command
Copies a drawing, component, or folder. After you copy an item, you can paste it at another
location in the hierarchy.
The software enforces the following rules regarding pasting:
 If you copy a drawing, select a component to use the Paste command. You cannot paste a
drawing to a folder or under the drawing book
You can copy only the composed drawings and Drawing by Rule drawings.
 If you copy a composed drawing and paste it on a Composed Drawing component, the
Paste Special dialog box is displayed. This dialog box gives you the option to paste the
drawing with or without the volume associated with the view. For more information, see
Paste Special Dialog Box (on page 44).
The Paste Special dialog box is displayed for a composed drawing only if it is
copied for drawings containing views with associated volumes.
 If you copy an application component, select a folder to use the Paste command. You
cannot paste an application component under the drawing book.
 If you copy a folder, select a folder or a drawing book to use the Paste command.
 If you copy a volume or a MicroStation 3D DGN drawings component with a template or a
drawing volume associated with it, the Paste Special dialog box is displayed if you paste the
component in another volume or a MicroStation 3D DGN drawings component. This dialog
box gives you the following options to paste: 1) only the template, (2) only the volume, or (3)
both the template and the volume. The volume associated with the current volume drawings
component being pasted, is copied and associated with the new volume drawings
component. For more information, see Paste Special Dialog Box (on page 44).
A component cannot be pasted under another component.

Copy an item
1. Select an item in the Management Console hierarchy or Detail View.
2. Right-click the item, and then select Copy on the shortcut menu.
You can paste the copied item at another location in the Management Console
hierarchy. For more information, see Paste an item (on page 44).
See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
Components Overview (on page 89)

Cut Command
Moves a drawing, component, or folder from its current location so that you can paste it at
another location in the hierarchy.
The software enforces the following rules regarding pasting:
 If you cut a drawing, select a component to use the Paste command. You cannot paste a
drawing to a folder or under the drawing book

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 38

 Shortcut Menus
Only the composed drawings can be cut.
 If you cut an application component, select a folder to use the Paste command. You cannot
paste an application component under the drawing book.
 If you cut a folder, select a folder or a drawing book to use the Paste command.

Cut an item
1. Select an item in the Management Console hierarchy or Detail View.
2. Right-click the item, and then select Cut on the shortcut menu.
You can paste the cut item at another location in the Management Console
hierarchy. For more information, see Paste an item (on page 44).
See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
Components Overview (on page 89)

Create Drawing(s) Command

Generates the drawings that have not previously been created. This command is available on
the right-click menu for various items in the Management Console hierarchy.
If you select the top-level of the hierarchy, this command generates all drawings not already
created for all components in the hierarchy. For example, if you have Volume Component
drawings that have not been created and Isometric drawings that have not been created, both
are created if you right-click the top-level hierarchy and select Create Drawing(s).
You can also right-click individual components or folders for which drawings are not yet created
and select Create Drawing(s) on the shortcut menu to generate the drawings.
After you create drawing documents, you update them to include model object content. You can
then open or edit them as needed.
Marine mode or material handling mode only: If you did not previously select the
model contents for a drawings-by-rule component, the Filter Properties for Asking Filter
dialog box displays, and you must select a filter. The dialog is the same as the Filter Properties
dialog box, except that only the appropriate tabs for the asking filter are displayed. For more
information, see Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 164).
See Also
Updating Documents (on page 78)
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
New (on page 37)
Run Query (Shortcut Menu) (on page 70)

Delete Command
Removes an item and its sub-items from the hierarchy and the database. You access this
command on the right-click menu for any node or document in the hierarchy. Undo is not
available for this action. Upon deletion, a confirmation message displays.
When you delete a drawing, its associated template and its component remain unchanged. Any
associated physical volumes are deleted.
You can delete many items that are directly or indirectly related to this task:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 39

 Shortcut Menus
 Components in the Management Console hierarchy
 Documents
 Drawing volumes
 Drawing views
In some cases, deleting an item causes other items to be deleted. For example, when you
delete a drawing volume, associated views are deleted. When you delete a drawing view in a
generated drawing, associated volumes and documents are deleted.
In addition, the item status and your permissions can affect whether or not you can delete the
item. A drawing set to Approved cannot be deleted. However, you may be able to delete a
drawing set to Working.
You can select multiple components or documents in the Detail View and use the
Delete command from the right-click menu to remove those items.

Delete an item
1. Right-click a folder component, document, drawing volume, or drawing view.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete.
You cannot undo a delete operation.
The Delete command propagates down the hierarchy. For example, if you delete a
volume component, its child components (if any) and all the drawings contained in the
components are deleted as well. However, when you delete a single volume drawing, the
associated template, volume, and component remain unchanged. You can update the drawing
component to re-create the drawing.
See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
Components Overview (on page 89)

Edit Command
Activates the selected drawing for editing. This command is available on the right-click menu for
a drawing in the Detail View. The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor with
additional commands or toolbars available for editing the drawing.
Objects like drawing views, key plan views, report views, and drawing property labels are placed
on the DwgTemplate layer when you save the drawing document. You should not place manual
markups on the DwgTemplate layer. If you use native SmartSketch Drawing Editor
commands (such as Place Line or Place Dimension) to add manual markups to the template,
put them on the Default layer or on a layer that you define (for example, a layer named
AnnotationLayer). This preserves the changes when you update drawings. For more
information on layers, see Layers (SmartSketch Drawing Editor Tools Menu) (on page 402).

Your access permissions, defined in the Project Management task, affect whether or not you
can edit documents.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 40

 Shortcut Menus

Edit Template Command

Allows you to open and edit a template for a drawing component in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

New Command
Adds a new folder, a search folder, an imported folder, or a component to the Management
Console hierarchy. Select the model root or a folder and right-click to select New. If you select
the model root, New creates a folder, a search folder, or a folder containing a set of drawing
components. If you select a folder, New creates a folder, a search folder, an imported folder, or
a drawing component.
Search Folders (on page 232)
Imported Folders (on page 237)
Components Overview (on page 89)
If you have previously created a package, the package is available in the Add Component
dialog box to add a component to the hierarchy. For more information, see Save Package
Command (on page 76).
You can configure the shortcut menu for a folder to display more New options. For more
information, see Configure New Command On A Folder in the Smart 3D Drawings and Reports
Reference Data Guide.

Add Component Dialog Box (on page 43)

What do you want to do?

 Add a folder (on page 41)
 Add a package of components (on page 42)
 Add a component (on page 42)

Add a folder
1. Right-click the root model in the Management Console hierarchy, and select New >
Folder.
The folder is added to the hierarchy.
2. To rename the folder, right-click the folder, and select Rename, or select the folder, and
press F2 on the keyboard. Type a new name.

 You can place another folder under a folder in the hierarchy.

 You can place a folder, application component, or a package under a folder in the hierarchy.
For example, you can add an Isogen Isometric Drawings by Query component to a folder.
 You cannot add folders or other components to a search folder component. For more
information, see Search Folders (on page 232).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 41

 Shortcut Menus
Add a package of components
1. Right-click the root model in the Management Console hierarchy, and select New.
2. On the shortcut menu, click More to open the Add Component dialog box, and select a
package for a set of related components. For more information, see Add Component
Dialog Box (on page 43).
A folder and components are added to the hierarchy.
3. To rename the folder or a component, right-click and select Rename on the shortcut menu,
or press F2 on the keyboard.
Right-click a component to access the available commands for that component.

Add a component
1. In the Management Console, create a folder or select an existing folder.
2. Right-click the folder, then select New.
3. On the shortcut menu, select a component such as Composed Drawings or Orthographic
Drawings by Query, or click More to open the Add Component dialog box and select a
component. For more information, see Add Component Dialog Box (on page 43).
The component is added to the folder.
4. To rename the component, right-click the component, and select Rename, or select the
component, and press F2 on the keyboard. Type a new name.

 Right-click a component to access the available commands for that component.

 You cannot add folders or other components to a search folder component. For more
information, see Search Folders (on page 232).

Add a Drawings by Rule component

This workflow is for marine mode and material handling mode only.
1. In the Management Console, create a folder or highlight an existing folder.
2. Right-click the folder, and select New.
3. On the shortcut menu, click More.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
4. Select a tab containing Drawings by Rule packages, such as Ship, Manufacturing, Ship
Structure, Piping, or Offshore.
5. Select a Drawings by Rule package , and click OK.
The component is created in the folder.

 Right-click a component to access the available commands for that component.

 You cannot add folders or other components to a search folder component. For more
information, see Search Folders (on page 232).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 42

 Shortcut Menus
Add Component Dialog Box
Lists the available packages and folder types you can use to create folders and drawing
components at the selected level in the Management Console hierarchy. You access this
dialog box when you right-click a folder or the model root, and select New > More.
Packages are organized in tabs by drawing type. Select a tab, and then select a package to
view its description.
Many packages are delivered with the software. Your catalog administrator can add
new tabs and packages to the dialog box using the Save Package Command. For more
information, see Save Package Command (on page 76).
See Also
Components Overview (on page 89)
Delivered Drawing Types (on page 21)
Icons for Components and Drawings (on page 25)

Open Command
Opens the selected document for viewing within this task. This command is available on the
shortcut menu for all document types except 3D Model Data. You also can open the document
by double-clicking it.
Opening a MicroStation 3D DGN document requires that the MicroStation J (V7) or
MicroStation J (V8) application be loaded on the workstation.

Open a document
1. In the Detail View, double-click a document. You can also right-click the document, then
select Open.
2. Close a document by clicking File > Exit.
To edit the document, right-click the document, the select Edit. If the document is a
drawing, you can annotate it.
See Also
Open Command (on page 43)
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
Components Overview (on page 89)

Paste Command
Inserts the contents that you last copied or cut into the hierarchy or, creates a copy of a drawing
volume, depending on the component that you have selected. You must copy or cut an item
using the Copy or Cut command before you can paste it.
The software enforces the following rules regarding pasting:
 If you copy or cut a drawing, select a component to use the Paste command.

 You can copy only the Composed or the Drawing by Rule drawings.
 You can cut only the composed drawings.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 43

 Shortcut Menus
 If you paste a composed drawing on a Composed Drawings component, the software
displays the Paste Special dialog box. This dialog box gives you the option to paste the
drawing with or without the volume associated with the view. For more information, see
Paste Special Dialog Box (on page 44).
The Paste Special dialog is displayed only for the composed drawings if it is
copied for the drawings containing views with associated volumes.
 If you copy a folder, select a folder or a drawing book to use the Paste command. You
cannot paste a folder to an application component. Application components cannot have a
folder below them in the hierarchy.
 If you copy an application component and the Paste command is selected on a folder, the
copied application component is pasted under the folder.
 If the application component you copy is a volume drawing or a MicroStation 3D DGN
component, and if the component has a template or a drawing volume associated with it, the
Paste Special dialog box is displayed. The dialog box gives the option to paste the
component with or without the template or the volume of that component.
 If you copy a volume drawings component with a template or a drawing volume associated
with it and paste it in another volume drawings component, the software displays the Paste
Special dialog box. This dialog box gives you the following options to paste: (1) only the
template, (2) only the volume, or (3) both the template and the volume. For more
information, see Paste Special Dialog Box (on page 44).
 If you copy a MicroStation 3D DGN component with a drawing volume associated with it, the
software displays the Paste Special dialog box if you paste onto another MicroStation 3D
DGN component.

Paste Special Dialog Box (on page 44)

Paste an item
Before pasting an item, you must copy or cut the item using the Copy or the Cut command. For
more information, see Copy an item (on page 38) and Cut an item (on page 39).
1. Select a location in the Management Console hierarchy or Detail View.
2. Right-click the location, and click Paste.
The software pastes the item under the selected location.
See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
Components Overview (on page 89)

Paste Special Dialog Box

Specifies the items to paste if you copied a volume drawing or MicroStation 3D DGN component
that has a template or drawing volume defined. The options provided to you depend on the
component selected.
If you are pasting a hierarchy containing one or more volume drawings or MicroStation 3D DGN
components into a folder, you can select one of the following options:
Copy Nodes(s), Template(s), and Volume(s)
Inserts the new components, including their respective template and drawing volumes,
under the selected folder.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 44

 Shortcut Menus
Copy Node(s) and Template(s)
Inserts the new components, including their respective templates, under the selected folder.
Copy Node(s) Only
Inserts the new components under the selected folder.
If you are pasting a volume drawings component onto another volume drawings component, or
a MicroStation 3D DGN component onto another MicroStation 3D DGN component, you can
select one of the following options:
Copy Template(s), and Volume(s)
Copies the template settings and drawing volumes to the selected component.
Copy Template(s) only
Copies only the template settings to the selected component.
Copy Volumes(s) only
Copies only the drawing volumes to the selected component.
If you are pasting a composed drawing on a Composed Drawing snap-in, the following options
are available:
Drawing(s) only
Copies only the drawing and its views
Drawing(s) and Associated Volume(s)
Copies the volume associated with the view along with the drawing.
See Also
Paste Command (on page 43)

Print Command
Sends a print request for the selected documents to the default printer. This command is not
available until you have created and updated documents.

What do you want to do?

 Print a document (on page 45)
 Print a document as a PDF file (on page 46)

Print a document
1. To specify a printer, select File > Select Printer. For more information on selecting a
printer, see Select Printer (File Menu) (on page 46).
2. Select a folder, application component, or the root node in the Management Console to
print all of the drawing and report documents beneath the selected level. You can also
select a single document or multi- select documents in the Detail View. You can select
multiple documents to print by pressing Ctrl or Shift and then clicking each document in the
Detail View.
3. Right-click and select Print on the shortcut menu.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 45

 Shortcut Menus
You can also use the Batch > Print command on the item's shortcut menu to print the item
using a scheduled batch job. For more information, see Batch Print.

Print a document as a PDF file

1. To specify a printer, select File > Select Printer. For more information on selecting a
printer, see Select Printer (File Menu) (on page 46).
2. Select SmartPlant PDF Converter 4xx as the printer.
3. Select a folder, application component, or the root node in the Management Console to
print all of the drawing and report documents beneath the selected level. You can also
select a single document or multi-select documents in the Detail View. You can select
multiple documents to print by pressing Ctrl or Shift and then clicking each document in the
Detail View.
4. Right-click and select Print on the shortcut menu.
You can also use the Batch > Print command on the item's shortcut menu to print the item
using a scheduled batch job. For more information, see Batch Print.

Select Printer (File Menu)

Specifies a printer for documents. The command lists all printers available to your computer.

 To print a drawing as a PDF, select SmartPlant PDF Converter 4xx as the printer.
 SmartPlant PDF Converter 4xx requires special settings for 64-bit versions of Windows.
For more information, see Configure SmartPlant PDF Converter for Windows (on page 46).
See Also
Select Printer Dialog Box (on page 47)

Configure SmartPlant PDF Converter for Windows

Smart 3D installs SmartPlant PDF Converter 4xx, a printer driver used to convert drawings
and reports to PDF files. Special settings are needed for this driver.

Windows 7
1. Open Start > Control Panel
The Control Panel displays.
2. In the Hardware and Sound section, click View devices and Printers.
3. Right-click SmartPlant PDF Converter 4xx and select Printer properties.
The SmartPlant PDF Converter 4xx Properties dialog box displays.
4. On the Advanced tab:
 Select Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster.
 Select Start printing immediately.
 Clear Enable advanced printing features.
5. Click OK.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 46

 Shortcut Menus

Select Printer Dialog Box

Specifies a printer for documents.
Name
Specifies a printer name.
Status
Displays the current status of the specified printer.
Type
Displays the type of printer.
Where
Displays the port or location the printer uses.
See Also
Components Overview (on page 89)
Print a Document (on page 45)

Setting Properties
The software updates properties from parent nodes to child nodes and drawings in the
Management Console hierarchy.
For example, you can display the Properties dialog box for a folder named Isometric
Drawings. If you set the Division Location property to Huntsville, Alabama, the software
pushes this value to the items contained within the Isometric Drawings folder.
You can specify inheritance for each item on its Properties dialog box. If you set the override
flag for a property, the property is not inherited from the parent. You can provide a new,
overriding value for the property. This new value then propagates to other items deeper in the
hierarchy.

Properties and Publishing

Several document properties impact publishing the document. Before you can publish
documents in the software, you must configure your computer. The configuration includes
installing the SmartPlant Client and SmartPlant Schema Component and registering through the
SmartPlant Registration Wizard. For more information about the SmartPlant Registration
Wizard, see the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Installation Guide, available from Help > Printable
Guides.
Even if you have registered your model using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, you must set
certain properties to enable the publishing capability. Properties that control publishing are found
on the WBS Tab. For more information, see Set properties for publishing documents (on page
428).

 The software considers blanks or cleared values as override flags.

 If the drawing document you are looking at in the Detail View has a yellow icon (for
example: ), the drawing document is a version 6.1 legacy Snapshot drawing. You should
use the Tools > Convert Legacy Snapshots command to convert this document to a

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 47

 Shortcut Menus
Composed Drawing for use in the current version of the software. If you do not convert the
legacy snapshot drawing, you cannot perform edit operations on the drawing, including
update, revise, and publish.
See Also
Edit document properties (on page 48)
Properties Command (on page 48)
Convert Legacy Snapshots (on page 240)

Properties Command
Views and edits properties for the selected document. The properties of child items are inherited
from the parent item unless you set the Override column for the properties.

Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

What do you want to do?

 Edit document properties (on page 48)
 Set surface styles and aspects for 3D model data documents (on page 48)
 Set properties for publishing documents (on page 428)

Edit document properties

1. In the Management Console or Detail view, right-click an item in the hierarchy, and select
Properties on the shortcut menu.
The Properties dialog box displays.
2. Change the properties as needed. For example, you can set the coordinate system for the
drawing on the Style tab or view the current approval information on the Signature tab.

 If you do not want an item to acquire a property from its parent, select the Override column
on the Properties dialog box and type a new value. This value propagates to other items
deeper in the hierarchy.
 The software treats blank or cleared property values as overrides.

Set surface styles and aspects for 3D model data documents

Surface Style Rules and Aspects must be set on each 3D Model Data document before
updating it using the Update, Update Now, or Batch > Update command.
1. Select one or more 3D Model Data documents.
2. Right-click the selected documents, and select Properties on the shortcut menu.
The Properties dialog box displays.
3. Go to the Surface Styles and Aspects tab to add surface style rules to the selected rules
list. You can also import the surface styles used in the session file. For more information,
see Surface Styles and Aspects Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 56).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 48

 Shortcut Menus
4. Click Select Aspects to specify the aspects used within the 3D Model Data documents. If
you select no aspects for your documents, the Simple Physical aspect is automatically
applied by default. For more information, see Select Aspects Dialog Box (on page 58).
5. Click OK on the Properties dialog box to save the changes to the document(s).
Now you can update the drawing documents using the Update Now or Batch > Update
command to incorporate the surface styles and aspects with the 3D Model Data.

Use a Search Folder to Collect 3D Model Data Documents for Property Update
You can create a Search Folder that filters for the 3D Model Data documents so you can edit
their surface style rule and aspect settings collectively. When you setup the Search Folder, use
a filter that looks for the SmartPlant Review Output objects. You could additionally specify
properties on the output objects to further narrow the search criteria, such as Data Created,
Date Last Modified, or Signature. For more information, see Search Folder Filters (on page
234).

Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for items in the Management Console hierarchy. All items in the Management
Console have a Properties command on their right-click shortcut menus. Using the Properties
dialog box, you can control how you want properties to propagate through the hierarchy.
You can specify labels for some of the properties on the tabs. Click the browse button at the
right of the table cell to display the Choose Label dialog box.
General Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 50)
Title Area Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 50)
Signature Area Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 53)
Style Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 55)
Surface Styles and Aspects Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 56)
Custom Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 62)
Notes Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 63)
Issue Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 64)
Revision Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 65)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 49

 Shortcut Menus
WBS Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 67)
Configuration Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 68)

 The WBS tab is available only if you have registered your model using the SmartPlant
Registration Wizard.
 If your model has not been registered using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, the Issue
tab is always available. If your model has been registered, the Issue tab is available only if
you have issued documents to a contract and the information is read-only. For more
information, see Issue request documents (on page 434).
See Also
Setting Properties (on page 47)

General Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Shows general properties for a drawing item.
Name
Displays the name of the property.
Value
Sets the current value of the property.
Behavior
Specifies whether to inherit or override a property in the hierarchy of items in the Console. If
the property is Inherited, the setting comes from items higher in the hierarchy. If the
property is not read-only, you can provide a new, overriding value for the property by
changing the behavior setting to Override. This new value then propagates to other items
deeper in the hierarchy. If you set the behavior to Force Override, the property setting is
forced to items deeper in the hierarchy, even if they are set to Inherit.

Properties
Published
Indicates whether the drawing has been published.
Size
Displays the size of the file in KB (kilobytes).
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

Title Area Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for the title area of drawings.
If you access this tab after selecting multiple drawings, these fields will appear empty,
regardless of what information was defined for any of the drawings individually. Any information
you add to this tab will overwrite the previously defined information in corresponding rows in the
selected drawings.
Name
Displays the name of the property.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 50

 Shortcut Menus
Value
Sets the current value of the property.
Behavior
Specifies whether to inherit or override a property in the hierarchy of items in the Console. If
the property is Inherited, the setting comes from items higher in the hierarchy. If the
property is not read-only, you can provide a new, overriding value for the property by
changing the behavior setting to Override. This new value then propagates to other items
deeper in the hierarchy. If you set the behavior to Force Override, the property setting is
forced to items deeper in the hierarchy, even if they are set to Inherit.

Properties
Border
Specifies the border attribute that stores the name of border for the title block. This attribute
also stores the dimensions of the border.
Charge Number
Defines the charge number for the drawing.
Charge Title
Describes the Charge Number box. The charge title text is placed to the left of the charge
number.
Company Name
Specifies the name of the company for which the project is designed.
Desc1
Describes the drawing. This description is the first of four lines of text used to describe the
drawing.
Desc2
Describes the drawing. This description is the second of four lines of text used to describe
the drawing.
Desc3
Describes the drawing. This description is the third of four lines of text used to describe the
drawing.
Desc4
Describes the drawing. This description is the fourth of four lines of text used to describe the
drawing.
Division Location
Specifies the location of the division for which the project is designed.
Division Name
Specifies the name of the division for which this project is designed.
Drawing Naming Rule
Specifies a default or custom naming rule to the drawing. The default name rules provided
include:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 51

 Shortcut Menus
Default Drawing Name Rule - This is the default rule for composed drawing types. Creates
a name based on the parent component name, Global Workshare location ID, and an index
number. The naming rule inserts a "-" between each name. If there are no parent objects,
then only the child object name is used. For example, the first drawing created under the
ComposedDrawings001 component at workshare site 1 is called
ComposedDrawings001-1-0001.
Default By Query Name Rule - This is the default rule for all Drawings by Query drawing
types. Creates a name based on the parent object name (each system and sub-system
above the child object will be included in the name) and child object name. The naming rule
inserts a "-" between each name. If there are no parent objects, then only the child object
name is used. For example, the first composed drawing created at workshare site 1 under
the ComposedDrawings001 component would be named ComposedDrawings001-0001.
Default Report Name Rule - This is the default rule for all Spreadsheet Reports. Creates a
name based on the object name, Global Workshare location ID, and an index number. For
example, the first drawing created at workshare site 1 is called
ComposedDrawings001-1-0001.
Volume Name Rule - This is the default rule for volume drawing types. Creates a name
based on the volume name, Global Workshare location ID, and an index number. For
example, the first drawing created using the volume Volume001 in workshare site 1 is called
Volume001-1-0001. If a volume is not specified, the drawing name will be named
Unspecified.
Customized naming rules appear in the list if you bulkload against the
CDrawingSheet class, which is the class for the drawing object. The rules are defined on
the NamingRules sheet in the GenericNamingRules.xls workbook. For more information,
see the Reference Data Guide.
Drawing Number
Displays the unique identifier for the drawing.
Drawing Size
Defines a standard note value for the border size.
Drawing Type
Defines the three-letter code to identify the type of drawing. For example, the type can be
DGN.
Job Number
Defines the unique identifier assigned to a capital project or job.
Note Line
Specifies text for a miscellaneous note line.
Plant Name
Specifies the name of the plant or project for which the drawing is designed.
Project Version
Defines the number and letter sequence that identifies a particular generation of a document
that was created since the last approved revision.
Revision Numbers
Defines the number of the current revision for this drawing.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 52

 Shortcut Menus
Sheet
Defines the number of the page and the total number of pages that are associated with this
one. For example, the value might be 3 of 5.
Site Location
Specifies the site location for which the drawing is designed.
Site Name
Specifies the name of the site where the plant is being constructed.
Title1
Specifies text for the first miscellaneous title. This title is usually a description of the area
shown on the drawing.
Title2
Specifies text for the second miscellaneous title. This title is usually a description of the type
of drawing.
Title3
Specifies text for the third miscellaneous title.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

Signature Area Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for the signature area of drawings.
If you access this tab after selecting multiple drawings, these fields will appear empty,
regardless of the information defined for any of the drawings individually. Any information you
add to this tab overrides the previously defined information in corresponding rows in the
selected drawings.
Name
Displays the name of the property.
Value
Sets the current value of the property.
Behavior
Specifies whether to inherit or override a property in the hierarchy of items in the Console. If
the property is Inherited, the setting comes from items higher in the hierarchy. If the
property is not read-only, you can provide a new, overriding value for the property by
changing the behavior setting to Override. This new value then propagates to other items
deeper in the hierarchy. If you set the behavior to Force Override, the property setting is
forced to items deeper in the hierarchy, even if they are set to Inherit.

Properties
Approval Date
Specifies the date the drawing was approved.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 53

 Shortcut Menus
Approved By
Specifies the name of the person responsible for approving the drawing.
Checked By
Specifies the name of the person responsible for checking the drawing.
Checked Date
Specifies the date the drawing was checked.
Designed By
Specifies the name of the person who specified or designed the information on the drawing.
Designed Date
Specifies the date the drawing was designed.
Drawing Status
Defines the status code for the drawing.
Drawn By
Specifies the name of the person who drew the drawing, or created it.
Drawn Date
Specifies the date the drawing was drawn or created.
Extra Sign By1
Specifies the name of an extra person who is signing the drawing.
Extra Sign By2
Specifies the name of an extra person who is signing the drawing.
Extra Sign Date1
Specifies the date the drawing was signed by the person whose name displays in this box.
Extra Sign Date2
Specifies the date the drawing was signed by the person whose name displays in this box.
Extra Sign Title1
Defines the title of the person whose name displays in this box.
Extra Sign Title2
Defines the title of the person whose name displays in this box.
Mfg Rep Date
Specifies the date that the manufacturing representative initials the drawing.
Mfg Rep Name
Specifies the name of the manufacturing representative who signed the drawing.
Plant Number
Defines the plant number.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 54

 Shortcut Menus
Proj Engineer Date
Specifies the date the project engineer initials the drawing.
Proj Engineer Name
Specifies the name of the person who is the project engineer for the project using the
drawing.
Spec By
Specifies the name of the person who specified or designed the information on this drawing.
Spec Date
Specifies the date this drawing was specified or designed.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

Style Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for the style of drawings and reports.
If you access this tab after selecting multiple drawings, these fields will appear empty,
regardless of the information defined for any of the drawings individually. Any information you
add to this tab overrides the previously defined information in corresponding rows in the
selected drawings.
Name
Displays the name of the property.
Value
Sets the current value of the property.
Behavior
Specifies whether to inherit or override a property in the hierarchy of items in the Console. If
the property is Inherited, the setting comes from items higher in the hierarchy. If the
property is not read-only, you can provide a new, overriding value for the property by
changing the behavior setting to Override. This new value then propagates to other items
deeper in the hierarchy. If you set the behavior to Force Override, the property setting is
forced to items deeper in the hierarchy, even if they are set to Inherit.

Properties
Coordinate System
Specifies the global or an active coordinate system. Choose a coordinate system from the
list, or click More... to choose another coordinate system with the Select System dialog
box.
If you want to output large coordinates on your drawings, define a coordinate system using
large negative coordinates. For example, if you want coordinates of 400,000 ft output on
drawings, define a coordinate system origin of -400,000 ft and place your model elements
close to global 0. Select the new coordinate system in the Coordinate System field on the
Style tab. For more information on defining coordinate systems, see the Grids User's Guide
available from Help > Printable Guides.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 55

 Shortcut Menus

 The Coordinate System property is not used by Composed Drawings. The coordinate
system settings are driven by the properties for the drawing views in a composed
drawing. For more information on the coordinate system properties for a drawing view,
see Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Place View Command) in the SmartSketch
Drawing Editor Help.
 If you are accessing the Properties Style tab for a 3D Model Data component or
document with the intention of saving it as a SmartPlant Review file, make sure this
property is set appropriately so that the Plant Monument Coordinate Offset is passed
correctly to SPR when creating the VUE file. This is because SPR shows the objects
from the VUE file using global coordinates. The offset value allows you to see the
original coordinates relative to the new SPR coordinate system. For more information on
3D Model Data components, see 3D Model Data (on page 188). For information on
saving to SPR, see Save as SmartPlant Review File (on page 417).
Volume Naming Rule
Specifies the naming rule applied to the content of the drawing.
Change Management
Enables and disables Change Management for Isogen isometric drawings. You can
override the Drawing.Content.ChangeManagementEnabled option in the isometric
drawing style with this property. You can set the property to Enabled, Disabled, or
Undefined. This property is only available when you are viewing properties for an Isometric
piping isometric drawing. For more information on Change Management, see Change
Management in Piping Isometric Drawings.
Baseline Date
Identifies a date in time when a snapshot of the drawing document was taken. It is a way of
identifying when objects have changed.
WBS Project
Specifies the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) project style to be used with the drawing.
This property serves as the answer to an asking filter when specified in a View Style. For
more information, see Create a Drawing Using WBS Objects (on page 208).
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

Surface Styles and Aspects Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for the surface styles and aspects used in 3D Model Data. This tab is only available
when you are looking at the properties for a 3D Model Data document.
You can perform the following operations on this tab:
 Select an existing surface style rule from the library and add it to the workspace.
 Modify an existing surface style rule in the library and add it to the workspace.
 Create a new surface style rule and add it to the library and the workspace.
 Delete a surface style rule from the library or the workspace.
 Rearrange the style rules in the workspace box of the Surface Style Rules dialog box by
using the Move Up and Move Down commands.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 56

 Shortcut Menus
 Import surface styles from the session file.
 Set the aspects for the 3D Model Data.

Surface style rules

Style rule library
Lists all the current surface style rules in the Site database.
Selected rules
Lists all the names for the surface style rules currently assigned to the workspace.
Add
Adds the selected surface style rule to the workspace.
Remove
Removes a selected surface style rule from the workspace. To remove a surface style from
the workspace, select the style in the Workspace list and click Remove.
Move Up
Moves the selected style rule up one step in the Workspace list.
Move Down
Moves the selected style rule down one step in the Workspace list.
New
Activates the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box on which you can create a new
surface style rule and add it to the database. This button is available only if you have write
permission to the surface style rules.
Modify
Activates the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box to modify an existing surface style
rule and add it to the database.
For more information on creating new or modifying existing surface style rules,
see Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box (on page 60).
Copy
Creates a copy of the selected rule on the Clipboard. You use Copy to create a copy of a
surface style rule in the Model database so you can modify the rule rather than create a new
one.
If you try to copy a style rule associated with a deleted filter, the style cannot be
copied. A message box displays.
Paste
Pastes the copied rule from the Clipboard so it can be modified.
Delete
Removes the selected Surface Style Rule from the database.
Apply
Applies changes in surface style rules to the workspace.
Double-clicking a surface style rule also activates the Surface Style Rule

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 57

 Shortcut Menus
Properties dialog box on which you can create or modify a surface style rule if you have
permission.
Import from Session
Imports session surface style rules for the selected 3D Model Data component.

Aspects
Select Aspects
Opens the Select Aspects dialog box so you can specify the aspects to use for the 3D
Model Data component. For more information, see Select Aspects Dialog Box (on page 58).
When publishing 3D Model Data documents, the Simple Physical aspect is used
by default if no other aspects are specified.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)
Set surface styles and aspects for 3D model data documents (on page 48)

Select Aspects Dialog Box

Specifies the aspect associated with the 3D Model Data document(s). An aspect is a geometric
area or space related to an object. The aspect represents information about the object, such as
its physical shape or the space required around the object. Aspects are associated parameters
for an object, representing additional information needed for placement. Aspects can represent
clearances for safety or maintenance, additional space required during operation, or simple and
detailed representations of the object. You define aspects when you model a part class for the
reference data.
This dialog box displays when you click the Select Aspects button on the Surface Styles and
Aspects tab of the Properties dialog box for a 3D Model Data document(s).
Selected aspects
Shows a checkbox list of all aspects defined by the model reference data. You can check
multiple aspects. By default, the Simple Physical aspect is selected.
 Simple physical - Includes primitive shapes. This aspect creates a less cluttered view
of the object, showing only the body of equipment or a simplified cross-section for
structure, as shown below.

 Detailed physical - Provides a more detailed view of an object. This aspect shows all
the graphical details associated with the equipment or structure. For example, certain
types of equipment may include legs and lugs. For marine structure, this aspect uses all
geometry in the cross-section, as shown below.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 58

 Shortcut Menus
 Insulation - Shows an area around a piece of equipment indicating the presence of
insulation. This aspect is also used to display structural fireproofing insulation. For
example, a 4-inch pipe with insulation might look like an 8-inch pipe when this aspect is
used.

 Operation - Includes the area or space around the object required for operation of the
object. This space shows in the model but not in drawings. For example, this aspect
leaves enough space around a motor for a person to operate the motor or the overhead
space needed for someone to walk up a stairway.

 Maintenance - Includes the area or space around the object required to perform
maintenance on the object. This space may appear in the model but not in drawings.
For example, this aspect leaves enough space around a motor to perform maintenance
on a motor, including space to remove the motor.

 Reference Geometry - Allows you to construct or add graphical objects that do not
participate in interference checking. For example, a reference geometry object could be
a spherical control or the obstruction volume for a door. For marine structure, this
aspect allows you to control the display of landing curves for design seams, profile
systems, reference curves, and knuckle curves.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 59

 Shortcut Menus
 Centerline - Displays objects as a single line representation. For example, this aspect is
useful for when you want to display handrails or structural members as a single-line on
drawings. For structure, the centerline is determined from the cardinal point used to
place the member. That cardinal point is not always the center of the object.

 Molded Forms - Displays plate, profile, and beam systems for marine structure.
 Equipment Hole - Displays holes for marine structure created in the Hole Management
task.
 * - Matches all cross-sections.
For more information on defining aspects for your model reference data, see the Common
User's Guide.
See Also
Surface Styles and Aspects Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 56)
Set surface styles and aspects for 3D model data documents (on page 48)

Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box

Selects a filter and a surface style to be used for the objects identified by the filter. This dialog
box displays when you click New or Modify or double-click a surface style rule on the Surface
Style Rules dialog box. You can also use this dialog box to rename a rule after you use the
Copy and Paste commands on the Surface Style Rules dialog box. Paste creates a rule
named Copy of original surface style rule name.
Surface Style Rule Properties Tab (Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box) (on page 60)
Configuration Tab (Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box) (on page 62)

Surface Style Rule Properties Tab (Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog
Box)
Creates or modifies a surface style rule. Surface style rules are based on filters. When you
create new rules or modify rules, you specify a filter on which to base the rule. For more
information on filters, see the Common User's Guide.
Rule name
Specifies the name of the surface style rule.
Filter
Identifies the filter used within the style rule. The filters available are the ones defined for the
current database. The list in the dropdown includes the last ten filters selected. Selecting
Create New Filter in the dropdown list displays the New Filter Properties dialog box, which
allows you to define a new filter for the style rule. Selecting More in the list displays the
Select Filter dialog box. The Properties button for this field displays the Property dialog

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 60

 Shortcut Menus
box for the selected filter. For more information on defining a new filter or reviewing
properties, see the Common User's Guide.
We recommend that you use simple, asking, and compound filters with style rules.
Using SQL filters can result in significant performance degradation and should be avoided
whenever possible. Unlike the other types of filters, the SQL server is performed directly on
the database. For each object passed to the SQL filter, the software checks to see if any of
the objects were returned by the query. However, modification of the object may change
whether or not the object passes the SQL filter. For example, a pipeline might pass the SQL
filter before it is assigned to a different system. After the system assignment changes, a
different style rule is applied. Therefore, some SQL filters may result in decreased efficiency
in assessing the project data model.
Style applied
Specifies the surface style to be used for the objects identified by the selected filter. The list
in the dropdown includes all surface styles available for the current database. The
Properties button displays the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box so you can edit
the style as needed.
Select all aspects to which the style will be applied
Shows a checkbox list of all aspects defined by the model reference data. You can check
multiple aspects. By default, all aspects are selected.

 An aspect is a geometric area or space related to an object. The aspect represents

information about the object, such as its physical shape or the space required around the
object. Aspects are associated parameters for an object, representing additional information
needed for placement. Aspects can represent clearances for safety or maintenance,
additional space required during operation, or simple and detailed representations of the
object. You define aspects when you model a part class for the reference data.
 The Simple Physical aspect includes primitive shapes. The space can be a field junction
box displayed in both the model and in drawings. When you publish 3D Model Data
documents, this is the default aspect used if no other aspects are selected for the document
properties.
 The Detailed Physical aspect provides a more detailed view of equipment in the model. For
example, certain types of equipment may include legs and lugs. As opposed to the Simple
Physical aspect, which only shows the body of the equipment, the Detailed Physical
aspect shows all the graphical details associated with the equipment.
 The Insulation aspect shows an area around a piece of equipment indicating insulation is
present. For example, a 4-inch pipe with insulation might look like an 8-inch pipe when the
Insulation aspect is selected.
 The Operation aspect includes the area or space around the object required for operation
of the object. This space shows in the model but not in drawings. The Operation aspect
leaves enough space around a motor for a person to operate the motor.
 The Maintenance aspect includes the area or space around the object required to perform
maintenance on the object. This space may appear in the model but not in drawings. The
Maintenance aspect leaves enough space around a motor to perform maintenance on the
motor, including space to remove the motor, if necessary.
 The Reference Geometry aspect allows you to construct or add graphical objects that do
not participate in interference checking. For example, a reference geometry object could be

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 61

 Shortcut Menus
the obstruction volume for a door on a field junction box. Another example is a spherical
control point.
See Also
Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box (on page 60)

Configuration Tab (Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the creation, modification, and status information of an object.
Model
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in the Project Management
task.
Transfer
Re-assigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This button is only available if the active
model/project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The button is not available if all of
the objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Structural Detailing User's
Guide.
The Transfer option does not apply to the Surface Style Rules.
Status
Specifies the current status of the selected object or filter. Depending on your access level,
you may not be able to change the status of the object.
Created
Displays the date and time that the object was created.
Created by
Displays the name of the person who created the object.
Modified
Displays the date and time when the object was modified.
Modified by
Displays the name of the person who modified the object.

Custom Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for drawing properties.
If you access this tab after selecting multiple drawings, these fields appear empty, regardless of
the information defined for any of the drawings individually. Any information you add to this tab
overrides the previously defined information in corresponding rows in all selected drawings.
Name
Displays the name of the property.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 62

 Shortcut Menus
Value
Sets the current value of the property.
Behavior
Specifies whether to inherit or override a property in the hierarchy of items in the Console. If
the property is Inherited, the setting comes from items higher in the hierarchy. If the
property is not read-only, you can provide a new, overriding value for the property by
changing the behavior setting to Override. This new value then propagates to other items
deeper in the hierarchy. If you set the behavior to Force Override, the property setting is
forced to items deeper in the hierarchy, even if they are set to Inherit.

See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

Notes Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Sets notes for the item.
If you access this tab after selecting multiple drawings, these fields appear empty, regardless of
the information defined for any of the drawings individually. Any information you add to this tab
overrides the previously defined information in corresponding rows in the selected drawings.
Parent Notes
Concatenates the notes from any parents of the currently selected item and displays the
notes. This box is read-only.
Notes
Specifies notes for the currently selected item.
The following graphics demonstrate how parent notes and notes work. The first graphic
shows how notes can be added at different levels of the hierarchy. The Notes tab shows
Parent Notes from a higher-level folder or component. The Notes section shows additional
information for a particular drawing document.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 63

 Shortcut Menus
When the document is updated and displayed, the Note Region of the template contains the
specified information.

See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

Issue Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for internal issues.
Issue Number
Shows the drawing issue number. Type the required issue number for the drawing. When
you have selected multiple drawings or a node in the Management Console, this field is not
available to edit, as an issue number is created for each individual drawing, depending on its
current revision history.
Description
Describes briefly the scope of the issue.
Issue Date
Shows the date issued.
Issue Reason
Shows the reason the document was issued. Select a value from Bid, Fabrication,
Construction, Reference, and your customized values, if any are defined.
The values for Issue Reason can be customized by editing and bulkloading the
DrawingIssueReason_Codelist.xls workbook delivered in the [Product
Folder]\CatalogData\Bulkload\AdditionalDataFiles folder. For more information, see Bulkload
Files in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.
Job Spec
Identifies the job specification for the issued document.
Revision Number
Defines the revision number for this issue of the drawing.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 64

 Shortcut Menus
Unregistered
If you access Properties on a single document when your model has not been registered using
the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, the Issue tab displays previous entries. A new row is
available to make a new entry. You can edit each field using alphanumeric and special
characters. You cannot delete a row after it has been added.
If you access Properties on a folder when your model has not been registered using the
SmartPlant Registration Wizard, the Issue tab has a single blank row for a new entry. With the
exception of the Issue Number field, you can edit all the fields. Their values are propagated to
the documents within the folder.

Registered
If your model is registered using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard and you have issued
requests for the document, the Issue tab is read-only. The Issue information is retrieved for
informational purposes only.

 You can create only one issue per instance of the Properties dialog box. To create another
issue, close the dialog box and open it again.
 For information on issuing requests for contracts when working in an integrated
environment, see Issue request documents (on page 434).
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

Revision Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and sets properties for revisions. The Revision tab is always read-write (subject to
user permissions).
Action
Lists the available actions when accessing Properties on a single component, multiple
components, or multiple documents.
Append Record - Creates a new revision record for each document under the selected
components or in the document set. You can type a value for the next revision mark or let
the software automatically increment it for you.
Edit Last Record - Edits the last revision for each document under the selected
components or in the document set. Only the edited revision fields overwrite the
corresponding fields on the last revision record. To clear a populated revision field, type a
single space character, and no other characters, in the edited field.
The Append Record and Edit Last Record options are not available for a model
registered with SmartPlant Foundation or when revising a single document.
Revision Mark
Specifies the current revision. For single documents, double-click the New Record cell to
automatically increment to the next revision mark number. To manually type a value for the
next revision mark, click the New Record cell and type the value. This only applies when
the model has not been registered with SmartPlant Foundation. If this cell is not edited, then
the revision mark number automatically increments to the next available number in each
writeable document associated to the selected set.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 65

 Shortcut Menus
Revision Minor Number
Specifies the minor revision number for the revision.
Description
Describes the scope of the revision.
Revised By
Identifies the person who made the revision.
Revision Date
Specifies the date of the revision.
Check
Identifies the person who checked the revision.
Check Date
Specifies the date the revision was checked.
Approved By
Identifies the person who approved the revision.
Approval Date
Specifies the date the revision was approved.
The appearance and behavior of the contents of this tab differ depending on whether properties
are accessed on a single document or accessed on a single component, multiple components,
or multiple documents. The contents of this tab also depend on whether the model is registered
to SmartPlant Foundation.

Unregistered
If you access Properties on a single document and your model has not been registered to
SmartPlant Foundation, the Revision tab displays previous entries made. A new row is
available to make a new entry. You can edit each field using alphanumeric and special
characters.
If you access Properties on a single component, multiple components, or multiple documents
and your model has not been registered to SmartPlant Foundation, the Revision tab has a
single blank row for a new or edited entry. All fields are editable. Their values are propagated to
the writeable documents that are associated with the selected set.

Registered
If your model has been registered to SmartPlant Foundation, use the Revise command to
create revision numbers. This command reserves a revision number by adding it to the
document Revision properties. The revision number is added in the form of a blank row on the
Revision tab of the Properties dialog box.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 66

 Shortcut Menus
After reserving the revision number, right-click the document and select Properties. Go to the
Revision tab and edit the Revision fields. All fields except for Revision Mark and Revision
Minor Number are editable. For more information, see Revising (on page 421).

 You can create more than one revision per instance of the Properties dialog box by
selecting Apply after adding a record.
 You can delete one or more revision records by highlighting the revision rows and pressing
Delete. You must select OK or Apply to make the deletion permanent. The rows selected
for deletion must be adjacent and must include the last revision record.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

WBS Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) of drawings and reports. This tab is
available only when your model has been registered using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard.
If you access this tab after selecting multiple drawings, these fields appear empty, regardless of
the information defined for any of the drawings individually. Any information you add to this tab
overrides the previously defined information in corresponding rows in the selected drawings.
Name
Displays the name of the property.
Value
Sets the current value of the property.
Behavior
Specifies whether to inherit or override a property in the hierarchy of items in the Console. If
the property is Inherited, the setting comes from items higher in the hierarchy. If the
property is not read-only, you can provide a new, overriding value for the property by
changing the behavior setting to Override. This new value then propagates to other items
deeper in the hierarchy. If you set the behavior to Force Override, the property setting is
forced to items deeper in the hierarchy, even if they are set to Inherit.

Properties
Project Name
Displays the project to which the item belongs. In SmartPlant Foundation, a project is the
scope of work approved for capital expenditure (that is, a job).
Document Type
Specifies the type of document, such as Civil Plan.
Document Style
Specifies the style of document, such as Ortho for orthographic drawing.
Discipline
Specifies the discipline for the document. If this is a 3D Model Data document, set the
property to SmartPlant Review Document. If it is a drawing or report document, set the
discipline to match the type of document.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 67

 Shortcut Menus
Allow Publish
Sets the document as a publishable document.

Working with the Integrated Environment

You can only publish documents after the appropriate properties are set on the WBS tab. The
WBS tab is not available if your login is not authenticated as valid for SmartPlant Foundation.
The properties that must be defined for publishing are: Document Type, Document Style,
Discipline, and Allow Publish. For more information, see Set properties for publishing
documents (on page 428).
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

Configuration Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the creation, modification, and status information for an item.
Model
Displays the name of the Model. This value is read-only.
Permission group
Specifies the permission group to which the item belongs. You can select another
permission group if needed.
If you access this tab after selecting multiple drawings, this field will be empty, regardless of
what information was defined for any of the drawings individually. Any selection you in this
field will overwrite the previously defined information in the selected drawings.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
The Transfer option does not apply to the filters and surface style rules.
Approval State
Shows the approval state of the selected item. This value is read-only.
Status
Specifies the current status of the selected Console hierarchy item or items or selected
documents in the Detail View. Depending on your access level, you may not be able to
change the status of the selected items.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the item was created.
Created by
Displays the name of the person who created the item.
Date Last Modified
Displays the date and time the item was modified last.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 68

 Shortcut Menus
Last Modified by
Displays the name of the person who modified the item last.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 49)

Transfer Ownership Dialog Box

Allows you to specify a new location and permission group for the selected model objects.
Current location
Displays the name of the location with which the current permission group is associated. All
of the objects in the select set must belong to the same location.
Current permission group
Displays the name of the permission group with which the selected objects are currently
associated. If all of the objects in the select set do not belong to the same permission group,
this box appears blank.
New location
Specifies the name of the location to which you want to assign the objects. In a global
workshare configuration, this box lists all the locations in which you have write access to one
or more permission groups. The selection in this box filters the entries in the New
permission group box.
New permission group
Specifies the new permission group to which to assign the selected objects. If you specify a
value in the New location box, this list displays all permission groups to which you have
write access in the selected location. If you do not specify a value in the New location box,
this list includes all permission groups to which you have write access in all locations except
the current location. This box is blank if you do not have write access to any permission
groups at any locations other than the current one.
We strongly recommend that administrators follow naming convention rules that
include the location as a prefix in the permission group name.

Choose Label Dialog Box

Specifies a label for a document property. This dialog box displays the labels available on the
application server in the [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\Labels\Base Templates
folders.
See Also
Setting Properties (on page 47)

Rename Command
Allows you to type a new name for a selected item in the hierarchy. The shortcut key for this
command is F2.
You cannot have duplicate names at the same level in the tree, but the names are
case-sensitive. For example, you can have two items be named 'ItemName' and 'itemname' at
the same level in the tree.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 69

 Shortcut Menus

Rename an item
1. Right-click an item in the Management Console hierarchy or Detail View, and select
Rename on the shortcut menu. Alternatively, press F2 on the keyboard.
2. Type a new name for the item.
See Also
Rename Command (on page 69)
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
Components Overview (on page 89)

Run Query (Shortcut Menu)

Runs the query associated with the selected Drawings by Query Manager component. For
example, if you execute Run Query on an Isogen Isometric Drawing by Query package
associated with a Drawings by Query Manager, the software looks for piping in the model. The
query results display beneath the style in the Management Console. You can create isometric
drawings from the query results by right-clicking on the component and selecting Create
Drawing(s).
If you have an Orthographic Drawing by Query package associated to a Drawings by Query
Manager, the Run Query command runs the query associated with the components, collects
the objects from the database, and builds the information that will be included in the drawing.
You can then create orthographic drawings from the query results by running the Create
Drawing(s) command on the Orthographic Drawing component.
The Run Query command uses the filters specified when you performed Setup components.

 When working in a Global Workshare Configuration with users logging into both Host and
Satellite systems for more than one site, you can encounter problems with the filters defined
for a Drawing by Query package. For example, if you create a Filter Root Folder for a
particular site, and then you try to run queries for drawings associated to this filter from
another site, the Run Query command is unable to update the drawings due to a lack of
permission against the Filter Root Folder. You have to move or transfer the Filter Root
Folder to the appropriate site where the Run Query command is executed.
 If the selected package was created and added manually, the folder name for the package
must match the value for pkgid in the XML file. Edit the name of the folder to match the
pkgid value.
In marine mode, this command displays in the Ship Root and Folder shortcut
menus for drawings by rule, but is not used with drawing by rule components.
See Also
Orthographic Drawings by Query (on page 213)
Create Drawing(s) Command (on page 39)

Save As Command
Saves drawings and reports as specified file types to an external location, such as a share on
another server. This command is not available until you generate drawings for at least one of the
structures in the hierarchy. This command saves only the structures that contain drawings or

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 70

 Shortcut Menus
reports. You can save multiple file types based on the types of documents available. You can
specify the target file type for each drawing type you want to save.
To save the hierarchy as a package, right-click the folder and select Save Package on the
right-click menu. For more information, see Save Package Command (on page 76).

Save As Dialog Box (on page 75)

What do you want to do?

 Save to a file (on page 71)
 Retrieve piping component file data (PCF) (on page 72)
 Save as SmartPlant Foundation (*.xml) (on page 73)

Save to a file
Prior to following this procedure, you must have generated drawings already for at least one of
the items in the Console hierarchy. The Save As command is not available if drawings have not
been generated.
1. Select a folder, component, or document. You can select multiple documents by holding Ctrl
or Shift and clicking each item.
2. Right-click your selection, then select Save As on the shortcut menu.
The Save As Dialog Box (on page 75) displays.
3. Specify the Output Folder Rule to be used. You can save the item as it displays in the
hierarchy, with its parent folder appended or with the entire model hierarchy appended.
4. Specify the File Already Exists Action to be used. This determines how you save the file if
it has the same name of an existing file. Select Overwrite to replace the existing file, or
select Save As filename (n) to save the file separately.
5. Specify the Output Folder location. Click Browse to display a dialog box to locate the
appropriate folder location.
6. Check the boxes for the Component Types you want to save. You can select multiple
component types. For more information, see Save As Dialog Box (on page 75).
7. In the Target File Type lists, specify the file types you want to save. You can specify a file
type for each component type selected. For example, you could use the Iso_Stress style to
create a Piping Component File (PCF) file, then when you perform a Save As on the
document, check the Isometric Drawings component type and specify the Target File
Type as PCF File.

 For Isogen isometric drawings, the name of the drawing document becomes the prefix
for all of the files. For example, if the drawing document name is My_Pipeline, the saved
file names become: My_Pipeline.sha, My_Pipeline.pcf, and so on.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 71

 Shortcut Menus
 For Isogen isometric drawings, a file is created for each sheet in the drawing with
[drawing name]_[sheet name] as the filename. For example, if the drawing My_Pipeline
contains Sheet1 and Sheet2, two files will be saved with the names
My_Pipeline_Sheet1 and My_Pipeline_Sheet2.
 If you configured a StartProgram, then the extracted PCF file will be stored with the
relation <Filename>-extracted-pcf. For example, if the final PCF file name is
My_Pipeline, then the extracted PCF is saved as My_Pipeline-extracted-pcf in the same
location along with the My_Pipeline file.
You must configure a StartProgram to store the extracted PCF.
Otherwise, the software considers the final PCF as the extracted PCF.
 The SmartPlant Foundation (*.xml) target file type allows you to save drawing data
and metadata to generate .xml files in either integrated and non-integrated
environments that can be easily updated. For integration, you can use SmartPlant
Interop Publisher to translate the generated .xml data file to a Smart Drawing available
in SmartPlant Foundation. This option is available for Isometric Drawings, Composed
Drawings, and Volume Drawings component types. For more information, see Save
as SmartPlant Foundation (*.xml) (on page 73).
8. Click OK to save the files as specified.

 The saved drawings retain the same names they had in this task.
 You can also extract all the sheets of a document to foreign formats such as MicroStation
DGN, AutoCAD DWG and DXF files. A file is created for each sheet in the drawing with
[drawing name]_[sheet name] as the filename. For example, if the drawing Volume_Drawing
contains Sheet1 and Sheet2, two files are saved with the names Volume_Drawing_Sheet1
and Volume_Drawing_Sheet2.

Retrieve piping component file data (PCF)

When you create a Piping isometric document that uses the Iso_Stress style, the software does
not create drawings. Instead it creates the data necessary for a Piping Component File (PCF).
You can then output the PCF to the CAESAR II pipe stress analysis software.
To retrieve the PCF data, you use the Save As command.
1. Right-click the Piping Isometric document that uses the Iso_Stress style and select Save
As. The Save As dialog box displays.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 72

 Shortcut Menus
2. Specify the Output Folder Rule to be used. You can save the item as it displays in the
Console, with its parent folder appended or with the entire model hierarchy appended.
3. Specify the File Already Exists Action to be used. This determines how you save the file if
it has the same name of an existing file. Select Overwrite to replace the existing file, or
select Save As filename (n) to save the file separately.
4. Specify the Output Folder location. Click Browse to display a dialog box to locate the
appropriate folder location.
5. Check the Isometric Drawings component type. You can select multiple component types.
For more information, see Save As Dialog Box (on page 75).
6. In the Target File Type list for the Isometric Drawing component type, select PCF File
(.pcf).
7. Click OK to save the files as specified.
The PCF file is saved to the location you specified, ready for use in stress analysis.

 The saved drawings retain the same names they had in this task.
 You can also view the PCF data with the View Extraction Data command. For more
information, see View Isogen isometric extraction data.
See Also
Save As Command (on page 70)

Save as SmartPlant Foundation (*.xml)

Use the SmartPlant Foundation (*.xml) target file type to save drawing data and metadata and
generate .xml files in either integrated or non-integrated environments. This save option is
available for Isometric Drawings, Composed Drawings, and Volume Drawings component
types.
1. Before you use the Save As command, you must define the Discipline property for your
documents:
a. In the Console, right-click an item in the hierarchy, then select Properties on the
shortcut menu.
b. Go to the WBS Tab.
c. Set the Discipline property. If your model has been registered using the SmartPlant
Registration Wizard, this also adds the Publish command to the right-click menu for the
selected document or documents. For a 3D Model Data document, the property is set to
SmartPlant Review Document.
2. Right-click the Isometric, Volume, or Composed document, and select Save As.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 73

 Shortcut Menus
The Save As dialog box displays.

3. Specify the Output Folder Rule to use. You can save the item as it displays in the
Console, with its parent folder appended or with the entire model hierarchy appended.
4. Specify the File Already Exists Action to be used. This determines how you save the file if
it has the same name of an existing file. Select Overwrite to replace the existing file, or
select Save As filename (n) to save the file separately.
5. Specify the Output Folder location. Click Browse to display a dialog box to locate the
appropriate folder location.
6. Check the Isometric Drawings, Composed Drawings, or Volume Drawings component
type. You can select multiple component types.
7. In the Target File Type menu list for the component type, select SmartPlant Foundation
(*.xml).

8. Click OK to save the files as specified.

The software generates an .sha file and two XML files in the specified location; an .xml data
file and an .xml metadata file. The data .xml file is named ToolData_<Drawing Name>. The
metadata file is named MetaData_<Drawing Name>.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 74

 Shortcut Menus
You can now add the generated .sha in SmartPlant Interop Publisher to translate it to a Smart
Drawing and publish the drawing to SmartPlant Foundation. SmartPlant Interop Publisher
requires all generated files (.sha and .xml) to be located in the same folder location for
translation and publishing. For more information about Smart Drawings and the translation and
publish capabilities, refer to the SmartPlant Interop Publisher User's Guide.

Save As Dialog Box

Sets options for exporting drawings. You can open this dialog box by right-clicking a folder,
component, or drawing and then selecting Save As on the right-click menu.

Output Folder Rules

Specifies how you want to save the hierarchy. The following options are provided:
 As displayed specifies the selection is saved as displayed.
 Append Parent Folder specifies the selected item is appended to the parent folder.
 Append Model Hierarchy specifies the selected item is appended to the hierarchy
starting from the root and including the selected item.
File Already Exists Action
Specifies how you want to save the hierarchy if a file with the same name already exists.
 Overwrite overwrites the existing file.
 Save As filename (n) saves the file separately, and appends a number 'n' after the file
name. For example, if the existing file name is FileName, the new file name is
FileName (1).
Output Folder
Specifies the location to which to save the package.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 75

 Shortcut Menus
Browse
Indicates a folder in which to save the drawings. You can select a local folder or a folder on
another computer on the network.
File Type
Specifies the file formats to save for each drawing type. Check the box next to each drawing
type you want to save. Use the Target File Type menu to specify the file type to which the
drawing type is saved. The file types available for each drawing type are described in the
following table.

Drawing Type Target File Types

MicroStation MicroStation J (V7 and V8)

(*.dgn) 32MB limit

Isogen Isometric Drawings Shape2DServer (*.sha)

PCF file (*.pcf)
 For Isogen Isometric Drawings, the name of the drawing Both (*.sha & *.pcf)
document becomes the prefix for all of the files. For
All Files (*.*) - Includes all .sha
example, if the drawing document name is My_Pipeline,
and .pcf files, as well as all
the saved file names become: My_Pipeline.sha,
enabled supplementary files.
My_Pipeline.pcf, and so on.
MicroStation J (V7 and V8)
 For Isogen Isometric Drawings, a file is created for each
(*.dgn)
sheet in the drawing with [drawing name]_[sheet name]
as the filename. For example, if the drawing AutoCAD (*.dxf)
My_Pipeline contains Sheet1 and Sheet2, two files will
be saved with the names My_Pipeline_Sheet1 and AutoCAD (*.dwg)
My_Pipeline_Sheet2. SmartPlant Foundation (*.xml)

Spreadsheet Reports Worksheets (*.xls)

Composed Drawings, Volume Drawings, and Orthographic Shape2DServer (*.sha)

Drawings by Query
MicroStation J (V7 and V8)
(*.dgn)
AutoCAD (*.dxf)
AutoCAD (*.dwg)

Composed by Drawings and Volume Drawings SmartPlant Foundation (*.xml)

See Also
Save As Command (on page 70)

Save Package Command

Saves the Management Console hierarchy from the selected component down. The package
saves the setup information and any template definitions that exist on nodes within the selected
hierarchy. You can access this command by right-clicking a folder or application component in
the Management Console. You must have at least write permissions on the component to
access the Save Package command.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 76

 Shortcut Menus
This command is not used in the normal workflow of creating drawings and
reports. An administrator with write permissions to the SharedContent folders saves packages.
When a package is added back into the Management Console, it recreates the hierarchy that
was saved with the package.
Packages are also used in the setup of a Drawings by Query Manager component for the
creation of orthographic and Isogen isometric drawings.

Save Package Dialog Box (on page 77)

 Output documents are not saved in a package.

 If the topmost component saved in the package is a folder, then the package can be placed
under the model root or a folder. If the topmost component saved in the package is an
application component, then the package can only be placed under a folder.
 When you place a package, the software adds all the components to the active permission
group.
 To save drawings or reports externally, see Save As Command (on page 70).

Save a package
1. Right-click a component in the Management Console hierarchy, and select Save Package
The Save Package dialog box displays.
2. Specify a package name, package description, and tab name. For example, you can save a
package named Piping Isometric Drawing Package to a new tab called Iso.
3. Click OK to save the package.
The package is added to the Add Component dialog box on the specified tab. If a new tab
name was specified, a new tab is added to the dialog box.
You can add the new package to the hierarchy by using the New command. Select
the package on the Add Component dialog box. When you add a package, the software adds
all the components to the active permission group.
See Also
Save Package Command (on page 76)
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
Components Overview (on page 89)
Orthographic Drawings by Query Common Tasks (on page 214)

Save Package Dialog Box

Package Name
Specifies a name for the package.
Package Description
Describes the package.
Tab Name
Specifies the tab of the Add Component dialog box on which the package displays. You
can pick an existing name or type a new tab name in this field. The next time you access the

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 77

 Shortcut Menus
Add Component dialog box from an existing folder, the software adds the new tab and lists
the new package on the tab. For more information, see Add Component Dialog Box (on
page 43). For example, if you saved a package called Piping Isometric Drawing Package
and added it to a new tab called Isos, an Isos tab is added to the Add Component dialog
box:

See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
Save a package (on page 77)

Setup Command
The Setup command sets options for a component or package. Each type of component has a
unique Setup dialog box.
Setup (3D Model Data Component) (on page 190)
Setup (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 198)
Setup (Drawings by Query Manager Component Shortcut Menu) (on page 219)
Setup (Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 104) (Marine mode only)
Setup (Orthographic Drawing by Query Component) (on page 217)
Setup (MicroStation DGN Files) (on page 194)
Setup (Search Folder) (on page 234)
Setup (Imported Folder) (on page 239)

Updating Documents
Updating documents increases productivity because you can easily keep deliverables current. It
is important to understand the different update capabilities.

 You must install the SmartPlant Schema Component to update documents.

 If the drawing document you are looking at in the Detail View has a yellow icon (for
example: ), the drawing document is a version 6.1 legacy Snapshot drawing. You should
use the Tools > Convert Legacy Snapshots command to convert this document to a

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 78

 Shortcut Menus
Composed Drawing for use in the current version of the software. If you do not convert the
legacy snapshot drawing, you cannot update, revise, or publish the drawing.
 Any time you update a 3D model document, the software generates a single log file listing
status information and any errors encountered during the process. The log file location is
%TEMP%\EFUpdateCache\[3D Model ID]\[3D Model ID].log.

Refreshing Document Contents

The Refresh command on the shortcut menu for a Console hierarchy item allows you to see
which documents are out-of-date. For more information, see Refresh (Shortcut Menu) (on page
79).

Updating Documents Using Batch Processing

The Batch command queries the model to regenerate a single document or multiple documents.
For volume and composed drawings, if you have edited the previous copy of the drawing (for
example, by moving a label), the software remembers those changes and re-creates them. If
batch processing is configured for the selected drawings, the update is performed on the Batch
Server.
For more information, see Batch Processing - Intergraph Smart Batch Services (on page 241).
See Also
Refresh document status (on page 80)
Print Command (on page 45)

Refresh (Shortcut Menu)

Compares the date of the last update of the document with the modification date in the model for
any object that has a positive (can be seen) resymbolization in the drawing.
This command is not available until you generate documents. You can access this command by
right-clicking an item in the Management Console hierarchy or in the Detail View and selecting
Refresh on the shortcut menu. The software updates the status for all the expanded items
within the parent node.
The Refresh command is not available for Spreadsheet Report documents. A
Spreadsheet Report document is regenerated each time you update or print the report
document. You can refresh the contents of a folder that contains reports.
For out-of-date documents , the command behavior implies the following:
 If the object is hidden entirely and is inside the drawing volume, but the style does not
resymbolize the hidden lines, the object does not participate in the "out-of-date" definition.
 The modification date used for the object in the model can be for any property even if this
property has no impact on the graphic. This means that a drawing could be considered
out-of-date even though the graphic is up-to-date. For example, the approval status does not
affect graphics. However, the view style you are using for your drawing can use a filter that
sets approved objects to a specific color. A drawing document displays with an out-of-date
definition because of a change to the approval status.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 79

 Shortcut Menus
 Objects participating indirectly in the graphic as labels do not participate in the out-of-date
definition. This means that, in rare cases, a label may be out-of-date on a drawing that is
shown as up-to-date.

 To refresh the Management Console to reflect changes made to loaded (expanded) tree
view items, use the View > Refresh command.
 You can also use the Batch > Refresh command on the shortcut menu to perform your
refreshes on the batch server. Batch > Refresh is not available for Spreadsheet Report
documents.

Refresh document status

1. Right-click any item in the Management Console or in the Detail View.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Refresh. The software checks the model for any differences.
The drawing icons change to reflect the status of the documents compared to the model.
After refreshing a folder or component, you can synchronize it with the model by
right-clicking the item and then selecting Update (drawings by rule) or Update Now on the
shortcut menu.
See Also
Refresh (Shortcut Menu) (on page 79)
Icons for Components and Drawings (on page 25)
Updating Documents (on page 78)

Update Now
Updates a single document or multiple drawing documents whether or not they are out-of-date.
This command is available when you right-click on:
 A folder or component in the Management Console. All drawings in all components within
the folder are updated.
 A component in the Management Console. All drawings in the component are updated.
 One or more documents in the Detail View. The selected drawings are updated.
This command works on your local computer regardless of the batch configuration.
For volume drawings, the Update Now command is not available until you place drawing
volumes for a volume component in the Space Management task. For composed drawings, this
command is not available until you create the drawings in a 3D task through Tools > Drawing
Console. For reports, this command is not available until you create the report by choosing a
report template.

 If the software encounters a problem before or during the drawing update, it stops updating,
displays either an error status or error message, and saves the errors to the log file. For
more information, see Conditional Drawing Update (on page 86).
 The software preserves many of the modifications you make between regenerations of
volume drawings. For example, if you annotate a volume drawing and then regenerate it,
your annotations still display on the updated drawing.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 80

 Shortcut Menus
 Documents created automatically in a Drawings by Rule component are automatically
deleted by updating the component if the document no longer contains views.
 If the software cannot make a SmartPlant Foundation server connection when updating 3D
Model Data documents, you are prompted to provide a valid login and password.
 If you place drawing property labels on a template, generate a drawing, move the labels on
the drawing, and then update the drawing, the software remembers the new position of the
labels on the drawing.

What do you want to do?

 Update all drawings in a folder or a component (on page 81)
 Update a report (on page 81)
 Update a single drawing (on page 82)
 Insert a note at a precise place on an isometric drawing (on page 82)

Update all drawings in a folder or a component

Before you update a folder or a component, you can refresh its documents to
determine which documents are out-of-date. For more information, see Refresh document
status (on page 80). You do not have to refresh before updating, but it can be helpful to
determine which documents are out-of-date.
1. Right-click a folder or a component in the hierarchy. If you select a component, it must
contain existing drawings or reports. If you select a folder, it must contain a component with
existing drawings or reports.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Update Now.
The icons for the out-of-date documents change to show they are updated. If the Batch
Server is configured, the command displays the Drawing Batch dialog box.
For more information, see Batch Processing - Intergraph Smart Batch Services (on page
241).
You can update an individual document by right-clicking the document and selecting
Update Now on the shortcut menu.

Update a report
1. Right-click a report document.
2. On the shortcut menu, select Batch > Update to update the document on the batch server
now or create a schedule to run the batch job. Alternatively, select Update Now to update
locally.

The icon for the out-of-date document changes to show it is updated .

3. If the batch server is configured, the Drawings Batch dialog box displays.
Batch Processing - Intergraph Smart Batch Services (on page 241)
When using the Batch > Update command and batch processing is configured for
the selected document, the update is performed on the Batch Server. If batch processing is not

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 81

 Shortcut Menus
configured, the command behaves the same as the Update Now command, performing a
complete regeneration of the entire drawing on the local machine.

Update a single drawing

1. Right-click a document.
2. On the shortcut menu, select Batch > Update to update the document on the batch server
now or create a schedule to run the batch job. Alternatively, select Update Now to update
locally.

The icon for the out-of-date document changes to show it is updated .

3. If the batch server is configured, the Drawings Batch dialog box displays.
Batch Processing - Intergraph Smart Batch Services (on page 241)
When using the Batch > Update command and batch processing is configured for
the selected document, the update is performed on the Batch Server. If batch processing is not
configured, the command behaves the same as the Update Now command, performing a
complete regeneration of the entire drawing on the local machine.

Insert a note at a precise place on an isometric drawing

1. Select Insert > Control Point.
2. Select the pipe part in the model that needs a note.
Use the quick pick tool to make the correct selection.

3. Position the control point on the centerline of the pipe part. For precision placement, use
commands like Measure , PinPoint , or Point Along.
4. In the Type box, verify that Control Point is selected.
5. Confirm or change the option in the Subtype box on the ribbon.
6. In the Name box, define a name for the control point.
7. Click Properties .
8. Under the Notes tab, click New Note.
9. In the Key point box, select the control point to which to attach the note.
10. In the Notes at this location, listed by name box, type or select a name.
11. In the Purpose of note box, select Fabrication so that the note is picked up for inclusion in
the drawing.
12. In the Note text box, type descriptive text for the note.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 82

 Shortcut Menus
13. Check the Show dimension box if you want a dimension to appear on the drawing.

14. Click OK.

15. In the Drawings and Reports task, use the Update Now or Batch > Update commands to
update the drawing that includes the pipe part with the associated control point.
The note appears where it was placed in the model.

Update
In marine mode or material handling mode, Update performs two functions:
 For existing drawings, this command updates a single document or multiple drawing
documents.
 When drawings have not been created, this command generates and updates the drawings
for the selected component. This option is only available for drawings-by-rule components.
Marine mode or material handling mode only: If you did not previously select the
model contents for a drawings-by-rule component, the Filter Properties for Asking Filter

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 83

 Shortcut Menus
dialog box displays, and you must select a filter. The dialog is the same as the Filter
Properties dialog box, except that only the appropriate tabs for the asking filter are
displayed. For more information, see Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 164).
For other plant mode drawings, this command updates a single document or multiple drawing
documents.
Update is available when you right-click on:
 A folder or component in the Management Console. All drawings in all components within
the folder are updated.
 A component in the Management Console. All drawings in the component are updated.
 One or more documents in the Detail View. The selected drawings are updated.
This command works on your local computer regardless of the batch configuration.
Update performs a smart update of a drawing. If a set of criteria is met, then an incremental
update is performed only for the geometry of added, modified, and deleted objects. If the criteria
are not met, then a full update of all geometry is performed.
All of the following criteria must be met for Update to trigger an incremental update:
 Each view in the drawing has had at least one full update previously performed.
 The only view properties that have changed are name and description. For more
information, see View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 277).
 The numbers of added, modified, or deleted objects in each view are less than a set
percentage of the total number of objects.
 The software allows incremental updates for the view types in the drawing.
Any one of the following criteria cause Update to trigger a full update:
 A drawing view is new and has never had a full update.
 A drawing view is a section or detail view.
 A drawing view has been cropped.
 The view style, scale, orientation, or coordinate system of a drawing view have changed.
 A primary plate object in a view has been spit or unsplit.
 The numbers of added, modified, or deleted objects in each view are greater than a set
percentage of the total number of objects.
 The software does not allow incremental updates for the view types in the drawing.
The Update command is not available until you create drawings in the Management Console
using the Create Drawing(s) command. When a folder or component is selected, all views in
the component(s) are updated, including unassigned views in the Unassigned Folder of the
Drawing View Explorer.

 If you have not previously selected a filter for the component, the Select Filter dialog box
displays, and you must select a filter. For more information, see Select Filter Dialog Box (on
page 122).
 An incremental update is usually faster than a full update, but still results in completely
up-to-date geometry for the view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 84

 Shortcut Menus
 Documents created automatically in a Drawings by Rule component are automatically
deleted by updating the component if the document no longer contains views.
 The Update command is only available for drawings by rule. For other drawing types, the
Update Now command is used. For more information, see Update Now (on page 80).

What do you want to do?

 Update all drawings in a folder or a component (on page 85)
 Update a single drawing (on page 85)
 Create automated major views for steel order scantling drawings (on page 154)
 Create an assembly drawing (on page 131)

Update all drawings in a folder or a component

Before you update a folder or a component, you can refresh its documents to
determine which documents are out-of-date. For more information, see Refresh document
status (on page 80). You do not have to refresh before updating, but it can be helpful to
determine which documents are out-of-date.
1. Right-click a drawings-by-rule folder or component in the hierarchy. The component must
contain existing drawings or reports. The folder must contain a component with existing
drawings or reports.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Update. The icons for the out-of-date documents change to
show they are updated. If the Batch Server is configured, the command displays the
Schedule Wizard.
Batch Schedule Wizard Common Tasks

 Documents created automatically in a Drawings by Rule component are automatically

deleted by updating the component if the document no longer contains views.
 You can update an individual document by right-clicking the document and selecting Update
or Batch > Update on the shortcut menu.
 If you place drawing property labels on a template, generate a drawing, move the labels on
the drawing, and then update the drawing, the software remembers the new position of the
labels on the drawing.

Update a single drawing

1. Right-click a drawings-by-rule document.
2. On the shortcut menu, select Batch > Update to update the document on the batch server
now or create a schedule to run the batch job. Select Update to update locally. The icon for
the out-of-date document changes to show it is updated .
3. If the batch server is configured, the Schedule Wizard displays.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 85

 Shortcut Menus
Batch Schedule Wizard Common Tasks

 When using the Batch > Update command and batch processing is configured for the
selected document, the update is performed on the Batch Server. If batch processing is not
configured, the command behaves the same as the Update command, performing a
complete regeneration of the entire drawing on the local machine.
 If you place drawing property labels on a template, generate a drawing, move the labels on
the drawing, and then update the drawing, the software remembers the new position of the
labels on the drawing.

Conditional Drawing Update

Before updating a drawing, Smart 3D ensures necessary information is present before changing
the existing drawing document. If any of the following conditions are true before the update
process begins, the software displays an error message that lists the missing items, and makes
no changes to the drawing. If any of the following conditions are true after the update process
begins, the drawing update process stops, changes to an error status ( ), and Smart 3D
preserves the previous state of the drawing document to avoid any data loss.

Reference Data Conditions

 View style cannot be found.
 Graphic preparation rule cannot be found.
 Graphic rule cannot be found.
 Label rule cannot be found.
 Dimension rule cannot be found.
 North arrow rule cannot be found.
 Matchline rule cannot be found.
 View rule cannot be found.
 View style filter cannot be found.
 Emptyvw.sha file cannot be found.
 Styles.sha file cannot be found.

Model Data Conditions

 Associated volume cannot be found.
 Associated coordinate system cannot be found.

Memory Conditions
 Not enough available memory to begin the update process.
 Not enough available memory to complete the update process after it has started.

 Failure conditions found before the update process can be viewed in the Drawings.log.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 86

 Shortcut Menus
 Failure conditions found during the update process can be viewed when you right-click a
drawing and select View Log.
 Failure conditions are not logged when the Update command is used on a drawing view.
You must use the Update Now command in either the Drawing Console or Drawings and
Reports task to save the error(s) to the log.
 If an orphan view (a view that exists in the model database without a corresponding view)
exists, it is removed from the database and a description of the error is logged in the
Drawings log file in <Temp Folder>\Logs.

Restore
Restores a drawing document from a model restored from a backup. This command is available
when you right-click on a document in the Drawing Console or the Drawings and Reports
task.

 When a document is restored, all document properties are overwritten.

 You cannot restore a document if the document is created in your current model after the
backup is created. If you select a group of documents to restore, new documents in the
group are not restored. All other documents are restored from the backup model.
 Views that are created in your current drawing after the backup is created are lost when you
select Restore.

What do you want to do?

 Create a backup to use for restoration (on page 87)
 Restore a document from a backup model (on page 87)

Create a backup to use for restoration

1. In the Project Management environment, create a backup file of your current model using
Tools > Backup. For more information, see Backup in the Project Management User's
Guide.
2. Create a new model in the site by restoring the backup file using Tools > Restore. For more
information, see Restore and Restore Wizard in the Project Management User's Guide.
Give the new model a name that makes it easy to identify as the backup of your current
model.

Restore a document from a backup model

1. In the Drawing Console or the Drawings and Reports task, right-click on a drawing
document in your current model, and select Restore.
The Restore Document dialog box displays.
2. Select the backup model from the Model box, and then click OK.
The document in your current model is replaced with the document from the backup model.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 87

 Shortcut Menus

View Log Command

Displays the log information for the selected drawing. To access this command:
Right-click a drawing document at any time, and select View Log on the shortcut menu.
 For drawings by rule, right-click a component after using Create Drawing(s) or Update at
the component level, and select View Log on the shortcut menu. View Log is only available
if there was an error during the create or update operations.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 88

SECTION 6
Components Overview
Several specialized components allow you to access commands for configuring templates and
generating drawings and reports. The various types of components can be divided into two
groups: application components and folder components. Many of the application components
correspond to specific types of drawings, such as volume drawings and composed drawings.
The Spreadsheet Reports component provides access to report-related commands. You
organize drawings and reports in folders. You can add folders to the root and to other folders.
Each component has a different icon and right-click menu.
You can copy and paste components with some restrictions. For example, application
components cannot contain folders or other application components. If you copy a folder, you
can paste it under a folder but not under another component type. If you copy a Volume Drawing
component, you can paste it under a folder. If you copy other types of components, you can
paste them under folders but not under other types of components.
Your administrator can assign permissions to the different components using commands in the
Project Management task. For example, the administrator can set permissions so that only the
piping designers have write privileges on Isogen Isometric Drawings. For more information, see
the Project Management User's Guide.
There are several types of delivered components. Their names reflect the type of drawing or
report they create. When you right-click the root or a folder and select New, the Add
Component dialog box displays. The dialog box includes a General Tab for general types of
drawings or reports and additional task-specific tabs with delivered folders and packages. For
more information, see Add Component Dialog Box (on page 43).
You can also create and manage components from the 3D modeling tasks by using
the Tools > Drawing Console command. For more information, see the Common User's Guide.
The following components are shown on the General tab of the Add Component dialog box.
Other components are shown on other tabs.

Delivered Component Description

3D Model By Query Creates a 3D Model By Query component in the

Console. You can use the 3D Model By Query
component to export 3D model data in bulk as CAD
(SAT) files. The software uses a filter-based query
to collect the objects and document them
automatically. More information is available in the
Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 89

 Components Overview

Delivered Component Description

3D Model Data Creates a 3D Model Data component in the

Console. Right-click the component and select
Setup on the shortcut menu to specify a filter that
identifies the objects you want collected by the 3D
Model Data component. You can use the 3D Model
Data component to output SmartPlant Review files
or CAD (SAT) files. More information is available in
the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

MicroStation 3D DGN Creates a MicroStation 3D DGN component in the

Console. Right-click the component and select
Setup from the shortcut menu to define the
MicroStation seed file and style to use in generating
the component documents. More information is
available in the Orthographic Drawings User's
Guide.

Folder Creates an empty folder in the Console.

Drawings By Query Manager Creates a Drawings by Query Manager in the

Console. The Drawings by Query Manager is used
in conjunction with other components, such as the
Orthographic Drawing by Query and Isogen
Isometric Drawing by Query components, to
complete the query for objects in the model. The
Drawings by Query Manager provides the filter that
specifies the "where" side of the query. It tells the
query "where" to look for the objects specified by
the component "what" filter. More information is
available in the Orthographic Drawings Users
Guide and the Isogen Isometric Drawings User's
Guide.

Generic Module Folder Creates a Generic Module Folder in the Console.

The Generic Module Folder component provides a
way for you to run your custom VB modules to
create custom drawings. You set up the Generic
Module Folder component to use your custom VB
module. More information is available in the
Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Imported Folder Imports an external Windows folder from a shared

network folder into the Management or Drawing
console. The imported folder can contain any type
of file available in Windows. You can manage the
imported documents, and publish them using
Imported Folder menu options. For more
information, refer to Drawings Folders in the
Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 90

 Components Overview

Delivered Component Description

Composed Drawings Creates a Composed Drawing component in the

Console. Composed drawings are orthographic
drawings created in a 3D task such as Common.
The composed drawing component manages the
composed drawings you create. More information is
available in the Orthographic Drawings User's
Guide.

Orthographic Drawings by Creates an Orthographic Drawings by Query

Query component in the Console. The Orthographic
Drawing by Query component allows you to create
drawings for many objects in the model all in the
same manner. This component does not require
physical volumes in the model. The software uses a
filter-based query to collect the objects and
document them automatically. More information is
available in the Orthographic Drawings User's
Guide.

Isogen Isometric Drawings by Creates an Isogen Isometric Drawings by Query

Query component in the Console. You create an isometric
drawing by associating an Isogen Isometric
Drawing by Query component to a Query Manager.
The Isogen Isometric Drawing by Query component
specifies the "what" portion of the query, while the
Query Manager specifies the "where." More
information is available in the Isogen Isometric
Drawings User's Guide.

Spreadsheet Reports Creates a Spreadsheet Report component in the

Console. More information is available in the
Reports User's Guide.

Search Folder Creates a Search Folder in the Console. Search

Folders allow you to search for documents based
on common properties such as out-of-date status,
approval, or documents that have been published
to a certain contract in integrated environment.
More information is available in the Orthographic
Drawings User's Guide.

Volume Drawings Creates a Volume Drawings component in the

Console. The Volume Drawing component uses a
template to create drawings. You can place a view
on the template and associate the view with a view
style to control the output. To define the contents of
the view, you create a drawing volume in the
model. More information is available in the
Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 91

 Components Overview

For drawing components used in marine mode, see Drawings by Rule Components (on page
92)Drawings by Rule Components in the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide. You can access
this document using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
See Also
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
Icons for Components and Drawings (on page 25)
New Command (on page 41)
Delivered Drawing Types (on page 21)
Drawings and Reports Naming Rules (on page 95)
Document and Sheet Naming Rules in Drawings by Rule (on page 96)

Drawings by Rule Components

The delivered marine mode drawings by rule packages include the following:
On the Ship tab of the Add Component dialog box:
 Drawings by Rule - Creates a Drawing by Rule component in the Console. The component
allows you to create empty drawings by rule to which you add the needed views.

Assembly Drawings
On the Ship tab of the Add Component dialog box:
 Assembly Method - Creates views of individual parts and an isometric of the assembly.
 Assembly Sequence - Creates views showing the sequence of parts.
 Assembly - Creates plan, elevation, and isometric views for an assembly. All views are on a
single drawing sheet.
 Assembly (Generic) - Creates plan, elevation, and isometric views for an assembly using
the more efficient generic ruleset. All views are on a single drawing sheet.
For more information, see Assembly Drawings (on page 129) in the Orthographic Drawings
User's Guide.

Hull Line Drawings

On the Ship tab of the Add Component dialog box:
 Hull Lines - Creates body plan, plan, and profile views of the hull lines.
 Body Plan - Creates body plan views of the hull lines.
For more information, see Hull Lines Drawings (on page 137) in the Orthographic Drawings
User's Guide.

Manufacturing Drawings
On the Manufacturing tab of the Add Component dialog box:
 Mfg PinJig - Contains an asking filter to select the pin jigs.
 Mfg Profile Sketch - Contains an asking filter to select the profile.
 Mfg Profile Sketch (Multiple) - Contains an asking filter to select the profiles.
 Mfg Template Set - Contains an asking filter to select the template sets.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 92

 Components Overview

 Mfg Templateset (Full Scale) Package - Contains an asking filter to select the template
sets. For more information, see Mfg Templateset (Full Scale) Package in the Drawings and
Reports Reference Data Guide.
For more information, see Manufacturing Drawings (on page 144) in the Orthographic Drawings
User's Guide.

Scantling Drawings
On the Ship Structure tab of the Add Component dialog box:
 Shell Expansion - Creates unfolded port and starboard views of shell plate.
 Steel Order by Block or Assembly - Creates transverse, longitudinal, deck shell
expansion, and shell profile views for plate and profile parts within selected blocks or
assemblies.
 Steel Order by Reference Planes - Creates a single drawing for each reference plane
selected as input.
 Steel Order (Expansion) - Creates expanded shell profile views for plate and profile parts.
 Steel Order (Shell Profiles) - Creates plan views of individual shell profiles, also showing
level 2 non-target parts connected to the profiles.
 Steel Order by Block or Assembly (Generic) - Creates transverse, longitudinal, deck shell
expansion, and shell profile views for plate and profile parts within selected blocks or
assemblies using the more efficient generic ruleset.
 Steel Order by Reference Planes (Generic) - Creates a single drawing for each reference
plane selected as input using the more efficient generic ruleset.
 Steel Order - Shell Profiles (Generic) - Creates plan views of individual shell profiles
showing level 2 non-target parts connected to the profiles using the more efficient generic
ruleset.
The Steel Order packages use scantling steel order rule sets and view styles for light
(non-detailed) parts created in the Molded Forms task and detailed parts created in the
Structural Detailing task. The packages also use short name and typical labels for profiles and
plates.
For more information, see Scantling Drawings (on page 153) in the Orthographic Drawings
User's Guide.

Offshore Drawings
On the Offshore tab of the Add Component dialog box:
 Member Parts - Creates drawings of individual member parts and their connected parts.
Two views are generated for each member part: one in the -Z direction and one in the +Y
direction of the member local coordinate system.
 Member Parts (Generic) - Creates drawings of individual member parts and their
connected parts using the more efficient generic ruleset. Two views are generated for each
member part: one in the -Z direction and one in the +Y direction of the member local
coordinate system.
 Pipe Supports (Generic) - Creates end, side, isometric, and detail views of a pipe support.
All views are on a single drawing sheet.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 93

 Components Overview

 Piping (Generic) - Creates forward-looking elevation, port-looking elevation, isometric, and

plan views for a pipeline. All views are on a single drawing sheet.
For volume-drawing-based orthographic piping packages, see Piping Packages in the
Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Baseline Drawings by Rule Package

You can also use the baseline Drawings by Rule component to create an empty drawing
component to which you can add views as needed. The Drawings by Rule component displays
on the Ship tab of the Add Component dialog box. After adding the component to a
Management Console folder, you can set it up with views and reports, specify the query
definition, and create drawings. For more information, see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).
See Also
Components Overview (on page 89)
Shortcut Menus (on page 33)
New Command (on page 41)
Icons for Components and Drawings (on page 25)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 94

SECTION 7
Drawings and Reports Naming Rules
The software provides several options for naming drawing and reports. In addition to the
delivered sample naming rules that are described below, you can create your own naming rules.
For more information on creating naming rules, see the Reference Data Guide.

Default Drawing Name Rule

Creates a name based on the parent component name, Global Workshare location ID, and an
index number. The naming rule inserts a "-" between each name. If there are no parent objects,
then only the child object name is used. For example, the first drawing created under the
ComposedDrawings001 component at workshare site 1 is called
ComposedDrawings001-1-0001.

Default By Query Name Rule

Creates a name based on the parent object name (each system and sub-system above the child
object will be included in the name) and child object name. The naming rule inserts a "-"
between each name. If there are no parent objects, then only the child object name is used. For
example, the first composed drawing created at workshare site 1 under the
ComposedDrawings001 component would be named ComposedDrawings001-0001.

Default Report Name Rule

Creates a name based on the object name, Global Workshare location ID, and an index
number. For example, the first drawing created at workshare site 1 is called
ComposedDrawings001-1-0001.

Volume Name Rule

Creates a name based on the volume name, Global Workshare location ID, and an index
number. For example, the first drawing created using the volume Volume001 in workshare site 1
is called Volume001-1-0001. If a volume is not specified, the drawing name will be named
Unspecified.

User Defined
Allows you to define a custom name for the drawing. After selecting this naming rule, type the
name for the drawing in the Name box.

See Also
Create a new composed drawing (on page 205)
Create a volume drawing (on page 229)
Delivered Drawing Types (on page 21)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 95

 Drawings and Reports Naming Rules

Document and Sheet Naming Rules in Drawings by

Rule
The software provides several options for naming drawings by rule documents and the individual
sheets within the documents. For more information on creating naming rules, see the Reference
Data Guide.
The following default naming rules are delivered:

Default
 Document
Names the drawing using the following criteria:
<plant name><model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-D"<index number>
For example, if a model named L101 has a location ID set to 12 in the Project Management
task, the name of the second drawing created should be named L101-12-00002.
 Sheets - Names drawing sheets using the default software names. For example, two sheets
are named Sheet1 and Sheet2.

Name by Assembly
Finds the first view on the drawing (as sorted internally by the software), finds the primary input
object on the view (such as a system or part), and uses the parent assembly or block of the
primary object, as defined by the Planning task.
 Document
Names the drawing using the following criteria:
<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-"<assembly/block
name>"-D"<index number>
For example, for a model name of L101, a location ID of 1, and an assembly name of
A0123, the first drawing created based on the assembly name should be named
L101-1-A0123-D0001.
 Sheets
Names drawing sheets using the following criteria:
<assembly/block name>"_"<index number>
For example, three sheets using the same assembly name are named A0123, A0123_1,
and A0123_2. Two sheets using different assembly names are A0123 and A4567.
When the criteria for the rule are not met, the software defaults to the Default rule.

Name by Query
Finds the first view on the drawing (as sorted internally by the software) and uses the primary
input object on the view (such as a system or part). Also determines if the Global Workshare
Location ID is part of the block/assembly name.
 Document
Names the drawing using the following criteria:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 96

 Drawings and Reports Naming Rules

<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-"<object name>"-D"<index

number>
For example, for a model name of L101, a location ID of 1, and a plate part name of
<B0.1>-LS.5-1, the second drawing created based on the part name should be named
L101-1-<B0.1>-LS.5-1-D02.
 Sheets
Names drawing sheets using the following criteria:
<object name>"_"<index number>
For example, three sheets using the same plate system name are named A-103DCK,
A-103DCK_1, and A-103DCK_2. Two sheets using different assembly names are
A-103DCK and A-110DCK.
When the criteria for the rule are not met, the software defaults to the Default rule.

Name by Grid Plane

Finds the first view on the drawing (as sorted internally by the software), finds the primary input
object on the view, and looks for the parent system if the input object is not a system. The rule
then uses the name of the grid plane that defines a plate system or the profile system name for
a profile system. This rule is only used for planar plate systems or intersection profile systems.
 Document
Names the drawing using the following criteria:
<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-"<grid plane name>"+ or -"<offset
from grid plane>"-D"<index number>
If the drawing is for a shell profile, names the drawing using the following criteria:
<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"- Shell Profile -"<parent profile
system name>"-"<index number>
For example, for a model name of L101, a location ID of 1, and a plate system defined by a
grid plane of F222, the third drawing created based on the grid plane should be named
L101-1-F222-D03. For a grid plane of F222 and a global coordinate system offset of -0.5 m,
the drawing is named L101-1-F222-0.5-D03. For a profile by intersection, the profile name is
used, such as L101-1-D47-1DCK-101T-D01.
 Sheets
Names drawing sheets using the following criteria:
<grid plane name>"+ or -"<offset from grid plane>"_"<index number>
For example, three sheets using the same assembly name are named F222, F222_1, and
F222_2. Two sheets using different assembly names are F222 and F232.
When the criteria for the rule are not met, the software defaults to the Default rule.

Name by Asking Assembly

 Document (automatically created, single view, shell plates)
If a block or assembly is selected through an asking filter, the drawing is named using the
following criteria:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 97

 Drawings and Reports Naming Rules

<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-SH-EX-"<assembly/block name>" -

"<PORT/STBD>"-D"<index number>
For example, for a model name of L101, a location ID of 1, and a starboard block name of
B0.1.2, the second drawing created based on the grid plane should be named
L101-1-SH-EX-BO.1.2-STBD-D03.
If a single shell part is selected without the block/assembly asking filter, the drawing is
named using the following criteria:
<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-SH-EX-"<part name>" -
"<PORT/STBD>"-D"<index number>
If multiple shell parts are selected without the block/assembly asking filter, the drawing is
named using the following criteria:
<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-SH-EX-"<PORT/STBD>"-D"<index
number>
 Document (automatically created, single view, non-shell plates)
Names the drawing using the following criteria:
<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-"<grid plane name>"+ or -"<offset
from grid plane>"-D"<index number>
For example, for a model name of L101, a location ID of 1, and a plate system defined by a
grid plane of F222, the third drawing created based on the grid plane should be named
L101-1-F222-D03. For a grid plane of F222 and a global coordinate system offset of -0.5 m,
the drawing is named L101-1-F222-0.5-D03.
 Document (automatically created, multiple views)
Names the drawing using the following criteria:
<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-MultipleViews-D"<index number>
For example, for a model name of L101, and a location ID of 1, the first drawing created
based on the assembly name should be named L101-1-MultipleViews-D0001.
 Document (manually created)
Use the Add Document command in the Management Console to manually create
documents.
Names the drawing using the following criteria:
<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-"<assembly/block
name>"-D"<index number>
For example, for a model name of L101, a location ID of 1, and an assembly name of
A0123, the first drawing created based on the assembly name should be named
L101-1-A0123-D0001.
 Sheets - Names drawing sheets using the default software names. For example, two sheets
are named Sheet1 and Sheet2.
When the criteria for the rule are not met, the software defaults to the Name by Query rule.

Name by Template Set Plate Part

This rule is applicable only to template set drawings.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 98

 Drawings and Reports Naming Rules

Finds the first view on the drawing (as sorted internally by the software) and uses the primary
input object on the view (such as a system or part). Also determines if the Global Workshare
Location ID is part of the block/assembly name.
 Document
Names the drawing using the following criteria:
<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"-"<TemplateSet Plate Part
name>"-D"<index number>
For example, for a model name of L101, a location ID of 1, and a Templateset plate part
name of <B0.1>-LS.5-1, the second drawing created based on the part name should be
named L101-1-<B0.1>-LS.5-1-D02.
 Sheets
Names drawing sheets using the following criteria:
< TemplateSet Plate name>"_"<index number>
For example, three sheets using the same plate system name are named A-103DCK,
A-103DCK_1, and A-103DCK_2. Two sheets using different assembly names are
A-103DCK and A-110DCK.
When the criteria for the rule are not met, the software defaults to the Default rule.

Name for Full Expansion

This rule is applicable only to full expansion drawings.
Finds the shell expansion view on the drawing and finds the hull object on the view. Also
determines if the Global Workshare Location ID is part of the name, and whether a port or
starboard view type has been selected.
 Document
Names the drawing using the following criteria:
<model name>"-"<Global Workshare Location ID>"- SHELL EXPANSION -" <PORT or
STBD> "-D"<index number>
For example, for a ship name of L101, a location ID of 1, and a view type of starboard, the
drawing should be named L101-1- SHELL EXPANSION -STBD-D0001.
 Sheets - Names drawing sheets using the default software names. For example, two sheets
are named Sheet1 and Sheet2.
When the criteria for the rule are not met, the software defaults to the Default rule.
See Also
Components Overview (on page 89)

View Naming Rules in Drawings by Rule

The software provides several options for naming the views in drawing by rule documents. For
more information on creating view naming rules, see the Reference Data Guide.
The following view naming rules are delivered:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 99

 Drawings and Reports Naming Rules

Default
Default naming convention is applied by the software. For example: View1.

Name by Block for Expansion

Uses the selected assembly, block, or assembly block name. This rule is used for shell
expansions in a block or assembly.
Names the view using "SHELL EXPANSION - "<PORT/STBD>" - "<assembly/block name>. For
example, for a starboard-side assembly name of A0123, the view is named SHELL
EXPANSION - STBD - A0123.

Name by Direction
Finds the primary input part in the view and the view direction returned from the orientation rule.
Names the view using <primary part name> "-" <view direction>. For example, for a member
part view, the name is BU1900x750x15x50-1-001 - Along +Y. For a view with a deck plate part
as the primary input, the name is <B412>-4LS.16-1 - Plan Looking Down.

Name by Grid Plane

Finds the primary input plate part in the view and uses the plate type and the grid plane used to
create the parent plate system of the part. This rule is used for plate parts and intersection
profile part.
For planar plates that lie on a major grid plane, names the view using <plate type> <grid plane
name>"+ or -"<offset from grid plane>. For example, for a transverse plate defined by a grid
plane of F234, the view is named Transverse F234. For a grid plane of F234 and a global
coordinate system offset of -0.5 m, the view is named Transverse F234-0.5.
For plates that do not lie on a major grid plane (such as inclined plates, knuckled plates, and
planar orthogonal plates that are between grid planes), names the view using <plate type>
<parent plate system name>. Collected plates are sorted alphabetically, and the first parent
plate system name is used.
For a shell profile view, names the view using "SHELL PROFILE -" <parent profile system
name>.

Name by Parts for Expansion

Uses the selected plate part name and finds the transverse side location of part. This rule is
used for expansions of a single part or expansions of multiple parts that are not selected by
block or assembly.
 View with an individual shell part - Names the view using "SHELL EXPANSION -
"<PORT/STBD>" - "<plate part name>. For example, SHELL EXPANSION - PORT -
<B0.1>-SH.1501-1.
 View with an individual non-shell part - Names the view using "EXPANSION - "<plate
part name>. For example, EXPANSION - <B0.1>-47_20223LS.102-1.
 View with multiple shell parts not selected by block/assembly - Names the view SHELL
EXPANSION - PORT or SHELL EXPANSION - STBD.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 100

 Drawings and Reports Naming Rules

Name by Query
Sheet name is the returned query name.

Name by Style
Names the view using the view definition name. For example, if the view definition used is “Mfg
PinJig - Pin Data” then the view is named Mfg PinJig - Pin Data. For more information about
view styles, see Define View Style Command (Tools Menu) in the Drawings and Reports
Reference Data Guide.

Name by Template
This rule is applicable only to template set drawings.
The view name is the name of the template in that view.

Name for Full Expansion

This rule is applicable only to full expansion drawings.
Names the view using "SHELL EXPANSION - "<view definition type name>". For example, if the
view definition used is "Starboard," the view is named SHELL EXPANSION - Starboard.
When the criteria for a selected naming rule are not met, the software defaults
to the Default rule.
See Also
Components Overview (on page 89)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 101

SECTION 8
Drawings by Rule
The Drawings by Rule component, available in marine mode and material handling mode,
creates drawings using rule sets. Rule sets are view styles that specify a unique way of
rendering the content of a drawing. After creating a Drawings by Rule component, you can add
rule-based drawing view types, then save the component as a package or create drawings
directly.

ViewTypes
A ViewType contains the instructions to define a drawing view. It specifies the filter, styles,
orientations, and scales used to define the drawing view. It also helps you assign inputs needed
to generate the drawing view.
A ViewType contains:
 ViewStyles - Specifies a unique way of rendering the content of a drawing view.
 Filter (Query) - Determines the primary elements in the drawing view.
 Orientation - Lists allowable orientations for views of this type.
For information on creating rule set view styles, see Define View Style Command (Tools Menu)
in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.
Depending on the nature of the drawing, some of the ViewType definitions allow
multiple selections. For example, a Hull Line ViewType allows one query and one style, but it
allows multiple orientations. Another example is the Shell Expansion by Blocks ViewType that
allows multiple blocks and one view is created for each selected block.
You can perform several tasks after creating a Drawings by Rule component. These tasks are
available on the shortcut menu when you right-click the component.

Setting Up a Drawings by Rule Component

If you are an administrator, use the Setup command on the component shortcut menu to define
views, reports, and queries for the drawings documents. For more information, see Setup
(Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 104).

Saving a Drawings by Rule Package

Use the following commands to select an existing component, edit the drawing template, and
save the component as a package.
 Edit Template - Opens the component template in SmartSketch Drawing Editor so you can
set document and sheet properties and design the layout of the drawing output. For more
information, see Edit Template (Drawings by Rule) (on page 128).
 Save Package - Saves the entire component as a package so it can be used for other
drawing generation tasks. For more information, see Save Package Command (on page 76).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 102

 Drawings by Rule

Creating Drawings and Updating

The following commands are available on the shortcut menu for a Drawings by Rule component.
 Create Drawing - Creates the drawing document(s). For more information, see Create
Drawing(s) Command (on page 39).
 Refresh - Refreshes the content of the associated document views. For more information,
see Refresh (Shortcut Menu) (on page 79).
 Update - Updates the drawing document content. For more information, see Update (on
page 83).
If you are using batch processing for your documents, the Batch command will be on
the shortcut menu for the selected component or document. For more information, see Batch
Processing.

Comparing 2D Drawing Objects to 3D Model Objects

You can open a Drawings by Rule document in a 3D task and compare the 2D drawing objects
in the drawing document to 3D model objects. For more information, see Compare 2D Drawing
Object to 3D Model Object (on page 362).

Other Tasks
 Print - Prints the selected drawing. For more information, see Print Command (on page 45).
 Properties - Displays the Properties dialog for the selected folder, component, or drawing
view. For more information, see Properties Command (on page 48).
 Delete - Deletes the selected folder, component, or drawing view. For more information, see
Delete Command (on page 39).
 Rename - Allows you to rename the selected folder, component, or drawing view. For more
information, see Rename Command (on page 69).
 Copy - Allows you to copy the selected item from one folder to another. For more
information, see Copy Command (on page 38).
 Paste - Allows you to paste the selected item from one folder to another. For more
information, see Paste Command (on page 43).
 Modify Border Templates for Individual Sheets - The Edit Sheet Properties command
allows you to change the border for an individual sheet to a template different from the
border template defined in the component. For more information, see Change the Border for
an Individual Drawings by Rule Sheet (on page 397).
See Also
Assembly Drawings (on page 129)
Hull Lines Drawings (on page 137)
Manufacturing Drawings (on page 144)
Scantling Drawings (on page 153)
Shell Expansion Drawings (on page 173)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 103

 Drawings by Rule

Setup (Drawings by Rule Component)

Defines component views, reports, and queries for creating drawings by rule. This command is
available on the shortcut menu for a Drawings by Rule component on the Management
Console.
You do not use most of the options in this command in the typical workflow for
creating drawings and reports. An administrator typically performs setup. The exception is when
you want to limit the number of view to be drawn. For more information, see View Query Results
in Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 115).
You can add as many views and reports as you like to a Drawings by Rule component. Reports
are associated to views. Queries are used to populate the views for the drawing documents.
For more information, see Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 108).

Dependent Reports
You associate reports to drawings by rule views, such as the Shell Expansion Profile Parts
report added to the following drawing.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 104

 Drawings by Rule

Set up a Drawings by Rule package

The following procedure steps you through creating a new Drawings by Rule component, setting
up its definition, and saving it as a package for multi-purpose usage. The procedure below
creates an example Hull Lines drawing component.
Before you create the Drawings by Rule component, you might want to create a custom rule set
view style or modify an existing style to use with the Drawings by Rule component. For more
information on creating rule set view styles, see Define View Style Command (Tools Menu) in
the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.
1. Right-click any drawing folder under the main model node and select New.
2. On the Ship tab of the Add Component dialog box, select Drawings by Rule. Click OK.
The new Drawings by Rule component displays under the drawing folder. To change the
name of the new component, right-click the component, and select Rename.
For more information, see Add a Drawings by Rule component (on page 42).
3. Right-click the Drawing by Rule component and select Setup to define the views, reports,
and queries used by the component. The Setup dialog box displays with the General tab
displayed so you can add views and reports to the View Builder. For more information, see
General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108).

4. On the General tab, click Add View Type to add a new view to the component. The
View Definition dialog box displays so you can define the view name, style, and other
properties. For more information, see View Definition Dialog Box (on page 109). The views
are added to the View Builder hierarchy.
For example, add a Hull Lines view, and define it to use the Hull Lines rule set view style.

The Hull Lines View is added to the View Builder.

5. After you create the views for the component, you can add reports to the views. Select a
view, and click Add Report . Select a report from those shown in the Select Template
dialog box, and click OK to add the report to the view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 105

 Drawings by Rule

6. You can also add some reports as embedded standalone reports that are not associated
with a view. Select View Builder, and click Add Report . Select a standalone report from
those shown in the Select Template dialog box, and click OK to add the report.
The report is added to the View Builder.

For more information, see Embedded Standalone Reports in the Report User's Guide.
7. To change the properties for a report or a view, select the item in the View Builder
hierarchy, and click Properties .
8. When you are done defining views and reports, go to the Queries tab to define the queries
for the component. For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by
Rule) (on page 115). On the Queries tab, select a view type from the Select View Type
drop-down. The view types are defined on the General tab of the Setup dialog box. Select
Default in this drop-down to specify a default filter definition to use for all view types, or you
can select individual view types and define filters for each.
9. Change or modify the filter used for the selected view type. For example, select the Hull
Lines View, then select Create New Filter in the Filter drop-down to create a new filter
definition, or you can select More in the drop-down to select from a list of existing filters.
Click Properties to modify the properties of the currently selected filter. The example below
shows that a Coordinate System Filter is used.

10. Set the collation rule using the Select Collation Rule drop-down. The default rule is
CollateToMany, which means that the drawings will have one part per view.
11. Click Apply Filter to run the filter definition. The rest of the dialog updates with
additional definition information.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 106

 Drawings by Rule

12. You can further define the view definition by changing the query or values associated with
each view generated by the filter. For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box
- Drawings by Rule) (on page 115).
13. After you have defined all of the views, reports, and queries for the Drawings by Rule
component on the Setup dialog box, click OK to save the changes.
14. Specify the sheet and document templates to use when creating the drawings. Right- click
the Drawings by Rule component and select Edit Template. SmartSketch Drawing Editor
opens with the Edit Sheet Properties dialog box displayed (Edit Sheet command). Use this
command to define the properties for the sheet and the document associated to the
Drawings by Rule component. For more information, see Edit Template (Drawings by Rule)
(on page 128).
15. Use the Edit Sheet Properties and Place Region commands to set up the layout
for the drawing area in the template. For more information on these commands, see the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
Regions are only needed if you want views to be placed on the sheet
automatically when the drawing is updated. Regions are not required. Without regions, you
can drag views onto the sheet and place them as needed for multi-sheet drawing
documents.

16. Save any changes you make to the template, and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
17. If you are an administrator with write permissions to the SharedContent folder, you can save
the current Drawings by Rule component definition into the model as a package so that it
displays in the Add Component dialog box and can be reused by others. Right-click the
component and select Save Package. For more information, see Save a package (on page
77).
18. You can also create the drawings for the Drawings by Rule component by right-clicking the
component and selecting Create Drawings. This creates the drawings documents and
displays them in the Detail View.
If you make changes to the model that impact the drawing content, the drawings will be
out-of-date and you will need to refresh or update them to update the drawing content. For more
information, see Updating Documents (on page 78).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 107

 Drawings by Rule

Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Rule Component)

Sets views, reports, and queries for a Drawings by Rule component. This dialog box displays
when you select Setup on the shortcut menu for a Drawings by Rule component.
General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108)
Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 115)
See Also
Setup (Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 104)

General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule)

Adds views and reports to a Drawings by Rule component. This is the default tab for the Setup
dialog box, which is displayed when you select Setup on the shortcut menu for a Drawings by
Rule component.
If this is a new Drawing by Rule component, the General Tab contains no views or reports in the
View Builder hierarchy.

If the Drawings by Rule component already has view and report definitions, the View Builder
hierarchy displays the current view definition:

View Builder
Shows a hierarchy of the current view and report definition for the Drawings by Rule
component.
Add View Type
Adds a view to the View Builder hierarchy. This option is available when you select the
View Builder root. When you click Add View Type , the View Definition dialog box
displays so you can define the view type properties. For more information, see View
Definition Dialog Box (on page 109).
Add Report
Adds a report in the following ways:
 Adds a report to the selected view in the View Builder hierarchy. When you click Add
Report , the Select Template dialog box displays so you can choose a dependent
report for the selected view. Select a report, and click OK to add it to the view in the
View Builder.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 108

 Drawings by Rule

 Adds an embedded standalone report in the View Builder hierarchy. An embedded

standalone report is not dependent on a view. When you click Add Report , the
Select Template dialog box displays so you can choose a standalone report. Select a
report, and click OK to add it to the View Builder.

Delete
Deletes the currently selected view or report.
Properties
Displays the View Definition dialog box so you can modify view or report definitions as
needed.
See Also
Setup (Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 104)
Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 108)

View Definition Dialog Box

Defines view properties for view in a Drawings by Rule component. This dialog box displays
when you add a new view to a Drawings by Rule component or edit the properties for an
existing view. For more information, see General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on
page 108).
The properties for a view definition are as follows:
Type Name
Names the view type you are adding or editing.
Style
Specifies the rule set view style to use for this view. For more information on creating rule
set view styles, see Define View Style Command (Tools Menu) in the Drawings and Reports
Reference Data Guide.
View Naming Rule
Specifies the naming rule used for this view type. For more information, see Labels Tab
(Edit Ruleset View Style Dialog Box) in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.
Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use with regard to the drawing view contents. These are
the coordinates used for the annotation of the view. The coordinates listed are defined for
the model. For Local Coordinate System, the main object of the view is used.
Scale Family
Specifies a scale family for the drawing view, such as Metric or Imperial. When you select a
scale family, the Scale Value property values update.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 109

 Drawings by Rule

Scale Value
Shows the scale values available for the currently selected Scale Family.
Orientation Rule
Specifies the rules available for orientations for the current view type. The Orientation Rule
drives the values for the View Direction and Up Direction properties. For more information,
see Orientation Rules (on page 110).
View Direction
Defines the "looking" direction of the view. The values change based on the selected
coordinate system. As an example, for planar views with a local coordinate system, select
Along -X, Along +X, Along +Y, Along -Y, Along +Z, or Along -Z. For isometric views with
a local coordinate system, select Iso - Along -Z +Y -X, Iso - Along -Z +Y +X, Iso - Along -Z
-Y -X, Iso - Along -Z -Y +X, Iso - Along +Z +Y -X, Iso - Along +Z +Y +X, Iso - Along +Z -Y
-X, or Iso - Along +Z -Y +X.
Up Direction
Defines the direction that is pointing up in the view, such as along the positive Y-axis.
VHL Precision
Type a value between .001 and 1.0 only if you want to reduce the precision of VHL (vector
hidden line) calculations for the view and override the software-wide value. By default, the
VHL Precision value is not set and a very small software-wide value of 1 x 10-4 is used for
VHL calculations.
Geometry Validation
Select On to analyze geometry and discard invalid geometry. Discarded geometry is not
drawn in the view. Use with caution, because invalid geometry may represent legitimate
model items that are removed from the drawing. The default is Off.
See Also
Setup (Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 104)
Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 108)
General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108)

Orientation Rules
An orientation rule specifies view orientations for the current view type. The Orientation Rule
drives the values for the View Direction and Up Direction properties. The following orientation
rules are delivered:
Global Coordinate System (ISGlobalLCS.Default)
Orientation is relative to the global coordinate system. View direction options include planar
view options such as Looking Aft or Looking Port; and isometric view options such as Up
Port Aft and Plan Starboard Forward. Up direction options are dependent on the selected
view direction and include planar view options Plan, Up, Aft, Forward, Port, or Starboard;
and isometric view options Up, Down, Left, or Right.
Local Coordinate System
Orientation is relative to the local coordinate system of the part as defined by the software.
View direction options include planar view options such as Right (Along -X) or Top (Along
+Z), and isometric view options such as Top Front Right and Bottom Back Left. Up

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 110

 Drawings by Rule

direction options are dependent on the selected view direction and include planar view
options along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes in both directions, and isometric view options Bottom,
Top, Back, or Front.
Not Applicable (SMNotApplicableLCS.Default)
Orientation rule has no significance. Both View direction and Up direction options are Not
Applicable.
Mfg PinJig SideView (SMMfgPinJigSideLCS.Default)
Orientation is relative to PinJig local coordinate system. View direction options include
planar view options such as Left (Along +X) or Right (Along -X). The up direction option
includes Jig Floor Up.
The up direction is along the jig floor and view directions are along +X and -X, as shown
below:

Scantlings for Plate/Profile

Orientation is relative to a view direction that is across the local x-, y-, and z - axes of the
view coordinate system. If the view does not have any coordinate system, the view direction
will be set to the global X-, Y- or Z-axis. The following are standard combinations of view
direction and up direction:
 Transverse Bulkheads
Section view Looking Aft: View direction is looking aft (Along -Z), Up direction is up
(Along +Y).
Section View Looking Fwd: View direction is looking forward (Along +Z), Up direction is
up (Along +Y).
 Longitudinal Bulkheads
Elevation Looking Stbd: View direction is looking starboard (Along -Z), Up direction is
up (Along +Y).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 111

 Drawings by Rule

Elevation Looking Port: View direction is looking port (Along +Z), Up direction is up
(Along +Y).
 Decks
Plan Looking Down: View direction is looking down (Along -Z), Up direction is port
(Along +Y). The forward end of the ship is always oriented to the right of the drawing.
 Shell Profiles
View direction will be either Global –Z or Global +Y based on the angle between the
web surface of the shell profile and Global –Z axis as shown below:

The orientation rule sets the view direction to:

 Global -Z (Plan looking Down) if the angle of inclination is less than the tolerance
angle.
 Global +Y (Looking Port) if the angle of inclination is more than the tolerance
angle.
The default value for the tolerance angle is set to 75 degrees. You can configure the
tolerance angle value using the Angle for Target Evaluation (Optional) view query in the
view style. For more information about view queries, see Steel Order Drawing Rule Set.
Mfg Template At Index
Orientation is relative to the local coordinate system of a template within a template set. The
template is identified by its index number within the template set. View direction options
include planar view options such as Right (Along -X) or Top (Along +Z), and isometric
view options such as Top Front Right and Bottom Back Left. Up direction options are
dependent on the selected view direction and include planar view options along the X-, Y-,
and Z-axes in both directions, and isometric view options Bottom, Top, Back, or Front.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 112

 Drawings by Rule

Shell Expansion for Plate

Used for partial shell plate expansions and expansion of curved and knuckled internal
plates. Orientation is relative to the global coordinate system. Up direction option is Up.
View direction options are as follows:
 Looking Outboard and Looking Inboard
 Looking Port and Looking Starboard
Expansion (Hull)
Used for full shell expansions. Orientation is relative to the global coordinate system. In all
view directions, hidden line conventions are ignored. The hull plate is always solid, and all
connected plates and profiles are dashed. The up direction option is Up. View direction
options are as follows:
 Centerline Looking Port and Starboard Looking Centerline - Forward is to the right
in the view.
 Centerline Looking Starboard and Port Looking Centerline - Forward is to the left in
the view.
View Coordinate System
Orientation is relative to the coordinate system specified in the view definition. View direction
options include planar view options, such as Right (Along -X) or Top (Along +Z), and
isometric view options, such as Top Front Right and Bottom Back Left. Up direction
options are dependent on the selected view direction and include planar view options along
the X-, Y-, and Z-axes in both directions, and isometric view options Bottom, Top, Back, or
Front.
If the View direction does not have any coordinate system, then it will be set to the global X-,
Y- or Z-axis.
Scantling By Plate Normal
Orientation is relative to plate normal. The following are standard combinations of view
direction and up direction:
 Plate normal inclined towards global X-axis
 Looking Aft: View direction is looking aft along the plate normal (Along –Z), Up
direction is up (Along +Y).
 Looking Forward: View direction is looking forward (Along +Z), Up direction is up
(Along +Y).
 Plate normal inclined towards global Y-axis
 Looking Stbd: View direction is looking starboard along the plate normal (Along –Z),
Up direction is up (Along +Y).
 Looking Port: View direction is looking port (Along +Z), Up direction is up (Along
+Y).
 Plate normal inclined towards global Z-axis
 Plan Looking Down: View direction is looking down (Along –Z), Up direction is port
(Along +Y).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 113

 Drawings by Rule

The following table shows how orientation rules are typically used depending on the type of
drawing you are creating:

Type of Drawing Orientation Rules

Scantling Drawings, including the following Global Coordinate System

delivered packages: Scantlings for Plate/Profile (for planar plates
Steel Order (Expansion) and Shell Profiles)
Steel Order by Block or Assembly Shell Expansion for Plate (for shell plates)
Steel Order (Shell Profiles)

Shell Expansion Expansion (Hull)

Hull Lines Drawings, including the following

delivered packages: Global Coordinate System
Hull Lines

Assembly Drawings, including the following

delivered packages: Local Coordinate System
Assembly Method
Assembly Sequence

Manufacturing Template Drawings,

including the following delivered packages: Local Coordinate System
Mfg Template at Index
Mfg Template Set

Manufacturing PinJig Drawings, including

the following delivered packages: Local Coordinate System
Mfg PinJig

Manufacturing Profile Sketch Drawings,

including the following delivered packages:
Not used
Mfg Profile Sketch
Mfg Profile Sketch (Multiple)

Manufacturing Templateset Full Scale

Not Applicable
Drawing

Manufacturing PinJig Side View Drawing Mfg PinJig SideView

See Also
View Definition Dialog Box (on page 109)
General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 114

 Drawings by Rule

Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule)

Adds queries to a Drawings by Rule component. Before adding queries, you should add views
and reports on the General tab. For more information, see General Tab (Setup Dialog Box -
Drawings by Rule) (on page 108).

View Type Filter and Query Definition

The view type filter definitions drive the views created when the query runs.
Select All (for Where filter) or View Type (for What filter)
Shows a list of the view types available for query definition. Select one of the following
options:
 All - Specifies objects to collate based on their location, not their type. You must select
a where filter for the location in the model used for all view definitions in the component.

 An individual view type - Specifies the object types to collate. The available view types
are defined on the General tab of the Setup dialog box. Optionally, select a what filter
for the type of object. You must also select a collation rule.

Run Query
Runs the current query definition with the specified filter to populate the rest of the query
parameters. The Queries tab updates with all the necessary query definition fields.
Filter
Specifies the filter to use for this query definition. Select More in the dropdown to display the

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 115

 Drawings by Rule

Select Filter dialog, and choose from a list of available filters. Select Create New Filter to
create a new filter with the Filter Properties dialog box. The dropdown also provides a list
of previously selected filters. For more information, see Select Filter Dialog Box (on page
122).
Some queries are run frequently but need customized values for the filter, called
an asking filter. Select User of filter supplies value on the Filter Properties dialog box to
create an asking filter. For example, select BO, Include nested objects, and User of filter
supplies value on the Filter Properties dialog box. The filter will allow selection of a block
or assembly when Ask Filter Inputs is clicked.
Properties
Displays the Filter Properties dialog box so you can modify the currently selected filter as
needed. For more information about filters, see Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 164).
Remove Filter
Removes the specified filter from the currently selected view type query definition.
Ask Filter Inputs
Displays the Filter Properties for Asking Filter dialog box, which allows selection of a
value for the asking filter. The dialog is the same as the Filter Properties dialog box, except
that only the appropriate tabs for the asking filter are displayed. This command is available
only when the filter has an asking filter specified. For more information about filters, see
Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 164).
Select Collation Rule
Specifies how model objects are gathered into views when the drawings for this Drawing by
Rule component are created. Collation rules are part of the reference data in the Catalog.
For more information, see Collation Rules (on page 123).

View Query Results

When you click Run Query against the current view type query definition, the view queries
display in the lower portion of the dialog box. You can make changes to the results as needed.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 116

 Drawings by Rule

Manage Views

Allows you to select multiple views in Select View that can be created (using ) or deleted
(using ) .
Select View
Shows the views created when the view type query ran. If this drop-down is empty, you
need to click Apply Filter to run the query and populate the view query definitions.

(toggle button)
Displays that the views will be created in Create Drawings.

(toggle button)
Displays that the views will not be created in Create Drawings.
Query
Specifies the value for a query applied to the selected view. Each view can have more than
one query applied. You can select each query and update the values.
A view query specifies the type of model object or parameter value used by the view
definition. The list of available queries is specific to the selected package. The drawings by
rule queries are most commonly used.

Drawings by Rule Queries

1. Any system, part, or reference plane
Defines the query by the selected outfitting or structural systems or parts, or a selected
reference plane. When systems are selected, the parts belonging to the systems are used.
Select objects that support the type of drawing view you want to create. A value for this
query is required. The following can be set:
 Plate parts or systems.
 Profile parts or systems.
 Member parts or systems.
 Outfitting parts or systems, including pipe lines, pipe runs, pipe parts, hangers and
supports, and equipment.
 Reference planes from any coordinate system.
Selections can be made manually using Associate Objects to Views in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor. Selections can also be specified automatically as output of an applicable
collation rule. For more information, see Collation Rules in Drawings by Rule in the
Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide or Collation Rules (on page 123) in the
Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.
2. Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly)
Defines the boundaries of a query by a selected planning block, volume, assembly, or
assembly block. A value for this query is optional.
3. Gathering rule
Defines the type of parts gathered in the drawing view. The rule provides a definition of the
objects to be gathered and drawn in a view. The gathering rule starts with the inputs

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 117

 Drawings by Rule

selected in Any system, part, or reference plane and adds more objects to the view based
on their relationships to each other. This option opens the Select Gathering Rule dialog
box. Select a rule that supports the type of drawing view you want to create, such as Steel
Order or Assembly. A value for this query is required. The default value is Steel Order.
4. Gathering method
Defines how model objects are included in the drawing view. The volume selected with
Block, volume, or Assembly or created with Volume creation rule is used as input for the
gathering method.
 Gather related objects in volume - Parts are gathered based on connections to
the selected parts resulting from Any system, part, or reference plane. If a volume
is defined for Volume creation rule, only connected objects in the volume are
gathered.
 Gather all objects in volume - All parts in the volume are gathered even if they are
not connected to the selected parts resulting from Any system, part, or reference
plane. If a volume is not defined for Volume creation rule, this option is not valid.
This is the default value.
Relationships (such as parent/child or bounded/bounding) for all gathered objects are also
gathered and used by the selected Gathering rule.
5. Volume creation rule
Defines the volume for the view by one of the following methods:
 Create volume along surface of input parts with boundary extents - The volume
follows the surfaces of the selected parts resulting from Any system, part, or
reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended by the values of
Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing. The volume area
(in the plane of the view) is extended to (or clipped by) the boundaries defined by
Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly). The gathering range is extended by the
values defined by Extend Into and Extend Out Of.

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Extended gathering range
4 - Volume extended to boundaries
5 - View direction
6 - Additional part gathered into view
7 - Additional part not gathered into view

 Create volume along surface of input parts without boundary extents - The volume
follows the surfaces of the selected parts resulting from Any system, part, or
reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended by the values of
Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing. The volume area
(in the plane of the view) is not extended to (nor clipped by) the boundaries defined by
Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly). The gathering range is extended by the
values defined by Extend Into and Extend Out Of.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 118

 Drawings by Rule

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Extended gathering range
4 - View direction
5 - Additional part gathered into view
6 - Additional part not gathered into view

 Create volume from range box around input parts with boundary extents - The
volume is a rectangular range box around the selected parts resulting from Any
system, part, or reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended
by the values of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing.
The volume is extended to (or clipped by) the boundaries defined by Boundary (Block,
volume, or assembly). See the corrugated bulkhead example below.

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part gathered into view
4 - View direction
5 - Volume extended to boundaries

 Create volume from range box around input parts without boundary extents - The
volume is a rectangular range box around the selected parts resulting from Any
system, part, or reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended
by the values of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing.
The volume is not extended to (nor clipped by) the boundaries defined by Boundary
(Block, volume, or assembly). See the corrugated bulkhead example below.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 119

 Drawings by Rule

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
Example: Non-orthogonal member
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part gathered into view
4 - View direction

 Create oriented volume around input parts without boundary extents - The volume
is a rectangular box around the parts. The box is oriented around parts to minimize the
volume. The parts are typically not orthogonal, but the view direction is typically normal
to the box. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended by the values of Volume
growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing.

 If the view direction is not normal to the box, then the volume is extended to (or
clipped by) the boundaries defined by Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly)
instead of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing.
 If the view direction is normal to the box, then the volume is extended to (or clipped
by) Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing. These
values can be positive or negative.

Example: Non-orthogonal member

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part gathered into view
4 - View direction

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 120

 Drawings by Rule

 Do not create volume - A volume is not used to restrict gathering using gathering rule.
For example, a shell longitudinal profile view does not use a volume. It instead uses
levels to gather secondary parts.
The volume selected with Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly) or created
with Volume creation rule is also used for view clipping in the graphic rule. For more
information, see Graphic Rules in Drawings by Rule in the Drawings and Reports Reference
Data Guide.
For other queries, see the appropriate drawing type under Drawings by Rule View Style Rule
Sets in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.
Value

Identifies the values generated when you ran the query using the Apply Filter button.
Edit
Allows you to edit the selected query value. In the following example, Query is changed to
Block (Optional). Click Edit to select a new filter (from the Assembly tab) as the value for
the query.

Reset
Resets the values back to their original state for the specified query.
Default
Sets the current value as the default for the current view query definition.
Clear
Removes assemblies or blocks in the Value list. You can then click Filter again, and select
new values for the query. This option is available only when assemblies or blocks are
selected in Query.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 121

 Drawings by Rule

See Also
Setup (Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 104)
Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 108)

Select Filter Dialog Box

Creates, edits, deletes, and selects filters for use with the Define Workspace, Surface Style
Rules, and other Select by Filter commands, including Project Management's Model Data
Reuse (MDR), Drawings View Styles, and Reports commands that require runtime filter
selection. You can access this dialog box in several ways.
 Select File > Define Workspace, and select the More option in the Filter box.
 Select Format > Surface Style Rules, click New or Modify, and then select the More
option in the Filter box.
 Select Tools > Select by Filter.
The tree view displays the following types of filters:
 Catalog Filters - These filters are used to reference data in the Catalog. For example, a
catalog filter could apply to company-wide operations. Your administrator can define
Company_Filter_1, Company_Filter_2, and so forth.
 Model Filters - These filters are available to everyone assigned to a specific model
database. There are delivered catalog filters to query on the different types of model objects.
You must have the appropriate privileges to create, edit, or delete these filters.
 My Filters - These are personal filters that you create and place in the My Filters folder.
They are visible only to you, the owner. You cannot see the personal filters of others, and
they cannot see your personal filters. Select a filter from one of the listed filters, or create a
new filter to meet your specific requirements.
New Folder
Creates a new folder.
New Filter (Simple or Asking)
Displays the New Filter Properties dialog box so that you can create a new filter. Asking
filters allow you to specify the parameters of the search. An asking filter has built-in
functionality to ask for values (with boxes that you are required to supply). The values apply
to properties that you have already designated you will supply when the filter runs. Asking
filters are portable between models.
Model Data Reuse (MDR) does not support asking filters. The only valid filter
types for an MDR transaction are System, Permission Group, Object Type, Volume and
Properties. You can define the filter on any one of these tabs or in a combination using
multiple tabs.

New Compound Filter

Displays the New Compound Filter Properties dialog box, which you use to create a new
compound filter containing the Or, And, or Not operators. Compound filters are not
supported for MDR.
New SQL Filter
Displays the New SQL Filter Properties dialog box, in which you can type the text of an
SQL query. SQL filters are not supported for MDR

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 122

 Drawings by Rule

Delete
Removes a filter or folder from the Select Filter list. If you delete a folder, the software also
deletes its contents.
Rename
Changes the name of an existing filter or folder from the Select Filter list.
Properties
Displays the Filter Properties dialog box so that you can select the properties that
determine your filter search criteria.

 If this dialog box is activated from the Select by Filter command, you can select multiple
filters on this dialog box. Hold CTRL or SHIFT, and click each filter. When you click OK, all
objects that fit the selected filters are selected.
 If this dialog box is activated from the Select by Filter command, it clears the select set
before adding objects to the select set.

Manage View from Setup Dialog Box

Create or Delete a View

1. Select a view from the Select Views drop-down menu.

2. Click or to create or delete a view respectively.

3. Click OK.

Create or Delete Multiple Views

1. Select the Manage Views check box.
Select Views to create is displayed.
2. Select or uncheck the views that you want to create or delete respectively.
3. Click OK.

 Setup also displays the views that were created from view explorer and RAD documents.
 Image displayed for each view is its current status.

 - Displays view will be created.

 - Displays view will not be created.

 All the changes to the views are applied the next time you create drawings.

Collation Rules
A collation rule specifies how model objects returned by a query are grouped. View styles then
use the groups to create views in drawings by rule. Collation rules are part of the reference data
in the catalog.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 123

 Drawings by Rule

The following diagram shows the collation concept:

The following collation rules are delivered:

CollateAssemblySequence
Identifies the parts in an assembly and the assembly sequence of the parts as defined in the
Planning task, then:
1. Places each part of the assembly in a separate group.
2. Creates a group for each step of the sequence by adding the next part(s) in the sequence.
Only groups parts within an assembly, not assemblies within an assembly or block.

CollateAssemblyStep
Identifies the parts and assemblies that make up an assembly or block and the assembly
sequence of each, then creates a group for each step of the sequence by adding the next
part(s) or assembly in the sequence.

CollateConnectedPlates
Groups connected plate parts. Connected plates are connected face-to-face (lapped
connections) or edge-to-edge (butt connections).

CollateConnectedProfiles
Groups connected profiles parts. Connected profiles are connected end-to-end.

CollateContiguousBlocks
Groups spatially connected blocks.

CollateContiguousProfiles
Groups spatially connected profile parts.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 124

 Drawings by Rule

CollateCoplanarPlates
Groups coplanar plate parts or plate parts with coplanar parent systems.

CollateForSteelOrder
Creates groups of major parts in a selected block/assembly. A grouping is created for parts that
meet each of the following tests:
Major Plate Part Tests
 Plate parts of the same type, such as deck plates, transverse bulkhead plates,
longitudinal bulkhead plates, and hull plates.
 Plate parts belonging to the same system.
 Coplanar plate parts that may be in different systems. Coplanar means that plates with
different thicknesses and thickness directions are collated if the thicknesses overlap.
 Connected plate parts or plate parts with connected parent systems. Connections must
be edge-to-edge (butt connections) or face-to-face (lapped connections).
Major Profile Part Tests
 Hull profile parts.
 Profile parts belonging to the same system.
 Connected profile parts or profile parts with connected parent systems. Connections
must be end-to-end.

 Hull plate parts are expanded and are separated into port and starboard groups.
 Brackets and standalone plate parts are not grouped because brackets (created in both the
Molded Forms and Structural Detailing tasks) and standalone plates (created in Structural
Detailing task) are not major parts. After drawings are created, you can manually create
views for these parts.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 125

 Drawings by Rule

The following example shows a simple collation using the CollateForSteelOrder rule:

CollateMemberParts
Groups standard member parts and plate parts that make up a built-up member part. A view is
created for each member part.

CollateSimilarProfiles
Groups similar profiles without sketch features to a single view by matching the following
conditions between profiles:
 Cross sections - The cross-section type and size must be the same.
 Material grade - The material grade must be the same.
 End cut counts.
 End cut smart items - The end cut types must be the same, but the end cut parameters may
be different.
 Corner feature counts.
 Corner feature smart items - The corner types must be the same but the feature parameters
may be different.
 Remaining feature counts.
 Remaining feature distances.
 Remaining feature parameter values - Edge features must be exactly the same, including
the position, type, and parameters.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 126

 Drawings by Rule

CollateSimilarProfilesByXML
Uses information in the manufacturing profile XML created in the Structural Manufacturing task.
Groups similar profiles without sketch features to a single view by matching conditions between
profiles. The goal is to group profiles based on the profile XML similar to the
CollateSimilarProfiles collation rule. However, the profile XML only contains the data to
support the following conditions:
 Material grade
 End cut counts
 Corner feature counts
 Remaining feature counts
 Remaining feature distances

CollateTemplateSetToTemplates
Places each template in a template set in a separate group.

CollateToFlipShellProfilesByDir
Groups shell profiles with aft orientation into a view and reverses the view direction.

CollateToMany
Places each part in a separate group.

CollateToOne
Groups all parts.
The following table shows how collation rules are typically used, depending on the type of
drawing you are creating:

Type of Drawing Collation Rules

Scantling Drawings, including the following delivered CollateToOne

packages: CollateToMany
CollateConnectedProfile
Steel Order - Expansion
CollateConnectedPlates
Steel Order by Block or Assembly
CollateContiguousProfiles
CollateCoplanarPlates
CollateForSteelOrder

Manufacturing Profile Sketch Drawings, including the CollateToOne

following delivered packages: CollateToMany
CollateSimilarProfiles
Mfg Profile Sketch
CollateSimilarProfilesByXML
Mfg Profile Sketch - Multiple
CollateToFlipShellProfilesByDir

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 127

 Drawings by Rule

Type of Drawing Collation Rules

Manufacturing Template Drawings, including the CollateTemplateSetToTemplates

following delivered packages:
Mfg Template
Mfg Template Set

Manufacturing PinJig Drawings, including the following CollateToOne

delivered packages: CollateToMany
Mfg PinJig

Hull Lines Drawings, including the following delivered CollateToOne

packages: CollateToMany
Hull Lines

Assembly Drawings, including the following delivered CollateAssemblySequence

packages: CollateAssemblySteps
Assembly Method
Assembly Sequence

See Also
Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 115)

Edit Template (Drawings by Rule)

Opens a Drawings by Rule template in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. If this is a new Drawings by
Rule component with no associated template, the 2D Drawings Editor opens as a new
document. You can use SmartSketch Drawing Editor commands to specify the template to use
with the document or per sheet, then define regions and other definitions for the template. If the
component is already associated to a template, the template opens in SmartSketch Drawing
Editor so you can make changes. To use this command, select a Drawings by Rule component
or package and select Edit Template on the shortcut menu.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 128

 Drawings by Rule

When SmartSketch Drawing Editor opens, you can edit sheet and document properties and
place regions. For more information, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.

Edit a Drawings by Rule Template

This procedures show you how to edit a Drawings by Rule template. The procedure assumes
you have already created a Drawings by Rule component in the Drawings and Reports task
Management Console or in a 3D modeling task using the Tools > Drawing Console
command.
1. Right-click a Drawings by Rule component and select Edit Template on the shortcut menu.
The SmartSketch Drawing Editor application opens with the current template displayed.
2. Use the Edit Sheet Properties and Place Region commands to set up the layout
for the drawing area in the template. For more information on these commands, see the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.

3. Save any changes you make to the template and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Assembly Drawings
Assembly drawings depict a collection of structure and outfitting parts assembled into a larger
unit.
The following things must be considered when creating an assembly drawing:
 Definition of space for the drawing - You must define the space for the drawing in
planning or compartmentation to generate an assembly drawing.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 129

 Drawings by Rule

 Boundary marking - If assembly boundary information exists, it must be marked on the

installation drawing.
 Shop orientation - The unit is assembled prior to installation in the ship. Therefore the
drawings must have a shop orientation.
You can create assembly drawings in the following ways:
 Use the delivered drawings-by-rule Assembly component to create assembly drawings
containing plan, elevation, and isometric views.

 Use the delivered Assembly Method component to create assembly method drawings.

 Use the delivered Assembly Sequence component to create assembly sequence drawings.

 Use the Drawings by Rule component and define it with assembly views using an assembly
drawing rule set view style. For more information, see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

What do you want to do?

 Create an assembly drawing (on page 131)
 Create an assembly method drawing (on page 133)
 Create an assembly sequence drawing (on page 135)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 130

 Drawings by Rule

Create an assembly drawing

The following procedure creates isometric, plan, and elevation views for a pipe run, using a
drawing-by-rule assembly component. The workflow is performed in the Drawings and Reports
task or from Tools > Drawing Console in other tasks.

Create a drawing component

1. To create a new folder, right-click the drawing root in the Management Console and select
New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
2. Select Folder on the General tab of the Add Component dialog box.
3. Click OK.
4. Right-click the folder, and select Rename. Give the folder the needed name.
5. Right-click the folder and select New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
6. Select the Ship tab of the Add Component dialog box.

7. Select the Assembly or the Assembly (Generic) package, and then click OK.
The Assembly component displays in the Management Console. This component contains
the views to be created: Looking +X, Looking -Z, and Isometric View.
8. Right-click the component in the Management Console, and select Rename. Give the
component the needed name.

Set up and run queries (optional)

This procedure can be skipped if you are using the default settings for the
component. Perform these steps only when you need to change the queries in the component.
1. Right-click the component, and select Setup.
The Setup dialog box displays. For more information, see Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by
Rule Component) (on page 108). The View Builder hierarchy contains views for each of the
view types to be created.
2. Select the Queries tab in the Setup dialog box.
3. Select All in the Select View Type box.
4. An existing asking filter for the component displays in the Filter box. Select another value if
needed.
5. A collation rule name displays in the Select Collation Rule box. Select another value if
needed.
6. Click Ask Filter Inputs .
The Filter Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.
7. Select the needed system, part, assembly object, or reference plane from the hierarchy:
 For a scantling drawing, select a structural part, structural system, or reference plane.
 For an assembly drawing, select an assembly, block, or assemblyblock.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 131

 Drawings by Rule

 For a piping drawing, select a pipeline.

 For a pipe support drawing, select a pipeline, or individual hangers and supports.
To include child objects, select Include nested objects. Click OK.
8. Click Run Query .
9. Select a view in the Select View Type box.
Results for the view type display at the bottom of the Queries tab for Views, Queries, and
Values.
10. Each result for Views is a view based on the view styles in the component and the object
types defined in Values.
11. If the parts are not the expected results, select a different filter in the Filter box, click Ask
Filter Inputs to select new inputs, and again click Run Query .
12. Repeat for remaining views in the Select View Type box.
13. Click OK.

Create drawings
1. In the Management Console, right-click the component, and select Update.
Because you have not selected what is to be displayed on the drawings, the Filter
Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.
2. From the assembly hierarchy, select one or more blocks, assemblies, or assembly blocks.
The Drawing Generation dialog box displays.
3. When the Generation Status field displays "Creating Documents Complete," click Exit.
One drawing for each selected assembly displays in the Detail View. The drawings are
up-to-date and is superimposed on each drawing icon.
4. Open a drawing.
All assembly views display on the same sheet.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 132

 Drawings by Rule

 If a batch server is set up by your system administrator, batch update commands are also
available. For more information, see Batch Commands (on page 37).
 To update individual drawings, right-click each drawing, and select Update.

 When a drawing are out-of-date, is superimposed on the drawing icon.

Create an assembly method drawing

The following procedure steps you through creating an Assembly Method drawing.
1. In the Console, right-click the root level of the hierarchy and select New on the shortcut
menu. On the Add Component dialog box, select Folder and click OK.
You could also select an existing folder in the hierarchy and skip this step.
2. Right-click the folder and select New. On the Add Component dialog box, go to the Ship
tab. Select an Assembly Method drawing component. For example, select the Assembly
Method component and click OK. The New Assembly Method component is added to the
folder. This is the component you use to create your Assembly Method drawings.
3. Right-click the new component and select Setup on the shortcut menu. The Setup dialog
box displays.
4. On the General tab, note the View Builder definition. For the delivered Assembly Method
component, one View is already defined.

You can add views and add views to reports as needed to define the contents of your
drawings.
5. You can select a view or report and click Properties to display the View Definition
dialog box showing the current property settings for the view or report. Change the
properties as needed for the assembly method drawings you are creating. For more
information, see General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108).
6. Go to the Queries tab to set up the query definition for the assembly method drawings. The
query definition identifies the objects in the model that will be included in the drawing. For
more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 115).
7. In the Select view type dropdown, select the view type to which you want the query
associated. You can define separate queries per view type or you can use a default query
for multiple view types.
Specify a filter to identify the objects used in the query. For an assembly method drawing,
the profiles you select do not have to be manufactured. For example, the graphic below
shows that the SeqAssy filter is being used for the Assembly Method view type.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 133

 Drawings by Rule

Notice that the Collation Rule for the Assembly Method setup is already set to
CollateAssemblyStep. This collation rule identifies the parts that make up an assembly,
then creates a view for each part in the assembly and one view for the "final" assembly.
8. Click Apply Filter to run the filter definition. The rest of the dialog updates with
additional definition information.

You can further define the view definition using the buttons at the bottom of the
Setup dialog box. For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by
Rule) (on page 115).
9. Click OK on the Setup dialog box to save the view and query definitions.
10. If you need to edit the template associated with the drawing component, right click the
component and select Edit Template. The template associated with the component opens
in SmartSketch Drawing Editor so you can edit the layout and presentation for the drawings
you are creating. For more information, see Edit Template (Drawings by Rule) (on page
128).
11. After you complete setup of the Assembly Method component, right-click the component
and select Create Drawings to create the drawing documents. The new documents display
in the Detail View. The red X icon indicates that the drawings are out-of-date (the
current model information needs to be updated in the drawing views).
12. Right-click the component again and select Update to update the drawing documents with
the information from the model. A dialog box shows the update progress.
13. When the process is complete, review the information in the dialog box for any problems
that may have occurred, then click OK to close the dialog box. Notice that the up-to-date
documents are now available.
14. Right-click the document and select Edit to open it in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 134

 Drawings by Rule

If you need to create a customized Assembly drawing component, create a Drawings

by Rule component and define it as an Assembly drawing component. For more information,
see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

Create an assembly sequence drawing

The following procedure steps you through creating an Assembly Sequence drawing.
1. In the Console, right-click the root level of the hierarchy and select New on the shortcut
menu. On the Add Component dialog box, select Folder and click OK.
You could also select an existing folder in the hierarchy and skip this step.
2. Right-click the folder and select New. On the Add Component dialog box, go to the Ship
tab. Select an Assembly Sequence drawing component. For example, select the Assembly
Sequence component and click OK. The New Assembly Sequence component is added
to the folder. This is the component you use to create your Assembly Sequence drawings.
3. Right-click the new component and select Setup on the shortcut menu. The Setup dialog
box displays.
4. On the General tab, note the View Builder definition. For the delivered Assembly
Sequence component, one View is already defined.

You can add views and add views to reports as needed to define the contents of your
drawings.
5. You can select a view or report and click Properties to display the View Definition
dialog box showing the current property settings for the view or report. Change the
properties as needed for the assembly method drawings you are creating. For more
information, see General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108).
6. Go to the Queries tab to set up the query definition for the assembly sequence drawings.
The query definition identifies the objects in the model that will be included in the drawing.
For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page
115).
7. In the Select view type dropdown, select the view type to which you want the query
associated. You can define separate queries per view type or you can use a default query
for multiple view types.
Specify a filter to identify the objects used in the query. For an assembly sequence drawing,
the profiles you select do not have to be manufactured. For example, the graphic below
shows that the SeqAssy filter is being used for the Assembly Sequence view type.

Notice that the Collation Rule for the Assembly Sequence setup is already set to
CollateAssemblySequence. This collation rule identifies how the assembly is built, then

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 135

 Drawings by Rule

creates a view for each part of the assembly in proper sequence and a view that shows how
the assembly is being built after "each" part is added.
8. Click Apply Filter to run the filter definition. The rest of the dialog updates with
additional definition information.

You can further define the view definition using the buttons at the bottom of the
Setup dialog box. For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by
Rule) (on page 115).
9. Click OK on the Setup dialog box to save the view and query definitions.
10. If you need to edit the template associated with the drawing component, right click the
component and select Edit Template. The template associated with the component opens
in SmartSketch Drawing Editor so you can edit the layout and presentation for the drawings
you are creating. For more information, see Edit Template (Drawings by Rule) (on page
128).
11. After you complete setup of the Assembly Sequence component, right-click the component
and select Create Drawings to create the drawing documents. The new documents display
in the Detail View. The red X icon indicates that the drawings are out-of-date (the
current model information needs to be updated in the drawing views).
12. Right-click the component again and select Update to update the drawing documents with
the information from the model. A dialog box shows the update progress.
13. When the process is complete, review the information in the dialog box for any problems
that may have occurred, then click OK to close the dialog box. Notice that the up-to-date
documents are now available.
14. Right-click the document and select Edit to open it in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 136

 Drawings by Rule

If you need to create a customized Assembly drawing component, create a Drawings

by Rule component and define it as an Assembly drawing component. For more information,
see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

Hull Lines Drawings

Hull Lines drawing views utilize a Hull Lines rule set view style. The Hull Lines drawings created
by the component depend on the definition you set for the component. For more information,
see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).
You can save each Hull Lines Drawing component as a package to be used or modified as
needed. For more information, see Hull Lines Drawings Common Tasks.
You can create the following types of hull lines drawings:

Body Plan
Contains frame hull lines. Also includes objects that are connected to the shell, such as decks,
bulkheads, profiles, and planning blocks.
You can create the following types of body plans drawings:
 From forward hull to reference plane, taken from the port side of the ship
 From reference plane to the after hull, taken from the starboard side of the ship
 Above types expressed together, with each on half of the drawing
 Complete hull body plan drawing

Plan View (waterline)

Contains waterline hull lines.
You can create the following types of plan drawings:
 From the top to a certain waterline
 From the baseline to a certain waterline
 Top and bottom combined
 Entire waterline plans

Profile View (buttock)

Contains buttock hull lines.
You can create the following types of profile drawings:
 From the centerline looking out to a certain buttock plane
 From the outside of the shell looking in to a certain buttock plane
 Looking out and looking in combined
 Entire buttock line plan

Plane Definitions
When creating hull lines drawings, you define planes intersecting the shell.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 137

 Drawings by Rule

Intersection curve - The intersection curve is defined by the intersection between a reference
plane and the hull.
Limiting plane - This plane limits the display of the intersection curve. You do not define the
limiting plane; it is used to determine how much of an intersection curve should be shown on the
drawing. For body plan and plan view drawings, the system should use Y=0 as the limiting
plane. For the profile view drawing, a limiting plane is not necessary because the entire
intersection curve is shown on the drawing.
Separation Plane - This plane divides the hull into two sections as follows:
 Body plan: Fore and Aft
 Plan view: Bottom and Top
 Profile view: Outboard and Inboard

Plane definitions in body plan drawing

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 138

 Drawings by Rule

Plane definitions in plan view drawing

Plane definitions in profile view drawing

Line Definitions
Transverse line - Frame line on the hull created by the intersection of transverse (X-axis) grid
planes with the hull.
Buttock line - Longitudinal line on the hull created by the intersection of longitudinal (Y-axis)
grid planes with the hull.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 139

 Drawings by Rule

Waterline - Deck line on the hull created by the intersection of the deck (Z-axis) grid planes with
the hull.
Line interval - The interval between intersection lines.

Plane definitions in body plan drawing

A body plan drawing is a transverse view of the hull. Transverse lines are shown on a grid of
waterlines and buttock lines.

Line definitions in the plan view drawing

Waterlines are shown on a grid of transverse lines and buttock lines.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 140

 Drawings by Rule

Line definitions in profile view drawing

A profile view drawing is a longitudinal elevation view of the hull. Buttock lines are shown on a
grid of waterlines and transverse lines.

What do you want to do?

 Create a hull lines drawing (on page 141)

Create a hull lines drawing

The following procedures steps you through creating a Hull Lines drawing using the delivered
package. For more information on Hull Lines drawings, see Hull Lines Drawings (on page 137).
For a list of common tasks for creating Hull Lines drawings, see Hull Lines Drawings Common
Tasks.
1. In the Console, create or select a folder and add the delivered Hull Lines package to the
hierarchy. This package displays on the Ship tab of the Add Component dialog box.
Add a Drawings by Rule component (on page 42)

2. To edit the template defined for the package or the layout of the template, right-click the Hull
Lines package and select Edit Template on the shortcut menu. The template associated
with the package opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. You can edit the layout and the
template association for the drawings which will be created by this package.
Edit a Drawings by Rule Template (on page 129)
3. Save your changes to the template and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 141

 Drawings by Rule

4. Right-click the Hull Lines package and select Setup to display the Setup dialog box and the
current view and query definition for the package. The General tab shows the views already
defined for this package.

You can make changes, add reports to views, modify view and report properties, or remove
views that you do not need. For more information, see General Tab (Setup Dialog Box -
Drawings by Rule) (on page 108). For example, you could modify the view properties of the
Hull Lines - Body Plans - Whole view:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 142

 Drawings by Rule

5. To change the query definition for individual view types or set a default query for all view
types, go to the Queries tab. For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box -
Drawings by Rule) (on page 115).
For example, you could leave the default query setting for All of the view types:

You could also change the query associated to each individual view as shown below with
the Hull Lines - Body Plan - Whole view type.

6. After setting the query filter, click Apply Filter to run the filter definition. The rest of the
dialog updates with additional definition information.

You can further define the view definition using the buttons at the bottom of the
Setup dialog box. For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by
Rule) (on page 115).
7. Click OK on the Setup dialog box to save your changes.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 143

 Drawings by Rule

8. To save this modified package for other drawing sets, right-click the package and select
Save Package.
Save a package (on page 77)
9. You can also create the drawings for the Drawings by Rule component by right-clicking the
component and selecting Create Drawings. This creates the drawings documents.
If you make changes to the model that impact the drawing content, the drawings will be out of
date and you will need to refresh or update them to update the drawing content. For more
information, see Updating Documents (on page 78).
If you need to create a customized Hull Lines drawing component, create a Drawings
by Rule component and define it as a Hull Lines drawing component. For more information, see
Drawings by Rule (on page 102). You can also create customized Hull Lines rule set view style
to use with your drawings. For more information, see Define View Style Command (Tools Menu)
in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Manufacturing Drawings
Manufacturing drawings are created using the Drawings by Rule functionality. Manufacturing
drawing types include the following:
 Profile Sketch - A drawing that shows a two dimensional wireframe representation of a
detailed profile that has manufacturing data applied such as margins, shrinkage, marking
lines, and beveling. You can also create a Multiple Profile Sketch drawing, a profile sketch
with multiple profiles per sheet.

The report for a profile sketch drawing indicates the board side of a symmetrical
profile.
 Pin Jig - A drawing that shows a manufacturing aid consisting of a height-adjustable
pedestal that supports a part such as a plate, assembly, or block.

 Template Set - A drawing that shows a group of templates prepared for a single plate to
check its curvature during and after the bending process.

You can also create customized manufacturing drawings using a Drawings by Rule component
and defining it with manufacturing drawing views that utilize a Manufacturing Drawing rule set
view style. For more information, see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 144

 Drawings by Rule

You can save each Manufacturing Drawing component as a package to be used or modified as
needed. For more information, see Manufacturing Drawings Common Tasks.

What do you want to do?

 Create a profile sketch drawing (on page 145)
 Create a multiple profile sketch drawing (on page 147)
 Create a pin jig drawing (on page 149)
 Create a template set drawing (on page 151)

Create a profile sketch drawing

The following procedure steps you through creating a profile sketch drawing. This procedure
shows how to create a profile sketch with one part per sheet. For information on creating a
profile sketch with multiple profiles per sheet, see Create a multiple profile sketch drawing (on
page 147).
1. In the Console, right-click the root level of the hierarchy and select New on the shortcut
menu. On the Add Component dialog box, select Folder and click OK.
You could also select an existing folder in the hierarchy and skip this step.
2. Right-click the folder and select New. On the Add Component dialog box, go to the
Manufacturing tab. Select a Profile Sketch drawing component. For example, select the
Mfg Profile Sketch component and click OK. The New Mfg Profile Sketch component is
added to the folder. This is the component you use to create your Profile Sketch drawings.
3. Right-click the new component and select Setup on the shortcut menu. The Setup dialog
box displays.
4. On the General tab, note the View Builder definition. For the delivered Mfg Profile Sketch
component, one View and one Report are already defined.

5. You can select a view or report and click Properties to display the View Definition
dialog box showing the current property settings for the view or report. Change the
properties as needed for the profile sketch drawings you are creating. For more information,
see General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108).
6. Go to the Queries tab to set up the query definition for the profile sketch drawings. The
query definition identifies the objects in the model that will be included in the drawing. For
more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 115).
7. In the Select view type dropdown, select the view type to which you want the query
associated. You can define separate queries per view type or you can use a default query
for multiple view types.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 145

 Drawings by Rule

Specify a filter to identify the objects used in the query. For a profile sketch drawing, you
want to select an assembly that contains the manufactured profiles you need for your
drawings. For example, the graphic below shows that the SeqAssy filter is being used for
the Mfg Profile Sketch view type.

Notice that the Collation Rule for the Mfg Profile Sketch setup is already set to
CollateToMany, which means that the drawings will have one part per view.

8. Click Apply Filter to run the filter definition. The rest of the dialog updates with
additional definition information.

You can further define the view definition using the buttons at the bottom of the
Setup dialog box. For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by
Rule) (on page 115).
9. Click OK on the Setup dialog box to save the view and query definitions.
10. If you need to edit the template associated with the drawing component, right click the
component and select Edit Template. The template associated with the component opens
in SmartSketch Drawing Editor so you can edit the layout and presentation for the drawings
you are creating. For more information, see Edit Template (Drawings by Rule) (on page
128).
11. After you complete setup of the Profile Sketch component, right-click the component and
select Create Drawings to create the drawing documents. The new documents display. The
red X icon indicates that the drawings are out-of-date (the current model information
needs to be updated in the drawing views).
12. Right-click the component again and select Update to update the drawing documents with
the information from the model. A dialog box shows the update progress.
13. When the process is complete, review the information in the dialog box for any problems
that may have occurred, then click OK to close the dialog box.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 146

 Drawings by Rule

14. Right-click the document and select Edit to open it in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

If you need to create a customized Manufacturing drawing component, create a

Drawings by Rule component and define it as a Manufacturing drawing component. For more
information, see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

Create a multiple profile sketch drawing

The following procedure steps you through creating a multiple profile sketch drawing. This
procedure shows how to create a profile sketch with multiple profiles per sheet. For information
on creating a profile sketch with one part per sheet, see Create a profile sketch drawing (on
page 145).
The example shown in this procedure demonstrates:
 More than one profile part is defined for the sketch
 The sketch contains variables defined in a report table
 The report table contains information specific to each profile
The profiles used in a multiple profile sketch drawing must follow certain criteria in
order to be shown on the same sketch. For example, they must have the same end cuts and
the same profile section type and size.
1. In the Console, right-click the root level of the hierarchy and select New on the shortcut
menu. On the Add Component dialog box, select Folder and click OK.
You could also select an existing folder in the hierarchy and skip this step.
2. Right-click the folder and select New. On the Add Component dialog box, go to the
Manufacturing tab. Select a Multiple Profile Sketch component. For example, you could
use the Mfg Profile Sketch (Multiple) component and click OK. The New Mfg Profile
Sketch (Multiple) component is added to the folder. This is the component you use to
create your Multiple Profile Sketch drawings.
3. Right-click the new component and select Setup on the shortcut menu. The Setup dialog
box displays.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 147

 Drawings by Rule

4. On the General tab, note the View Builder definition. For the delivered Mfg Profile Sketch
(Multiple) component, one View and one Report are already defined.

5. You can select a view or report and click Properties to display the View Definition
dialog box showing the current property settings for the view or report. Change the
properties as needed for the drawings you are creating. For more information, see General
Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108).
6. Go to the Queries tab to set up the query definition for the profile sketch drawings. The
query definition identifies the objects in the model that will be included in the drawing. For
more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 115).
7. In the Select view type dropdown, select the view type to which you want the query
associated. You can define separate queries per view type or you can use a default query
for multiple view types.
Specify a filter to identify the objects used in the query. For a profile sketch drawing, you
want to select an assembly that contains the manufactured profiles you need for your
drawings. For example, the graphic below shows that the SeqAssy filter is being used for
the Mfg Profile Sketch (Multiple) view type.

Notice that the Collation Rule for the Mfg Profile Sketch (Multiple) setup is already set to
CollateSimilarProfiles, which means that the drawings will have multiple profiles per view.

8. Click Apply Filter to run the filter definition. The rest of the dialog updates with
additional definition information.
You can further define the view definition using the buttons at the bottom of the
Setup dialog box. For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by
Rule) (on page 115).
9. Click OK on the Setup dialog box to save the view and query definitions.
10. If you need to edit the template associated with the drawing component, right click the
component and select Edit Template. The template associated with the component opens
in SmartSketch Drawing Editor so you can edit the layout and presentation for the drawings
you are creating. For more information, see Edit Template (Drawings by Rule) (on page
128).
11. After you complete setup of the Multiple Profile Sketch component, right-click the
component and select Create Drawings to create the drawing documents. The new
documents display. The red X icon indicates that the drawings are out-of-date (the
current model information needs to be updated in the drawing views).
12. Right-click the component again and select Update to update the drawing documents with
the information from the model. A dialog box shows the update progress.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 148

 Drawings by Rule

13. When the process is complete, review the information in the dialog box for any problems
that may have occurred, then click OK to close the dialog box.
14. Right-click the document and select Edit to open it in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

If you need to create a customized Manufacturing drawing component, create a

Drawings by Rule component and define it as a Manufacturing drawing component. For more
information, see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

Create a pin jig drawing

The following procedure steps you through creating a pin jig drawing. This procedure shows
how to use the delivered Mfg PinJig component to create a pin jig drawing with two views,
including a remarking view, and a pin height report.
1. In the Console, right-click the root level of the hierarchy and select New on the shortcut
menu. On the Add Component dialog box, select Folder and click OK.

You could also select an existing folder in the hierarchy and skip this step.
2. Right-click the folder and select New. On the Add Component dialog box, go to the
Manufacturing tab. Select a PinJig drawing component. For example, select the Mfg
PinJig component and click OK. The New Mfg PinJig component is added to the folder.
This is the component you use to create your PinJig drawings.
3. Right-click the new component and select Setup on the shortcut menu. The Setup dialog
box displays.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 149

 Drawings by Rule

4. On the General tab, note the View Builder definition. For the delivered Mfg PinJig
component, two Views and one Report are already defined.

5. You can select a view or report and click Properties to display the View Definition
dialog box showing the current property settings for the view or report. Change the
properties as needed for the PinJig drawings you are creating. For more information, see
General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108).
6. Go to the Queries tab to set up the query definition for the PinJig drawings. The query
definition identifies the objects in the model that will be included in the drawing. For more
information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 115).
7. In the Select view type dropdown, select the view type to which you want the query
associated. You can define separate queries per view type or you can use a default query
for multiple view types.
Specify a filter to identify the objects used in the query. For example, the graphic below
shows that the Pin Jigs filter is being used for the Mfg PinJig view type.

Notice that the Collation Rule for the Mfg PinJig setup is already set to CollateToMany,
which means that the drawings will have one part per view.
8. Click Apply Filter to run the filter definition. The rest of the dialog updates with
additional definition information.
You can further define the view definition using the buttons at the bottom of the
Setup dialog box. For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by
Rule) (on page 115).
9. Click OK on the Setup dialog box to save the view and query definitions.
10. If you need to edit the template associated with the drawing component, right click the
component and select Edit Template. The template associated with the component opens
in SmartSketch Drawing Editor so you can edit the layout and presentation for the drawings
you are creating. For more information, see Edit Template (Drawings by Rule) (on page
128).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 150

 Drawings by Rule

11. After you complete setup of the Mfg PinJig component, right-click the component and select
Create Drawings to create the drawing documents. The new documents display. The red X
icon indicates that the drawings are out-of-date (the current model information needs to
be updated in the drawing views).
12. Right-click the component again and select Update to update the drawing documents with
the information from the model. A dialog box shows the update progress.
13. When the process is complete, review the information in the dialog box for any problems
that may have occurred, then click OK to close the dialog box.
14. Right-click the document and select Edit to open it in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
If you need to create a customized Manufacturing drawing component, create a
Drawings by Rule component and define it as a Manufacturing drawing component. For more
information, see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

Create a template set drawing

The following procedure steps you through creating a template set drawing. This procedure
shows how to use the delivered Mfg Template Set component to create a Template Set drawing
with two views and a multi-row report.
1. In the Console, right-click the root level of the hierarchy and select New on the shortcut
menu. On the Add Component dialog box, select Folder and click OK.
You could also select an existing folder in the hierarchy and skip this step.
2. Right-click the folder and select New. On the Add Component dialog box, go to the
Manufacturing tab. Select a Template Set drawing component. For example, select the
Mfg Template Set component and click OK. The New Mfg Template Set component is
added to the folder. This is the component you use to create your template set drawings.
3. Right-click the new component and select Setup on the shortcut menu. The Setup dialog
box displays.
4. On the General tab, note the View Builder definition. For the delivered Mfg Template Set
component, two Views and one Report are already defined.

5. You can select a view or report and click Properties to display the View Definition
dialog box showing the current property settings for the view or report. Change the
properties as needed for the template set drawings you are creating. For more information,
see General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108).
6. Go to the Queries tab to set up the query definition for the template set drawings. The query
definition identifies the objects in the model that will be included in the drawing. For more
information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 115).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 151

 Drawings by Rule

7. In the Select view type dropdown, select the view type to which you want the query
associated. You can define separate queries per view type or you can use a default query
for multiple view types.
Specify a filter to identify the objects used in the query. For example, the graphic below
shows that the Template Sets filter is being used for the Mfg Template Set view type.

Notice that the Collation Rule for the Mfg Template Set setup is already set to
CollateToMany, which means that the drawings will have one part per view.

8. Click Apply Filter to run the filter definition. The rest of the dialog updates with
additional definition information.
You can further define the view definition using the buttons at the bottom of the
Setup dialog box. For more information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by
Rule) (on page 115).
9. Click OK on the Setup dialog box to save the view and query definitions.
10. If you need to edit the template associated with the drawing component, right click the
component and select Edit Template. The template associated with the component opens
in SmartSketch Drawing Editor so you can edit the layout and presentation for the drawings
you are creating. For more information, see Edit Template (Drawings by Rule) (on page
128).
11. After you complete setup of the Mfg Template Set component, right-click the component and
select Create Drawings to create the drawing documents. The new documents display. The
red X icon indicates that the drawings are out-of-date (the current model information
needs to be updated in the drawing views).
12. Right-click the component again and select Update to update the drawing documents with
the information from the model. A dialog box shows the update progress.
13. When the process is complete, review the information in the dialog box for any problems
that may have occurred, then click OK to close the dialog box.
14. Right-click the document and select Edit to open it in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
If you need to create a customized Manufacturing drawing component, create a
Drawings by Rule component and define it as a Manufacturing drawing component. For more
information, see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 152

 Drawings by Rule

Scantling Drawings
A scantling drawing is a 2D drawing that represents structural objects.

Objects are represented on the scantling drawing with a standard set of symbols. For example,
a profile stiffener is typically resymbolized by a line with an arrow at each end.

What do you want to do?

 Create automated major views for steel order scantling drawings (on page 154)
 Place a manual view by selecting parts (on page 155)
 Place a manual view by selecting a reference plane or offset (on page 157)
 Create a shell profile steel order scantling drawing (on page 158)
 Create weld symbol with double bevel and fillet (on page 161)
 Edit a scantling drawing (on page 162)
 Update a manual view (on page 163)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 153

 Drawings by Rule

Create automated major views for steel order scantling

drawings
The following procedure creates major views (decks, transverse bulkheads, and longitudinal
bulkheads) for a selected block or assembly, using a steel order component delivered with
Drawings by Rule. The component includes an asking filter allowing you to select the block or
assembly. The workflows are performed in the Drawings and Reports task or from Tools >
Drawing Console in other tasks.

Create a drawing component

1. To create a new folder, right-click the drawing root in the Management Console and select
New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
2. Select Folder on the General tab of the Add Component dialog box.
3. Click OK.
4. Right-click the folder, and select Rename. Give the folder the needed name.
5. Right-click the folder and select New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
6. Select the Ship Structure tab of the Add Component dialog box.

7. Select the Steel Order by Block or Assembly or the Steel Order by Block or
Assembly (Generic) package and click OK.
The Steel Order by Block or Assembly component displays in the Management
Console. This component contains views for each of the view types to be created: Decks -
Main Views, Longitudinals - Main Views, Transversals - Main Views, Shell Expansions
and Shell Profiles.
8. Right-click the component in the Management Console, and select Rename. Give the
component the needed name.

Set up and run queries (optional)

This procedure can be skipped if you are using the default settings for the
component. Perform these steps only when you need to change the queries in the component.
1. Right-click the component, and select Setup.
The Setup dialog box displays. For more information, see Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by
Rule Component) (on page 108). The View Builder hierarchy contains views for each of the
view types to be created.
2. Select the Queries tab in the Setup dialog box.
3. Select All in the Select View Type box.
4. An existing asking filter for the component displays in the Filter box. Select another value if
needed.
5. A collation rule name displays in the Select Collation Rule box. Select another value if
needed.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 154

 Drawings by Rule

6. Click Ask Filter Inputs .

The Filter Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.
7. Select the needed system, part, assembly object, or reference plane from the hierarchy:
 For a scantling drawing, select a structural part, structural system, or reference plane.
 For an assembly drawing, select an assembly, block, or assemblyblock.
 For a piping drawing, select a pipeline.
 For a pipe support drawing, select a pipeline, or individual hangers and supports.
To include child objects, select Include nested objects. Click OK.
8. Click Run Query .
9. Select a view in the Select View Type box.
Results for the view type display at the bottom of the Queries tab for Views, Queries, and
Values.
10. Each result for Views is a view based on the view styles in the component and the object
types defined in Values.
11. If the parts are not the expected results, select a different filter in the Filter box, click Ask
Filter Inputs to select new inputs, and again click Run Query .
12. Repeat for remaining views in the Select View Type box.
13. Click OK.

Create drawings
1. In the Management Console, right-click the component, and select Update.
Because you have not selected what is to be displayed on the drawings, the Filter
Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.
2. Select a block, assembly, or assemblyblock from the assembly hierarchy. To include child
blocks or assemblies, select Include nested objects. Click OK.
The Drawing Generation dialog box displays.
3. When the Generation Status field displays "Creating Documents Complete," click Exit.
One drawing for each selected assembly displays in the Detail View. The drawings are
up-to-date and is superimposed on each drawing icon.

 If a batch server is set up by your system administrator, batch update commands are
also available. For more information, see Batch Commands (on page 37).
 When a drawing are out-of-date, is superimposed on the drawing icon.

Place a manual view by selecting parts

The following workflow places a major view (such as the view for a deck, transverse bulkhead,
or longitudinal bulkhead) in Drawings by Rule by selecting detailed parts, systems, or leaf
systems. The workflows are performed in the Drawings and Reports task or from Tools >
Drawing Console in other tasks.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 155

 Drawings by Rule

In this workflow, you directly select detailed parts to associate with the view.
1. In Smart 3D, switch to a task other than Drawings and Reports, such as Molded Forms or
Structural Detailing.
2. Select Tools > Drawing Console.
The Drawing Console dialog box displays.
3. Right click a drawing document and select Edit.
SmartSketch Drawing Editor displays. In the Drawings View Explorer, a single sheet
displays as a child of the drawing document.
4. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, click the Place View command. Click and drag in the
drawing area to place a graphic view.
The Drawing View Properties dialog box displays.
5. On the View tab, select More for the Style property.
The Select View Style dialog box displays.
6. Navigate through the hierarchy to Ruleset Styles. Select an appropriate steel order ruleset
view style, such as Steel Order (Decks) or Steel Order (Generic), and click OK.
Additional properties display in the View tab of the Drawing View Properties dialog box.
7. On the View tab, type a value for Name.
8. On the View tab, select the needed values for Coordinate System, Scale Family, and
User Selected Scale.
9. On the View tab, select Scantlings for Plate / Profile as the Orientation Rule value.
10. Click OK.

In the Drawings View Explorer, the view displays as a child of the drawing sheet.
11. Select the graphic view in the drawing area and click Associate Objects to Views .
12. Select the 3D application window to make it the active window.
The Associate ribbon displays in the 3D window.
13. To associate parts, select 1. Structural Parts or Plane as the value for Query on the
Associate ribbon.
14. In the Workspace Explorer, select plates to associate to the view. Select detailed parts, light
(non-detailed) parts, systems, or leaf systems.
15. Click Finish on the Associate ribbon to complete the association to the drawing view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 156

 Drawings by Rule

In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, preview geometry of the selected plate parts displays.

16. Update the view. For more information, see Update a manual view (on page 163).

Place a manual view by selecting a reference plane or offset

In this workflow, you select a grid plane or an offset from a grid plane to associate parts with the
view and select a block, assembly block or assembly to clip the plane selected. You can use the
workflow to place a major view, such as the view for a deck, transverse bulkhead, or longitudinal
bulkhead.
1. In Smart 3D, switch to a task other than Drawings and Reports, such as Molded Forms or
Structural Detailing.
2. Select Tools > Drawing Console.
The Drawing Console dialog box displays.
3. Right click a drawing document and select Edit.
SmartSketch Drawing Editor displays. In the Drawings View Explorer, a single sheet
displays as a child of the drawing document.
4. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, click the Place View command. Click and drag in the
drawing area to place a graphic view.
The Drawing View Properties dialog box displays.
5. On the View tab, select More for the Style property.
The Select View Style dialog box displays.
6. Navigate through the hierarchy to Ruleset Styles. Select an appropriate steel order ruleset
view style, such as Steel Order (Reference Plane) or Steel Order - Reference Plane
(Generic), and click OK.
Additional properties display in the View tab of the Drawing View Properties dialog box.
7. On the View tab, type a value for Name.
8. On the View tab, select the needed values for Coordinate System, Scale Family, and
User Selected Scale.
9. On the View tab, select Scantlings for Plate / Profile as the Orientation Rule value.
10. Click OK.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 157

 Drawings by Rule

In the Drawings View Explorer, the view displays as a child of the drawing sheet.
11. Select the graphic view in the drawing area and click Associate Objects to Views .
12. Select the 3D application window to make it the active window.
The Associate ribbon displays in the 3D window.
13. To associate parts by grid plane, select 1. Structural Parts or Plane as the value for Query
on the Associate ribbon. In the Workspace Explorer, select a reference plane coincident
with the needed plate parts. For the example in this workflow, a transverse reference plane
is selected.
14. To associate parts by an offset from a grid plane, select 7. Offset (Optional) as the value
for Query on the Associate ribbon. In the Workspace Explorer, select a reference plane.
Type an offset value in Value on the Associate ribbon.
15. Select plate parts to associate to the view. For the example in this workflow, select plate
parts.
16. Select 2. Block, Volume or Assembly (Optional) as the value for Query on the Associate
ribbon.
17. In the Workspace Explorer, select the Assembly tab.
18. Select a block, assembly block or assembly that will define the extents of the plane that is
associated with the view being created.
19. Click Finish on the Associate ribbon to complete the association to the drawing view.
In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, preview geometry of the plate parts displays. Only parts
within the selected block or assembly and coincident with the selected reference plane are
associated with the view. The block boundaries are also displayed.

20. Update the view. For more information, see Update a manual view (on page 163).

Create a shell profile steel order scantling drawing

The following procedure creates a Steel Order (Shell Profiles) Scantling drawing for a
longitudinal shell profile specified by the component filter.
1. In the Drawing Console, right-click the root level of the hierarchy and select New on the
shortcut menu. On the Add Component dialog box, select Folder and click OK.

You could also select an existing folder in the hierarchy and skip this step.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 158

 Drawings by Rule

2. Right-click the folder and select New. On the Add Component dialog box, click the Ship
Structure tab. Select a Steel Order (Shell Profiles) Scantling drawing component. For
example, you could use the delivered Steel Order (Shell Profiles) component and click
OK. The New Steel Order (Shell Profiles) component is added to the folder. This is the
component you use to create your Scantling drawings.
3. Right-click the new component and select Setup on the shortcut menu.
The Setup dialog box displays.
4. On the General tab, note the View Builder definition. For the delivered Steel Order (Shell
Profiles) component, one View is already defined.

 Add views and reports as needed to define the contents of your drawings.
 Select a view or report and click Properties to display the View Definition dialog
box showing the current property settings for the view or report. Change the properties
as needed for the shell expansion drawings you are creating. For more information, see
General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 108).
5. Click the Queries tab to set up the query definition for the scantling drawings. The query
definition identifies the objects in the model that will be included in the drawing. For more
information, see Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 115).
6. In the Select View Type dropdown, select All.
7. The asking filter Steel Filter by Block or Assembly is selected in the Filter field. Select
another value if needed.
8. CollateForSteelOrder.collate is selected in the Select Collation Rule field. Select another
value if needed.
9. Click Ask Filter Inputs.
The Filter Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.
For more information about asking filters, see Select Filter Dialog Box.
10. Select a block, assembly, or assemblyblock from the assembly hierarchy and click OK.
11. Click Run Query.
12. Click OK on the Setup dialog box to save the view and query definitions.
13. Select Steel Order (Shell Profiles) in the Select View Type field.
Results for the view type display at the bottom of the Queries tab for Views, Queries, and
Values. Each result for Views is a view with single part or collation of parts as shown in
Values.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 159

 Drawings by Rule

14. The Steel Order (Shell Profiles) package includes a default drawing template. To modify this
template, right-click the component and select Edit Template.
SmartSketch Drawing Editor opens with the blank drawing template displayed.
You use SmartSketch Drawing Editor to define document, sheet, and region properties
before generating the drawing. For additional information on commands available in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
15. After you complete setup of the Steel Order (Shell Profiles) Scantling component, right-click
the component and select Create Drawings. The new documents display.

The red X icon displays, indicating that the drawings are out-of-date (the current model
information needs to be updated in the drawing views).
16. Right-click the component again and select Update to update the drawing documents with
the information from the model.
A dialog box shows the update progress.
17. When the process is complete, review the information in the dialog box for any problems
that may have occurred, then click Exit to close the dialog box.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 160

 Drawings by Rule

18. Right-click the document and select Edit to open SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

If you need to create a customized Scantling drawing component, create a

Drawings by Rule component and define it as a Scantling drawing component. For more
information, see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

Create weld symbol with double bevel and fillet

The following procedure creates a weld symbol that contains double bevels and fillets for use in
drawings-by-rule drawing.
1. In the Structural Detailing task, select a physical connection that you want to label. You can
select Physical Connections in the Locate Filter field to restrict the Select tool to
only physical connections.
2. Click Properties .
The StructPhysicalConnection Properties dialog box displays.
3. On the Parameters tab, clear the Rule-Based options.
4. On the General tab, select the Welding category.
5. Modify the values for double bevel and fillet properties as necessary.
6. Click OK.
The StructPhysicalConnection Properties dialog box closes.
7. Create or update a drawing that contains the physical connections that you modified. For
more information on creating rule set drawings, see Drawings by Rule (on page 102).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 161

 Drawings by Rule

Below is an example of the label that is created for the double bevel and fillet.

If you manually move the label to the other side of the weld, the label flips to
properly indicate the weld information.

Edit a scantling drawing

1. Right-click a drawing document and select Edit.
The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. To add an existing view that is not assigned to a drawing, see Place an Unassigned View
(on page 408).
3. To add a section view, see Place a Section View (on page 355).
4. To add a detail view, see Place a Detail View (on page 359).
5. To manually add a drawing view, see Create a Drawing View in Create a new composed
drawing (on page 205).
6. To delete a view that is assigned to the drawing, right-click the view In the Drawing View
Explorer and select Delete.
Select UnAssigned to move the view to the Unassigned Folder, or select Delete to delete
the view permanently.
If you delete a view that is a parent of other views, such as a detail or
section view, the Convert or Delete dialog box displays. Select Convert to independent
drawing view(s) to save the child view as an independent drawing view, or select Delete to
delete the child view.
7. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, click File > Save.
8. Click File > Exit.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 162

 Drawings by Rule

The SmartSketch Drawing Editor window closes.

 Before a view has been updated for the first time, it contains preview geometry in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For example:

 When a view is up-to-date, the view icon looks like this in the Drawing View Explorer: .

 When a view is out-of-date, the view icon looks like this in the Drawing View Explorer: .
To update an out-of-date drawing, right-click the drawing and select Update.
 When a view is unassigned and in the Unassigned Folder of Drawing View Explorer, the
view icon looks like this: .
 All views in the Unassigned Folder are available for placement on documents created with
the Add Document command. For more information, see New (on page 37).

Update a manual view

1. Right-click the out-of-date view in the Drawings View Explorer and select Update.
2. After the view updates, the view frame in the graphics area shows all geometry defined by
the component view style. The view is up-to-date in the Drawing View Explorer.

 You can delete a manual view permanently, or select UnAssign to move the view in the
UnAssigned Folder. If you delete a view that is a parent of other views, such as a detail or

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 163

 Drawings by Rule

section view, the Convert or Delete dialog box displays. Select Convert to independent
drawing view(s) to save the child view as an independent drawing view, or select Delete to
delete the child view.
 A sheet cannot be deleted unless all views on the sheet are removed first.
 All views within the drawing must be up-to-date or the drawing status will be out-of-date.
For information on the 2D commands available for editing, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.

Filter Properties Dialog Box

Builds a filter or displays the properties of an existing filter. You access this dialog box from the
Select Filter dialog box, which is available as follows:
 File > Define Workspace - Filter option, or Properties button, if a filter is selected.
 Tools > Select by Filter.
This dialog box is entitled New Filter Properties or simply Filter Properties, depending on
whether you are creating a new filter or modifying an existing filter. Its behavior is the same.
The dialog box tabs let you pick the appropriate criteria for the filter. For example, the System,
Assembly, or Named Space tabs on the Filter Properties dialog box provide for extensive
searches, while the Properties, Volume, Permission Group, and Object Type tabs assist with
more restrictive searches. The Configuration tab specifies the permission group assignment of
the filter. The Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) tab identifies objects in the selected WBS for
the filter. For example, you can select projects, contracts, or documents from the WBS.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. If a Name Rule is specified, then the software uses that
rule to determine this name. If the Name Rule value is User Defined, then you must type a
name in this box.
Asking Filter - user of filter will supply value
Creates an asking filter. An asking filter prompts you for specific values for certain
properties.
Include nested objects
Specifies whether you want your search to include all objects under a selected node. For
example, when you check this box and then select an object, the software selects all
sub-objects under that object. If you do not check this box, you can select objects
separately. This option is unavailable for certain tabs on this dialog box.
Lock CTRL key
This option changes the selection mode and allows you to select multiple items across filter
tabs without holding down the CTRL key.
Clear All
Removes the object definition. Click Clear All if you want to start over and redefine the
search criteria.

 When the New dialog box displays, the default is always the last-selected option.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 164

 Drawings by Rule

 When you double-click a filter on the Select Filter dialog box, the software applies the filter
and dismisses the dialog box.

Topics
System Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ................................... 165
Assembly Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ............................... 166
Named Space Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ........................ 166
Analysis Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box).................................. 167
Work Breakdown Structure Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ..... 167
Permission Group Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ................... 168
Object Type Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ............................ 168
Volume Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ................................... 169
Properties Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ............................... 170
Reference Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) .............................. 171
Reference 3D Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ......................... 171
Point Cloud (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ................................... 171
Configuration Tab ....................................................................... 172

System Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a tree view list of all the available systems you can include in your filter search criteria.
A Model is the highest system in the hierarchy and includes all subsystems. Systems can span
disciplines and include many types of objects.

You can select the Include nested objects option to specify that you want your search criteria
to include all objects within a system. For example, if you select this option, the software selects
all children objects when you select a parent system. If you do not select this option, you select
only the systems. You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple objects on this
tab.
Nodes with more than 1,000 children display in bold type rather than auto-expanding if some of
their children are selected in the filter properties. The selected child nodes highlight when you
expand the parent node.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 165

 Drawings by Rule

Assembly Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a tree view list of all the available assemblies you can include in your filter search
criteria.

You can select the Include nested objects option to specify that you want your search criteria
to include all objects within a category. For example, if you select this option, the software
selects all objects when you select a category. If you do not select this option, you select the
assembly objects separately. You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple
objects on this tab.
The Include nested assemblies only option includes all nested assemblies, assembly blocks,
blocks, spools, and penetration spools under the selected assemblies, but not the parts.

 The Include nested assemblies only option explicitly includes the assemblies and
assembly parents that you are working on so that the Refresh Workspace command
updates the assembly information without including all of the parts nested under the selected
assemblies, such as plate parts, that are not of interest.
 You can only select one of the Include nested objects and Include nested assemblies
only options. You can clear both options.

Named Space Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a list of all the named spaces and drawing volumes you can include in your search.

Named spaces are regions in the model, like fire or blast zones. Filtering on named spaces is
useful particularly when you work in the Space Management task and need to see the size,

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 166

 Drawings by Rule

shape, and position of the named spaces that already exist. Drawing volumes are used in the
Drawings and Reports task in the drawing creation process.
You can select the Include nested objects option to specify that you want your search criteria
to include all objects within a category. For example, if you select this option, the software
selects all objects when you select a category. If you do not select this option, you select the
category and individual objects separately. You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to
select multiple objects on this tab.

Analysis Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a list of all the structural analysis models you can include in your search.

Analysis models are associated with the Structural Analysis task in the software. An analysis
model is a non-graphical and logical grouping of member systems that can be sent to a
third-party analysis and design solver package.
You can select the Include nested objects option to specify that you want your search criteria
to include all objects within a category. For example, if you select this option, the software
selects all objects when you select a category. If you do not select this option, you select the
category and individual objects separately. You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to
select multiple objects on this tab.

Work Breakdown Structure Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Browses a tree view of the model work breakdown structure to include WBS entities only if the
Work Breakdown Structure tab is used, or restrict the filters to objects assigned to the
selected WBS, if other tabs are used.

A simple filter shows only objects assigned to the selected WBS items and the WBS
items themselves. To see WBS objects on the Workspace Explorer tab, you must create a
compound filter. If you define a filter that contains only one WBS project, this filter returns the
WBS project selected on the WBS tab of the Workspace Explorer and any objects assigned to
that particular WBS project on the Systems tab in the Workspace Explorer. To see all WBS

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 167

 Drawings by Rule

objects on the WBS tab in the Workspace Explorer, you must create a compound filter. For
example, you might create a filter that contains All Systems or WBS Objects. This filter would
return all objects on the Systems tab and all WBS objects.
The WBS is the breakdown of the Model by the construction work to be performed. The
breakdown can consist of the Model at the top level, as well as projects, contracts, and
documents. You can modify a property for an object to associate it to a project. You can
associate published documents to a contract and then reassign the document from one contract
to another. Objects are associated to a document.
You can select the Include nested objects option to specify that you want your search criteria
to include all objects within a category. For example, if you select this option, the software
selects all objects when you select a category. If you do not select this option, you select the
category and individual objects separately. You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to
select multiple objects on this tab.

Permission Group Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Displays a tree view list of all the permission groups that you can select for your search. The
filter selects objects that belong to the groups that you highlight. If you do not highlight any
groups, the filter includes all groups in the list.

You can add permission groups in the Project Management task.

Object Type Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides options for you to select specific object types to restrict your filter. The objects are
organized by discipline.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 168

 Drawings by Rule

This tab provides a list of all the major object types you can include in your search. The filter
selects the objects you highlight. If you do not select any objects, the filter includes all objects in
the list. To include one or more object types in your filter, press CTRL and click the name of
each object type that you want to include.

Volume Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

This tab restricts filter selection to objects within the selected volume and provides two options
for defining the volume search method: Named spaces or Planes. The tree view displays the
Named Spaces hierarchy or the coordinate system hierarchy depending on the option that you
select.

Define by
Named spaces
Displays a tree view of the space hierarchy from which you can choose one or more spaces
to include in your search. This option is useful for filtering all objects located within specific
spaces. In addition to selecting all the objects inside the specified named spaces, the
software retrieves the space itself. You do not need to select the object on the Named
Space tab as well. To select a particular named space, press CTRL and click as many
spaces as you want to include in your search. If you do not select any named spaces, the
filter includes all objects in all named spaces.
Planes
Displays a tree view of the reference coordinate system hierarchy in the window, and a
group of first and second position coordinate boxes at the bottom. The coordinate system
hierarchy is a list of predefined coordinate systems for the model, each having a different
origin point. For example, one coordinate system might have an origin point at the corner of
a boiler room, another at the center of the building, and so forth.
When you select one of these coordinate systems, the software displays a list of coordinate
planes for that system. By selecting a plane and specifying the first and second positions
along that plane, your filter selects all objects that fall between the two positions on that
plane. The positions automatically appear in the first and second position boxes at the
bottom of the dialog box. This option is useful when you want to select objects that are all on
a specific level or plane. You can hold CTRL to select the first and second positions in the
tree view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 169

 Drawings by Rule

Coordinate system
Specifies a coordinate system. You can define coordinate systems in the Grids task.
1st Position (N, E, EL) or (Y, X, n)
Displays the names of the planes that you select to define the first position of the volume.
2nd Position (N, E, EL) or (Y, X, n)
Displays the names of the planes that you select to define the second position of the
volume.

Properties Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides options for selecting object properties that you can use to restrict your search.

Filter Method
You can combine multiple properties on individual rows.
Match All
Returns only those objects matching all of the properties listed in the grid. This method is
the same as using the Boolean operator AND.
Match Any
Returns objects matching any property listed in the grid. This method is the same as using
the Boolean operator OR.
Property
Lists the properties of objects in the data model in the Select Properties dialog box. To
select properties and set their data type, select More in the field drop-down.
Operator
Select an operator such as <> (not equal) or = (equal).
If you use a wildcard character (*), you must use the Contains comparison
operator. For example, pumps P-1000A and P-1000B exist in the model. To query for the
pumps using properties, select Match All and type Name Contains P*.
Value
Specifies the value of the property.
Ask
Creates an Asking Filter that allows you to specify a value for the property when you run
the filter. The Ask column is so named because the software asks or prompts you to type a
value. An administrator or other user with the required permissions establishes the asking

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 170

 Drawings by Rule

filter and defines a default value. While defining a workspace, you can type a different value
for the property. This is not a valid option for Model Data Reuse.
Remove
Removes the selected property from the grid.

Reference Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a tree view list of the available reference files you can include in your search.

You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple objects on this tab.

 To view this tab, you must first insert a file using the Insert > File command.
 When you copy a filter that contains Reference tab information into the Catalog or into a
different Model database, the software removes the Reference tab information. Because of
this, you cannot create a compound filter that uses Reference tab information. Filters that
use Reference tab information are hidden from the tree view on the Compound Filter
dialog box. The compound filter ignores any Reference tab information.

Reference 3D Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a list of all the Reference 3D models you can include in your search.

You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple objects on this tab.

When you copy a filter that contains Reference 3D tab information into the Catalog or
into a different Model database, the software removes the Reference 3D tab information.

Point Cloud (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a list of all the registered point cloud vendors. You can reference only one point cloud
object in your search. You cannot select the parent node to filter the search.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 171

 Drawings by Rule

To select point cloud objects for filters, you must install the point cloud vendor
software and associate a point cloud model reference with the Model in the Smart 3D Project
Management task.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Plant
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
The Transfer option does not apply to the filters and surface style rules.
Approval State
Specifies the current status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your
access level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by
the ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.
Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date when the object was last modified.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 172

 Drawings by Rule

Shell Expansion Drawings

Shell expansion drawings are girth expansions (in the transverse direction) of the hull plate
system. The hull plate system is created with the Imported Plate System command in the
Molded Forms task.
Two types of shell expansion are available:
1. Full port and starboard expansions. For more information, see Create a shell expansion
drawing (on page 173).

2. Partial expansions, for hull plates that are part of blocks or assemblies. For more
information, see Create automated major views for steel order scantling drawings (on page
154).

Create a shell expansion drawing

The following procedure steps you through creating shell expansion drawings, using the Shell
Expansion component delivered with Drawings by Rule. The component creates two drawings:
one for the port expansion and one for the starboard expansion. The steps can be performed in
the Drawings and Reports task or from Tools > Drawing Console in other tasks.

Create a Drawing Component

1. To create a new folder, right-click the drawing root in the Management Console and select
New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
2. Select Folder on the General tab of the Add Component dialog box.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 173

 Drawings by Rule

3. Click OK.
4. Right-click the folder, and select Rename. Give the folder the needed name.
5. Right-click the folder and select New.... The Add Component dialog box displays.
6. Select the Ship Structure tab of the Add Component dialog box.
7. Select the Shell Expansion package and click OK. The Shell Expansion component
displays in the console.
8. If needed, right-click the component and select Rename. Give the component the needed
name.

Set Up the Drawing Component

1. Right-click the component and select Setup.... The Setup dialog box displays. For more
information, see Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Rule Component) (on page 108). The View
Builder hierarchy contains views for the view types to be created: PORT and
STARBOARD.
2. Select the PORT view and click Properties .
3. In the View Definition dialog box, select the needed Coordinate System.
4. Click OK.
5. Repeat for the STARBOARD view.
6. Select the Queries tab in the Setup dialog box.
7. Select All in the Select View Type field. The filter Root Hull Plate Systems is selected in
the Filter field.
8. Click Run Query .
9. Select PORT in the Select View Type field. Results for the view type display at the bottom
of the Queries tab.
10. Repeat for STARBOARD in the Select View Type field.
11. Click OK.

Create Drawings
1. In the Management Console or the Drawing Console, right-click the component and select
Create Drawing(s). The Drawing Generation dialog box displays.
2. When the Generation Status field displays "Creating Documents Complete," click Exit. Port
shell expansion and starboard shell expansion drawings are created. The drawings are
out-of-date and a red X icon is superimposed on each drawing icon.
3. To update all drawings, right-click the component in the Management Console and select
Update. To update individual drawings, right-click drawings and select Update. When a
drawing is up-to-date, a green check icon is superimposed on the drawing icon.
See Also
Shell Expansion Drawings (on page 173)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 174

 Drawings by Rule

Offshore Drawings
An offshore drawing is a 2D drawing that represents structural and outfitting objects found in an
offshore model.

Create a member part drawing

The following procedure creates member part drawings for a selected block or assembly using a
drawing-by-query to select the block or assembly. The workflow is performed in the Drawings
and Reports task or from Tools > Drawing Console in other tasks.

Create a drawing component

1. To create a new folder, right-click the drawing root in the Management Console and select
New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
2. Select Folder on the General tab of the Add Component dialog box.
3. Click OK.
4. Right-click the folder, and select Rename. Give the folder the needed name.
5. Right-click the folder and select New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
6. Select the Offshore tab of the Add Component dialog box.

7. Select the Member Parts or the Member Parts (Generic) package, and then click
OK.
The Member Part component displays in the Management Console. This component
contains the views to be created: Looking +Y and Looking -Z.
8. Right-click the component in the Management Console, and select Rename. Give the
component the needed name.

Set up and run queries (optional)

This procedure can be skipped if you are using the default settings for the
component. Perform these steps only when you need to change the queries in the component.
1. Right-click the component, and select Setup.
The Setup dialog box displays. For more information, see Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by
Rule Component) (on page 108). The View Builder hierarchy contains views for each of the
view types to be created.
2. Select the Queries tab in the Setup dialog box.
3. Select All in the Select View Type box.
4. An existing asking filter for the component displays in the Filter box. Select another value if
needed.
5. A collation rule name displays in the Select Collation Rule box. Select another value if
needed.
6. Click Ask Filter Inputs .

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 175

 Drawings by Rule

The Filter Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.

7. Select the needed system, part, assembly object, or reference plane from the hierarchy:
 For a scantling drawing, select a structural part, structural system, or reference plane.
 For an assembly drawing, select an assembly, block, or assemblyblock.
 For a piping drawing, select a pipeline.
 For a pipe support drawing, select a pipeline, or individual hangers and supports.
To include child objects, select Include nested objects. Click OK.
8. Click Run Query .
9. Select a view in the Select View Type box.
Results for the view type display at the bottom of the Queries tab for Views, Queries, and
Values.
10. Each result for Views is a view based on the view styles in the component and the object
types defined in Values.
11. If the parts are not the expected results, select a different filter in the Filter box, click Ask
Filter Inputs to select new inputs, and again click Run Query .
12. Repeat for remaining views in the Select View Type box.
13. Click OK.

Create drawings
1. In the Management Console, right-click the component, and select Update.
Because you have not selected what is to be displayed on the drawings, the Filter
Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.
2. From the assembly hierarchy, select one or more blocks, assemblies, or assembly blocks.
The Drawing Generation dialog box displays.
3. When the Generation Status field displays "Creating Documents Complete," click Exit.
One drawing for each selected member part displays in the Detail View. The drawings are
up-to-date and is superimposed on each drawing icon.
4. Open a drawing.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 176

 Drawings by Rule

All member part views display on the same sheet, as shown in the example below.

 If a batch server is set up by your system administrator, batch update commands are
also available. For more information, see Batch Commands (on page 37).
 When a drawing are out-of-date, is superimposed on the drawing icon.

Create a pipe support drawing

The following procedure creates pipe support drawings for a selected pipeline using a generic
drawing-by-rule pipe support component. The workflow is performed in the Drawings and
Reports task or from Tools > Drawing Console in other tasks.

Create a drawing component

1. To create a new folder, right-click the drawing root in the Management Console and select
New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
2. Select Folder on the General tab of the Add Component dialog box.
3. Click OK.
4. Right-click the folder, and select Rename. Give the folder the needed name.
5. Right-click the folder, and select New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
6. Select the Offshore tab of the Add Component dialog box.
7. Select the Pipe Support (Generic) package, and click OK.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 177

 Drawings by Rule

The Pipe Support component displays in the Management Console. This component
contains the views to be created.
8. Right-click the component in the Management Console, and select Rename. Give the
component the needed name.

Set up and run queries (optional)

This procedure can be skipped if you are using the default settings for the
component. Perform these steps only when you need to change the queries in the component.
1. Right-click the component, and select Setup.
The Setup dialog box displays. For more information, see Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by
Rule Component) (on page 108). The View Builder hierarchy contains views for each of the
view types to be created.
2. Select the Queries tab in the Setup dialog box.
3. Select All in the Select View Type box.
4. An existing asking filter for the component displays in the Filter box. Select another value if
needed.
5. A collation rule name displays in the Select Collation Rule box. Select another value if
needed.
6. Click Ask Filter Inputs .
The Filter Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.
7. Select the needed system, part, assembly object, or reference plane from the hierarchy:
 For a scantling drawing, select a structural part, structural system, or reference plane.
 For an assembly drawing, select an assembly, block, or assemblyblock.
 For a piping drawing, select a pipeline.
 For a pipe support drawing, select a pipeline, or individual hangers and supports.
To include child objects, select Include nested objects. Click OK.
8. Click Run Query .
9. Select a view in the Select View Type box.
Results for the view type display at the bottom of the Queries tab for Views, Queries, and
Values.
10. Each result for Views is a view based on the view styles in the component and the object
types defined in Values.
11. If the parts are not the expected results, select a different filter in the Filter box, click Ask
Filter Inputs to select new inputs, and again click Run Query .
12. Repeat for remaining views in the Select View Type box.
13. Click OK.

Create drawings
1. In the Management Console, right-click the component and select Update.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 178

 Drawings by Rule

Because you have not selected what is to be displayed on the drawings, the Filter
Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.
2. From the system hierarchy, select a pipeline or a system containing one or more pipe
hangers or supports. Select Include nested objects to step through the hierarchy and
include child hangers and supports. Click OK.
The Drawing Generation dialog box displays.
3. When the Generation Status field displays "Creating Documents Complete," click Exit.
One drawing for each selected assembly displays in the Detail View. The drawings are
up-to-date and is superimposed on each drawing icon.
4. Open a drawing.
All pipe support view display on the same sheet, as shown in the example below.

 If a batch server is set up by your system administrator, batch update commands are also
available. For more information, see Batch Commands (on page 37).
 To update individual drawings, right-click each drawing, and select Update.

 When a drawing are out-of-date, is superimposed on the drawing icon.

Create a piping drawing

The following procedure creates isometric, plan, and elevation views for a pipeline containing
one or more pipe runs, using a generic drawing-by-rule piping component. The workflow is
performed in the Drawings and Reports task or from Tools > Drawing Console in other tasks.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 179

 Drawings by Rule

Create a drawing component

1. To create a new folder, right-click the drawing root in the Management Console and select
New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
2. Select Folder on the General tab of the Add Component dialog box.
3. Click OK.
4. Right-click the folder, and select Rename. Give the folder the needed name.
5. Right-click the folder, and select New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
6. Select the Offshore tab of the Add Component dialog box.
7. Select the Piping (Generic) package, and click OK.
The Piping component displays in the Management Console. This component contains the
views to be created.
8. Right-click the component in the Management Console, and select Rename. Give the
component the needed name.

Set up and run queries (optional)

This procedure can be skipped if you are using the default settings for the
component. Perform these steps only when you need to change the queries in the component.
1. Right-click the component, and select Setup.
The Setup dialog box displays. For more information, see Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by
Rule Component) (on page 108). The View Builder hierarchy contains views for each of the
view types to be created.
2. Select the Queries tab in the Setup dialog box.
3. Select All in the Select View Type box.
4. An existing asking filter for the component displays in the Filter box. Select another value if
needed.
5. A collation rule name displays in the Select Collation Rule box. Select another value if
needed.
6. Click Ask Filter Inputs .
The Filter Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.
7. Select the needed system, part, assembly object, or reference plane from the hierarchy:
 For a scantling drawing, select a structural part, structural system, or reference plane.
 For an assembly drawing, select an assembly, block, or assemblyblock.
 For a piping drawing, select a pipeline.
 For a pipe support drawing, select a pipeline, or individual hangers and supports.
To include child objects, select Include nested objects. Click OK.
8. Click Run Query .

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 180

 Drawings by Rule

9. Select a view in the Select View Type box.

Results for the view type display at the bottom of the Queries tab for Views, Queries, and
Values.
10. Each result for Views is a view based on the view styles in the component and the object
types defined in Values.
11. If the parts are not the expected results, select a different filter in the Filter box, click Ask
Filter Inputs to select new inputs, and again click Run Query .
12. Repeat for remaining views in the Select View Type box.
13. Click OK.

Create drawings
1. In the Management Console, right-click the component, and select Update.
Because you have not selected what is to be displayed on the drawings, the Filter
Properties for Asking Filter dialog box displays.
2. From the system hierarchy, select a pipeline system containing one or more pipe runs. Click
OK.
The gathering rule steps through the hierarchy and automatically include child
pipe runs, parts, and components.
The Drawing Generation dialog box displays.
3. When the Generation Status field displays "Creating Documents Complete," click Exit.
One drawing for each selected assembly displays in the Detail View. The drawings are
up-to-date and is superimposed on each drawing icon.
4. Open a drawing.
All piping views display on the same sheet, as shown in the example below.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 181

 Drawings by Rule

 If a batch server is set up by your system administrator, batch update commands are also
available. For more information, see Batch Commands (on page 37).
 To update individual drawings, right-click each drawing, and select Update.

 When a drawing is out-of-date, is superimposed on the drawing icon.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 182

SECTION 9
3D Model by Query
You can create a 3D Model by Query component and base it on a specific filter that
determines what objects to document. You can use the 3D Model by Query component to output
CAD (SAT) files. The software uses a filter-based query to collect the objects and document
them automatically.

Output as Neutral CAD (SAT) Graphics File

You can setup the 3D Model by Query component to output your model objects to a neutral
CAD (.sat) file format. Right-click the 3D Model by Query component and select Setup to set the
filter and navigation rule.

Project Supervisor Setup

Your project supervisor should set up appropriate filters that define the objects to include in the
component documents when they are created.

3D Model by Query Component Common Tasks

The following tasks are used to set up a 3D Model by Query component and configure it for
exporting CAD (SAT) files.

Define Your Workspace

The defined workspace does not need to include objects being manipulated for export.

Set Up a 3D Model by Query Component

You can create and set up a 3D Model by Query component to create neutral CAD (SAT)
graphics files.

Save the 3D Model by Query Component as a Package

Save the 3D Model by Query component as a package so you can join it with a Drawings by
Query Manager to generate the query drawings. For more information, see Save a package (on
page 77).

Add a Drawings by Query Manager

Create the Drawings by Query Manager, then set it up to specify the "where" portion of the
query for the Orthographic, Isogen Isometric Drawing, and 3D Model by Query components. For
more information, see Set up a Drawings by Query Manager component (on page 186).

Run the Query

Execute the query specified by the 3D Model by Query component and the Query Manager. For
more information, see Run Query (Shortcut Menu) (on page 70).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 183

 3D Model by Query

Setup (3D Model by Query Component)

Sets options for a 3D Model by Query component. This command is available on the shortcut
menu on a 3D Model by Query component.
Setup Dialog Box (3D Model by Query Component) (on page 185)
With this command, you specify a filter that identifies what objects you want collected by the 3D
Model by Query component.
(SAT) - The CAD export function supports the following:
 Grouping - Selects an equipment object as one object without separately selecting each
equipment primitive. Grouping is done on a per object basis.
 Color information and transparency values - Retrieves color information and transparency
values from the styles and applies them to the SAT file. If no style is selected, the default 3D
object style is used. If there is no style associated with an object, green is used.
You do not need to define the workspace or verify that the workspace contains all of the objects
required by the 3D Model by Query filter subset.

Set up a 3D Model By Query component

The 3D Model By Query component is used to export model graphics to neutral CAD (.sat) files.
Before creating a 3D Model By Query component, you should create filters that specify what
objects are collected for your output file.
1. Right-click a folder in the Console.
To add a folder, right-click the root or another folder.
2. On the shortcut menu, select New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
3. Select the 3D Model By Query component on the Add Component dialog box, and click
OK.
4. Right-click the new 3D Model by Query component, and select Setup.
5. Specify a filter to identify what model data to include when the data is exported. Select More
to display the Select Filter dialog box, or click Properties to display the current filter
properties.
6. Select a navigation rule from the Navigation Rule drop-down list to include child elements
in the document. This is an optional step. For more information on navigation rules, see the
Navigator Rules section in Orthographic Drawings by Query (on page 213).
7. Click OK to save the component settings.
To use the component to generate output files, you need to save it as a package and associate
it to a Drawings by Query Manager. For more information, see Set up a Drawings by Query
Manager component (on page 186).

 To delete a component, right-click it and select Delete.

 To rename a component, right-click it and select Rename.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 184

 3D Model by Query

See Also
Setup (3D Model by Query Component) (on page 184)

Setup Dialog Box (3D Model by Query Component)

Sets options for the 3D Model by Query component. You access this dialog box when you
right-click a 3D Model by Query component and select Setup on the shortcut menu.
Filter - Identifies the filter that defines what objects to include in the query. The filter needs to be
specific to the objects that you want to export. The software uses the filter to determine the
objects included in the drawings when they are generated. Select More in the Filter dropdown
list to display the Select Filter dialog box. Click Properties to display the Filter Properties
dialog box. For more information on the Select Filter dialog box, see Select Filter Dialog Box
(on page 122).

 You do not need to define the workspace to contain all of the objects required by the 3D
Model by Query filter subset.
 For more information on query filters, see Drawings by Query Filters (on page 216).
Navigation Rule
Specifies the navigation rule to use to include child elements in the document. This is an
optional setting. For more information on navigation rules, see the Navigator Rules section
in Orthographic Drawings by Query (on page 213).
Output File Type
Specifies the output file type.
See Also
Setup (3D Model by Query Component) (on page 184)

Setup (Drawings By Query Manager Component)

Sets options for creating a Drawings by Query Manager component for use with a 3D Model by
Query package. This command is available on the right-click shortcut menu for Drawings by
Query Manager components.
The Drawings by Query Manager component is used in conjunction with other components,
such as the 3D Model by Query, Orthographic Drawing by Query, and Isogen Isometric Drawing
by Query components, to complete the query for objects in the model. The Drawings by Query
Manager provides the filter that specifies the "where" side of the query. It tells the query "where"
to look for the objects specified by the component "what" filter.
When using the Drawings by Query Manager component in conjunction with a 3D Model by
Query package, additional options for output files are available that allow you to save files to
disk.
Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Query Manager Component) (on page 187)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 185

 3D Model by Query

Set up a Drawings by Query Manager component

The Drawings by Query Manager component works in conjunction with the Orthographic
Drawing by Query, Isogen Isometric Drawing by Query, and 3D Model by Query components.
Before using this command, you must create packages for your 3D Model by Query component.
For more information, see Save Package Command (on page 76).
1. Right-click the folder where you want to create your Drawings by Query Manager.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
You can store the Drawings by Query Manager anywhere in the Console, but it is
best to store it in the same location as the components with which it works.
2. Select the Drawings by Query Manager component, and then click OK.
The Drawings by Query Manager component is created in the folder.
3. Right-click the Drawings by Query Manager component and select Setup to specify the
properties for the component.
The Setup dialog box displays.
4. Specify a filter in the Filter field. The drop-down shows the most recently selected filters.
Select More in the drop-down list to display the Select Filter dialog box and specify a filter.
Click Properties to display the current filter properties.

The filter you select is the "where" portion of the query, as opposed to the "what"
portion specified when you setup the 3D Model by Query component. The filter you specify
here tells where in the model you want to look for the objects. For more information on filters
for Drawings by Query, see Drawings by Query Filters (on page 216).
5. In the Package field, specify the 3D Model by Query package you created. The drop-down
contains the most recently selected packages. Select More to display the Select Package
dialog box.
6. Define a path to save the exported files in the Path to save field. You can type in an existing
folder path, or click the browse button to browse to or create a new folder.
7. Click OK to save the settings.
To create the drawings, you need to run the query. For more information, see Run Query
(Shortcut Menu) (on page 70).

 Because the AutoCAD software can open only SAT files of version 5, the ACIS version in
the SAT file is written as 5 by default. If you want to output the current ACIS version, contact
Intergraph Support (http://www.intergraph.com/support) or your local office.
See Also
Setup (Drawings by Query Manager Component) (on page 185)
Export color and transparency styles (on page 187)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 186

 3D Model by Query

Setup Dialog Box (Drawings By Query Manager Component)

Sets options for creating Drawings by Query Manager components associated with a 3D Model
by Query package.

You must create an Orthographic Drawing by Query, Isogen Isometric Drawing by

Query, or 3D Model by Query package before setting up the Drawings by Query Manager
component. For more information, see Save Package Command (on page 76).
Filter
Identifies the filter to use to define the where portion of the query. The software uses the
filter to determine where to look for the objects requested in Orthographic Drawing by Query
and Isogen Isometric Drawing by Query components when they are generated. Select More
in the list to display the Select Filter dialog box. Click Properties to display the current
filter properties. For more information on filters for the Drawings by Query Manager, see
Drawings by Query Filters (on page 216).
Package
Specifies the package to use in completing the query.

Output
Disk only (do not save to database)
Save the output file locally. A copy of the output file is not saved to the database. You
cannot change this option.
Path to save
Specify a local folder for the output file. You cannot leave this field blank.
See Also
Setup (3D Model by Query Component) (on page 184)

Export color and transparency styles

If you are exporting objects to a CAD format graphics file, you can also export color and
transparency styles to the SAT file when it is created.
1. Right-click a document, and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box displays.
2. On the Surface Styles tab, select the style, and then click Add.
3. Right-click the document component, and select Update Now.
The SAT file is created with the selected style.
Style rules on the Surface Styles tab are created in the Common task. You can also
create new styles by clicking New.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 187

SECTION 10
3D Model Data
You can create a 3D Model Data component and base it on a specific filter. The filter defines
the contents of the component documents when they are created. You can use the 3D Model
Data component to output SmartPlant Review files or CAD (SAT) files.

Output as Neutral CAD (SAT) Graphics File

You can setup the 3D Model Data component to output your model objects to a neutral CAD
(.sat) file format. Right-click the 3D Model Data component, and select Setup to set the filter and
output file path.

Output as SmartPlant Review File

You can setup the 3D Model Data component to output your model objects as SmartPlant
Review files depending on how you set up the 3D Model Data component. The software creates
.vue and .xml files by default. If you select the Generate streaming vue output (.zvf file) option
on the Setup dialog box, the software creates all three SmartPlant Review files: .zvf, .vue, and
.xml.
You can set the output on the 3D Model Data component to save the SmartPlant Review (SPR)
file to disk only, database only or both.
 Select Disk only (do not save to database) to save the generated graphics and data files
to the specified path. You can then update and publish the 3D Model Data files to
SmartPlant Foundation in an integrated environment. This option helps prevent data
congestion by allowing you to save and publish your files locally.
 Clear Disk only (do not save to database) and do not specify output paths to save the
data only to the database.
 Clear Disk only (do not save to database and specify the output paths to save the data to
the database, and as files to the specified paths.
The basic workflow for creating a 3D Model Data component is as follows:
 Create a 3D Model Data component, and set it up with a filter and output file information.
 Create the 3D Model Data document (one document per 3D Model Data component).

SmartPlant Review shows the objects from the .vue file using global coordinates.
If you plan to save the 3D Model Data component documents to a .vue file using the Save
as SmartPlant Review File command, right-click the component and select Properties to
check the Style tab Coordinate System property setting. You want to make sure the Plant
Monument Coordinate Offset is passed correctly to SPR when creating the .vue file. The
offset value allows you to see the original coordinates relative to the new SPR coordinate
system.
 Revise the documents if publishing to SmartPlant Foundation.
 Set properties Surface Styles and Aspects properties as needed on the 3D Model Data
documents.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 188

 3D Model Data

 Update the documents using Update Now or Batch > Update on the 3D Model Data
component shortcut menu.
 If SmartPlant Foundation requires a password, you are prompted to type it when updating
3D Model Data documents.
 Save the documents to a predefined location for viewing in SmartPlant Review or publish
the documents to the registered SmartPlant Foundation plant.

Recommendations for Exporting to SmartPlant Review

 The number of objects generated by a 3D Model Data component and exported successfully
to a SmartPlant Review file depends largely on the type of objects and your hardware
resources. We recommend that you limit each 3D Model Data component filter.
 Monitor the error logs regularly for resource issues, even if the specified filter worked
initially. You can add more objects to the model meeting the filter criteria.
 SmartPlant Review (SPR) version 6.1.0.15 (or higher) allows you to open multiple .vue files
simultaneously. Refer to your SmartPlant Review documentation for more information. When
you open .vue and .xml files in SPR for the first time, SPR builds a database containing the
tag information for the files. This process can take a significant amount of time.
 SmartPlant Review (SPR) version 6.2.0.29 (or higher) supports turning SmartPlant aspects
on and off. All aspects are turned on by default in SPR. The SPRSchema.txt file can be
customized to add any customized aspects.
The 3D View Control used for viewing the published graphics in SmartPlant Markup
Plus does not currently support turning aspects on and off.

Project Supervisor Setup

Your project supervisor should set up appropriate filters that define the objects to include in the
component documents when they are created.
You must install the SmartPlant Schema Component and the SmartPlant Client to use this
component.

3D Model Data Component Common Tasks

The following tasks are used to set up a 3D Model Data component and configure it for viewing
in SmartPlant Review or publishing.

Define Your Workspace

The defined workspace does not need to include objects being manipulated for SmartPlant
Review.

Setup a 3D Model Data Component

You can create and set up a 3D Model Data component to create SmartPlant Review output
files or neutral CAD (SAT) graphics files.

Create the 3D Model Data Document

To create the 3D Model Data document, right-click the component and select the Create
Drawing command. When this command is complete, the document is listed in the Detail View.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 189

 3D Model Data

Set Surface Style Rules and Aspects for 3D Model Data Documents
Before you update your 3D Model Data documents, set the surface style rules and aspects to
use for the model objects. You can specify the properties for the 3D Model Data component
and documents by right-clicking and selecting Properties.

Update 3D Model Data Documents

Update your 3D Model Data documents using Update Now or Batch > Update on the
component or document shortcut menu.

Save Data as a SmartPlant Review File

You can output your 3D Model Data to a SmartPlant Review (.vue) file whether you are working
in a stand-alone or integrated environment.

Set Revision Information

The document revision process is separate from the publishing process, making it possible to
revise a document locally and save it to the database without re-publishing the document.

Publish Data
If your model has been registered using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, you can publish
your 3D Model data for retrieval in other tools.

Setup (3D Model Data Component)

Sets options for a 3D Model Data component. This command is available on the shortcut menu
on a 3D Model Data component.
Setup Dialog Box (3D Model Data Component) (on page 192)
With this command, you specify a filter that identifies the objects you want collected by the 3D
Model Data component. You have several combination options for output of the objects:
 SmartPlant Review graphics file (VUE)
 CAD output file (SAT)
The CAD export function supports the following:
 Color information and transparency values - The software can retrieve color information
and transparency values from the styles and apply them to the SAT file. If no style is
selected, the default 3D object style is applied. If there is no style associated with an
object, green is applied by default.
You do not need to define the workspace or verify that the workspace contains all of the
objects required by the 3D Model by Query filter subset.

 You can publish .zvf files and launch SmartPlant Review to view the .zvf files. You can also
use File > View and Markup to use SmartPlant Markup Plus to navigate the model. You do
not have to use the Save as SmartPlant Review command to use the SmartPlant Review
features.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 190

 3D Model Data

 After you create a component, you must update the documents to extract the data from the
database to create the .vue, .zvf, and .xml files.

Setup a 3D Model Data component

The 3D Model Data component is used with the Save as SmartPlant Review and Publish
commands. It is also used to output model graphics to neutral CAD (.sat) files. Before creating a
3D Model Data component, you should create filters that specify the objects required for your
output.
1. Right-click a folder in the Console.
To add a folder, right-click the root or another folder.
2. On the shortcut menu, select New.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
3. Select the 3D Model Data component, and click OK.
4. Right-click the new 3D Model Data component and then select Setup.
5. Specify a filter to identify the model data to include when the data is saved or published.
Select More to display the Select Filter dialog box. Click Properties to display the
current filter properties.
6. If you need to output the 3D Model Data to SmartPlant Review, select Generate
SmartPlant Review output (.vue file). If you need to output the data as a neutral CAD
format graphics file (.sat file), select the Generate CAD output (.sat file) option.
7. Select or clear the Disk only (do not save to database) option to specify how to save the
3D Model Data. If you are registered in an integrated environment, checking this option
allows you to update and publish the output files to SmartPlant Foundation.
When saving as SmartPlant Review files, the behavior of the 3D Model Data
setup is different depending on whether you are registered to work in an integrated
environment or not. For more information on how this option affects the saved data, see
Setup Dialog Box (3D Model Data Component) (on page 192). For more information on
registering your model using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, see the section titled
Working in an Integrated Environment in the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Installation Guide,
available from the Help > Printable Guides command.
8. Specify file paths for the data file and the graphics file as needed.
9. Click OK to save the component settings and create the output files as specified.

 After you create a component, you must update the documents to extract the data from the
database and create the .vue, .zvf, and .xml files. For more information on tasks associated
with the 3D Model Data component, see 3D Model Data Component Common Tasks (on
page 189).
 If you are setting up the 3D Model Data component with the intention of saving it as a
SmartPlant Review (SPR) file, right-click the component and select Properties and go to the
Style tab to make sure the Coordinate System property is set appropriately so that the
Plant Monument Coordinate Offset is passed correctly to SPR when creating the VUE file.
This is because SPR shows the objects from the VUE file using global coordinates. The
offset value allows you to see the original coordinates relative to the new SPR coordinate

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 191

 3D Model Data

system. For more information on 3D Model Data components, see 3D Model Data (on page
188). For information on saving to SPR, see Save as SmartPlant Review File (on page 417).
 If you are setting up the 3D Model Data component for output to the CAD format graphics
file, you can export color and transparency style rules along with the objects to the SAT file
when it is created. To set the style for export, right-click the 3D Model Data component and
select Properties. Go to the Surface Styles and Aspects tab, select the style and click
Add. This property tab includes the style rules that are created in the Common task. You
can also create new styles by clicking New. After the style is set, right-click the 3D Model
Data component and select Update Now to create the SAT file with the specified style.
 Because the AutoCAD software can open only SAT files of version 5, the ACIS version in
the SAT file is written as 5 by default. If you want to output the current ACIS version, contact
Intergraph Support (http://www.intergraph.com/support) or your local office.
 For the SAT output, all the bodies are merged and then saved to the SAT file. If you are
using viewers, such as MicroStation, that cannot open merged bodies, contact Intergraph
Support (http://www.intergraph.com/support) or your local office.
See Also
Publishing Documents (on page 424)
Setup (3D Model Data Component) (on page 190)
Find Documents to Publish (on page 441)
Publish (on page 427)

Setup Dialog Box (3D Model Data Component)

Sets options for the 3D Model Data component. You access this dialog box when you right-click
a 3D Model Data component and select Setup on the shortcut menu.
Filter
Identifies the filter to use to define the objects to include in the component definition. The
filter needs to be specific to the objects that you want to publish or to save to a SmartPlant
Review file.
You do not need to define the workspace to contain all of the objects required by the
3D Model Data filter subset.

Options
Specifies how the 3D Model Data is saved. The setup for your 3D Model Data component is
different depending on whether or not you are registered to work in an integrated environment.
Generate SmartPlant Review output (.vue file)
Indicates that you want the 3D Model Data saved as a SmartPlant Review .vue file.
Generate streaming vue output (.zvf file)
Indicates that you want the 3D Model Data saved as a .zvf file in addition to a .vue file.
Check this option if you intend to attach this data as a reference to another plant. The .zvf
format allows you to attach this plant data as a reference to another plant using Reference
3D functionality.
Generate CAD output (.sat file)
Indicates that you want the 3D Model Data saved as an SAT graphics file.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 192

 3D Model Data

Disk only (do not save to database)

Specifies how the graphics and/or data files are saved:
 Select Disk only (do not save to database) to save the files only to the specified path.
You can then update and publish the .vue or .zvf file to SmartPlant Foundation from the
designated locations.
 Clear the Disk only (do not save to database) and do not specify output paths for the
data to only be saved to the database.
 Clear the Disk only (do not save to database and specify the output paths to save the
data to the database and as files to the specified paths.
You can change this option at any time during your work so that you can determine the best
save and publish options for your specific environment.
Path to save graphics file
Specifies the file to which the graphics for the 3D Model Data will be saved. Click the ellipsis
button to browse for the correct file.
Path to save data file
Specifies the file to which the data will be saved. Click the ellipsis button to browse for the
correct file. This box is automatically populated, and the ellipsis button does not display
when you specify a .vue file. For example, if you specify C:\temp\tpjtest.vue in the Path to
save graphics file box, then the Path to save data file box automatically displays
C:\temp\tpjtest.xml.

 You can publish .zvf files and launch SmartPlant Review to view the .zvf files from within
SmartPlant Foundation. You do not have to use the Save as SmartPlant Review command
to use the SmartPlant Review features. For more information on publishing, see Publish (on
page 427).
 For more information about the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, see Working in an
Integrated Environment in the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Installation Guide, available from Help
> Printable Guides.
See Also
Setup (3D Model Data Component) (on page 190)
Setup a 3D Model Data component (on page 191)
3D Model Data Component Common Tasks (on page 189)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 193

SECTION 11
Exporting 3D Model Graphics to
MicroStation
You can export 3D model graphics directly to MicroStation J (V7) and MicroStation V8 DGN
file formats. The actual export is not a drawing file. It is an actual 3D file translated into
MicroStation graphic types. While the workflow is similar to that of regular volume drawings,
there are some differences.
Create a MicroStation component with the Add Component command. After the component is
created, right-click and select Setup from the shortcut menu. The Setup command allows you to
define the MicroStation version, seed file, and style to use in generating the component
documents.
The view style you specify for the component determines which model object graphics are
included in the component documents. The view style also specifies the layers on which the
graphics are placed as well as colors and linear styles when imported in MicroStation. The
MicroStation version you specify defines the type of DGN file to be generated. The seed file
selected determines the MicroStation symbology used within the document.
Layers are referred to as Levels in MicroStation. Levels are defined by integers 1-63
and must be typed in the Layer property in the View Style properties dialog box.
See Also
Create MicroStation DGN files (on page 195)
Setup (MicroStation DGN Files) (on page 194)

Setup (MicroStation DGN Files)

Sets options for creating a MicroStation DGN file. This command is available on the shortcut
menu on the MicroStation 3D DGN component.
Setup Dialog Box (MicroStation DGN Files) (on page 194)
See Also
Create MicroStation DGN files (on page 195)

Setup Dialog Box (MicroStation DGN Files)

MicroStation Version - Specifies the type of DGN file to be generated. By default, the software
selects the MicroStation V7 DGN file.
You must install MicroStation V8 XM (08.09) or higher on your computer to generate
MicroStation V8 DGN files.
Seed File
Specifies the seed file to use to create the document. Select More, navigate to the
appropriate folder, and then select the seed file.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 194

 Exporting 3D Model Graphics to MicroStation

 You must specify the MicroStation version before you specify the seed file. Seed files
vary for different versions of DGN file formats.
 Seed files for MicroStation V8 DGN files are located in the MicroStation V8 folder. Seed
files for MicroStation V7 DGN files are in the Templates folder.
View Style
Selects the defined view style to use in determining which 3D model objects display in the
document. Click Properties to display the View Style Properties dialog for the
selected style. For more information, see "Define View Style Dialog Box" in the Drawings
and Reports Reference Data Guide.
See Also
Create MicroStation DGN files (on page 195)
Setup (MicroStation DGN Files) (on page 194)

Create Drawing (MicroStation DGN Files)

Generates a document for the MicroStation 3D DGN components. Before you can use this
command to generate documents, you must complete the steps below.
 Create at least one MicroStation 3D DGN component in the Console hierarchy.
 Right-click on the component and select Setup to define the MicroStation version, seed file,
and view style to use in generating the documents for export into MicroStation.
 Create at least one volume with the Place Drawing Volume commands in the Space
Management task.

 The MicroStation DGN data reflects the clipping applied in 3D application and the style
information defined in the graphic rule of the view style. No data is persisted on any of the
model objects, but all objects are mapped to levels as specified by the graphic rule. If the
graphic rule does not assign a level, the graphics are placed on level 1.
 During update of the documents, the software saves the MicroStation J (V7) or MicroStation
V8 DGN files to the model database. Use the Save As command to export the DGN files
from the database to another location.

Create MicroStation DGN files

This procedure shows how to create MicroStation 3D DGN documents for export into
MicroStation J (V7) and MicroStation V8 DGN files. For more information, see Exporting 3D
Model Graphics to MicroStation (on page 194).
1. Create a MicroStation 3D DGN component.
Add a package of components (on page 42)
2. Right-click the MicroStation 3D DGN component, and select Setup from the shortcut menu.
The Setup dialog box displays.
3. Select the required MicroStation Version DGN file to generate. You can select Generate
v7 DGN file or Generate v8 DGN file.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 195

 Exporting 3D Model Graphics to MicroStation

 Generate v7 DGN file is selected by default.

 Both MicroStation v7 and v8 can reside on the same computer.
4. Select the appropriate seed file to use from the options available.
5. Select the view style you want to use to determine what objects are displayed in the
document.
6. Create one or more drawing volumes to associate with the drawing view by switching to the
Space Management task and clicking one of the Place Drawing Volume commands.
7. Right-click the MicroStation 3D DGN drawings component, and select Create Drawing(s) to
create the blank drawing.
8. Right-click on the document, and click Update Now to update the information displayed in
the drawing.
You must place a Drawing type volume from the Space Management task before
you can update the drawing.
9. You can open the DGN file in MicroStation after it is updated. Select Open and the drawing
component.
10. You can export DGN files by right-clicking a folder, component, or single document, and
then selecting Save As on the shortcut menu.

 The delivered seed files contain master units as m (meters) and feet ("). When exporting
graphics to MicroStation Version v7 DGN file format, make sure the selected MicroStation
Version v7 DGN seed file has one of the following labels as working units.

Working Units Labels Working Unit Name

um Micrometer

mm Millimeter

cm Centimeter

dm Decimeter

m Meter

hm Hectometer

km Kilometer

ui MicroInch

in, " Inch

ft, ' Foot

yd Yard

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 196

 Exporting 3D Model Graphics to MicroStation

mi Mile

 The size and measurement of the graphics is accurate only if the units present in the seed
file are within the set of units listed in the previous table. Otherwise, the working units of the
seed file are treated as meters. These labels are not case-sensitive.
 The MicroStation DGN data reflects the clipping applied in 3D application and the style
information defined in the graphic rule of the view style. No data is persisted on any of the
model objects, but all objects are mapped to levels as specified by the graphic rule. If the
graphic rule does not assign a level, the graphics are placed on level 1.
 After a view style is selected on the Setup dialog box, you can use the view style properties
to add, edit, or remove filters that determine what objects are included in the document.
 The Layer property in a graphic rule assigns objects to a DGN level. For the purposes of
saving to a 3D DGN file, the software only recognizes levels 1 to 63. Other values, or an
empty field, are interpreted as level 1.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 197

SECTION 12
Generic Module Folder
The Generic Module Folder component provides a way for you to run your custom VB
modules to create custom drawings. You set up the Generic Module Folder component to use
your custom VB module. For example, you might create a VB module to create MicroStation 3D
drawings, AutoCAD 3D drawings, or Electrical Isometric drawings. The Generic Module Folder
is simply a container for your VB modules. You create the component just like other
components, but when you perform Setup on the component, you specify a custom VB module.
The software builds the list of available VB modules from the SharedContent library, specifically
from [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\Drawings\Catalog\DwgTypeModules. You must
store your VB module in this location to have access to it when setting up the component.

Custom VB Module
The behavior of the component depends entirely on how the VB module is developed.
Everything is controlled by the VB module. When you right-click the component, the VB module
determines the menu items that are available. If the module has a command that creates
documents, you see the Create Documents command. If, for whatever reason, the module
does not need documents, the document-related commands do not display on the shortcut
menu. Other commands the VB module can include are Rename, Delete, Refresh, and Print.
For more information on general commands available, see Shortcut Menus in any of the Smart
3D Drawings user's guides, available from Help > Printable Guides.
If the module supports publishing, the right-click menu includes the Publish command. This
command is available only if your model has been registered using the Smart 3D Registration
Wizard. For more information, see Publishing Documents in the Integration Reference Guide, or
in any of the Smart 3D Drawings user's guides, available from Help > Printable Guides.
For information on the interfaces used to create a custom VB drawing module, see the
Intergraph SmartTM 3D Programmer's Guide. Contact your administrator or Intergraph Support if
you need the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Programmer's Guide. You can find support information on
our web site http://support.intergraph.com (http://support.intergraph.com/).
See Also
Use a Generic Module Folder component (on page 199)
Setup (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 198)

Setup (Generic Module Folder Component)

Sets the custom VB module associated with the Generic Module Folder component. This
command is available on the right-click popup menu for the Generic Module Folder component.
Setup Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 199)
Select Module Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 199)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 198

 Generic Module Folder

Use a Generic Module Folder component

The Generic Module Folder is a container component for a custom VB module. Before you
perform this procedure, ensure that your created custom VB modules are stored in
\Symbols\Drawings\Catalog\DwgTypeModules.
1. Right-click the folder in the hierarchy where you want to store the Generic Module Folder
component, then select More from the New menu.
The Add Component dialog box displays.
2. Select the Generic Module Folder component, then click OK.
The Generic Module Folder component is created in the folder.
3. Right-click the Generic Module Folder component and select Setup.
The Setup dialog box displays.
4. Specify a custom VB module from the dropdown list. Click More to display the Select
Module dialog box, which provides a hierarchy of modules available from
\Symbols\Drawings\Catalog\DwgTypeModules.
5. Click OK to save the changes to the Generic Module Folder component.
The new custom component is added to the selected folder in the hierarchy.
6. Right-click the new custom component and use the available commands to perform
operations on the component. The commands available depend entirely on the functionality
provided in the VB module.
See Also
Setup (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 198)
Setup Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 199)
Select Module Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 199)

Setup Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder Component)

Sets the custom VB module for the Generic Module Folder component.
Modules
Specifies a custom VB module. The dropdown list contains a list of the most recently used
VB modules. Click More to display the Select Module dialog box. For more information, see
Select Module Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 199).
See Also
Setup (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 198)
Use a Generic Module Folder component (on page 199)

Select Module Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder

Component)
Provides a hierarchical list of available VB modules. The hierarchy includes all VB modules
located in \Symbols\Drawings\Catalog\DwgTypeModules. This dialog box displays when you
select More in the Modules dropdown on the Setup dialog for a Generic Module Folder
component.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 199

 Generic Module Folder

See Also
Setup (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 198)
Use a Generic Module Folder component (on page 199)
Setup Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder Component) (on page 199)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 200

SECTION 13
Composed Drawings
Composed drawings are orthographic drawings created in a 3D task, such as Common,
through the Drawing Console. The composed drawing component manages the composed
drawings you create. Composed drawings are flexible, allowing you to have views that are
managed by a drawing region and to associate the views to volumes and other views.
In 3D modeling tasks such as Common, you can use the Tools > Drawing Console command
to create a composed drawing component and the drawings associated with it. In the Drawings
and Reports task, you can create the composed drawing component, but you must use the 3D
modeling tasks to associate the drawing to objects in the model.
1. In the Drawings and Reports task, use the Tools > Define Layout Style command to create
layout styles you need for your composed drawing regions, then use the layout styles when
you create your layout templates with the Tools > Edit Layout Template command.
2. Create a folder for the drawing component in the Management Console, or go to a 3D task
and use Tools > Drawing Console to create the component.
3. In the 3D modeling task, use the Drawing Console to create new composed drawings.
Right-click the component, and select New Drawing. For more information, see New
Drawing in the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide, available from Help > Printable
Guides. You can also use Edit on the shortcut menu to view or modify existing composed
drawings. You can select Tools > Snapshot View to add snapshots of the model to
composed drawings. For additional information, see the Common User's Guide available
from Help > Printable Guides.
4. When the composed drawing is open in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor, you can add
views, associate views to volumes or other views, remove view associations, add dependent
report views, and modify the layout of the drawing sheet. For more information, see Create a
new composed drawing (on page 205) in the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide. For
information on the Drawings Compose toolbar in plant mode, see Working with 3D Task
Drawings in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help. For information on the Drawings
Compose Toolbar in marine mode, see Working with Marine 3D Drawings in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
5. After saving the drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor, return to the Drawing Console to
do additional editing, update the drawing, and revise and publish the drawing. After the
composed drawing is created, it is just like any other drawing document and can be
managed in the Drawings and Reports task. For information on the 2D commands available
for editing, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
If the drawing document you are looking at in the Detail View has a yellow icon (for
example: ), the drawing document is a version 6.1 legacy Snapshot drawing. You should use
the Tools > Convert Legacy Snapshots command to convert this document to a Composed
Drawing for use in the current version of the software. If you do not convert the legacy snapshot
drawing, you cannot perform edit operations on the drawing, including update, revise, and
publish. For more information, see Convert Legacy Snapshots (on page 240) in the
Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 201

 Composed Drawings

Drawing Regions and Drawing Views

A region is a container that manages drawing views. The layout style associated with the region
dictates the order and placement of the managed drawing views. Drawing views are associated
with objects, volumes, or other drawing views. You place regions and views on a composed
drawing when it is open in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For more information on placing regions
and views, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.

Regions and drawing views behave as follows:

 You can create a drawing view outside a region, but this makes the drawing view an
"unmanaged view," meaning the properties of the region do not impact the drawing view.
However, if a view is inside a region or touching a region, the region manages the drawing
view. When you update the drawing, the software associates the drawing view with the
region and updates it based on the applied region layout style.
 If a region refuses to accept a drawing view (for example, if the region is defined for three
views, and you are attempting to add a fourth view), the drawing view is added as an
unmanaged view, just outside and to the upper left of the region. If another region occupies
this space in the drawing area, the unmanaged view is placed as close to the original region
as possible.
 If a drawing view "straddles" two or more regions, the region that contains more of the
drawing view manages it. If the drawing view equally straddles two or more regions, the
software uses the first drawing view point to measure distance and determine which region
manages the drawing view.
 If a region contained a drawing view and the drawing view properties make it ineligible for
the region, the software removes the drawing view from the region automatically and places
it in the upper left of the drawing area, outside of other regions.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 202

 Composed Drawings

Layout Templates and Layout Styles

Composed drawings use layout templates and layout styles to assist you in creating reusable
drawings. The software combines layout templates with drawing borders to create composed
drawings. Layouts also use regions as containers to manage drawing views. You also define a
layout style associated with the region. The layout style dictates the order and placement of the
managed drawing views. For more information on defining layout styles, see Define Layout Style
Command (Tools Menu). For additional information on editing layout templates, see Edit Layout
Template Command (Tools Menu).

Drawing Borders
When you create a composed drawing in a 3D task, you specify a border template to use with
the drawing. After the drawing is created, you can switch the border associated with the drawing
using the Switch Border command on the shortcut menu of the drawing. For more information,
see Switch Border (on page 210) in the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Composed Drawings Common Tasks

The following tasks are used frequently when you create composed drawings. Some of the
tasks are performed within the Drawings and Reports task or other 3D modeling tasks, and
others are performed while the drawing is open in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Create Layout and View Styles, and Edit Templates for Composed Drawings
You use a combination of commands in the Drawings and Reports task to create styles used in
your composed drawings and to design the drawing appearance.
 The views you create in a composed drawing require view styles. For more information, see
"Define View Style Command (Tools Menu)" in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data
Guide available from Help > Printable Guides.
 Create layout styles to define regions on a layout template used with composed drawings.
For more information, see "Define Layout Style Command" in the Drawings and Reports
Reference Data Guide available from Help > Printable Guides.
 Edit border templates to include additional graphics in the border area of a composed
drawing. For more information, see "Edit Border Template Command (Tools Menu)" in the
Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide available from Help > Printable Guides.
 Composed drawings combine a layout template with a border template to create drawings
that have the same positioning of views but different content. For more information, see "Edit
Layout Template Command" in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide available
from Help > Printable Guides.

Create a Composed Drawing Component

You can create a Composed Drawing component either in the Drawings and Reports task
Management Console, or by using the Tools > Drawings Console command in one of the 3D
modeling tasks. For more information, see Add a package of components (on page 42), or see
Drawing Console Command in the Common User's Guide available from Help > Printable
Guides.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 203

 Composed Drawings

Create a Volume for a Composed Drawing

Composed drawings must be associated with a volume in the 3D model before they can be
updated successfully. In the Space Management task, you can create volumes to use in your
drawings. For more information, see the Space Management User's Guide available from Help
> Printable Guides.

Create a Composed Drawing

In a 3D task, create a new composed drawing using the Tools > Drawing Console command.
Select and right-click the composed drawing component, and select New Drawing on the
shortcut menu. The software creates the composed drawing based on the layout template and
border template you specify. You can also open existing drawings in a 3D task by right-clicking a
document in the Drawing Console and selecting Edit. For more information on creating new
composed drawings, see Create a new composed drawing (on page 205). To edit an existing
composed drawing, see Edit a Composed Drawing (on page 404).

Update a Composed Drawing Document

Update the composed drawing document. For more information, see Updating Documents (on
page 78).

Viewing the Drawing Log

You can view the drawing log to see any messages associated with the drawing. For more
information, see View Log Command (on page 88).

Set Drawing Properties

You can specify the properties for the drawing component or drawing documents by
right-clicking and selecting Properties. For more information, see Edit document properties (on
page 48).

Comparing 2D Drawing Objects to 3D Model Objects

You can open a drawing document and compare the 2D drawing objects in the drawing
document to 3D model objects. For more information, see Compare 2D Drawing Object to 3D
Model Object (on page 362).

Edit the Composed Drawing

In many cases, you need to include additional labels, dimensions, or place new views on the
composed drawing after it is created. For more information, see Edit a Composed Drawing (on
page 404). This is an optional task and is not required to create composed drawings.

Publish the Composed Drawing

Publish the composed drawing documents. You can publish only if your model has been
registered using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard. For more information, see Publishing
Documents (on page 424).
The viewable files created when you publish drawings and reports provide
relationship links to the 3D Model Data. You must also publish the 3D Model Data to provide the
navigation between the viewable files and the 3D Model Data. For more information, see 3D
Model Data (on page 188).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 204

 Composed Drawings

Convert a Version 6.1 Snapshot Drawing to a Composed Drawing

If a drawing document in the Detail View has a yellow icon (for example: ), the drawing
document is a version 6.1 legacy Snapshot drawing. You should use the Tools > Convert
Legacy Snapshots command to convert this document to a Composed Drawing for use in the
current version of the software. If you do not convert the legacy snapshot drawing, you cannot
perform edit operations on the drawing, including update, revise, and publish. For more
information, see Convert Legacy Snapshots (on page 240).
See Also
Drawings and Reports Naming Rules (on page 95)
Layers (SmartSketch Drawing Editor Tools Menu) (on page 402) (Marine mode only)

New Drawing
Creates a new composed drawing. You access this command on the shortcut menu for a
composed drawing component in the Drawing Console in a 3D modeling task such as
Common. When you select New Drawing, the Drawing Sheet General Properties dialog box
displays, which allows you to set the properties for the new composed drawing. When you click
OK, the drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor so you can add views, associate views to
objects or other views, and modify the drawing area of the composed drawing. For more
information on commands available to edit the composed drawing, see the SmartSketch
Drawing Editor Help.
You must create at least one folder in the Console to provide a location for the new
composed drawings to be stored. You can also create your composed drawing components in
the Drawings and Reports task. For more information on the Drawing Console, see the
Common User's Guide.

What do you want to do?

 Create a new composed drawing (on page 205)
 Create a drawing using WBS objects (on page 208)

Create a New Composed Drawing

 For information on the Drawings Compose toolbar used in this procedure, see Working with
Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor (on page 253).
 For information on the 2D commands available for editing, see the SmartSketch Drawing
Editor Help.
 Unmanaged drawing views do not move or resize when updating composed drawings or
when creating a new composed drawing from a layout template.

Set Up a Drawing
1. In the Space Management task, create volumes to use in your drawings. For more
information, see the Space Management User's Guide available from Help > Printable
Guides.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 205

 Composed Drawings

2. In a 3D modeling task such as Common, select Tools > Drawing Console.

The Drawing Console opens, showing all of the existing folders and components available
for creating drawings.
3. To create a new folder and component, right-click the drawing root in the Management
Console, and select New....
The Add Component dialog box displays.
4. Select Folder on the General tab, and click OK.
5. Right-click the folder and select Rename to edit the name of the folder.
6. Right-click the folder and select New....
The Add Component dialog box displays.
7. Select the Composed Drawings component on the General tab.
8. Right-click the composed drawings component, and select Rename to edit the name of the
component.

Create a Drawing Sheet

1. Right-click a composed drawings component in the Drawing Console and select New
Drawing.
The Drawing Sheet General Properties dialog box displays. For more information, see
Drawing Sheet General Properties Dialog Box (on page 209).
2. Select a rule for the Name Rule.
3. Type a value for Name, if User Defined is selected for Name Rule.
4. Select a layout template by selecting More in the Value field for the Layout Template
property.
The Select Template dialog box displays. For more information, see Select Template
Dialog Box (on page 210).
5. Select a border template by selecting More in the Value field for the Border Template
property.
The Select Template dialog box displays. For more information, see Select Template
Dialog Box (on page 210).
6. If you are using batch processing when updating, printing, or refreshing this drawing
document, select Update Settings for the Category, and type a Batch Processing
Timeout value. The default value is 40 minutes.
7. Click OK to accept the composed drawing sheet properties. The software "stretches" the
layout template you selected to fit the drawing area of the border template you selected and
opens the new drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Create a Drawing View

1. Select the SmartSketch Drawing Editor window to make it the active window.
The SmartSketch Drawing Editor window may be hidden behind the 3D
application window.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 206

 Composed Drawings

2. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, click the Place View command. Click and drag in the
drawing area to place a graphic view.

You can use PinPoint ( or ) to place views precisely.

The Drawing View Properties dialog box displays. For more information, see Drawing View
Properties Dialog Box (Place View Command) - Composed Drawings (on page 276).
3. On the View tab, select More for the Style property.
The Select View Style dialog box displays.
4. Select a view style, and click OK.
For more information on rule set view style definitions, see Define View Style
Command (Tools Menu) in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide. You can
access the guide using the Help > Printable Guides command in the Drawings and
Reports task.
5. On the View tab, type a value for Name, and select a Coordinate System, Scale Family,
and User Selected Scale.
6. Click OK.
7. Select the graphic view in the drawing area, and click Associate Objects to View .
8. Select the 3D application window to make it the active window. The 3D application
Associate ribbon is available. Select a volume to populate the drawing view.
You can select a volume from the 3D environment, or from the Space tab in the
Workspace Explorer.
9. Return to the SmartSketch Drawing Editor window to save and update the drawing.

Create a Report View

1. Select the SmartSketch Drawing Editor window to make it the active window.
2. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, click the Place Report View command.
3. Click and drag in the drawing area to place a non-graphical view.
The Report Properties dialog box displays.
4. On the Report View tab, select More for the Report Template property.
The Select Template dialog box displays.
5. Select a report template, and click OK.
For more information, see Select Template Dialog Box in the SmartSketch
Drawing Editor Help.
For a composed drawing in marine mode, you can only place report views
that use dependent view templates. These are templates that are associated with a graphic
drawing view. In the delivered reference data, the templates are in folders named
"Dependent View Reports."
6. Set the output format of the report using the Report Output Format and Report Justification
properties. For more information, see Report Properties Dialog Box (Place Report View
Command) in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
7. Type a value for Name on the Report Properties dialog box, and click OK.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 207

 Composed Drawings

8. Select the non-graphical report view in the drawing area, and click Associate Objects to
View .
9. Select the 3D application window to make it the active window. The 3D application
Associate ribbon is available. Select a graphic View to associate with the report view.
The graphic view names from the 2D drawing area are listed in the View field.
10. Click Finish on the Associate ribbon to complete the association of a drawing view to the
report view.

Add a Section or Detail View to a Drawing

To add a section or detail view, see Place a Section View (on page 355) and Place a Detail
View (on page 359).

Create Additional Views

1. Select the SmartSketch Drawing Editor window to make it the active window.
2. Use the commands on the Drawings Compose toolbar to place and associate additional
views, place drawing regions, remove view associations if necessary, and perform other
editing tasks on the drawing sheet. For information on the Drawings Compose toolbar, see
Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor (on page 253).

Save a Drawing after Editing

1. Click File > Save.
2. Click File > Exit.
The SmartSketch Drawing Editor window closes.

Update the Drawing

1. In the 3D application window, select Tools > Drawing Console.
2. Navigate through the hierarchy to the drawing.
3. Right-click the drawing and select Update Now.
You can also update a single view by right-clicking on a drawing view inside the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor and selecting Update View.
4. After the drawing is up-to-date, right-click the drawing and select Edit to view or edit the
drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

 When the drawing is out-of-date, a red X icon is superimposed on the drawing icon.
 While the drawing is updating, an hourglass icon is superimposed on the drawing icon.
 When the drawing is up-to-date, a green check icon is superimposed on the drawing
icon.

Create a drawing using WBS objects

Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) Projects manage the composition of the plant based on the
construction work to be completed. For example, new and existing objects in the model can be

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 208

 Composed Drawings

symbolized differently by assigning them to a WBS Project. Drawing view styles can also be
configured to symbolize the difference between new and existing projects.
The following procedure shows how to create a drawing that includes WBS Project objects.

Assign Objects to WBS Project

Objects must be included in a WBS Project before they can symbolize correctly in a drawing.
For more information on using WBS Project, see Project Menu in the Common User's Guide.

Create a Parameterized/Asking Filter

A parameterized, or asking, filter must be created before configuring a custom view style for the
drawing. For more information on creating a new asking filter, see Create a new asking filter in
the Common User's Guide.
When creating the filter, include the appropriate WBS Project(s) in the Work
Breakdown Structure tab of the New Filter Properties dialog box.

Create a View Style for WBS Objects

You must create a custom view style that includes the parameterized filter created in the
previous step. For more information on creating a custom view style, see Create an
Orthographic Drawing View Style in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Select WBS Project on Drawing Properties and Update

1. Right-click on a drawing in the Drawing Console or Drawing and Reports task, and select
Properties.
The Drawing Properties dialog box displays.
2. Select the Style tab.
3. In the WBS Project row, change the Value to the appropriate WBS Project. You can also
change the Behavior to Inherit, Override, or Force Override. The default behavior is set to
Inherit. For more information on the Style tab, see Style Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 55).
4. Click OK.
5. Update the drawing(s).
If a property in the WBS Project field is changed, the entire drawing is marked
out-of-date in order to resymbolize the appropriate WBS items when an update is performed.
See Also
Edit a Composed Drawing (on page 404)

Drawing Sheet General Properties Dialog Box

Displays drawing sheet properties for review and editing. This dialog box displays when you
right click a drawing component in the Drawing Console and select New Drawing.
Location
Allows you to select either a composed drawing component or a folder from the Drawings
and Reports Management Console. If you select a folder, the software automatically
creates a new composed drawing component. For more information, see Select Drawings

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 209

 Composed Drawings

Component Dialog Box.

Name
Specifies the name of the object. If a Name Rule is specified, then the software uses that
rule to determine this name. If the Name Rule value is User Defined, then you must type a
name in this box.
Name Rule
Displays the available name rules for the selected object. Specify the naming rule to use to
name the object. You can select one of the listed rules, or you can select User Defined to
specify the name yourself in the (Name) box.
Layout Template
Specifies the template for the drawing layout. For more information, see Select Template
Dialog Box.
Border Template
Specifies the template for the drawing border. For more information, see Select Template
Dialog Box.
The software uses a combination of the layout template and the border template
to create the drawing.
OK
Opens the new composed drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor so you can place
views, associate views to objects, and add other modifications to the drawing area using
SmartSketch Drawing Editor commands. For more information, see the SmartSketch
Drawing Editor Help.
See Also
New Drawing (on page 205)

Select Template Dialog Box

Specifies a template for the layout or border of a drawing.
To open this dialog box, open the Drawing Sheet General Properties dialog box, and click
More in the Value fields for the Layout Template or Border Template properties. Select a
template from those available in the hierarchy, then click OK to return to the Drawing Sheet
General Properties dialog box.
See Also
New Drawing (on page 205)

Switch Border
Allows you to switch the border template associated with the composed drawing documents
selected in the Detail View. This command is available on the shortcut menu when you select a
composed drawing document. It displays the Drawing Sheet Properties dialog box so you can
change the associated border template.
Editing a border template in the SharedContent folder does not affect an existing drawing
because the border template associated to a drawing is stored in the database. To change the

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 210

 Composed Drawings

border template used by an existing drawing, you must replace the stored border template using
the Switch Border command.
After switching the border template, the software computes a new position and size for any
regions and managed views contained in the drawing. The shift and resize of the view is
proportional to the size of the drawing areas in the border templates. If the border template does
not contain a drawing area, the drawing boundary is computed automatically.
The software does not distinguish between different types of drawing views (report, key plan,
and graphic views) when switching the border.

 If you switch the border template of a drawing, views may resize or reposition with the new
border template based on the following conditions:
 Managed views are proportionately resized and repositioned according to the size of the
new border template.
 Unmanaged views are not resized and repositioned.
 Drawings must be updated after switching the border template in order to ensure all
automated annotation is positioned correctly on the drawing.
 For views that are resized after the border template switch, drawing views using Fit to Scale
show the same content. Views with a scale may have content clipped out if the view is made
smaller after the switch.
For more information, see Place Region Command (on page 296).

Drawing Sheet Properties Dialog Box

Shows the drawing sheet properties associated with the selected drawing document(s) and
allows you to change the border template file. When displayed for the Switch Border command
on selected composed drawing documents, the only property available is Border Template.
Select More in the Value field to display the Select Template dialog box and specify a new
border template. Click OK to associate the new border template file to the selected drawing
documents.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 211

 Composed Drawings

You need to update the drawings to regenerate them with the new border template file.
See Also
Switch Border (on page 210)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 212

SECTION 14
Orthographic Drawings by Query
You can generate orthographic (volume) drawings using a filter-based query. The
Orthographic Drawing by Query component allows you to create drawings for many objects in
the model all in the same manner. This component does not require physical volumes in the
model. The software uses a filter-based query to collect the objects and document them
automatically.
For example, Hanger drawings use parts that can be queried from the database. There are
many of them, and in most cases, they are documented the same way. Using the Orthographic
Drawing by Query component means you do not have to place hundreds of drawing volumes to
document each type of part or assembly.
The basic workflow for creating Orthographic Drawings by Query is as follows:
 Create an Orthographic Drawing by Query component that specifies what you want to
document.
 Create a Query Manager that says where to look for the data.
 Run the filter-based query.
 Create the drawings.
 Update the drawings.
 Publish the drawings to a viewable graphic file; no physical data is published.

Administrator Setup
Your administrator sets up appropriate templates to use with the Orthographic Drawings by
Query component. The administrator is also responsible for creating filters that define what to
look for and filters that specify where in the model to look for the objects. The template and the
"what" filter information within the component are saved as a package.

Drawings by Query Manager

The Drawings by Query Manager uses the normal filter to specify where to look for the objects
included in the drawing. You do not use an asking filter with the Drawings by Query Manager.
For more information on the filters necessary for setting up a Drawings by Query component,
see Drawings by Query Filters (on page 216) in the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Navigator Rules
The navigator rules for Orthographic Drawings by Query tell the software how to traverse
elements to be included in the range for the drawing view objects. The navigator rules can also
return separate object collections with ranges that are included in the 3D object range. If no
navigator rule is specified for a drawing view, the drawing object collection includes everything in
the 3D object range. The delivered rules are as follows

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 213

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

 HngSupSimpleNavigator.dll - Returns support components, supporting objects, supported

objects, and design children. This rule also returns the control points on the components.
This rule is specific to objects created in the Hangers and Support task.
 HngSupRangeNavigator.dll - Returns support components, supporting objects, supported
objects, and design children collections that extend the Hangers and Support range. This
rule also returns the control points on the components. This rule is specific to objects
created in the Hangers and Support task and operates similarly to the
HngSupSimpleNavigator.dll rule.
 HngSupNoSupportingRange.dll - Returns the same components and objects as
HngSupRangeNavigator.dll, excluding the supporting objects.
 DrawingSpoolNavigator.dll - Returns the spool, its connected parts, and their features.
This rule is specific to pipe spools.
 AssemblyNavigator.dll - Returns the assemblies, pipe spool, penetration spool, its
connected parts, and their features. This rule is specific to assemblies.
 SystemRangeNavigator.dll - Returns the Equipment objects, as specified by the "what"
filter. It also returns design hierarchy children of the Equipment, including any Route objects
that are children of the Equipment (Runs, Parts, and Features). This rule is specific to
Equipment objects.
When you edit the template associated to an Orthographic Drawing by Query component, such
as the HgrSup3View package, you can set the navigator rule assigned to each drawing view.
Right-click the component or package and select Edit Template to open the drawing template in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. Select and right-click a drawing view to display the Drawing
View Properties and set the navigator rule. For more information, see the SmartSketch
Drawing Editor Help.

Orthographic Drawings by Query Common Tasks

The following tasks are used when you create orthographic drawings by query. For more
information on the filters required to create Orthographic Drawings by Query, see Drawings by
Query Filters (on page 216).

Setup an Orthographic Drawing by Query Component

Setup allows you to select the appropriate filter for an Orthographic Drawing by Query
component. When you select a filter in Setup, you are specifying the "what" portion of the query.
In other words, you are specifying the objects to be included in the drawing. You can also
specify how much extra space you want to include around the objects. To setup an Orthographic
Drawing by Query component with the appropriate filter, right-click the component and select
Setup. For more information, see Setup an Orthographic Drawing by Query component (on
page 218).

Edit the Template

Edit the template associated to an Orthographic Drawing by Query component. Editing the
template allows you to set the navigation rule assigned to each drawing view. Right-click the
component or package, and select Edit Template to open the drawing template in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. Select and right-click a drawing view to display the Drawing
View Properties, and set the navigator rule. For more information, see the SmartSketch
Drawing Editor Help.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 214

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

You can also edit the drawing border template to meet your output requirements. For more
information, see "Edit Border Template Command (Tools Menu) in the Drawings and Reports
Reference Data Guide.

Save the Orthographic Drawing Component as a Package

Save the Orthographic Drawing by Query component as a package so you can join it with a
Drawings by Query Manager to generate the query drawings. For more information, see Save
a package (on page 77).

Add a Drawings by Query Manager

Create the Drawings by Query Manager, then set it up to specify the "where" portion of the
query for the Orthographic and Piping Isometric Drawing components. For more information,
see Set up a Drawings by Query Manager component (on page 219).

Run the Query

Execute the query specified by the Orthographic Drawing by Query component and the
Drawings by Query Manager. For more information, see Run Query (Shortcut Menu) (on page
70).

Create or Update the Drawings

Create or update drawings by right-clicking the component and selecting the appropriate
command. For more information, see Updating Documents (on page 78).

Viewing the Drawing Log

Display the drawing log, which details any messages associated with the drawing. For more
information, see View Log Command (on page 88).

Set Drawing Properties

Specify the properties for the drawing component or drawing documents by right-clicking and
selecting Properties. For more information, see Edit document properties (on page 48).

Comparing 2D Drawing Objects to 3D Model Objects

Open or edit a drawing document and compare the 2D drawing objects in the drawing document
to 3D model objects. For more information, see Compare 2D Drawing Object to 3D Model
Object (on page 362).

Publish the Orthographic Drawing

Publish the Orthographic Drawing by Query documents. You can publish documents only if your
model has been registered using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard. For more information, see
Publishing Documents (on page 424).
The viewable files created when you publish drawings and reports provide
relationship links to the 3D Model Data. You must also publish the 3D Model Data to provide the
navigation between the viewable files and the 3D Model Data. For more information, see 3D
Model Data (on page 188).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 215

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

See Also
Layers (SmartSketch Drawing Editor Tools Menu) (on page 402)
Drawings and Reports Naming Rules (on page 95)

Drawings by Query Filters

Filters determine the contents of the documents produced by Drawings by Query components
(3D Model By Query, Orthographic, Isogen Isometric, and Drawings by Query Manager). For
Orthographic and Isogen Isometric Drawings by Query components, the Setup command
specifies a what filter that access the model database and determines which objects are
included in the drawings, as well as which hierarchy is traversed to create a tree in the
Management Console. Setup then defines a Drawings by Query Manager component to
specify a where filter that determines the position in the hierarchy and, therefore, the location of
the objects included in the drawing.
For example, if you are creating Orthographic drawings that include pipe supports, you create a
new Orthographic Drawings by Query component, and then run Setup on the component to
select a normal filter that returns only pipe support objects. For example, you might choose the
Pipe Supports filter as shown below:

After saving your Orthographic Drawings by Query component setup as a package, you then
define a Drawings by Query Manager component to determine where in the model to collect the
objects you specified in the what filter. When you run Setup on the Drawings by Query Manager
component, you select a normal filter.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 216

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

When you run the query, the software compounds the where filter with the what filter to return
the needed objects. Each object is documented in a drawing using the template and rules that
you setup for the package. The following graphic shows an example drawing using the Pipe
Supports filter:

For more information on defining filters, see the Common User's Guide available from Help >
Printable Guides.
A what filter can specify non-graphical objects, such as various system nodes in the
System tab, folders in the Space tab, WBS projects and items in the WBS tab, and Reference
3D Model nodes in the Reference 3D tab of the Workspace Explorer. When you specify
non-graphical objects in the what filter, you must also specify a Navigator Rule in the Drawing
View Properties dialog box.
You can use the SystemRangeNavigator.dll Navigator Rule to include all graphical
objects under a non-graphical object. For more information on navigation rules, see the
Navigator Rules section in Orthographic Drawings by Query (on page 213).
See Also
Orthographic Drawings by Query Common Tasks (on page 214)

Setup (Orthographic Drawing by Query Component)

Sets component options for creating Orthographic Drawings by Query. This command is
available when you right-click the Orthographic Drawing by Query component.
Setup Dialog Box (Orthographic Drawing by Query Component) (on page 218)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 217

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

Setup an Orthographic Drawing by Query component

1. Right-click the folder where you want to store the new Orthographic Drawing by Query
component, and select New > Orthographic Drawing by Query.
The Orthographic Drawing by Query component is created in the folder.
2. Right-click the Orthographic Drawing by Query component and select Setup.
The Select Filter dialog box displays.
3. Select the filter that specifies the objects to include in the drawing. Click Properties to
display the current filter properties. For more information on filters for Drawings by Query,
see Drawings by Query Filters (on page 216).
4. If you want extra space included around the objects, specify a Volume Growth value. The
larger the value, the more space is included around each object.
5. If you want to include the supported objects in the volume, set Expand Volume to Include
Supported Objects to On.

 This option is only available for Hangers and Supports drawings that use the
HngSupRangeNavigator.dll, HngSupNoSupportingRangeNav.dll, or
SystemRangeNavigator.dll navigator rules.
 You can control this option by editing the XML file for the template. To turn Expand
Volume to Include Supported Objects on, set the <clipsupported> node to -1. To
turn it off, set the node to 0.
6. Click OK.
To generate orthographic drawings with using the component, you need to save it as a package
and associate it to a Drawings by Query Manager. For more information, see Set up a
Drawings by Query Manager component (on page 219).

 To delete a component, right-click it and select Delete.

 To rename a component, right-click it and select Rename.

Setup Dialog Box (Orthographic Drawing by Query

Component)
Filter
Identifies the filter that defines the what portion of the query. The filter determines the
objects included in the drawings when they are generated. Select More in the Filter list to
display the Select Filter dialog box. Click Properties to display the Filter Properties
dialog box. For more information on filters for Orthographic Drawings by Query, see
Drawings by Query Filters (on page 216).
Volume Growth
Specifies the growth range, or extra space, that you want to include around the objects
identified by the query. The larger the setting, the more space is included around the object.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 218

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

Expand Volume to Include Supported Objects

Expands the drawing volume to fit the supported object. If the supported object is not a
straight feature, the entire graphic of the supported object is shown. If the supported object
is a straight feature, the segment encapsulated in the drawing volume is shown.

 This option is only available for Hangers and Supports drawings that use the
HngSupRangeNavigator.dll, HngSupNoSupportingRangeNav.dll, or
SystemRangeNavigator.dll navigator rules.
 You can control this option by editing the xml file for the template. To turn Expand Volume
to Include Supported Objects on, set the <clipsupported> node to -1. To turn it off, set
the node to 0.
See Also
Setup (Orthographic Drawing by Query Component) (on page 217)

Select Filter
Specifies a filter for orthographic or Isogen isometric drawings created by Drawings by Query
components. The filter narrows the objects returned for the drawings.
For more information on setting up filters for Drawings by Query components, see Drawings by
Query Filters (on page 216).
Select Filter Dialog Box (on page 122)

Setup (Drawings by Query Manager Component

Shortcut Menu)
Sets options for creating a Drawings by Query Manager component. This command is available
on the shortcut menu when you right-click a Drawings by Query Manager component.
The Drawings by Query Manager component is used in conjunction with other components,
such as the Orthographic and Isogen Isometric Drawing by Query components, to complete the
query for objects in the model. The Drawings by Query Manager provides the filter that specifies
the where side of the query. It tells the query where to look for the objects specified by the
component what filter.
Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Query Manager Component) (on page 220)

Set up a Drawings by Query Manager component

The Drawings by Query Manager component works in conjunction with the Orthographic
Drawing by Query and Isogen Isometric Drawing by Query components. Before using this
command, you must create packages for your Orthographic Drawing by Query and Isogen
Isometric Drawing by Query components. For more information, see Save Package Command
(on page 76).
1. Right-click the folder in which to create your Drawings by Query Manager.
The software displays the Add Component dialog box.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 219

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

You can store the Drawings by Query Manager anywhere in the Console, but it is
best to store it in the same location as the components with which it works.
2. Select the Drawings by Query Manager component, and then click OK.
The software creates the Drawings by Query Manager component in the folder.
3. Right-click the Drawings by Query Manager component, and then select Setup to specify
the properties for the component.
The software displays Setup dialog box.
4. Specify a filter in the Filter field. The list shows the most recently selected filters. Select
More in the list to display the Select Filter dialog box, and then specify a filter. Click
Properties to display the current filter properties.
The filter that you select is the where portion of the query, as opposed to the what
portion specified when you set up the Orthographic Drawing by Query or Isogen Isometric
Drawing by Query component. The filter that you specify here tells where in the model you
want to look for the objects. For more information on filters for Drawings by Query, see
Drawings by Query Filters (on page 216).
5. In the Package field, specify the Orthographic Drawing by Query or Isogen Isometric
Drawing by Query package that you created. The list contains the most recently selected
packages. Select More to display the Select Package dialog box. For example, if you are
defining a Drawings by Query Manager for an Orthographic Drawing by Query, select an
Orthographic Drawing by Query package.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
To create the drawings, you need to run the query. For more information, see Run Query
(Shortcut Menu) (on page 70).

 To delete a component, right-click the component, and then select Delete.

 To rename a component, right-click the component, and then select Rename.

Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Query Manager Component)

Sets options for creating Drawings by Query Manager components.
You must create an Orthographic Drawing by Query, Isogen Isometric Drawing by
Query, or 3D Model by Query package before setting up the Drawings by Query Manager
component. For more information, see Save Package Command (on page 76).
Filter
Identifies the filter to use to define the where portion of the query. The software uses the
filter to determine where to look for the objects requested in Orthographic Drawing by Query
and Isogen Isometric Drawing by Query components when they are generated. Select More
in the list to display the Select Filter dialog box. Click Properties to display the current
filter properties. For more information on filters for the Drawings by Query Manager, see
Drawings by Query Filters (on page 216).
Package
Specifies the package to use in completing the query.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 220

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

See Also
Setup (Drawings by Query Manager Component Shortcut Menu) (on page 219)

Run Query (Shortcut Menu)

Runs the query associated with the selected Drawings by Query Manager component. For
example, if you execute Run Query on an Isogen Isometric Drawing by Query package
associated with a Drawings by Query Manager, the software looks for piping in the model. The
query results display beneath the style in the Management Console. You can create isometric
drawings from the query results by right-clicking on the component and selecting Create
Drawing(s).
If you have an Orthographic Drawing by Query package associated to a Drawings by Query
Manager, the Run Query command runs the query associated with the components, collects
the objects from the database, and builds the information that will be included in the drawing.
You can then create orthographic drawings from the query results by running the Create
Drawing(s) command on the Orthographic Drawing component.
The Run Query command uses the filters specified when you performed Setup components.

 When working in a Global Workshare Configuration with users logging into both Host and
Satellite systems for more than one site, you can encounter problems with the filters defined
for a Drawing by Query package. For example, if you create a Filter Root Folder for a
particular site, and then you try to run queries for drawings associated to this filter from
another site, the Run Query command is unable to update the drawings due to a lack of
permission against the Filter Root Folder. You have to move or transfer the Filter Root
Folder to the appropriate site where the Run Query command is executed.
 If the selected package was created and added manually, the folder name for the package
must match the value for pkgid in the XML file. Edit the name of the folder to match the
pkgid value.
In marine mode, this command displays in the Ship Root and Folder shortcut
menus for drawings by rule, but is not used with drawing by rule components.
See Also
Orthographic Drawings by Query (on page 213)
Create Drawing(s) Command (on page 39)

Create Orthographic Drawings by Query for volumes

The following procedure provides an example workflow for creating an Orthographic Drawing by
Query to find volumes in the model. The software collects the volumes based on the filters
specified and generates a drawing for each volume. The view style associated with the template
you are using hides the volume and show the objects inside the volume.
This method of creating volume drawings is very similar to creating volume drawings
using the Volume component in previous versions of the software. You use a template to specify
how each volume is managed and placed. The advantage of using an Orthographic Drawing by
Query component is that you do not have to place the volumes in the Space Management task
as Drawing Volumes. You can use any type of Space Management volume to create the
Orthographic Drawings by Query.
This procedure involves 3D tasks as well as the Drawings and Reports task.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 221

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

1. In the Space Management task, create volumes that contain the objects you want to include
in your drawings. For example, you can use the Place Volumes By Grid command to
create volumes based on your grid system definition. For information on the Place Volume
commands, see the Space Management User's Guide available from Help > Printable
Guides.
2. In any of the 3D tasks, use the Tools > Select by Filter command to create a what filter to
look for the volume objects. For example, on the Select Filter dialog box, create a new
model filter called What Filter for Grid Volumes. Select Object Type > Space Entities.

Select the Properties tab to define volume properties to simplify the query. For example,
you could set the filter to look for the Name property with a specific value such as 0001Grid.

3. Go to the Drawings and Reports task and create an Orthographic Drawing by Query
component. For more information, see Setup an Orthographic Drawing by Query component
(on page 218). When you specify the filter during setup of the component, select the what
filter you create that looks for the volumes.
4. Right-click the component and select Edit Template to place drawing views for your
volumes.
When you edit the template associated to an Orthographic Drawing by Query
component, you can set the navigation rule assigned to each drawing view. The navigator
rules for Orthographic Drawings by Query tell the software how to traverse elements to be
included in the range for the drawing view objects. Right-click the component or package
and select Edit Template to open the drawing template in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
Select and right-click a drawing view to display the Drawing View Properties and set the
navigator rule. For more information, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
5. Right-click the component and select Save Package. For more information, see Save
Package Command (on page 76).
6. Create a Query Manager to define the where side of the query, which determines where in
the model to look for the volumes you created.
Set up a Drawings by Query Manager component (on page 219)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 222

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

7. Right-click the Drawings by Query Manager, and select Run Query.

8. Right-click the Drawings by Query Manager, and select Create Drawing(s) to generate
the drawings based on the objects returned by the query and the Orthographic Drawing By
Query package you specified. You can also navigate through the Management Console
hierarchy and use the Create Drawing(s) command from the folder levels.
9. Update the drawing documents to save the changes. For more information on updating
documents, see Updating Documents (on page 78).
See Also
Orthographic Drawings by Query Common Tasks (on page 214)
Setup (Drawings by Query Manager Component Shortcut Menu) (on page 219)
Setup (Orthographic Drawing by Query Component) (on page 217)

Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Drawing by

Query)
Specifies properties for the selected drawing view using drawing by query. You can access this
dialog box when you select and right-click on a drawing view and then select Properties on the
shortcut menu.
Info Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 276)
Format Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 277)
View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 223)
See Also
Orthographic Drawings by Query (on page 213)

View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies a name for the view. You must type a name in order to create a view.
Description
Provides a description for the drawing view.
Style
Specifies a view style, which includes rules for filters, updates, and graphics. The view style
controls the output characteristics of the view on the generated drawing. The list displays
the 10 most recently used view styles in the session. Click More... to display the Select
View Style dialog box.
Use object coordinate system
Select this option to use the object coordinate system.
Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the drawing view.
Scale
Provides the scale of the drawing view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 223

 Orthographic Drawings by Query

Navigation Rule
Specifies the type of navigation rule.
Convert report output to text boxes (no Excel)
Select this option to convert the report output to text boxes and not into MS Excel.
Report Justification
Specifies the justification of the report window. Select Top-Left, Top-Right, Center-Center,
Bottom-Left, or Bottom-Right to align the report to one of these positions. For example, if
you select Top-Right, the top-right corner of the report window is aligned to the top-right
corner of the view.

 The Report Justification option is enabled when you select Convert report output to
text boxes (no Excel) option.
 The report justification properties does not work for dependent reports.
 The Center-Center option is the only justification option that scales the report window to
fit the view.
 If you select the Top-Left option, the resulting report view is as shown below.

SmartFrame
Report

 If a report view is smaller or larger than a SmartFrame, the SmartFrame will be resized
based on the report contents as shown below.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 224

SECTION 15
Volume Drawings
The Volume Drawing component uses a template to create drawings. You can place a view
on the template and associate the view with a view style to control the output. To define the
contents of the view, you create a drawing volume in the model. Before you create these types
of drawings, an administrator should create or edit drawing view styles and templates for use
with the drawings. For example, you can place title block labels and reports on the templates to
reflect your project or company standards.
After you have your view styles and templates in place, you are ready to start creating drawings.
The volume drawings require that the changes occur within the drawing template.
The software allows you to place several views on a template, each with independent scale. In
the Space Management task, you can place a volume, which is associated to single or multiple
views. The volume you create in Space Management is associated with all the views you create
within a volume drawing template. Therefore, in a multiple view volume drawing, you can have
multiple views of the same volume, and each view specifies the style, scale, and orientation for
the volume associated with the view. If the volume you create is too big for a particular view at
its scale, the volume is clipped.
For example, if you place two views in a drawing template with the following property settings:
 DrawingView1 - Size 6" x 6", Scale 1" = 1', and Orientation = Plan
 DrawingView2 - Size 6" x 6", Scale 1" = 1', and Orientation = North,
you use the Place Volume By 2-Points command in the Space Management task from
coordinates (0,0,0) to (6,6,6). In this case, the volume is exactly the right size based on scale
and orientation. The generated drawing contains the complete contents of the volume.
However, if your volume was placed from (0,0,0) to (8,6,6), the volume is too big for the drawing
view on the template. The maximum volume size the view can accommodate is no more than 6
inches on each side. The software centers the volume in the drawing view, effectively giving you
the information from (1,0,0) to <7,6,6 in the output drawing.
The overall processing for volume drawings is as follows:
 Identify a drawing volume. This is a query of all the objects that have been created in the
database which reside inside the volume borders. The objects do not have to be visible or
even in the current workspace to be included.
 When the drawing is created, the software checks the objects from the volume query
against the list of filters in the specified view style.
 If an object in the volume matches one of the specified view style filters, the software applies
the rules set for the object filter. If the object does not match a filter, it is not included in the
drawing view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 225

 Volume Drawings

The following conceptual graphic shows the workflow for creating volume drawings:

The software applies the view styles in a top-down manner. If an object finds its match in several
filters, the last one applied (the bottommost style) overrides any preceding style rules.
When a drawing is updated, it can be published by right-clicking the document and selecting
Publish on the right-click menu. The document is published as a viewable graphic file; no
physical data is published. For more information, see Publishing Documents in any of the Smart
3D Drawings user's guides, available from Help > Printable Guides.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 226

 Volume Drawings

Volume Drawings Common Tasks

The following tasks are used frequently when you create volume drawings.

Create a Volume Component

Create a Volume component using the New command. For more information, see Add a
package of components (on page 42).

Edit the Volume Component Template

The template for the volume drawing defines the size and location of the frames that will contain
the drawing volumes. For more information, see Edit a volume drawing template (on page 231).
If your volume drawing requires a key plan, you can include it by placing one while in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For more information, see Place a Key Plan (on page 390). For
additional information, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.

Place Volumes in Space Management

In the Space Management task, create volumes using one of the Place Drawing Volume
commands on the vertical toolbar. For more information, see Defining Drawing Volumes (on
page 228). For detailed information on these commands, refer to the Space Management User's
Guide.

Create the Volume Drawing Document

Right-click the component and select Create Drawing to create the volume drawing document.
The drawing documents are created. For more information, see Create Drawing (Volume
Drawings) (on page 229).

Updating Volume Documents

Update the volume drawing document. For more information, see Updating Documents (on
page 78).

Viewing the Drawing Log

View the drawing log to see any messages associated with the drawing. For more information,
see View Log Command (on page 88).

Set Drawing Properties

Specify the properties for the drawing component or drawing documents by right-clicking and
selecting Properties. For more information, see Edit document properties (on page 48).

Comparing 2D Drawing Objects to 3D Model Objects

Open a drawing document in a 3D task and compare the 2D drawing objects in the drawing
document to 3D model objects. For more information, see Compare 2D Drawing Object to 3D
Model Object (on page 362).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 227

 Volume Drawings

Manually Add Labels

In many cases, you need to include additional labels or dimensions on the volume drawing after
it is created. For more information, see Place a Manual Label (on page 325). This is an optional
task and is not required to create volume drawings.

Publish the Volume Drawing

Publish the Volume Drawing. You can publish only if your model has been registered using the
SmartPlant Registration Wizard. For more information, see Publishing Documents (on page
424).
The viewable files created when you publish drawings and reports provide
relationship links to the 3D Model Data. You must also publish the 3D Model Data to provide the
navigation between the viewable files and the 3D Model Data. For more information, see 3D
Model Data (on page 188).
See Also
Layers (SmartSketch Drawing Editor Tools Menu) (on page 402)
Drawings and Reports Naming Rules (on page 95)

Defining Drawing Volumes

Drawing volumes are a critical piece of the volume drawing generation process. Drawing
volumes are different from the other drawing components in that they exist in the
three-dimensional model as objects.
After you place a drawing view on a volume template, you must define one or more volumes for
the view. Volumes clip the results of a query for a drawing view, which displays a
two-dimensional representation of the model.
You define a drawing volume with the Place Drawing Volume commands in the Space
Management task. It is possible to size the volume based on the grid coordinates in the model.
Volumes can be placed by view (if single view), by 2-points, by 4-points, and by object selection.
When you use drawing volumes with key plans, you can specify that the key plan is
created with a coordinate system relative to the drawing volume view. For more information on
placing key plans, see Place a Key Plan (on page 390). For additional information, see the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
Volumes are stored in the Model database. When a 3D task such as Piping is active, you can
see the defined volumes on the Space tab of the Workspace Explorer. With this solution, you
can locate and manipulate drawing volumes quickly and easily. When you create a drawing
volume, the software automatically names the volume and places it in the space hierarchy.
If you delete a drawing volume in the model, the software deletes any
associated drawings and views.
See Also
Create a volume drawing (on page 229)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 228

 Volume Drawings

Create Drawing (Volume Drawings)

Generates a drawing for a volume component. Before you can use this command to generate
drawings, you must complete the steps below.
 Create at least one Volume Drawing Type component in the hierarchy.
 Define an Orthographic view style using the Tools > Define View Style command in this
task.
 Create at least one volume drawing view with the Place Drawing Volume commands in the
Space Management task.
If the drawing view you created on the drawing component template is larger than the
volume you created using the Place Drawing Volume command, the software centers the
volume on the drawing view. If the volume is smaller than the drawing view, the software clips
the volume to fit the drawing view according to its scale.

Create a volume drawing

1. In the Console, verify that at least one volume drawings component exists. If none exists,
add a component for volume drawings.
Add a package of components (on page 42)
2. Right-click the volume drawings component, and select Edit Template on the shortcut
menu.
The Select Template dialog box displays.
3. Select a template file.
You can modify the templates in this task by clicking Tools > Edit Border
Template. For example, place drawing property labels or reports in the title block and save.
4. Click Place Drawing View to place one or more drawing views on the template.
Place a Drawing View for Volume Drawings (on page 381)
You cannot undo a drawing view delete operation. A message box displays when you press
Delete for a selected view, providing a chance to cancel the operation.
5. Select a view style for the drawing view.
You can create and edit view styles by clicking Tools > Define View Style in the
Drawings and Reports task.
6. Add symbols to the drawing view. You may need to click Symbol Explorer to display
the symbol browser.
For example, you can place a north arrow symbol. When the drawing is generated,
the north arrow will orient itself according to the view direction.
7. Exit and save the template.
8. Create one or more drawing volumes to associate with the drawing view by switching to the
Space Management task and clicking one of the Place Drawing Volume commands.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 229

 Volume Drawings

9. Update the drawing component documents.

 The software allows you to place several views on a template. In the Space Management
task, you can place a volume, which is associated to all the views.
 After you generate drawings, the software does not allow you to edit the view scale.
However, you can change the view scale on the template.
 You can export drawings to files by right-clicking a folder, component, or single drawing, and
then selecting Save As on the shortcut menu.
 If you are using Office 2003, in Microsoft Excel under Tools > Macro > Security > Trusted
Publishers tab, check the Trust Access to Visual Basic Project option.
 If you are using Office 2007 or Office 2010, click Microsoft Office to access Excel Option.
Go to the Trust Center category and select Trust Center Settings. Select the Macro
Settings category and check Trust access to the VBA project object model.
 For more information about Microsoft Office and service packs, refer to the Microsoft web
site (http://www.microsoft.com/) (http://www.microsoft.com/).
 If the drawing view you created on the drawing component template is larger than the
volume you created using the Place Drawing Volume command, the software centers the
volume on the drawing view. If the volume is smaller than the drawing view, the software
clips the volume to fit the drawing view according to its scale.

Edit Template (Volume Drawings Component)

Allows you to modify a template for a volume drawing component in SmartSketch Drawing
Editor. Use the Template Toolbar commands to add a drawing view, report, or key plan.

When you place objects like drawing views, key plan views, report views, and drawing property
labels, the software automatically places them on the DwgTemplate layer when you save the
drawing document. You should not place manual markups on the DwgTemplate layer.
If you use other native SmartSketch Drawing Editor commands (such as Place Line or Place
Dimension) to add manual markups to the template, put them on the Default layer or on a
customized layer (for example, a layer named AnnotationLayer). This preserves the changes
when you update drawings. For more information on layers, see Layers (SmartSketch Drawing
Editor Tools Menu) (on page 402).

Before you click the Edit Template command for a volume drawing, you can use the Tools >
Edit Border Template command to place drawing property labels in the title block of a
template. For more information, see Place a Drawing Property Label on a Template (on page
393).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 230

 Volume Drawings

Edit a volume drawing template

1. Right-click a volume drawing component in the Management Console, and select Edit
Template.
2. On the Select Template dialog box, select a border template for the drawing, and click OK.
The template opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

3. In the SmartSketch Drawing Editor window, click Place Drawing View . Click and drag
to place a view. You can place multiple volume drawing views.
You cannot undo a drawing view delete operation. A message box displays when you press
Delete for a selected view, providing a chance to cancel the operation.
4. On the Properties dialog box for each drawing view, provide a name and description for the
drawing view.
5. Specify a style and scale on the drawing sheet, and set the view orientation for each
drawing view.

If your volume drawing requires a key plan, you can place one with the Place Key Plan
command. For more information, see Place a Key Plan (on page 390), or the SmartSketch
Drawing Editor Help.
6. Save the changes you made and close SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Volume

Drawings)
Specifies properties for the selected drawing view in a volume drawing. You can access this
dialog box when you select and right-click on a drawing view and then select Properties on the
shortcut menu.
Info Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 276)
Format Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 277)
View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 223)
See Also
Volume Drawings (on page 225)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 231

SECTION 16
Search Folders
Search Folder allows you to search for documents based on common properties such as
out-of-date status, approval, or documents that have been published to a certain contract in
integrated environment. You create a search folder by right-clicking the root model or a
folder in the Management Console or the Drawing Console and selecting New > Search
Folder.
After running the query defined for a search folder, you can perform such tasks as Update or
Publish as if you are working from the actual component for the documents.
The documents found by a search folder query are listed in the Detail View. You are able to
interact with the search folder documents just as if you were dealing with the actual components
that own the documents. Search folders can also be used for reports.

Search Folder Shortcut Menu

Right-click a search folder component to display the shortcut menu.
Run Query
Runs the query specified by the search folder setup definition. If you have not run the search
folder Setup command, this command is not available.
Publish
Publishes a single document or all documents in the imported folder. This command is only
available if the model is registered with SmartPlant Foundation.
Update and Publish
Updates and immediately publishes a single document or all documents in the search folder.
This command is only available if the model is registered with SmartPlant Foundation.
Setup
Specifies the query to run for the search folder. For more information, see Setup (Search
Folder) (on page 234).
Setup for the search folder does not perform the individual setups for any of the
drawing by query documents found in the search folder query and shown in the detail view.
Copy
Copies the search folder. It does not copy the associated documents shown in the detail
view area. The search folder setup information is saved with the copy. After you paste the
copy to a different location in the Console hierarchy, you can run Setup again as needed
for the new search folder.
Delete
Deletes the search folder. It does not delete any of the documents found in the associated
detail view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 232

 Search Folders

Rename
Renames the search folder. It does not affect any of the documents found in the associated
detail view.
Revise
Allows you to revise all documents in the search folder without publishing them. This
command is only available if the model is registered with SmartPlant Foundation. For more
information, see Revise (on page 421).
Save Package
Allows you to save the search folder and its definition as a package to be reused in other
folder locations in the hierarchy. If you have not run the search folder Setup command, this
command is not available.
Properties
Displays the Configuration Properties for the document.
To change properties on the document, go to the root location of the document.
The search folder does not participate in any propagation of properties to its documents.

 After a search folder is placed in the console, it follows the same localized naming
convention as a folder, such as "New Search Folder" and "New Search Folder (2)."

 Unlike a folder , you cannot create child components in a search folder . This includes
pasting existing components; however, you can copy the search folder and paste it
elsewhere in the hierarchy.
 Performing Publish, Update and Publish, and Revise on a folder does not include
documents under a child search folder. The commands need to be performed separately on
the child search folder in order for its documents to be affected.
 You can run commands from the search folder level to modify all of the documents within
the folder, or you can modify the individual documents by selecting them in the Detail View.

Create a search folder

1. Right-click the model root or a folder in the Management Console, and select New >
Search Folder.
The search folder is added to the hierarchy.
2. Right-click on the new search folder, and select Setup.
The Setup dialog box displays.
3. Select More in the Filter list, and select a filter. Click Properties to display the Filter
Properties dialog box.
4. Select More in the Start From list, and select a component from the Select Drawings
Component dialog box.
5. Click OK.
6. Right-click the search folder, and select Run Query.
The documents returned by the query are added to the Search Folder listing in the Detail

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 233

 Search Folders

View.
7. To rename the folder, right-click the folder, and select Rename, or select the folder, and
press F2 on the keyboard. Type a new name.

Setup (Search Folder)

Sets options for creating a search folder. This command is available on the Search Folder
shortcut menu and displays the Setup dialog box.
Setup for the search folder does not perform the individual setups for any of the
drawing by query documents found in the search folder query and shown in the detail view.

Setup Dialog Box (Search Folder) (on page 234)

Setup Dialog Box (Search Folder)

Specifies a filter that identifies the objects to be included in the search folder query. The Setup
definition tells the query "where" to look for the objects specified by the component "what" filter.
Filter
Identifies the filter that defines the what portion of the query. The software uses the filter to
determine the objects included in the drawings when they are generated. Select More in the
Filter list to display the Select Filter dialog box. Click Properties to display the Filter
Properties dialog box. For more information, see Search Folder Filters (on page 234).
Start From
Specifies the location in the model from which to start the object search. This is the "where"
side of the query. Select More in the Start From combo box to display the Select Location
dialog box.

Search Folder Filters

Search folders use filters to specify how the component identifies the documents to include in
the search folder. You can use Drawings and Reports object properties to define filters when
creating search folder components. This allows you to search for documents based on common
properties such as out-of-date status, approval, or documents that have been published to a
certain contract in integrated environment.
When you run Setup on a search folder, you can create filters that check for specific drawing or
report object properties.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 234

 Search Folders

The following examples show how you might create filters to search for specific drawing object
properties:

Basic Drawing Document Properties - Title, Area, and Signature

You can use the Drawing Sheet object and its properties to look for properties associated with
the drawing documents. The following procedure shows how to access the Title, Area, and
Signature properties on the drawing and report documents.
1. On the Properties tab of the Filter Properties dialog box, select More in the Property field.
The Select Properties dialog box displays.
2. Under Object type used as the basis for the property identification, select Drawing
Sheets.
3. Under Relationship, select Direct Properties of Object Type.
You can now search the documents for specified properties under Select one or more
properties. For example, you can search specifically for the Date Created value on the
documents.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 235

 Search Folders

Issue or Revision Properties

To search specifically for issue or revision properties on the drawing sheet or drawing
component, set the Relationship to Drawing Sheet (or Drawing Component) to Drawing
Issues or Drawing Sheet (or Drawing Component) to Drawing Revisions when setting the
filter properties.

Baseline, Style, Smart 3D, or Custom Attribute Properties

To search specifically for baseline, style, Smart 3D, or custom attribute properties, set the
Relationship to Drawing Sheet to Drawing Child Properties, and set Related object type to
Drawing Child Properties.

See Also
Setup Dialog Box (Search Folder) (on page 234)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 236

SECTION 17
Imported Folders
Imported Folder allows you to import an external Windows folder containing any type of file
available in Windows. You create an imported folder by right-clicking a folder in the
Management Console or the Drawing Console and selecting New > Imported Folder.
Imported files are opened using their standard Windows default software. For example, a .docx
file opens in Microsoft Word.

Imported Folder Shortcut Menu

Right-click an imported folder component to display the shortcut menu.
Delete
Deletes the imported folder and its files from the database. Deleting does not affect the
original folder and files on the network drive.
Rename
Renames the imported folder. Renaming does not affect the files in the folder or the name of
the original folder on the network drive.
Revise
Allows you to revise all documents in the imported folder without publishing them. This
command is only available if the model is registered with SmartPlant Foundation and when
the documents are persisted in the model database. For more information, see Revise (on
page 421) and Setup Dialog Box (Imported Folder) (on page 239).
Export
Exports files in the imported folder to the specified folder path. This command is only
available after setup of the imported folder, and when the folder and files are persisted in the
database.
Refresh
Refreshes the status of files in the imported folder when the date of a file is earlier than the
date of the file the on the network drive. The icon of an out-of-date file is superimposed with
. This command is only available after setup of the imported folder.
Publish
Publishes a single document or all documents in the search folder. This command is only
available if the model is registered with SmartPlant Foundation and when the documents are
persisted in the model database. For more information, see Setup Dialog Box (Imported
Folder) (on page 239).
Update and Publish
Updates and immediately publishes a single document or all documents in the search folder.
This command is only available if the model is registered with SmartPlant Foundation and
when the documents are persisted in the model database. For more information, see Setup

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 237

 Imported Folders

Dialog Box (Imported Folder) (on page 239).

Setup
Specifies the folder to import. For more information, see Setup (Imported Folder) (on page
239).
Update Now
Updates all files in the imported folder to match the files on the network drive. This
command is only available after setup of the imported folder.
Properties
Displays the properties of the folder.

Imported Files
Right-click an imported file to display the shortcut menu.
Open
Opens the file with the appropriate Windows application.
Properties
Displays the properties of the file.
Update
Updates the file to match the files on the network drive. This command is only available after
setup of the imported folder.
Select a shared network folder (with a path beginning with \\) instead of a local
folder to allow refresh and update of file changes between users.
Unlike a folder , you cannot create or paste other components within the imported
folder .

Create an imported folder

1. Right click a folder in the Management Console, and select New > Imported Folder.
The imported folder is added to the hierarchy.
2. Right-click the folder, and select Setup.
The Setup dialog box displays.
3. Type the path in the Folder to Import box.
OR
Click Browse , navigate to the needed folder in the Browse for Folder dialog box, and
click OK.
4. In the Setup dialog box, click Persist in Database to add the imported files to the model
database.
5. Click OK.
The imported folder and its files are added to the hierarchy.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 238

 Imported Folders

6. To rename the folder, right-click the folder, and select Rename, or select the folder, and
press F2 on the keyboard. Type a new name.

Setup (Imported Folder)

Sets options for importing an external folder and its files. This command is available on the
Imported Folder shortcut menu and displays the Setup dialog box.

Setup Dialog Box (Imported Folder) (on page 239)

Setup Dialog Box (Imported Folder)

Specifies a folder containing the files to import.
You should import from a shared network folder having a path beginning with \\ to allow
everyone to have access to the same files and to avoid multiple file copies or unintended
overwriting of changes from another user. Windows handles read-only locking of the files when
they are open. You cannot import the %Temp% folder because it is used for file processing
during import.
Folder to Import
Specifies the folder path. Type a path, or click Browse to select a path.
Browse
Allows you to browse for a folder location. For more information, see Browse for Folder
Dialog Box (on page 239).
Persist in Database
When selected, adds imported files to the model database. When cleared, only the folder
path to the files is imported.
Export is not available when Persist in Database is cleared.

Browse for Folder Dialog Box

Displays a hierarchical list of folders. Select a folder from this list, and click OK to choose it, or
double-click a folder to display any sub-folders. The selection you make on this dialog box
appears in the Folder to Import box of the Setup dialog box.
Make New Folder
Creates a new folder in the hierarchy, beneath the currently selected folder.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 239

SECTION 18
Tools Menu
Several tools are provided within the Drawings and Reports task. These tools display on the
Tools menu in the Drawings and Reports task.

Reference Data Tools

The following commands on the Tools menu are for use by your reference data administrator.
They apply strictly to customizing orthographic drawing and marine mode drawings by rule
reference data:
 Define View Style
 Define Layout Style
 Edit Border Template
 Edit Layout Template
You do not use these commands in the normal workflow of creating drawings and reports. For
more information, see the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Other Tools
You can use the Custom Command tool to set up special macro commands you use in your
documents. Batch Management processes drawing updates and printing on a batch server.
Convert Legacy Snapshots converts legacy version 6.1 snapshot drawings to composed
drawings. For more information, see the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

In This Section
Convert Legacy Snapshots ......................................................... 240
Batch Processing - Intergraph Smart Batch Services................... 241
Custom Commands .................................................................... 245

Convert Legacy Snapshots

Converts legacy version 6.1 Snapshot drawings to Composed drawings. As of version
2007, Composed drawings replace Snapshot drawings as a more flexible way to create
orthographic drawings. Composed drawings allow you to have views that are managed by a
drawing region and associate the views to volumes and other views. If you have legacy
Snapshot Drawings in the Management Console, they are indicated in the Detail View with
yellow icons . You must convert legacy snapshot drawings to composed drawings in order to
edit, change document properties, update, revise, or publish them. To convert legacy snapshot
drawing to composed drawings, click Tools > Convert Legacy Snapshots.
Convert Legacy Snapshots Dialog Box (on page 241)
After converting the legacy Snapshot drawings, the icon updates, indicating that the drawing is
now available for editing and updating as a composed drawing. For more information on
composed drawings, see Composed Drawings (on page 201). You can open and edit a

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 240

 Tools Menu

composed drawing using the Tools > Drawings Console command in any of the other 3D
tasks, such as Common or Space Management.

Convert Legacy Snapshots Dialog Box

Shows the Management Console hierarchy with legacy version 6.1 Snapshot drawings
indicated with yellow icons so you can select and convert them to Composed drawings.
You access this dialog box when you select Tools > Convert Legacy Snapshots. Select a
node to convert all legacy snapshot drawings within the node, or you can select and convert a
single drawing document. Click OK to convert the selected drawing documents.
After converting the legacy Snapshot drawings, the icon updates, indicating that the drawing is
now available for editing and updating as a composed drawing.

Batch Processing - Intergraph Smart Batch Services

With batch processing, you can update, print, or refresh your documents without dedicating your
computer to the operation.

Drawings Batch Dialog Box (on page 241)

What do you want to do?

 Add Actions to Queue (on page 242)
 Create a Template (on page 243)

Drawings Batch Dialog Box

Updates, prints, and refreshes document batch jobs without requiring a dedicated computer for
the operation.
Available Actions
Lists the actions that you can perform within a batch job. The actions available are based on
permissions and document type.
 Refresh - Refreshes documents on a batch queue.
 Full Update - Updates all drawings by rule documents, regardless of the current status
of the documents. This action is only available in the Marine mode.
 Update - Updates documents on a batch queue.
 Save As - Specifies the file format to which to save Smart 3D drawings.
 Print - Schedules a document to be printed from a batch queue.
Actions to Queue
Lists the actions that are performed in the batch job.

 Remove - Removes an action from the queue.

 Clear - Removes all actions from the queue.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 241

 Tools Menu

Action Options
Defines the parameters of an action. The displayed options depend on the selected action.
Template Name
Saves print settings as a template. Type a name in the box, and click Save Settings as
Template. While optional, creating a new template is a quick method to submit a batch
job with the specified options.
Save Settings as Template
Creates a user-parameterized action.
Delete
Removes a template from Available Actions. This option is available only on
user-created templates.
Save As
For more information on the Save As action options, see Save As Dialog Box (on page
75).
In the Output Folder field, select a shared folder through its UNC path. A
UNC path has the general form of \\server\share.
Print
 Printer – Displays all printers configured on the client computer. The name of the printer
on the batch queue must match for the print to be successful.
 Copies – Specifies the number of copies to print.
 Black and White – Prints a black and white drawing, if checked.
 Orientation – Indicates the orientation of the printed output. Select Portrait or
Landscape.
 Paper Size – Displays the paper sizes supported by the selected printer.
Use 64-bit if available
Updates drawings with 64-bit processes. This option is only available for Update actions
performed on composed drawings.

 If you select Use 64-bit if available and run Update on a folder component containing
composed drawings and other drawing types, the composed drawings are updated with
64-bit processes. All other drawings are updated with 32-bit processes.
 You cannot update a composed drawing with 64-bit if the drawing contains a view style
that includes PDS reference data.
Schedule
Creates the job and opens the Schedule Batch dialog box.
If you click Schedule with no actions in Actions to Queue, you receive a
message, and the dialog box remains open.

Add Actions to Queue

You can set up batch jobs for a single document or for multiple documents.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 242

 Tools Menu

Single document:
1. Right-click on a single drawing either in the Detail View or in the Drawings Console, and
select Batch.
2. Select the action, and click Add to move it into Actions to Queue.

 You can add actions to the queue in any order, but the software processes the actions
in the following order: Refresh, Update, and then all other actions. If you add Update,
but you do not add Refresh, Update is the first action processed.
 You can only add one Save As action to the queue.
3. Define any action options. For more information, see Batch Processing - Intergraph Smart
Batch Services (on page 241).
4. Click Schedule to create the job and open the Schedule Batch dialog box.
Multiple documents:
1. Do one of the following:
a. Right-click a set of multi-selected documents or components in the Detail View, and
select Batch.
b. Right-click a component in the Management Console, Detail View, or Drawings
Console, and select Batch.
2. Select the action, and click Add to move it into Actions to Queue.

 You can add actions to the queue in any order, but the software processes the actions
in the following order: Refresh, Update, and then all other actions. If you add Update,
but you do not add Refresh, Update is the first action processed.
 You can only add one Save As action to the queue.
3. Define any action options. For more information, see Batch Processing - Intergraph Smart
Batch Services (on page 241).
4. Click Schedule to create the job and open the Schedule Batch dialog box.

Create a Template
Templates are user-parameterized actions that are saved in the session file and available for
future batch jobs. You can only create templates based on the Print action.
Create a new template:
1. Select the Print action, and click Add to move it to Actions to Queue.
2. In Action Options, make the necessary changes to the action.
3. Type a new Template Name for the action.
4. Click Save Settings As Template.
Delete a template:
1. Select the template to delete.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 243

 Tools Menu

2. In Action Options, click Delete.

Schedule [Task] Dialog Box

Queue
Displays the name of the queues configured by an administrator for the job. For more
information on configuring the queues, see Configure Queues for Jobs in the Project
Management User's Guide.
Run job
Sets the frequency with which the job runs. Jobs can be scheduled to run once or on a
regular interval (daily, weekly, or monthly). Depending on the job frequency selected,
additional controls display. These controls allow you to define more specific scheduling
information. The scheduling controls can be changed only at job submission.
Run on
Sets the time to start running the job.
Options
Opens the Optional Schedule Properties Dialog Box (on page 245) that you can use to
define a start and end date.
Run on box
Contains a calendar from which you can select the run date. This option is available when
you select Once from Run job.
Every X days
Specifies how many days pass between job runs. This option is available when you select
Daily from Run job.
Every X weeks
Specifies how many weeks pass between job runs. In addition, you can select on which
days the job runs. This option is available when you select Weekly from Run job.
Day X of the month
Specifies on which day of the month the job runs. This option is available when you select
Monthly from Run job.
The X Y of the month
Specifies on which day of the month the job runs. For example, you can select the last
Monday of the month. This option is available when you select Monthly from Run job.
Job Start
Notifies you when the job starts, if Outlook is set up.
Job Completion
Notifies when the job completes, if Outlook is set up.
Job Abort
Notifies you if the job aborts, if Outlook is set up.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 244

 Tools Menu

Address Book
Selects the name of the person to be notified by e-mail of the job status, if Outlook is set up.
If Outlook is not available, this option does not work. You can also type the address
manually. The person you define here receives an email with the job log files after the job
finishes.

 The Batch Services SMTP option must be configured on the batch server for this to work.
For more information, see the Intergraph Smart Batch Services documentation.
 The WinZip application is no longer required on the batch server to compress any emailed
attachments. Compression is now done with functionality included in Smart 3D.

Optional Schedule Properties Dialog Box

Provides more options on the Schedule Backup dialog box. This dialog box opens when you
click Options.
Start date
Sets an optional start date.
End date
Sets an optional end date, if checked.

Custom Commands
Provides you with application programming capability for the 3D software. Using Microsoft®
Visual Basic, you can create a custom command that groups a series of commands and
instructions into a single command that runs as an operation in the 3D software. As a result, you
can access the customized commands that directly relate to the work routine in your operation.
In Visual Basic, the Command Wizard helps you to build a custom command. For example, the
first Command Wizard step prompts you to identify general information, including command
name, project name, author, and company. You can start the wizard in Visual Basic by clicking
Command Wizard on the Add-Ins menu. For more information about installing the Command
Wizard and other programming resources, see the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Installation Guide
available by clicking Help > Printable Guides in the software.
After adding a custom command in the 3D software, you can edit it. The Edit Custom
Command dialog box requires you to specify the program identifier (prog_id), command name
and description, command priority, and a command line of arguments in a string.

Delivered Custom Commands

The following list provides descriptions and ProgIDs for the delivered custom commands:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 245

 Tools Menu

Custom ProgID Description

Command

Check SP3DCheckDatabaseIntegrity Creates records for the objects that need to

Database . be cleaned. You run this custom command
Integrity CCheckObj directly on a database (Site, Catalog, or
Model). After you run this command, you can
generate a report to review the errors that
the Check Database Integrity command
generated. For more information on the
Check Database Integrity command, see
the Database Integrity Guide available from
Help > Printable Guides.

Clean SP3DCleanDatabaseCmd. Deletes or cleans an object. This command

Database CCheckObj is used when an action on the Check
Database Integrity report is To Be
Removed or To Be Repaired. For more
information on deleting and cleaning objects
in the database, see the Database Integrity
Guide available from Help > Printable
Guides.

Create MenuDrawView. Saves and converts the contents of a

Drawing View CMenuDrawView three-dimensional graphic view window into
a snapshot view. The command creates a
rectangular object associated to a clipping
volume or volumes in the three-dimensional
model.
Before you create a snapshot view using this
command, you must have added at least one
composed drawing type to the Management
Console in the Drawings and Reports task.
You can save additional views by updating
the view contents and then saving the new
design. If you used the Tools > Hide
command to avoid displaying certain objects,
those objects are included in a composed
drawing you create.
You must have appropriate permissions to
access composed drawing types, or you
cannot use the Tools > Snapshot View
command. If you have only read permission,
you receive a message that alerts you to this
condition.
After you create the snapshot views, you can
add them to composed drawings when you
use the Tools > Drawings Console
command.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 246

 Tools Menu

Custom ProgID Description

Command

Drawings DwgCheckUtility,Ingr.SP3D. Checks drawing items for problems, such as

Check and Drawings.Client.Commands. mismatches between views, smartframes,
Repair Utility DwgCheckUtility. and OIDs; duplications of views,
RunChecksCmd smartframes, and OIDs; and invalid
dimensions with missing smartframe
attributes. After problems are found, you can
run repairs.
This command is intended for use by your
administrator.

Find Object SP3DFindObjectByReport. Finds objects with integrity problems in a

by OID FindObjects graphic view. Before running this command,
you must define your workspace to include
these objects. Run a database integrity
report, and use the reported OIDs of the
objects in the workspace definition. For more
information on the Find Objects by OID
custom command, see the Database
Integrity Guide available from Help >
Printable Guides.

Fix Project SP3DPRJMGTRepairCmd. Synchronizes the model name in the Model

Root FixCnfgProjectRoot database and the Site database. The name
in the Site database prevails.
You must run this command from
a task in the model, not from Project
Management.

Fix Sector DwgBinaryEditorCmd. Adjusts the sector size from small to large.
Size of FixSectorSize Documents that have many sheets and a
Documents small sector size can cause the software to
run out of memory.

Reset Design IMSEngFrameworkCmd. Modifies the Design Basis timestamp. With

Basis Time EngFrameworkCmd this command, you can set the time and date
Argument = back to a point in the past. This command is
ResetDesignBasisTime useful if, for any reason, there are delete
instructions that could not be processed.

Synchronize DwgSynchTemplatesCmd.Sy Repairs a drawing component that has

Drawing nchTemplates become corrupted by synchronizing it with a
Component different, uncorrupted drawing component.
Templates This command requires that the source
component is the same type as the corrupted
component, the source component must
have a template, and that the source
component cannot be corrupted. Also, the
number of views on the source component

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 247

 Tools Menu

Custom ProgID Description

Command
must be the same as the number of views on
the corrupted component. The names of the
views on the source component must match
the view names of the corrupted component.

Verify P&ID SP3DDisplayPIDService. Validates the internal connections between

Integrity VerifyPIDCmd objects on a P&ID and objects in the Model
database. This command is useful when
there is a problem displaying a P&ID or
selecting objects on a P&ID. The command
provides some basic troubleshooting
statistics: Number of design basis objects,
number of 3D objects (correlated), number of
P&ID objects, number of deleted P&ID OIDs,
and number of duplicate OIDs.

Custom Commands Dialog Box (on page 250)

Add Custom Command Dialog Box (on page 250)
Edit Custom Command Dialog Box (on page 251)

What do you want to do?

 Create custom commands (on page 248)
 Add custom commands (on page 249)
 Run a custom command (on page 249)
 Edit a custom command (on page 249)
 Delete a custom command (on page 249)

Create custom commands

1. Open Microsoft® Visual Basic.

 You do not create or modify custom commands within the software. You can edit the
code of the command in Visual Basic. You can edit a limited number of items, such as
the description of the command, using the Edit Custom Command dialog box.
 You must install the Command Wizard software in Visual Basic. The setup for the
Command Wizard is located at [Product Folder]\CommonApp\Tools\CommandWizard.
2. In Visual Basic, click Add-Ins > Command Wizard.
3. Complete all steps on each page of the Command Wizard.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 248

 Tools Menu

Add custom commands

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
2. On the Custom Commands dialog box, click Add.
3. On the Add Custom Command dialog box, type the program identifier you assigned to the
command in Microsoft® Visual Basic in the Command ProgID box.
4. Type the name you assigned to the command in the Command name box.
5. Type a phrase that describes the command in the Description box.
6. If necessary, change the option in the Priority section.
7. Type command line arguments in a string in the Argument box.
After you complete this procedure, the Custom Commands dialog box lists the
command you added to the software. You can run the command, edit the settings, or delete the
command.

Run a custom command

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
The Custom Commands dialog box opens.
2. To start a custom command you created, select the command in the list box, and click Run.
3. After the command runs, click Close on the Custom Commands dialog box.

Edit a custom command

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
The Custom Commands dialog box opens.
2. To change the options for a custom command, select the command in the list box, and click
Edit. For example, you can change the name and description of the command.
3. After completing the needed changes, click Close on the Custom Commands dialog box.
You must open the command in Microsoft® Visual Basic if you want to edit the
underlying code.

Delete a custom command

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
The Custom Commands dialog box opens.
2. Select the command in the list box, and click Delete. The software removes the command
from the list box; however, the command code is not deleted.
3. After completing the needed changes, click Close on the Custom Commands dialog box.
This action does not delete the DLL for the custom command. It just removes access
to the custom command from the Custom Commands dialog box.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 249

 Tools Menu

Custom Commands Dialog Box

Adds and edits customized commands you have created with the Command Wizard in
Microsoft® Visual Basic. For information on creating custom commands, see Create custom
commands (on page 248).
Command names
Lists the names of commands that have been added.
Run
Starts the custom command you select in the list box. For more information, see Run a
custom command (on page 249).
Close
Cancels the Custom Commands dialog box.
Edit
Opens the Edit Custom Command dialog box. You can change settings for the command,
such as the program identifier (prog_ID) and command name. For more information, see
Edit a custom command (on page 249).
Add
Installs the custom command into the software. For more information, see Add custom
commands (on page 249).
Delete
Removes the custom command from the software. For more information, see Delete a
custom command (on page 249).
Clear
Deletes the information you have typed in the boxes on the Custom Commands dialog
box.
Description
Contains an identifying phrase so you can better recognize the custom command with which
you are working.

Add Custom Command Dialog Box

Accesses a customized command you created in Microsoft® Visual Basic and saves the
command within the software.
Command ProgID
Identifies the program identifier for the custom command you created in Visual Basic.
Command name
Specifies the name you assigned to the custom command.
Description
Describes the custom command.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 250

 Tools Menu

Priority
Assigns a priority of High, Normal, or Low.
Argument
Specifies command line arguments in a string.
See Also
Create custom commands (on page 248)

Edit Custom Command Dialog Box

Changes options for a customized command you added to the software.
Command ProgID
Specifies the program identifier for the custom command you created in Microsoft® Visual
Basic.
Command name
Provides a text box for you to change the name you assigned to the custom command.
Description
Provides a text box to provide a descriptive phrase for the custom command.
Priority
Changes priority to High, Normal, or Low.
Argument
Change the command line arguments in a string.
Reset Default
Returns the dialog box to its default settings.
See Also
Create custom commands (on page 248)

Delivered Custom Commands

This section describes some of the delivered custom commands. For a comprehensive list of the
custom commands, see Custom Commands in the Common User's Guide.

Repair Documents Custom Command

The Repair Documents custom command updates invalid Styles.sha or Symbol Browser file
paths on a document or a set of documents. Invalid file paths can occur when you change the
symbol share. This causes overhead while editing, saving, or updating documents.
Click Tools > Custom Commands to add the command using the ProgID
DwgRepairCmd.RepairDocuments. For more information, see Custom Commands in the
Common User's Guide.
Each time you use Repair Documents, the changes made to the component or document are
saved in a log file. You can access the file at %TEMP%\Drawings. The log file name starts with

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 251

 Tools Menu

"DwgRepairCmd_" as its prefix. A summary at the end of the log file lists all documents that the
command could not repair.

Repair Documents Dialog Box

Component or Document
Specifies the component or document to repair.
Actions
Shows the repair options for the selected component or document.
 Reset style resources - Resets the style resource files and to the Styles.sha file on
the current symbols share.
 Set symbol browser home - Sets the symbol browser home address. You can change
this address by typing in a new address or by clicking More and opening the file
folder.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 252

SECTION 19
Working with Drawings and Reports and
SmartSketch Drawing Editor
The following commands are available when you are using SmartSketch Drawing Editor to edit a
drawing created and managed through the Drawings and Reports task.

Edit Sheet Properties - Specifies properties for the current sheet and
document of the open 3D drawing. For more information, see Edit Sheet
Properties Command (on page 272).

Place View - Creates a new drawing view in the drawing area. For more
information, see Place View Command (on page 275).

Place Region - Creates a new drawing region in the drawing area so that
drawing views can be managed. For more information, see Place Region
Command (on page 296).

Place Snapshot View - Creates a new snapshot drawing view in the

drawing area. For more information, see Place Snapshot View Command
(on page 299).

Associate Objects to View - Allows you to interactively select a volume for

the associated views. If the view is a key plan or report view, you specify an
associated drawing view. For more information, see Associate Objects to
View Command (on page 300).

Remove Associated Inputs - Allows you to remove the associated

volumes, filters, views, and other inputs from the selected view. For more
information, see Remove Associated Inputs Command (on page 319).

Place Report View - Allows you to add a report "view" in the drawing. The
report view becomes an embedded report based on the contents of a
drawing view. For more information, see Place Report View Command (on
page 319).

Place a Label - Allows you to place labels manually. For more information,
see Place a Label Command (on page 322).

Group Selected Labels - Groups existing labels so that you can move them
as a unit. For more information, see Group Selected Labels (on page 339).

2D/3D Selection - Allows you to move back and forth between the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor application window and the 3D task window.
For more information, see 2D/3D Selection Command (on page 361).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 253

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Scaled Sketching - Enables you to edit or draw new objects at a scale that
is different from the drawing scale for the active sheet. For more information,
see Scaled Sketching Command (on page 365).

Edit Border Family - Associates a single border or family of borders to the

current layout template. For more information, see Edit Border Family
Command (on page 398).

Hide/Show Object - Hides or displays objects in the drawing view. For more
information, see Hide/Show Object Command (on page 372).

Copy and Paste View - Copies an orthographic drawing view and places
the copy on the same sheet. For more information, see Copy and Paste
View Command (on page 375).

Move View - Moves one or more views from a composed drawing document
to another composed drawing document. For more information, see Move
View Command (on page 375).

Highlight Annotations - Highlights labels, dimensions, and customized

graphics based on the options that you select. For more information, see
Highlight Annotations Command (on page 376).

Clear Manual Edits - Permanently clears all manual edits made to labels
and dimensions in the selected views. For more information, see Clear
Manual Edits Command (on page 379).

Associate Objects to Graphic View - Associates and disassociates objects

to graphic views. For more information, see Associate Graphics to Graphic
View Command (on page 379).

Right-click Update View - Updates the contents for the selected view - drawing, report,
menu for
selected views
key plan, snapshot, and detail/section views. For more information, see
Update View Command (on page 399).

Preview Layout - Shows a preview of the drawing document based on the

current layout. For more information, see Preview Layout Command (on
page 399).

Place Drawing View - Places a two-dimensional view for orthographic

drawings. For more information, see Place Drawing View Command
(Template Toolbar) (on page 381).

Place Report - Embeds a report in a drawing view on a volume or snapshot

drawing. For more information, see Place Report Command (Template
Toolbar) (on page 386).

Place Key Plan - Places a key plan on a volume drawing template. For
more information, see Place Key Plan Command (Template Toolbar) (on
page 388).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 254

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Place Border Label - Positions drawing property labels in the title block of a
template when you are editing a 3D drawing border template. For more
information, see Place Drawing Property Label Command (Drawing Labels
Toolbar) (on page 391).

Place Drawing Area - Places a drawing area. You use this command to
create a drawing area on a 3D drawing border template that has been
imported from other software, such as MicroStation DGN or AutoCAD DWG.
For information on this command, see Place Drawing Area Command (on
page 396). For more information on editing border templates, see the
Drawings and Reports User's Guide.

Drawings View Explorer

The Drawings View Explorer provides access to views and their attributes for the currently
displayed drawing or template. For more information, see Drawings View Explorer (on page
256).

Dimensioning in 3D Drawings
You can use the Dimension toolbar to place dimensions on your 3D drawings. For more
information, see Dimensioning in 3D Drawings (on page 267).
You can also specify dimensioning for paper space objects (at the proper scale) when they are
drawn on top of drawing view objects. For more information, see Dimension Paper Space
Objects for 3D Drawings (on page 268).

Cutting Planes, Detail Envelopes, and Section/Detail Views

The following commands allow you to create and edit cutting planes, detail envelopes, and
section and detail views in 3D drawings.

Place Detail Envelope - Creates a detail view for an existing drawing view.
Detail views are more than enlargements of the main drawing view. They often
contain additional graphical information that is not visible in the main drawing
view, such as weld or chalk information. For more information, see Place Detail
Envelope Command (on page 343).

Place Cutting Plane - Creates a cutting plane on a drawing view. The cutting
plane is a marker that indicates where to slice a group of objects and from which
direction to look at that slice. For more information, see Place Cutting
Plane/Section View Command (on page 346).

Place Section/Detail View - Creates both a section view and a detail view
based on the selected cutting plane or detail envelope. A detail view is extracted
from a main drawing view or another detail view. You can rotate detail views in
2D space, but they remain in the same orientation as the main drawing view.
Section views are extracted from main drawing views, detail views, or other
section views. Section views are similar to detail views, except that they can
display information in an orientation that is different from that of the originating
view. For more information, see Place Detail View Command (on page 358).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 255

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Converting Excel Spreadsheet Reports to Native Text Boxes

The SP3DConvertExcelEmbedded.dll is a delivered custom command that allows you to
convert an Excel spreadsheet report to the native text box format for use in 3D Drawings. For
more information on converting Excel spreadsheet reports, see Convert Excel Spreadsheet
Reports to Native Text Box Format Custom Command (on page 403).

Saving Drawings in MicroStation and AutoCAD Format

You can use the Save As command to assign dimension units and export the drawings to
MicroStation or AutoCAD format. For more information, see Save As MicroStation or AutoCAD
Format (on page 270).

Drawings View Explorer

Provides access to views and their attributes for the currently displayed drawing or template.

Drawings View Explorer

Displays a list of sheets and views on the active sheet and a list of unplaced views available for
placement. This window is available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you have a Drawings
by Rule template or drawing open. The Drawings View Explorer displays by default as a
right-side window in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you:
 Edit a template associated with a Drawings by Rule component. Right-click the component,
and select Edit Template on the shortcut menu.
 Edit an existing drawing document. Right-click a Drawings by Rule drawing document in the
Detail View or the Drawing Console, and select Edit on the shortcut menu.

The Drawings View Explorer allows you to see views that are available for the current drawing.
Assigned views appear beneath a drawing sheet. Unassigned views appear in the UnAssigned
Folder. Views are identified by the following icons:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 256

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

- The view is assigned to a drawing and all 2D

geometry is up-to-date with the 3D model.
- The view is assigned to a drawing and 2D
geometry is out-of-date with the 3D model.
- The view is not assigned to a drawing, and is in
the UnAssigned Folder.

- The view is assigned to a drawing, and there

were errors in processing the 2D geometry. The update
skips the geometry errors.

Shortcut Menu
The Drawings View Explorer also allows you to update, refresh, delete, or edit properties by
right-clicking on a view or a set of selected views from the same sheet.
Update
Performs a smart update of geometry in the view(s). Rules in the software determine
whether to perform:
 An incremental update of the geometry for added, modified, and deleted objects.
 A full update of all geometry.
For more information, see Update and Full Update Commands (on page 414).
When Update performs the first option, it is usually faster than Full Update but
still results in all geometry being up-to-date for the view.
Full Update
Performs a full update of all geometry in the view. For more information, see Update and
Full Update Commands (on page 414).
Refresh
Compares the date of the last update of the views with the modification date in the model for
any object that has a positive (can be seen) resymbolization in the drawing. For more
information, see Refresh in the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.
Delete
Moves one or more views to the UnAssigned Folder, or deletes views permanently if the
view was placed by the drawing rule set. For more information, see Place View Command
(on page 275).
Properties
Opens the Drawing View Properties dialog box, allowing you to change the properties of a
drawing view. For more information, see Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Place View
Command) - Steel Order Drawings (on page 281).
Update Selected
Performs an update on objects that are first selected in a view or in the 3D model. You can
perform Update Selected on both full and cropped views. Only the selected geometry is

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 257

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

updated in the view. Other geometry affected by the selected geometry is neither checked

nor updated. As a result, the view is marked as out-of-date . This option is only
available when:
 A drawing is created with a Drawings by Rule component. For more information, see the
Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.
 2D/3D Selection is clicked. 2D/3D Selection causes geometry in the view to
be actively linked to its 3D model object. For more information, see 2D/3D Selection
Command (on page 361) in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor User's Guide.
View Log
Displays a log of the results from the last update performed on the view.

 You can also select multiple views from the RAD sheet.
 For more information, see Place an Unassigned View (on page 408).
Move Sheet(s)
Moves the selected sheets from one document to another under the same Drawings by Rule
component. For more information, see Move Sheet(s) (on page 258).

Move Sheet(s)
Moves the selected sheets from one document to another under the same Drawings by Rule
component.
1. In the Drawings View Explorer, right-click the sheets to be moved, and select Move
Sheet(s).
The Move Sheet dialog box displays.
2. Select the destination document, and click OK.
Sheets cannot be moved to a document that is being edited or to a document on
which you do not have write permissions.
The sheets are moved to the destination document.

 You can only move sheets to documents under the active component.
 When all sheets under a document are moved, an empty sheet with a border template is
placed under the source document.
 To perform Move Sheet(s), the component must have at least two documents as children.
 Move Sheet(s) cannot be used by selecting both views and sheets together.
 Upon completion, the status of the source and destination documents is changed to "Out of
date."

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 258

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Dimensions
In general, dimension rules control the placement of dimensions, and dimension styles control
the appearance, including the units, of dimensions in orthographic drawings. However,
dimension styles and dimension rules interact in complex ways. There are two methods you can
use to cause dimensions to display in drawings. Automatic dimensioning and manual
dimensioning place dimensions in native format drawings.
For automatic dimensioning, the view style controls whether or not dimensions are placed. For
manual dimensioning, you edit an existing drawing and place dimensions manually.
The Save As command saves drawings from the database to files and presents
additional considerations about dimensions. The files created by the Save As command can be
native format or a foreign format such as MicroStation or AutoCAD. With the Save As
command, the software attempts to replicate dimensions as they are shown within a drawing.
Assigning dimension units is different for each method. For more information, see the following
sections in the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide:
Automatic Dimensioning (on page 259)
Manual Dimensioning (on page 266)
Save As MicroStation or AutoCAD Format (on page 270)
Isometric drawings use the isometric options settings within their style to determine
the dimension appearance, placement, and units. For more information, see Isometric Drawing
Styles in the Isogen Isometric Drawings User's Guide.

Automatic Dimensioning
When you use automatic dimensioning, the view style controls whether or not dimensions are
placed. The following flowchart shows how Update (for marine mode Drawings by Rule) and
Update Now (for all other drawing types) assign units to automatically placed dimensions.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 259

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

View Styles
A dimension rule within a view style triggers the automatic placement of dimensions in an
orthographic drawing. For more information, see Use View Styles with Dimension Rules (on
page 260).

Dimension Rules
Dimension rules control the placement and appearance of automatic dimensions in the drawing.
For more information, see Use Dimension Rules (on page 261).

Dimension Templates
The dimension rule is not responsible for assigning the dimension units to automatic
dimensions. The dimension rule points to a dimension template XML file that influences the unit
assignment. For more information, see Use Dimension Templates (on page 261).

Dimension Styles
You can determine the active style of a dimension by editing the drawing or drawing template in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For more information, see Edit Dimension Styles (on page 263).

Dimension Style Overrides

You can override dimension style settings in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For more
information, see Override Dimension Styles (on page 265).
See Also
Dimensions (on page 259)

Use View Styles with Dimension Rules

A dimension rule within a view style triggers the automatic placement of dimensions in a
drawing.
1. Select Tools > Define View Style.
The Define View Style dialog box displays.
2. Select New Style to define a new view style with a dimension rule. You can also edit an
existing view style by selecting Properties .
3. On the View Style Properties dialog box, use the Dimension Rule field dropdown to
specify a dimension rule for the view style. For more information on this dialog box, see
View Style Properties Dialog Box in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.
Select More to display the Select Dimension Rule dialog box. For more information, see
Select Dimension Rule Dialog Box in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 260

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

For information on how dimension rules are maintained, see Use Dimension Rules (on page
261).
For more information on defining view styles, see Define View Style Command in the
Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide, accessible using the Help > Printable Guides
command in the Drawings and Reports task.
See Also
Automatic Dimensioning (on page 259)
Dimensions (on page 259)

Use Dimension Rules

A dimension rule controls the placement and appearance of automatic dimension in the drawing.
When you select More in the Dimension Rule dropdown on the View Style Properties dialog
box, the Select Dimension Rule dialog box displays the list of rules available in the Drawings
catalog. For more information, see Select Dimension Rule Dialog Box in the Drawings and
Reports Reference Data Guide. You can access this guide with the Help > Printable Guides
command in the Drawings and Reports task.
The Drawings catalog is file-based and located on the SharedContent share within the
\Drawings\Catalog folder. The available dimension rules are XML files stored in the
\Drawings\Catalog\Rules\DimensionRules folder. Several example dimension rules are
delivered with the software.
You edit the dimension rule XML files with a text or XML editor. Each dimension rule should
point to its own dimension template. Rename any customized dimension rules. Do not use the
delivered rule names for customized rules.

 We recommend that you maintain a separate set of dimension rules for each dimension
style used in drawings.
 The dimension rule is not responsible for assigning the dimension units to automatic
dimensions. However, the dimension rule points to another XML file, called the dimension
template, that influences the unit assignment. For more information, see Use Dimension
Templates (on page 261).
 The drawing dimension XML Files are discussed further in the Intergraph SmartTM 3D
Programmer's Guide under Extending the Capabilities of the Software. Contact your
administrator or Intergraph Support if you need the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Programmer's
Guide. You can find support information on our web site http://support.intergraph.com
(http://support.intergraph.com/).
See Also
Automatic Dimensioning (on page 259)
Dimensions (on page 259)

Use Dimension Templates

The dimension rule is not responsible for assigning the dimension units to automatic
dimensions. However, the dimension rule points to another XML file, called the dimension
template, that influences the unit assignment. The dimension template XML file contains the
settings that further control the placement and appearance of dimension in the orthographic
drawings.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 261

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

You edit the dimension template XML files with a text or XML editor. Rename any customized
dimension templates. Do not use the delivered rule names for customized dimension templates.
Several example dimension template XML files are delivered with the software and are located
on the SharedContent share in the \Drawings\Catalog\Dimensions\Templates folder.
The setting in the template that influences dimension unit display is
<dimensionContentModules>. In each dimension template, you should set
<dimensionContentModules> to the dimension style used to create dimensions in the
drawing. The values available for this setting determine whether the software places the
dimension vertical, horizontal, radial, or angular. To determine the dimension units, the various
content modules refer to the dimension formatting saved either in the drawing template file (for
volume and by query drawing types) or in the drawing itself (for composed drawings).

 We recommend that you maintain a separate dimension template for each dimension rule
you create.
 For manual dimensioning, the software looks in the Linear_A_HV dimension template for
the value of the dimension content module during the update of manually placed
dimensions. For more information, see Manual Dimensioning (on page 266).
 The <dimensionStyleSettings> setting in the dimension templates is not used by the
software at this time. However, when creating drawings, we recommend that the active
dimension style in the selected border template have the same name as the
<dimensionStyleSettings> setting in the dimension template to avoid problems in future
software releases. Rename any customized border templates. Do not use the delivered
border template name for customized border templates.
 The drawing dimension XML Files are discussed further in the Intergraph SmartTM 3D
Programmer's Guide under Extending the Capabilities of the Software. Contact your
administrator or Intergraph Support if you need the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Programmer's
Guide. You can find support information on our web site http://support.intergraph.com
(http://support.intergraph.com/).

Overall Dimensions
By default, dimension control generators use the settings in the Linear_A_HV.xml dimension
template. By using <overallDimension>, you can override Linear_A_HV.xml and select another
template for overall dimensions. In the example below, Piping Plan_Pipes_Horizontal.xml is
used as the dimension template for piping parts:
<dimensionSettings>
<overall>-1</overall>
<overallDimension value="Piping Plan_Pipes_Horizontal">
</dimensionSettings>

Layering Dimensions
You can define the layer on which your dimensions display in the drawing by editing the
dimension rule template XML file. After the <dimensionStyleSettings> section of the XML file,
add a <dimensionLayerSettings> definition using the <dimLayer> tag, like the one shown in
the example below, that defines the layer on which you want the dimensions placed:
<dimensionLayerSettings>
<dimLayer>dimensionLayer</dimLayer>
</dimensionLayerSettings>

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 262

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

If the layer does not already exist in the template you are using to create drawings, the software
creates the layer automatically.
See Also
Automatic Dimensioning (on page 259)
Dimensions (on page 259)
Use Dimension Rules (on page 261)

Edit Dimension Styles

The software resolves dimension units for a particular drawing from the active dimension
formatting in either the drawing template (for volume and by query drawing types) or the drawing
itself (for composed drawings). The active dimension formatting is a combination of the settings
in the active dimension style plus any dimension style overrides that may be set.
You can determine the active style by editing the drawing or the drawing template in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor, selecting one of the placement dimension commands, and
checking the style that displays on the resulting ribbon bar. You can view the overrides to the
active dimension in the drawing template by selecting Format > Dimension in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor.
The Imperial border templates have ANSI as the active dimension style with
no overrides set. The Metric border templates have DIN as the active dimension style with no
overrides set.
You can create and maintain dimension styles in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
1. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, select Format > Style.
The Style dialog box displays.

2. Click Modify.
The Modify Dimension Style dialog box displays.
3. Modify the appearance of the dimension style as needed, and click OK.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 263

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

4. On the Style dialog box, you can either save dimension styles with the files being edited or
reference them from other files. You can reference files by selecting Resources.

 The reference files, also called resource files, can be any file with an .igr or .sha extension.
While referenced dimension styles are available for dimension placement, they cannot be
edited. Therefore, the Style dialog box only displays dimension styles that are saved locally
to the file.
 In cases where a local dimension style has the same name as a referenced dimension style,
the software always uses the local style when placing dimensions. Currently, you cannot
override local dimension styles with the same name as a referenced dimension style of the
same name. Local dimension styles can be renamed so that the referenced dimension style
can be used to place dimensions. Local dimension styles are renamed on the Modify
Dimension Style dialog box. For more information on overriding dimension style settings,
see Override Dimension Styles (on page 265).
The delivered Styles.sha file contains several example dimension styles. This file is located in
the Symbols share in the \Drawings\Catalog\Templates folder. All drawings created in the
Drawings and Reports task reference the Styles.sha file.
After updating the drawings, the Styles.sha file on the Symbols share is the
only file referenced into the drawings. This is true for all orthographic drawings. Any other files
previously referenced before the update need to be referenced to the drawing again.
All drawings and drawing templates must have at least one dimension style saved within them.
Therefore, if only one dimension style is saved with a file, you cannot delete it. Also, you cannot
delete any style from a drawing or drawing template if they are currently used by dimensions in
a drawing.
Dimension styles can be added to the list of saved or local styles in a drawing or drawing
template in one of two ways:
 Create a new dimension style from the Style dialog box using the New... command.
 Place a dimension in a drawing or drawing template using a reference dimension style. This
method copies the referenced dimension style into the drawing or drawing template.

 We recommend that you maintain a separate set of border templates for each dimension
style used for drawings. The border templates within a particular set should have the same
active dimension style with the same style settings.
 The <dimensionStyleSettings> setting in the dimension templates is not used by the
software at this time. However, when creating drawings, we recommend that the active
dimension style in the selected border template have the same name as the
<dimensionStyleSettings> setting in the dimension template to avoid problems in future
software releases. Rename any customized border templates. Do not use the delivered
border template name for customized border templates.
 We recommend that you maintain a complete set of your dimension styles in a renamed
version of the Styles.sha file.
See Also
Override Dimension Styles (on page 265)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 264

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Override Dimension Styles

You can override dimension styles in a drawing or drawing template.
We support dimension style overrides, but we do not recommend their use as
a standard practice. Overrides are saved in the drawing or drawing template and can be difficult
to maintain as dimension styles change. As an alternative, we recommend creating a new
dimension style in a reference resource file. For more information, see Edit Dimension Styles
(on page 263).
1. Select Tools > Edit Border Template, and select a template to edit.
The template opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. Select Format > Dimension.
3. On the Format Dimension dialog box, select the Units tab.

4. If the settings on the Units tab are identical to those on the Modify Dimension Style dialog
box, no overrides are applied to the active dimension style. If a dimension style is changed
during a dimension placement command, the override values become identical to the
dimension style values. For more information, see Edit Dimension Styles (on page 263).
You cannot override local dimension styles with the same name as a referenced
dimension style. Local dimension styles can be renamed so that the referenced dimension style
can be used to place dimensions. Local dimension styles are renamed on the Modify
Dimension Style dialog box.
See Also
Automatic Dimensioning (on page 259)
Dimensions (on page 259)
Use Dimension Rules (on page 261)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 265

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Manual Dimensioning
When you use manual dimensioning, the view style and the dimension rules do not apply for
display or placement. However, the logic used to determine manual dimensions is similar to that
of automatic dimensions. The following flowchart shows how Update (for marine mode
Drawings by Rule) and Update Now (for all other drawing types) assign units to manually
placed dimensions.

Dimension templates
For manual dimensioning, the software looks in the dimension template for the value of the
dimension content module during the update of manually placed dimensions. For more
information, see Use Dimension Templates (on page 261).

Dimension styles
You can determine the active style of a dimension by editing the drawing or drawing template in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For more information, see Edit Dimension Styles (on page 263).

Dimension style overrides

You can override dimension style settings in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For more
information, see Override Dimension Styles (on page 265).
If you place a manual linear dimension that is chained or stacked with an automatic
linear dimension, the manual dimension is immediately replaced with a standalone dimension
that is no longer attached to the automatic dimension. The new dimension is attached to a
newly-placed point object whose position coincides with the connect point location of the
automatic dimension projection line to which the manual dimension was originally attached.
Because the new dimension is no longer chained or stacked with the automatic dimension, it
does not move if the automatic dimension's position is modified.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 266

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Dimension between views

If you try to place dimensions from one drawing view to another, a status bar message displays
Dimensions between two views will not be remembered between updates. The dimension
is not placed and the command cancels. Other supported types of dimensions remain.

Dimensioning in 3D Drawings
When you edit a Smart 3D drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor, you can use commands on
the Dimension toolbar to manually place dimensions. When updating the drawing, the software
remembers dimensions placed between objects within a single drawing view, dimensions placed
from paper space to paper space, and dimensions placed between paper space graphics and
model objects. You cannot dimension from one drawing view to another drawing view.
You can place dimensions in drawings by rule and composed drawing views using the standard
SmartSketch Drawing Editor dimensioning commands. The commands are enhanced with an
additional ribbon to support accurate dimensions of 3D objects in non-planar views.
Dimensioning Drawing Elements in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help
Dimension Ribbon in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help
3D Dimension Ribbon
The 2D dimension commands treat all geometry in a view as being in the view plane. If the view
contains non-planar geometry, such as in an isometric view, the value of the dimension is not
accurate, as shown in the following figure.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 267

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

With the 3D dimension options, the dimension reflects the distance between the 3D objects.

You can specify dimensioning for paper space objects (at the proper scale) when they are
drawn on top of drawing view objects. For more information, see Dimension Paper Space
Objects for 3D Drawings (on page 268).

Dimension Paper Space Objects for 3D Drawings

The following procedure shows you how to dimension paper space objects (at the proper scale)
when they are drawn on top of a 3D Drawing view object. To accomplish this task, you create a
dimension style with the appropriate scale setting in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
When manually placing dimensions and then updating the drawing, the software remembers
dimensions placed between objects within a single drawing view, dimensions placed from paper
space to paper space, and dimensions placed between paper space graphics and model
objects.
Dimension styles must be defined for paper space objects and their scale
factors, otherwise the paper space dimensions will be deleted when the drawing is updated.
SmartSketch Drawing Editor will not recognize any possible errors in the dimension style, so be
sure that any new dimension styles are correct before updating a drawing. For more information,
see Edit Dimension Styles (on page 263) and Manual Dimensioning (on page 266).
1. Start SmartSketch Drawing Editor. Double-click shape2dserver.exe in the [Product
Folder]\Common2D\Shape2D\Bin folder.
2. Use File > Open to open the styles.sha file. This file is located in your [Product
Folder]\Common2D\Shape2D\Template\Styles folder.
The styles.sha file is delivered as a read-only file. You can change the properties
of the file, or you can copy the file to a new name and use the copied file to create your new
dimensioning style.
3. Select Format > Style, and on the Style dialog box, click New.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 268

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

4. On the New Dimension Style dialog box, give the new paper space dimension a name.

5. Go to the General tab, and set the scale mode to Manual and set a manual value for the
dimensioning. For example, for a scale of 1:100mm, you would set the manual value to
0.01.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 269

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

When you apply this updated style.sha to your drawings, you can use the new paper space
dimension style when placing paper space objects, even when positioned on top of drawing
view objects.

Upon resizing a drawing, all automatic dimensions change accordingly, but

manual dimensions will not relocate. Manual dimensions between paper space objects and
model objects will still exist, but their values will change.
Dimensioning from model objects in one view to model objects in a different view is
not supported.

Save As MicroStation or AutoCAD Format

You can use the Save As command to assign dimension units and export the drawings to
MicroStation or AutoCAD format. The following flowchart shows how the Save As command
controls dimensioning during export.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 270

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Save As Command
The Save As command is available from the shortcut menu for any document or node
containing documents in the Console. For orthographic drawings, the Save As command
supports exporting to DGN, DWG, and DXF formats, as well as the native SHA formats. For
more information, see Save As Command (on page 70) in the Drawings Help.
For Isogen Isometric Drawings, a file is created for each sheet in the drawing with
[drawing name]_[sheet name] as the filename. For example, if the drawing My_Pipeline contains
Sheet1 and Sheet2, two files will be saved with the names My_Pipeline_Sheet1 and
My_Pipeline_Sheet2.

Embedded Object Dimensioning

The model graphics in the drawings are embedded in the drawing file. The dimensions in the
drawings are connected directly to the embedded objects.
During export to MicroStation or AutoCAD formats using Save As, the software opens the
drawings in SmartSketch Drawing Editor and the relationship between the embedded objects
and the dimensions is broken. The dimension, however, is not removed and still maintains its
original value.

Document Properties
Dimensions in drawings exported to the DGN, DWG, and DXF formats do not use the active
dimension formatting for their units. Instead, the software determines dimension units from the
document properties for the drawing being exported. This behavior applies whether the
drawings is a volume, by query, or composed drawing type. You can view and edit the
document units by opening the drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor and selecting File >
Properties. You can see the current unit settings on the Units tab.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 271

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

We recommend that border templates have identical units and precision

values in the document properties set in the active dimension style. This maintains dimension
unit accuracy if you export the drawing to a foreign file format.
See Also
Dimensions (on page 259)

Edit Sheet Properties Command

Specifies properties for the current sheet and document. This command is available on the
Drawings Compose toolbar in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you:
 Edit a template associated with a Drawings by Rule component. Right-click the component
and select Edit Template on the shortcut menu.
 Edit an existing drawing document. Right-click a Drawings by Rule drawing document in the
Detail View and select Edit on the shortcut menu.
In both cases, the template or drawing document opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor with the
Edit Sheet Properties available on the toolbar above the drawing area. When you click the
command, the Sheet Properties dialog box appears so you can set the properties for the sheet
and the document.

See Also
Sheet Properties Dialog Box (on page 273)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 272

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Change the Border Template for an Existing Sheet

In this workflow, you change the border for an individual sheet to a template different from the
border template defined in the component. For example, you may want the first sheet of drawing
to use a different border template than all other sheets.
1. Right-click the drawing document in the Management Console Detail View, or in the
Drawing Console and select Edit. The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. Select a sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing view.
3. Click Edit Sheet Properties on the toolbar. The Sheet Properties dialog box displays.
4. On the Current Sheet tab, select a new value for Border Template.
5. Click OK. The new border template is applied to the sheet.

 Layout Template is inactive, and cannot be changed for an existing sheet

 Border Layout and Template Layout are customizable items.
 For more information about layout properties, see Edit Sheet Properties Command (on page
272) in SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.

Sheet Properties Dialog Box

Specifies properties for the current sheet and document. This dialog box displays when you click
Edit Sheet Properties , which is only available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you
are editing a Drawings by Rule template or document.
See Also
Edit Sheet Properties Command (on page 272)
Current Sheet Tab (on page 274)
Document Tab (on page 273)

Document Tab
Specifies properties for the document. This dialog box displays when you click Edit Sheet
Properties , which is only available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you are editing a
Drawings by Ruleset template or document.
The properties available are defined as follows:
Document Assignment Rule
Specifies the layout style rule to use for the document. Select More in the dropdown to
display the Define Layout Style dialog box and select the layout style to use.
Document Naming Rule
Defines how the document will be named.
Scale Group
Specifies a scale group for the document, such as Metric, Imperial, or Manual Scale. When
you select a scale group, the Scale property values update. Selecting Manual Scale shows
all scales, metric or imperial.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 273

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Scale
Specifies a scale to use for the document. The Scale values update depending on the
selected Scale Group.
See Also
Edit Sheet Properties Command (on page 272)
Sheet Properties Dialog Box (on page 273)

Current Sheet Tab

Specifies properties for the current sheet. This dialog box displays when you click Edit Sheet
Properties , which is only available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you are editing a
Drawings by Rule template or document.

The properties available are defined as follows:

Sheet Assignment Rule
Specifies the layout style rule to use for the sheet. Select More in the list to display the
Define Layout Style dialog box and select the layout style to use.
Sheet Naming Rule
Defines how the sheet will be named.
Scale Group
Specifies a scale group for the sheet, such as Metric, Imperial, or Manual Scale. When you
select a scale group, the Scale property values update. Selecting Manual Scale shows all
scales, metric or imperial.
Scale
Specifies a scale to use for the sheet. The Scale values update depending on the selected
Scale Group.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 274

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

See Also
Edit Sheet Properties Command (on page 272)
Sheet Properties Dialog Box (on page 273)

Drawings Compose Toolbar

This toolbar is available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you click Edit on a drawing
document shortcut menu in the Drawings and Reports task. For more information, see Drawing
Document Shortcut Menu (on page 36) and Edit Command (on page 40) in the Drawings and
Reports Reference Data Guide.

Place View Command

Creates a new drawing view in the drawing area. This command is only available in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you create a new drawing or open an existing drawing from
a 3D task.
When you click Place View , you click and drag to define the new view. The Drawing View
Properties dialog box appears so that you can define the properties associated with the view.
The properties shown change depending on the View Style type you select, such as
Orthographic View or Key Plan View.
After creating the view and defining its properties, use the Associate Objects to View
command to specify the content of the view. You can also move the view around, crop it, or
align it in the drawing sheet.
You can create drawing views outside the drawing area. Also, when you stretch the
drawing area to match the border file, the software retains your offsets so that a view or region
outside the drawing area remains outside the drawing area even after it is placed in the border
file.

You can create a drawing view outside a region, but this makes the drawing view an
"unmanaged view," meaning the properties of the region do not impact the drawing view.
However, if a view is entirely inside a region or touching a region, the region manages the
drawing view and, when you update the drawing in a 3D task, the software pulls the drawing
view into the region and updates it based on the region layout style.
See Also
Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Place View Command) - Composed Drawings (on page
276)
Update View Command (on page 399)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 275

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Place View Command) -

Composed Drawings
Specifies properties for the selected drawing view in a composed drawing. You can access this
dialog box when you right-click on a drawing view and then select Properties on the shortcut
menu.
For more information on creating a composed drawing, see Create a new composed drawing
(on page 205) in the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Info Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 276)
Format Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 277)
View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 277)
See Also
Place View Command (on page 275)

Info Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies general view properties.
Type
Displays the category of the selected element.
Sheet
Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the selected element.
Layer
Shows the layer that contains the selected element.
Origin
Specifies the coordinates, or location, of an element along the X- and Y-axes.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 276

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Format Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box)

Formats the frame around a drawing view.
Show Border
Displays the frame around the object.
Color
Sets the color of the frame.
Line Width
Sets the line thickness on the frame.
Line Type
Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line style for
an element or a linked object.

View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box)

Sets the drawing view style and other properties for a selected drawing view in a composed
drawing.
Style
Specifies a view style, which includes rules for filters, updates, and graphics. The view style
controls the output characteristics of the view on the generated drawing. The list displays
the 10 most recently used view styles in the session. Click More... to display the Select
View Style dialog box.
Name
Specifies a name for the view. You must type a name in order to create a view.
View Style
Identifies the view style used within the rule set associated with this drawing document. This
is a read-only field and is shown for Ruleset view styles only.

Coordinate System Properties

Annotation Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system used to place annotations (labels and dimensions) on the
drawing. This property is not supported in Ruleset view styles. Choose a coordinate system
from the list, or click More... to choose another coordinate system with the Select System
dialog box.
View Direction Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use with regard to the "looking direction" for the drawing
view contents. The coordinates listed are defined for the model. This property is not
supported in Ruleset view styles. Choose a coordinate system from the list, or click More...
to choose another coordinate system with the Select System dialog box.
Example 1
The global coordinate system is selected for both Annotation Coordinate System and

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 277

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

View Direction Coordinate System. A plan view is created, and the global view direction
coordinate system North points up. Because the North arrow annotation is also defined by
the global coordinate system, the North arrow annotation also points up.

1 - Global coordinate
system selected for
annotation and view
direction.
2 - North arrow
annotation.

Example 2
The global coordinate system is selected for Annotation Coordinate System and a local
coordinate system is selected for View Direction Coordinate System. North on the local
coordinate system is rotated 90° counter-clockwise relative to the global coordinate system.
A plan view is created, for which North of the local view direction coordinate system points
up, rotating the view 90° clockwise. Because the North arrow annotation is defined by the
global coordinate system, the North arrow annotation points to the right.

1 - Global coordinate
system selected for
annotation.
2 - Local coordinate
system selected for
view direction.
3 - North arrow
annotation.

Orientation Properties
Orientation Rule
Specifies the rules available for orientations for the current view type. The Orientation Rule
drives the values for the Orientation View Direction and Orientation Up Direction
properties. This property is only shown for Ruleset view styles.
Orientation View Direction
Indicates the elevation direction in which you want the drawing view to "look" at the drawing
objects. This property is only shown for Ruleset view styles.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 278

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Orientation Up Direction
Indicates the x- and y-axis direction with which you want the drawing view to "look" at the
drawing objects. This property is only shown for Ruleset view styles.

Scale Properties
Scale Family
Specifies a scale family for the drawing view, such as Metric, Imperial, or Manual Scale.
When you select a scale family, the Scale property values update. Selecting Manual Scale
shows all scales, metric or imperial.
User Selected Scale
Specifies a scale to use for the drawing view. The Scale values update depending on the
selected Scale Family.

 For Custom scale, the default is the unit of measure setting of the document. For
example, if you type values of 1 in to 1 ft, the values are converted to mm if that is the
default unit of measure.
 Do not use negative values when typing custom scale values.

Navigation Rule Properties

HngSupSimpleNavigator.dll
Returns support components, supporting objects, supported objects, and design children.
This rule also returns the control points on the components. This rule is specific to objects
created in the Hangers and Support task.
HngSupRangeNavigator.dll
Returns support components, supporting objects, supported objects, and design children
collections that extend the Hangers and Support range. This rule also returns the control
points on the components. This rule is specific to objects created in the Hangers and
Support task, and operates similarly to the HngSupSimpleNavigator.dll rule.
DrawingSpoolNavigator.dll
Returns the spool, its connected parts and their features. This rule is specific to pipe spools.
AssemblyNavigator.dll
Returns the assemblies, pipe spool, penetration spool, its connected parts, and their
features. This rule is specific to assemblies.

Margin Properties
Margin Left/Margin Right/Margin Top/Margin Bottom
Defines the marginal distance for the drawing view. The margin is the distance surrounding
the drawing view SmartFrame. This area is used for labels and dimensions that have been
designed to incorporate margins in their search for clear space.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 279

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

For example, you could have several drawing views, each with different margin settings:

Other General Properties

Look Direction
Indicates the direction in which you want the drawing view to "look" at the associated
volume or objects.
Description
Describes the content of the view. This description is optional.
View Offset
Expands the view on the drawing sheet in all directions in order to prevent matchline
distortion and grid plane clipping. The default offset value is 2 mm for composed views and
0 mm for ruleset views. The offset does not affect the size of the volume that is associated
with the view.

 View Offset is only available for views that are associated to a volume. Section and
detail views do not have this property value.
 Negative values are not permitted for this property.
 In ruleset views, if you change the view style before editing View Offset for the first
time, View Offset displays the offset value as defined in the .xml template of the view
style. Make sure that your View Offset value is correct before closing the Drawing
View Properties dialog box.
Flush Threshold
Sets a parameter for memory management, and helps improve drawing update
performance. When the number of objects processed for a drawing document reaches the
Threshold value, they are removed from memory. If they are needed later, they are recalled
from the database. The Flush Threshold property is only available for composed drawing
documents. The default value is 2000, with a range of 5-5000. Higher values are faster but
use more memory, which is acceptable for smaller drawings. Lower values are slower but
allow larger drawings to complete faster.
If a drawing document does not successfully update in the Drawings and Reports
3D task, check the error log for the drawing document. If the error log shows memory

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 280

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

overflow errors, lower the Flush Threshold value.

VHL Precision
Sets a parameter for Hidden Line removal processing to consider two lines as identical. This
property setting has a direct impact on the visibility of the lines in the drawing. It improves
drawing update performance, but it may reduce drawing quality. The VHL precision
property is only available for composed drawing documents. The default value is 0.000001,
with a range of 0.001 to 0.000001. The smaller the value, the more accurate the graphic
elements are in the 2D view.
If some intersections of complex surfaces appear on/off along the curve, the
precision of the VHL may be too restrictive compared with the precision by which the
surfaces were created. Lowering the VHL Precision value may help the display of the
intersections, but lowering the value too much could degrade the overall quality and the
visibility of the drawing details.
Geometry Validation
Sets a parameter for drawing completion and quality to improve drawing update
performance. The Geometry Validation property is available for composed drawing
documents only. The default value is Off. When set to Off, the drawing document
completes, but invalid geometries are left out. If set to On, the drawing document does not
complete if invalid geometries are encountered during update.
Angle for Target Evaluation (Marine mode only)
Defines the allowable angle from the view plane for a target plate. The Angle for Target
Evaluation property is available for the scantling view style only. Additionally, this property
is used only with the Place Detail View or the Place Section View command in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor and only when a reference plane selected for the Any system,
part, or reference plane Drawing by Rule query has been set. When plates or profiles are
selected in the query, target evaluation is determined by a combination of levels and type of
connection. The default value is 20º.

 The angle is displayed in the units specified in the session file, which is degrees by
default.
 For more information about Any system, part, or reference plane, see Drawings by
Rule Queries in Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings by Rule) (on page 115).

Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Place View Command) -

Steel Order Drawings
Specifies properties for the selected drawing view in a steel order drawing. You can access this
dialog box when you select and right-click on a drawing view and then select Properties on the
shortcut menu.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 281

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

For more information on creating a scantling drawing, see the Orthographic Drawings User's
Guide.

Info Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 276)
Format Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 277)
View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box - Drawings View Explorer) (on page 283)
See Also
Place View Command (on page 275)

Info Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies general view properties.
Type
Displays the category of the selected element.
Sheet
Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the selected element.
Layer
Shows the layer that contains the selected element.
Origin
Specifies the coordinates, or location, of an element along the X- and Y-axes.

Format Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box)

Formats the frame around a drawing view.
Show Border
Displays the frame around the object.
Color
Sets the color of the frame.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 282

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Line Width
Sets the line thickness on the frame.
Line Type
Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line style for
an element or a linked object.

View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box - Drawings View Explorer)
Sets the drawing view style and other properties for a selected drawing view in a steel order
drawing.
Style
Specifies a view style, which includes rules for filters, updates, and graphics. The view style
controls the output characteristics of the view on the generated drawing. The list displays
the 10 most recently used view styles in the session. Click More... to display the Select
View Style dialog box.
(Marine mode only) To display only RulesetStyles in marine mode, you need to
remove the marine and material handling productIDs from the KeyPlan.xml,
Orthographic.xml, and Spatial.xml files as shown in the example below. The .xml files are
located in the [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\Drawings\Catalog\MetaStyles folder.
Original

Modified

Name
Specifies a name for the drawing view.

Coordinate System Properties

Coordinate System
Specifies a coordinate system to include in the drawing.

Orientation Properties
Orientation Rule
Specifies the rules available for orientations for the current view type. The Orientation Rule

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 283

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

drives the values for the Orientation View Direction and Orientation Up Direction
properties. This property is only shown for rule set view styles.
Orientation View Direction
Indicates the elevation direction in which you want the drawing view to "look" at the drawing
objects. This property is only shown for rule set view styles.
Orientation Up Direction
Indicates the x- and y-axis direction with which you want the drawing view to "look" at the
drawing objects. This property is only shown for rule set view styles.

Scale Properties
Scale Family
Specifies a scale family for the drawing view, such as Metric, Imperial, or Manual Scale.
When you select a scale family, the Scale property values update. Selecting Manual Scale
shows all scales, metric or imperial.
User Selected Scale
Specifies a scale to use for the drawing view. The Scale values update depending on the
selected Scale Family.

 For Custom scale, the default is the document's unit of measure setting. For
example, if you type values of 1 in to 1 ft, the values are converted to mm if that is
the default unit of measure.
 Do not use negative values when typing custom scale values.

Margin Properties
Margin Left/Margin Right/Margin Top/Margin Bottom
Defines the marginal distance for the drawing view. The margin is the distance surrounding
the drawing view SmartFrame. This area is used for labels and dimensions that have been
designed to incorporate margins in their search for clear space.
For example, you could have several drawing views, each with different margin settings:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 284

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Other General Properties

Description
Provides a description of the drawing view. This description is optional.
View Offset
Expands the view on the drawing sheet in all directions in order to prevent matchline
distortion and grid plane clipping. The default offset value is 2 mm for composed views and
0 mm for ruleset views. The offset does not affect the size of the volume that is associated
with the view.

 View Offset is only available for views that are associated to a volume. Section and
detail views do not have this property value.
 Negative values are not permitted for this property.
 In rule set views, if you change the view style before editing View Offset for the first
time, View Offset displays the offset value as defined in the .xml template of the view
style. Make sure that your View Offset value is correct before closing the Drawing
View Properties dialog box.
 View annotations, such as the ruler and view name, are automatically adjusted in
relation to the View Offset value.
VHL Precision
Sets a parameter for Hidden Line removal processing to consider two lines as identical. This
property setting has a direct impact on the visibility of the lines in the drawing. It improves
drawing update performance, but it may reduce drawing quality. The VHL precision
property is only available for composed drawing documents. The default value is 0.000001,
with a range of 0.001 to 0.000001. The smaller the number, the more accurate the graphic
elements are in the 2D view.
Geometry Validation
Sets a parameter for drawing completion and quality to improve drawing update
performance. The Geometry Validation property is available for composed drawing
documents only. The default value is Off. When set to Off, the drawing document
completes, but invalid geometries are left out. If set to On, the drawing document does not
complete if invalid geometries are encountered during update.
View Cone Angle
Displays the cone angle value. This property is only available when you select the Steel
Order Extensions.xml file as the Additional View Inputs property value in the Edit
Ruleset View Style dialog box. For more information, see General Tab (Edit Ruleset View
Style Dialog Box) (Edit Ruleset View Style Dialog Box) in the Smart 3D Drawings and
Reports Reference Data Guide.
See Also
Drawings View Explorer (on page 256)

Automatic Resize Behavior of Composed Views

For Composed drawings, views that are too small to display the associated volume or are larger
than the volume are automatically resized to fit unless the view is set to Fit to Scale or is

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 285

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

managed by a region. The view size grows or shrinks from the center of the view and view
proportions may change after the resize. The drawing must be saved to make the resize of the
view permanent.
You cannot crop a composed drawing view that is scaled. Views that are set to Fit to
Scale can be cropped.
The following examples are common workflows that are affected by the automatic resizing
behavior of the composed drawing view.

Overlapping Volumes Modification

If you manually shift the sides of an associated volume such that the new volume location
overlaps a portion of the old volume, the associated view resizes to mirror the volume changes.
You must update the drawing or drawing view for these changes to take place. Manually-placed
graphics and labels stay in the correct location on the drawing after the volume size modification
and view update.

Before After

Volume
Modification

View Update

Non-overlapping Volumes Modification

If you manually shift the sides of an associated volume, or move the volume, such that the new
volume location does not overlap a portion of the old volume, the associated view resizes
symmetrically around the previous center point of the view. If the volume is moved to a new
location, the view does not resize. In either case, the view contents are updated with the volume
contents. You must update the drawing or drawing view for these changes to take place.

Before After

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 286

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Before After

Volume
Modification

View Update

View to Volume Association

If you associate a view to a volume with the Associate Objects to View command, the view
resizes symmetrically around the center point to match the volume size. The view resizes to
match a larger or smaller volume.

First Volume Second Volume

Volume
Modification

View Update

View Scale Modification

If you change the view scale on the Drawing View Properties dialog box, the view resizes
symmetrically around the center point to accommodate the new scale. Depending on the scale
change, the view grows or shrinks in size. You do not need to update the view to see these
changes, but in order to populate any new objects that are inside the view, an update is
required.

Small Scale Larger Scale

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 287

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Small Scale Larger Scale

View Look Direction Modification

If you change the Look Direction from the Drawing View Properties dialog box, the view
resizes symmetrically around the center point to match the volume size according to the new
look direction. You do not need to update the view to see these changes, but in order to
populate any new objects that are inside the view, an update is required.

Before, Looking Plan After, Looking East

Volume
Modification

View Update

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 288

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

View Direction Coordinate System Modification

If you change the View Direction Coordinate System in the Drawing View Properties dialog
box, the view resizes symmetrically around the center point to accommodate the new view
direction coordinate system. You do not need to update the view to see these changes, but in
order to populate any new objects that are inside the view, an update is required.
If the new coordinate system has the same orientation as the previous coordinate
system, the view does not resize.

Before After

Place a Manual View

The following workflows allow you to place a manual view in a Ruleset drawing either by Parts
or by Reference Plane and Block.
See Also
Place a Manual View (By Parts) (on page 289)
Place a Manual View (By Reference Plane and Block) (on page 290)

Place a Manual View (By Parts)

In this workflow, you directly select detailed parts to associate with the view.
1. In Smart 3D, switch to a task other than Drawings and Reports, such as Molded Forms or
Structural Detailing.
2. Select Tools > Drawing Console.
The Drawing Console dialog box displays.
3. Right click a drawing document and select Edit.
SmartSketch Drawing Editor displays. In the Drawings View Explorer, a single sheet
displays as a child of the drawing document.
4. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, click the Place View command. Click and drag in the
drawing area to place a graphic view.
The Drawing View Properties dialog box displays.
5. On the View tab, select More for the Style property.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 289

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

The Select View Style dialog box displays.

6. Navigate through the hierarchy to Ruleset Styles. Select an appropriate steel order ruleset
view style, such as Steel Order (Decks) or Steel Order (Generic), and click OK.
Additional properties display in the View tab of the Drawing View Properties dialog box.
7. On the View tab, type a value for Name.
8. On the View tab, select the needed values for Coordinate System, Scale Family, and
User Selected Scale.
9. On the View tab, select Scantlings for Plate / Profile as the Orientation Rule value.
10. Click OK.

In the Drawings View Explorer, the view displays as a child of the drawing sheet.
11. Select the graphic view in the drawing area and click Associate Objects to Views .
12. Select the 3D application window to make it the active window.
The Associate ribbon displays in the 3D window.
13. To associate parts, select 1. Structural Parts or Plane as the value for Query on the
Associate ribbon.
14. In the Workspace Explorer, select plates to associate to the view. Select detailed parts, light
(non-detailed) parts, systems, or leaf systems.
15. Click Finish on the Associate ribbon to complete the association to the drawing view.
In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, preview geometry of the selected plate parts displays.

Place a Manual View (By Reference Plane and Block)

In this workflow, you select a grid plane or an offset from a grid plane to associate parts with the
view and select a block, assembly block or assembly to clip the plane selected. You can use the
workflow to place a major view, such as the view for a deck, transverse bulkhead, or longitudinal
bulkhead.
1. In Smart 3D, switch to a task other than Drawings and Reports, such as Molded Forms or
Structural Detailing.
2. Select Tools > Drawing Console.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 290

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

The Drawing Console dialog box displays.

3. Right click a drawing document and select Edit.
SmartSketch Drawing Editor displays. In the Drawings View Explorer, a single sheet
displays as a child of the drawing document.
4. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, click the Place View command. Click and drag in the
drawing area to place a graphic view.
The Drawing View Properties dialog box displays.
5. On the View tab, select More for the Style property.
The Select View Style dialog box displays.
6. Navigate through the hierarchy to Ruleset Styles. Select an appropriate steel order ruleset
view style, such as Steel Order (Reference Plane) or Steel Order - Reference Plane
(Generic), and click OK.
Additional properties display in the View tab of the Drawing View Properties dialog box.
7. On the View tab, type a value for Name.
8. On the View tab, select the needed values for Coordinate System, Scale Family, and
User Selected Scale.
9. On the View tab, select Scantlings for Plate / Profile as the Orientation Rule value.
10. Click OK.

In the Drawings View Explorer, the view displays as a child of the drawing sheet.
11. Select the graphic view in the drawing area and click Associate Objects to Views .
12. Select the 3D application window to make it the active window.
The Associate ribbon displays in the 3D window.
13. To associate parts by grid plane, select 1. Structural Parts or Plane as the value for Query
on the Associate ribbon. In the Workspace Explorer, select a reference plane coincident
with the needed plate parts. For the example in this workflow, a transverse reference plane
is selected.
14. To associate parts by an offset from a grid plane, select 7. Offset (Optional) as the value
for Query on the Associate ribbon. In the Workspace Explorer, select a reference plane.
Type an offset value in Value on the Associate ribbon.
15. Select plate parts to associate to the view. For the example in this workflow, select plate
parts.
16. Select 2. Block, Volume or Assembly (Optional) as the value for Query on the Associate
ribbon.
17. In the Workspace Explorer, select the Assembly tab.
18. Select a block, assembly block or assembly that will define the extents of the plane that is
associated with the view being created.
19. Click Finish on the Associate ribbon to complete the association to the drawing view.
In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, preview geometry of the plate parts displays. Only parts
within the selected block or assembly and coincident with the selected reference plane are

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 291

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

associated with the view. The block boundaries are also displayed.

Place a Manual View for Non-Shell Plates

In this workflow, you use additional options in the Associate ribbon to place a manual view for
non-shell plates. These options display when you select the Use Expansion query in the Query
tab in the Edit Ruleset View Style dialog box. For more information, see Edit Ruleset View
Style Dialog Box.
1. In Smart 3D, switch to a task other than Drawings and Reports, such as Molded Forms or
Structural Detailing.
2. Select Tools > Drawing Console.
The Drawing Console dialog box displays.
3. Right click a drawing document, and select Edit.
SmartSketch Drawing Editor displays. In the Drawings View Explorer, a single sheet
displays as a child of the drawing document.
4. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, click the Place View command. Click and drag in the
drawing area to place a graphic view.
The Drawing View Properties dialog box displays.
5. On the View tab, select More for the Style property.
The Select View Style dialog box displays.
6. Navigate through the hierarchy to Ruleset Styles. Select an appropriate steel order ruleset
view style, such as Steel Order (Reference Plane), and click OK.
Additional properties display in the View tab of the Drawing View Properties dialog box.
7. On the View tab, type a value for Name.
8. On the View tab, select the needed values for Coordinate System, Scale Family, and
User Selected Scale.
9. On the View tab, select Shell Expansion for Plate as the Orientation Rule value.
10. Click OK.

In the Drawings View Explorer, the view displays as a child of the drawing sheet.
11. Select the graphic view in the drawing area, and click Associate Objects to Views .
12. Select the 3D application window to make it the active window.
The Associate ribbon displays in the 3D window.
13. Click Expansion Surface , and then select the root or leaf plate systems to see in the
manual view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 292

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

You can only select systems, not parts.

14. Click Cutting Plane Axis , and then select the axis whose child planes are parallel to the
expansion direction from the Workspace Explorer.

Girth lengths are measured along curves defined by the intersection of each plate
system and each cutting plane.

15. Click Base Plane Definition , and then select the base plane that defines the start point
for girth measurements.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 293

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

16. Specify any additional options as necessary. For example, you can select the offset plane,
as shown below. For more information, see Associate Objects to View Command (on page
300).

1 Plate Curve

2 Offset Plane

3 Base Plane

4 Distance from the offset plane to the start point of the

plate curve

5 Distance from the base plane to the start point of the

plate curve

6 Normal of the offset plane pointing to the plate

17. Click Finish on the Associate ribbon to complete the association to the drawing view.
In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, preview geometry of the selected non-shell plates displays.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 294

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Update a Manual View

1. Right-click the out-of-date view in the Drawings View Explorer and select Update.
2. After the view updates, the view frame in the graphics area shows all geometry defined by
the component view style. The view is up-to-date in the Drawing View Explorer.

 You can delete a manual view permanently, or select UnAssign to move the view in the
UnAssigned Folder. If you delete a view that is a parent of other views, such as a detail or
section view, the Convert or Delete dialog box displays. Select Convert to independent
drawing view(s) to save the child view as an independent drawing view, or select Delete to
delete the child view.
 A sheet cannot be deleted unless all views on the sheet are removed first.
 All views within the drawing must be up-to-date or the drawing status will be out-of-date.
 For information on the 2D commands available for editing, see the SmartSketch Drawing
Editor Help.

Move a Drawing View

Plant, marine, and material handling mode drawing views can only be moved while holding the
ALT key when selecting the view. This includes drawing, section, key plan, and detail views that
contain any graphics.
1. Press and hold the ALT key.
2. Select a view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 295

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

3. Drag the view to a new location.

 Drawing views that have not been updated can be moved without pressing the ALT key.
 Empty views and embedded reports views can be moved without pressing the ALT key.
 The Move, Nudge, Drag, and Select All commands found on the Change toolbar also
requires the use of the ALT key when selecting a view.
 You must use the Fence Select or Select All commands to select multiple views. You
cannot use the CTRL key to select multiple views.

Place Region Command

Creates a new drawing region in the drawing area. A region is a container that controls the
arrangement of the views inside by means of an associated layout style. Views controlled by a
region are called managed views. You can manage any type of drawing view (report, key plan
and graphic views) with a region.

This command is available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you edit a layout template or
edit an existing drawing.

When you click Place Region , you click and drag to define the new region. The Region
Properties dialog box appears so that you can define the properties associated with the region.
After creating the region and defining its properties, use the Place View or Place Report View
command to place views within the region.

Region Behavior
 You can place a drawing view outside a region, but this makes the drawing view an
"unmanaged view," meaning the properties of the region do not control the drawing view.
However, if a view is inside a region or touching a region, the region manages the drawing

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 296

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

view and, when you update the drawing in the 3D Drawings and Reports task, the software
pulls the drawing view into the region and updates it based on the region layout style and
layout processor.
 If a region refuses to accept a drawing view (for example: the region is defined for three
views, and you are attempting to add a fourth view), the drawing view is added as an
unmanaged view, just outside and to the upper left of the region. If another region occupies
this space in the drawing area, the unmanaged view is placed as close to the original region
as possible.
 If a drawing view "straddles" two or more regions, the region that contains more of the
drawing view manages it. If the drawing view equally straddles two or more regions, the
software uses the first drawing view point to measure distance and determine which region
manages the drawing view.
 If a region contains a drawing view and the drawing view properties make it ineligible for the
region, the software removes the drawing view from the region automatically and places it in
the upper left of the drawing area, outside of other regions.
 If you switch the border of a drawing using the Switch Border command, views may
reposition or resize with the new border template based on the following conditions:
 Managed views are resized and repositioned according to the new border template.
 Unmanaged views are not resized and repositioned.
For more information, see Switch Border (on page 210).

Deleting a Region
Regions are used to manage the positioning of views within a layout template. When you delete
a region, any views that were managed by the region become "unmanaged" views.
1. To delete a region from a layout template, you should use PickQuick to select the outer
boundary of the region.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 297

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

2. After selecting the region outer boundary, select Edit > Delete to remove the region
definition. You can also press the Delete key on the keyboard. Any views placed within the
region remain on the layout template as unmanaged views.

See Also
Region Properties Dialog Box (on page 298)

Region Properties Dialog Box

Specifies properties for the selected region. This dialog box displays after you have created a
new region using the Place Region command, which is only available in SmartSketch Drawing
Editor.
Description
Provides a description of the region.
Layout Style
Specifies the layout style to associate with this region. The layout style dictates the order
and placement of the drawing views managed by the region. Select More to display the
Define Layout Style dialog box and select the layout style from a list of available styles. For
more information, see Define Layout Style Dialog Box (on page 299).
Maintain Aspect
Specifies whether or not the aspect ratio for each drawing view and region is maintained
within the layout. This property is useful when you are "stretching" a layout into a border or
when you are changing the border.
Lock Region
Locks the positioning of the drawing views within the region. This property also prevents you
from adding or deleting existing views.
See Also
Convert Excel Spreadsheet Reports to Native Text Box Format Custom Command (on page
403)
Place Region Command (on page 296)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 298

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Define Layout Style Dialog Box

Specifies a layout style to associate with a drawing region. This dialog box displays when you
select More in the Value field for the Layout Style property on the Region Properties dialog
box. The hierarchy shows all available layout styles.
See Also
Convert Excel Spreadsheet Reports to Native Text Box Format Custom Command (on page
403)
Place Region Command (on page 296)
Region Properties Dialog Box (on page 298)

Place Snapshot View Command

Creates a new snapshot drawing view in the drawing area. This command is only available
in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you create a new drawing or open an existing drawing
from a 3D task.
Before you place snapshot views, you need to create a snapshot using the 3D task
Tools > Snapshot View command. If you do not have any snapshot views, a message displays
and you can go back to a 3D task and create the snapshot views.

When you click Place Snapshot View , you click and drag to define the new view. You
specify the snapshot view properties in the Snapshot View ribbon displayed above the drawing
area.

When you edit a drawing that contains a snapshot view, you can right-click the view and select
Properties to change the style or scale used in the snapshot view.
To update the contents of the snapshot view, right-click the view and select Update View.

See Also
Update View Command (on page 399)
Place Snapshot View Ribbon (on page 299)
Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Drawing View Shortcut Menu) (on page 382)

Place Snapshot View Ribbon

Sets options for placing a snapshot drawing view. These options include the view name, style,
and scale.
View Name
Displays the name of the view you created in a 3D task.
View Style
Specifies a view style, which includes rules for filters, updates, and graphics. The view style
controls the output characteristics of the view on the generated drawing. The list displays
the 10 most recently used view styles in the session. Click More... to display the Select
View Style dialog box.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 299

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

View Scale
Specifies a scale. You can choose No Scale if the view is not to scale. Choose Custom if
you want to specify your own scale and then type values in the two boxes at the right of the
ribbon. If you choose Custom for the scale, you must type values that are greater than zero
in the boxes at the right. If you select Fit to Scale, the software places the snapshot to fit
the scale of the view you place. If you select one of the scale families, such as Metric
Scales, the software sets the cursor for placement at the selected scale.
See Also
Place Snapshot View Command (on page 299)

Associate Objects to View Command

Allows you to interactively specify volumes or other model objects as input for the selected
drawing views. If the view is a key plan or report view, you specify an existing drawing view. This
command is also used in creating composed drawings in a 3D task. The command is only
available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you create a new drawing or open an existing
drawing from a 3D task.
When you select a view and click Associate Objects to View , the Associate Objects to
View ribbon appears on the 3D task window. Associate Objects to View turns off 2D/3D
Selection so that you can move back and forth between the 3D application and
SmartSketch Drawing Editor, selecting views and associating volumes or model objects.

Orthographic View Ribbon

If you are associating volumes to a graphic drawing view, the following ribbon options appear:
Select View
Shows either all of the graphic views in the drawing or a list of selected views from the
drawing. You can multi-select views before running the Associate Objects to View
command to populate the list with only the selected views. As you click volumes to associate
them to the currently shown view, the list scrolls to the next view automatically. The views
are listed in alphabetical order.
Exclude Objects
Allows you to select objects to exclude from the drawing view or to view objects that have
been previously selected for exclusion from the drawing view. When you click Exclude
Objects, the Accept/Cancel buttons enable on the ribbon so that you can confirm the
selection. Excluded objects are highlighted.

 You should associate your volume before excluding objects from the volume.
 You can select the objects from the model, or from the Workspace Explorer, but you
cannot select referenced objects that originate from files on the Reference tab of the
Workspace Explorer.
 You can clear objects that have previously been excluded from the drawing view by
clicking on the object.
 If you exclude an object while the related tab of the Workspace Explorer is active, the
child objects are automatically excluded. For example, if the System tab is active when
you exclude a system object, then all of the children objects are also excluded. If the

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 300

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

related WSE tab is not active, only the object that you specifically select is excluded. For
example, if you exclude a pipe run while the Space tab is active, the child parts of the
pipe run are not excluded.
Select Volume
Sets the command in select mode so that you can select a volume graphically or from the
Workspace Explorer. After you select a volume in the workspace window, you can use the
other controls on the ribbon to further define the objects collected for the drawing view. This
is the default setting when the command ribbon appears.
Cancel
Clears all objects selected for exclusion from the drawing view and returns you to the
previous Select volume command step.
Accept
Accepts all objects selected for exclusion from the drawing view and returns you to the
Select volume command step.
Filter
Specifies a filter to restrict the objects to include in the volume. You can right-click and
select More to select a filter from an existing list of filters or to create a new filter.

 You should not use filters from the My Filters folder when using the Filter option on the
Associate Objects to View ribbon.
 Section and detail views inherit filters used by the Filter option from the parent view.
Properties
Displays the properties for the selected filter.
Clear Filter
Clears the currently selected filter. This button only enables when you have selected a filter
in the Filter dropdown field.
Look Direction
Indicates the view direction for the drawing view. The current setting is taken from the
drawing view properties, set when the view was created with the Place View command in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. If you change the Look Direction, you are also changing the
view direction property on the drawing view. If you select From Active View, the software
uses the Look Direction of the active graphic view.

Rule Set View Ribbon (List-Based)

When the graphic view has a rule set view style, the following ribbon options appear:
Query
Specifies the query to apply to the drawing view. The selected query tells the software which
objects to include in the drawing view.
A view query specifies the type of model object or parameter value used by the
view definition. The list of available queries is specific to the selected package. If you are a
reference data administrator customizing a drawing package, view queries are parts of the

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 301

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

rule set defined on the Actions tab of the Edit Ruleset View Style dialog box in the
Drawings and Reports task. For more information, see the appropriate drawing type under
Drawings by Rule View Style Rule Sets in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.
Value
Specifies a value required by the selected query. The type of value is defined by the query.
You may need to select a value from a list, type a value, or turn an option on or off.
Finish
Saves the specified query and value to the selected drawing view.

Rule Set View Ribbon (Step-Based)

When the graphic view has a rule set view style, the following ribbon options appear:
Associate Objects to View
Displays the default parts available for the view. Select the needed parts to add them to the
view.
 If all needed parts are displayed, select them in the graphic view, and then click Finish
to return to SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
 If all needed parts are not displayed, select them using the Create Volume or
Gather Objects options.
Create Volume
Changes the default volume definition for the drawing view. For more information, see
Create Volume Options, below.
Gather Objects
Changes the default part type definitions to include in the volume. For more information, see
Gather Objects Options, below.
Orient View
Changes the default view direction and orientation. For more information, see Orient View
Options, below.
With this option, you can orient the drawing view by the local coordinate system of a
part selected in the graphic view.
Finish
Saves the specified options to the drawing view and returns to SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
Reject
Rejects the selected options.
Accept
Accepts the selected options.

Create Volume Options

Volume Creation Rule - Defines the volume for the view by one of the following methods:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 302

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

 Create volume along surface of input parts with boundary extents - The
volume follows the surfaces of the selected parts resulting from Any system, part,
or reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended by the
values of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing. The
volume area (in the plane of the view) is extended to (or clipped by) the boundaries
defined by Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly).

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part not gathered into view
4 - View direction
5 - Volume extended to boundaries

 Create volume along surface of input parts without boundary extents - The
volume follows the surfaces of the selected parts resulting from Any system, part,
or reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended by the
values of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing. The
volume area (in the plane of the view) is not extended to (nor clipped by) the
boundaries defined by Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly).

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part not gathered into view
4 - View direction

 Create volume from range box around input parts with boundary extents - The
volume is a rectangular range box around the selected parts resulting from Any
system, part, or reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is
extended by the values of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out
of drawing. The volume is extended to (or clipped by) the boundaries defined by
Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly). See the corrugated bulkhead example
below.

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part gathered into view
4 - View direction
5 - Volume extended to boundaries

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 303

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

 Create volume from range box around input parts without boundary extents -
The volume is a rectangular range box around the selected parts resulting from Any
system, part, or reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is
extended by the values of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out
of drawing. The volume is not extended to (nor clipped by) the boundaries defined
by Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly). See the corrugated bulkhead
example below.

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
Example: Non-orthogonal member
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part gathered into view
4 - View direction

 Create oriented volume around input parts without boundary extents - The
volume is a rectangular box around the parts. The box is oriented around parts to
minimize the volume. The parts are typically not orthogonal, but the view direction is
typically normal to the box. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended by
the values of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing.

 If the view direction is not normal to the box, then the volume is extended to (or
clipped by) the boundaries defined by Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly)
instead of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing.
 If the view direction is normal to the box, then the volume is extended to (or clipped
by) Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing. These
values can be positive or negative.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 304

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Example: Non-orthogonal member

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part gathered into view
4 - View direction

 Do not create volume - A volume is not used to restrict gathering using gathering
rule. For example, a shell longitudinal profile view does not use a volume. It instead
uses levels to gather secondary parts.
Depth Into
Defines a distance into the drawing to extend the depth of a thin volume. Parts within the
thin volume are displayed in the view. A value for this query is optional.
Depth Out Of
Defines a distance out of the drawing to extend the depth of a thin volume. Parts within the
thin volume are displayed in the view. A value for this query is optional.

1 - View plane
2 - View direction
3 - Out of drawing
4 - Into drawing

Boundary Overlap
Defines the distance that parts extend past the view boundary.
Offset
Defines the distance from a reference plane used to create the view plane. A positive value
offsets the view plane out of the drawing. A negative value offsets the view plane into the
drawing. This value can be used in combination with Volume growth into drawing and
Volume growth out of drawing to create a thin volume. A value for this query is optional.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 305

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

1 - Reference plane
2 - View direction
3 - Offset out of drawing (positive value)
4 - Offset into drawing (negative value)
5 - View plane offset out of drawing
6 - View plane offset into drawing

Clip to Volume
Clips part visibility in the graphic view to the boundaries of the volume.

Gather Objects Options

Gathering Rule
Defines the type of parts gathered in the drawing view. The rule provides a definition of the
objects to be gathered and drawn in a view. Select a rule that supports the type of drawing
view you want to create, such as Steel Order, Piping, Pipe Supports, or Assembly.
Include all objects in volume
Defines how gathered parts are included in the drawing view. Select to gather all parts in the
volume even if they are not connected to the selected parts. Clear to gather only the
selected parts and parts connected to the selected parts.
Show Objects Gathered
Highlights the gathered parts.

Orient View Options

Orientation Rule
Specifies the rule used to define the view orientation. Select options such as Global
Coordinate System, Local Coordinate System, Scantlings for Plate/Profile, and
Scantling By Plate Normal.
View Direction
Defines the direction of the view. The available options are defined by the selected
orientation rule.
Up Direction
Defines the up direction of the view. The available options are defined by the selected
orientation rule.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 306

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Orient Display to View Direction

Changes the orientation of the graphic view to match the view orientation. This option is only
available when Local Coordinate System is selected for Orientation Rule.
For more information on view orientation options, see Orientation Rules (on page 110) in the
Smart 3D Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Key Plan or Report View Ribbon

When the view you selected is specified as a report or key plan view style, you need to
associate a drawing view to populate the contents of the report or key plan. The following ribbon
options appear:
View
Displays a list of views available for association with the report or key plan.
Finish
Returns you to SmartSketch Drawing Editor with the selected view associated to the report
or key plan view.

Generic View Ribbon

When the selected graphic view is specified as a generic rule set view style, the following ribbon
options display:
Associate Objects to View
Displays the default parts available for the view. Select the needed parts to add them to the
view.
 If all needed parts are displayed, select them in the graphic view, and then click Finish
to return to SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
 If all needed parts are not displayed, select them using the Create Volume or
Gather Objects options.
Create Volume
Changes the default volume definition for the drawing view. For more information, see
Create Volume Options, below.
Gather Objects
Changes the default part type definitions to include in the volume. For more information, see
Gather Objects Options, below.
Orient View
Changes the default view direction and orientation. For more information, see Orient View
Options, below.
With this option, you can orient the drawing view by the local coordinate system of a
part selected in the graphic view.
Finish
Saves the specified options to the drawing view and returns to SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 307

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Reject
Rejects the selected options.
Accept
Accepts the selected options.

Create Volume Options

Volume Creation Rule
Defines the volume for the view by one of the following methods:
 Create volume along surface of input parts with boundary extents - The volume
follows the surfaces of the selected parts resulting from Any system, part, or
reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended by the values of
Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing. The volume area
(in the plane of the view) is extended to (or clipped by) the boundaries defined by
Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly). The gathering range is extended by the
values defined by Extend Into and Extend Out Of.

Example: Corrugated bulkhead 1 - Cross-section of volume

2 - Volume growth
3 - Extended gathering range
4 - Volume extended to
boundaries
5 - View direction
6 - Additional part gathered into
view
7 - Additional part not gathered
into view

 Create volume along surface of input parts without boundary extents - The volume
follows the surfaces of the selected parts resulting from Any system, part, or
reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended by the values of
Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing. The volume area
(in the plane of the view) is not extended to (nor clipped by) the boundaries defined by
Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly). The gathering range is extended by the
values defined by Extend Into and Extend Out Of.

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Extended gathering range
4 - View direction
5 - Additional part gathered into view
6 - Additional part not gathered into view

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 308

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

 Create volume from range box around input parts with boundary extents - The
volume is a rectangular range box around the selected parts resulting from Any
system, part, or reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended
by the values of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing.
The volume is extended to (or clipped by) the boundaries defined by Boundary (Block,
volume, or assembly). See the corrugated bulkhead example below.

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part gathered into view
4 - View direction
5 - Volume extended to boundaries

 Create volume from range box around input parts without boundary extents - The
volume is a rectangular range box around the selected parts resulting from Any
system, part, or reference plane. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended
by the values of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing.
The volume is not extended to (nor clipped by) the boundaries defined by Boundary
(Block, volume, or assembly). See the corrugated bulkhead example below.

Example: Corrugated bulkhead

1 - Cross-section of volume
Example: Non-orthogonal member
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part gathered into view
4 - View direction

 Create oriented volume around input parts without boundary extents - The volume
is a rectangular box around the parts. The box is oriented around parts to minimize the
volume. The parts are typically not orthogonal, but the view direction is typically normal

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 309

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

to the box. The volume depth (normal to the view) is extended by the values of Volume
growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing.

 If the view direction is not normal to the box, then the volume is extended to (or
clipped by) the boundaries defined by Boundary (Block, volume, or assembly)
instead of Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing.
 If the view direction is normal to the box, then the volume is extended to (or clipped
by) Volume growth into drawing and Volume growth out of drawing. These
values can be positive or negative.

Example: Non-orthogonal member

1 - Cross-section of volume
2 - Volume growth
3 - Additional part gathered into view
4 - View direction

 Do not create volume - A volume is not used to restrict gathering using gathering rule.
For example, a shell longitudinal profile view does not use a volume. It instead uses
levels to gather secondary parts.
Depth Into
Defines a distance into the drawing to extend the depth of a thin volume. Parts within the
thin volume are displayed in the view. A value for this query is optional.
Depth Out Of
Defines a distance out of the drawing to extend the depth of a thin volume. Parts within the
thin volume are displayed in the view. A value for this query is optional.

1 - View plane
2 - View direction
3 - Out of drawing
4 - Into drawing

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 310

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Boundary Overlap
Defines the distance that parts extend past the view boundary.
Offset
Defines the distance from a reference plane used to create the view plane. A positive value
offsets the view plane out of the drawing. A negative value offsets the view plane into the
drawing. This value can be used in combination with Volume growth into drawing and
Volume growth out of drawing to create a thin volume. A value for this query is optional.

1 - Reference plane
2 - View direction
3 - Offset out of drawing (positive value)
4 - Offset into drawing (negative value)
5 - View plane offset out of drawing
6 - View plane offset into drawing

Extend Into
Defines the distance that the gathering range box extends into the drawing. You can display
parts that are outside of the thin volume and in the extended gathering range box. A value
for this query is optional.
Extend Out Of
Defines the distance that the gathering range box extends out of the drawing. You can
display parts that are outside of the thin volume and in the extended gathering range box. A
value for this query is optional.
Clip to Volume
Clips part visibility in the graphic view to the boundaries of the volume.

Gather Objects Options

Gathering Rule
Defines the type of parts gathered in the drawing view. The rule provides a definition of the
objects to be gathered and drawn in a view. Select a rule that supports the type of drawing
view you want to create, such as Steel Order, Piping, Pipe Supports, or Assembly.
Include all objects in volume
Defines how gathered parts are included in the drawing view. Select to gather all parts in the
volume even if they are not connected to the selected parts. Clear to gather only the
selected parts and parts connected to the selected parts.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 311

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Show Objects Gathered

Highlights the gathered parts.

Orient View Options

Orientation Rule
Specifies the rule used to define the view orientation. Select options such as Global
Coordinate System, Local Coordinate System, Scantlings for Plate/Profile, and
Scantling By Plate Normal.
View Direction
Defines the direction of the view. The available options are defined by the selected
orientation rule.
Up Direction
Defines the up direction of the view. The available options are defined by the selected
orientation rule.
Orient Display to View Direction
Changes the orientation of the graphic view to match the view orientation. This option is only
available when Local Coordinate System is selected for Orientation Rule.
For more information on view orientation options, see Orientation Rules (on page 110) in the
Smart 3D Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Expansion View Ribbon

Provides options for generating expansion views. An overview of the required inputs is shown in
the following graphic:

This ribbon displays only when the Associate Views to Object Command option is
set to Expansion. For more information, see General Tab (Edit Ruleset View Style Dialog Box)
in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide. You can access this document using the
Help > Printable Guides command in the Drawings and Reports task.
Expansion Surface
Select a plate system or plate part for which you want expansion drawings. You can select
multiple plate systems or plate parts.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 312

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Cutting Planes Axis

Select a coordinate system axis for defining the cutting planes.

Base Plane Definition

Select a plane that is normal to the grid planes of the cutting plane axis.
Offset Plane
Select a plane that is perpendicular to the grid planes of the base plane and cutting plane
axes. This plane is the reference plane from which the curve is expanded. This is an
optional input.

Expansion Direction
Defines the expansion direction. This option is available only when the base plane intersects
the expansion surface. If you select Positive Direction, the expansion surface on the
positive side of the base plane will be expanded and its corresponding drawing will be
generated. If you select Negative Direction, the expansion surface on the negative side of
the base plane will be expanded and its corresponding drawing will be generated. If you
select Both, the expansion surface will be expanded completely and its corresponding
drawing will be generated.
Block or Volume
Select a bounding block or volume. This is an optional input.
Cancel
Clears the selected options and allows you to continue the selection process.
Accept
Accepts the selected options.
Finish
Finishes the command.
For workflows using this command, see Associate Objects to Views (on page 314) and
Associate Objects to a Drawings by Rule View (on page 318).

 When using a Snapshot view style, all objects within the associated volume are included in
the drawing view, regardless of exclusions made using Associate Objects to View .
 When using a Volume view style, only the objects returned by the filters in the view style are
included in the drawing view.
 An error message displays if a volume is not selected in the 3D application.
 If a 3D task process is running (for example: a recompute of relationships after moving a
grid plane), an informational message displays and Associate Objects to View is
canceled.
 Views that are too small to display the volume are automatically sized larger to fit unless the
view is set to Fit to Scale or is managed by a region. Likewise, views that are larger than
the volume are automatically resized to fit unless the view is set to Fit to Scale or is
managed by a region. The view size grows or shrinks from the center of the view and view
proportions may change after the resize. The drawing must be saved to make the resize of

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 313

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

the view permanent. For more information, see Automatic Resize Behavior of Composed
Views (on page 285).
 To remove associated inputs from a view, use Remove Associated Inputs . For more
information, see Remove Associated Inputs Command (on page 319).
 Section and detail views inherit filters used by the Filter option from the parent view.
See Also
Place View Command (on page 275)
Update View Command (on page 399)

Associate Objects to Views

The following procedure steps you through associating volumes to drawings views in a 3D
composed drawing. The procedures assumes you have already opened a 3D drawing in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor to place and associate views. The example workflow uses a
drawing with two drawing views already placed.

For more information on 3D composed drawings, see the Orthographic Drawings

User's Guide. For information on the commands available for editing 3D drawings, see Working
with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor (on page 253).

Associate Drawing Views with Orthographic View Styles

1. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, select the orthographic drawing views that you want to
associate, and then click Associate Objects to View .

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 314

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

2. In the 3D application, notice the Associate Objects to View ribbon above the active
window. If the selected drawing view has an orthographic view style, the Select View
dropdown includes the names of the drawing views you selected in the drawing.

3. Click volume graphically or in the Workspace Explorer to associate to the current drawing
view. The Select View dropdown scrolls automatically to the next drawing view in the list.
Click another volume to associate with the second drawing view.
4. When you are done associating volumes to drawing views, return to SmartSketch Drawing
Editor, and click Place View .
5. To update the view contents with the associated volumes, select and right-click the view and
select Update View on the shortcut menu. For more information, see Update View
Command (on page 399).
6. Save the drawing document and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
7. Update and complete your drawing document.

Exclude Objects from the Volume

The Associate Objects to View command ribbon allows you to further define the objects
associated to the drawing view. You can use filters to restrict the objects collected from the
volume. You can also exclude objects from the volume if you do not want them included in the
drawing.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 315

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

In the following graphic, the Associate Objects to View ribbon shows how you can use a filter,
such as Equipment, to define the objects shown in the drawing.

In the next example, the same Equipment filter is applied to the volume. However, a Vertical
Tank is excluded from the filter. You achieve this output as follows:
1. Select the Filter, then click Exclude Objects .
2. Select the objects inside the volume that you want to exclude from the drawing.

 We recommend that you associate your volume before excluding objects from the
volume.
 You can select the objects from the model, or from the Workspace Explorer, but you
cannot select referenced objects that originate from files on the Reference tab of the
Workspace Explorer.
 You can clear objects that have previously been excluded from the drawing view by
clicking on the object.
 If you exclude an object while the related tab of the Workspace Explorer is active, the
child objects are automatically excluded. For example, if the System tab is active when
you exclude a system object, then all of the children objects are also excluded. If the
related WSE tab is not active, only the object that you specifically select is excluded. For
example, if you exclude a pipe run while the Space tab is active, the child parts of the
pipe run are not excluded.
3. Click Accept to save the change to the volume definition.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 316

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

4. Go back to SmartSketch Drawing Editor and update the view contents with the associated
volumes with the Update View command on the shortcut menu of the view. The Vertical
Tank does not appear in the drawing view.

5. Save the drawing document and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

6. Update and complete your drawing document.

Associate Key Plan or Report Views

1. Select a key plan or report view in the drawing document.
2. Click Associate Objects to View .
3. In the 3D application, select a view from the View dropdown. The View dropdown contains
a list of all the drawing views available in the current drawing document open in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
4. Click Finish to save the association to the key plan or report view.
5. Go back to SmartSketch Drawing Editor to update the view contents. Select and right- click
the view and select Update View on the shortcut menu. For more information, see Update
View Command (on page 399).
6. Save the drawing document and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
7. Update and complete your drawing document.

Associate to a Drawing View with a Ruleset View Style

Ruleset view styles are only used in Smart 3D drawings.
1. Select a drawing view with a ruleset view style then click Associate Objects to View .
2. In the 3D application, select a query from the Query dropdown. Depending on the query,
you may need to specify a value or select objects graphically.
3. Click Finish to save the association to the drawing view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 317

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

4. Go back to SmartSketch Drawing Editor to update the view contents. Select and right- click
the view and select Update View on the shortcut menu. For more information, see Update
View Command (on page 399).
5. Save the drawing document and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
6. Update and complete your drawing document.
See Also
Place View Command (on page 275)
Associate Objects to View Command (on page 300)

Associate Objects to a Drawings by Rule View

1. In Smart 3D, switch to a task other than Drawings and Reports, such as Molded Forms or
Structural Detailing.
2. Click Tools > Drawing Console.
The Drawing Console dialog box displays.
3. Right-click an existing Drawings by Ruleset drawing document and click Edit.
SmartSketch Drawing Editor displays.
4. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, click Place View . Click and drag in the drawing area to
place a graphic view.
The Drawing View Properties Dialog Box displays.
5. On the View tab, select More for the Style property.
The Select View Style dialog box displays.
6. Navigate through the hierarchy and select a drawing view style, and then click OK.
Additional properties display on the View tab of the Drawing View Properties dialog box.
For more information about ruleset view style definitions, see Define View Style
Command in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide. You can access this
document using the Help > Printable Guides command in the Drawings and Reports task.
7. On the View tab, type a value for Name, and then select the needed values for Coordinate
System, Scale Family, and User Selected Scale.
8. Click OK.
9. Select the graphic view in the drawing area and click Associate Objects to View .
10. Select the 3D application window to make it the active window.
11. Use the ribbon that displays in the 3D window to define the necessary options.

 For more information, see Place View Command (on page 275) and Associate Objects to
View Command (on page 300).
 The software displays either the Drawing Ruleset Ribbon or the Expansion Ribbon,
depending on how you defined the Associate Objects to View options for the selected
view style. For more information about this option, see General Tab (Edit Ruleset View Style
Dialog Box) in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 318

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Remove Associated Inputs Command

Allows you to remove the associated volumes, filters, views, and other inputs from the
selected view. It works with all graphic and non-graphic (report and keyplan) views. The
command is available on the Compose toolbar when creating a new 3D composed drawing or
editing a 3D composed drawing.
When you click Remove Associated Inputs , a status bar message instructs you to select a
single drawing view. After you select a drawing view, a confirmation message displays. Click
Yes to continue and remove the associated inputs from the selected view, or click No to cancel
the command.
You cannot Undo or Redo actions performed by the Remove Associated Inputs
command.
See Also
Place View Command (on page 275)
Associate Objects to View Command (on page 300)
Update View Command (on page 399)

Place Report View Command

Adds a report "view" in the drawing. The report view becomes an embedded report based on
the contents of a drawing view. You could create Bill of Material, Issue Record, or a Revision
report tied to the contents of a specified drawing view. This command is only available in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you create a new drawing or open an existing drawing from
a 3D task.

When you click Place Report , you click and drag to define the new report view. The Report
Properties dialog box appears so you can define the properties associated with the report view.
When you select a report view and click Associate Objects to View , the Associate
Objects to View ribbon appears on the 3D task window. For more information, see Associate
Objects to View Command (on page 300).
For information on creating new views, see Place View Command (on page 275).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 319

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

For a list of reports that can be embedded in a drawing successfully, see Reports Compatible
with Drawings (on page 321).

 You can associate multiple reports to the same view, but you cannot associate multiple
views to the same report.
 You cannot multi-select report views to associate to a single view. The relationship is
one-to-one from report view to graphic drawing view. Also, you cannot multi-select report
views and graphic views. Other objects (such as lines or symbols) are ignored if they are in
the select set with the report view when you run the Associate Objects to View command.
See Also
Report Properties Dialog Box (Place Report View Command) (on page 320)
Update View Command (on page 399)
Report Properties Dialog Box (Place Report View Command) (on page 320)

Report Properties Dialog Box (Place Report View Command)

Specifies properties for the selected report view. This dialog box displays after you have placed
a new report view using the Place Report View command or when you edit properties for an
existing report view.
Name
Specifies a name for the report view.
Description
Provides a description of the report view.
Report Template
Specifies the report template to use when populating the report view. Select More in the
Value list to display the Select Template dialog box. For more information, see Select
Template Dialog Box (on page 321).
Report Template Output
Specifies how the report output will be formatted. Select Excel to output the report as an
Excel spreadsheet or Native text boxes to use a text box format. The Undefined value
means the software uses the default output format for the report (Excel spreadsheet).
Report Justification
Specifies the justification of the report window. Select Top-Left, Top-Right, Center-Center,
Bottom-Left, or Bottom-Right to align the report to one of these positions. For example, if
you select Top-Right, the top-right corner of the report window is aligned to the top-right
corner of the view. The Center-Center option is the only justification option that scales the
report window to fit the view. The other justification options do not scale to the view. For
example, if you choose Top-Right and the report window is either larger or smaller than the
view, it is not resized automatically to fit the view.
The Report Output Format setting must be set to Native text boxes for
justification to function. Otherwise, the justification setting is automatically set to
Center-Center.
After creating the view and defining its properties, use the Associate Objects to View
command to specify the content of the view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 320

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

The SP3DConvertExcelEmbedded.dll is a delivered custom command that allows you to

convert an Excel spreadsheet report to the native text box format for use in 3D Drawings. For
information on converting Excel spreadsheet reports, see Convert Excel Spreadsheet Reports to
Native Text Box Format Custom Command (on page 403).
See Also
Place Report View Command (on page 319)

Select Template Dialog Box

Specifies a template to associate with the selected view.
This dialog box appears when you click More in the Value dropdown on the Report Properties
dialog box while placing a new report view on the drawing sheet. For more information, see
Place Report View Command (on page 319).
Click OK to return to the Report Properties dialog box.
See Also
Place Report View Command (on page 319)
Report Properties Dialog Box (Place Report View Command) (on page 320)

Reports Compatible with Drawings

There are three conditions that must be satisfied before a report can be successfully embedded
in a drawing and produce useful results.
 Pure SQL queries are not supported
 Report must have a column named OID and LocatableOID
 There must be a column named ItemNum
The following reports can be embedded in a drawing successfully. The product allows you to
embed any of the delivered reports in a drawing, but the following reports provide more
meaningful results when embedded in a drawing. The following reports are the only reports that
are compatible with the bubble label (Reference_Circle_CA_L) in drawings. For more
information on each report, see the Smart 3D Reports User's Guide.
PipeRuns by Drawing (Deliverables\PipeRuns by Drawing)
Equipment Material Take-Off (Equipment)
Solids of Design Equipment with Composite CoG (Equipment)
Hangers and Supports for Components - Drawings (Hangers and Supports)
Hangers and Supports for Supported Route - Drawing (Hangers and Supports)
Hangers and Supports for Supporting Structure - Drawing (Hangers and Supports)
Hangers and Supports End View - Drawing (Hangers and Supports)
Hangers and Supports ISO View - Drawing (Hangers and Supports)
Hangers and Supports Side View - Drawing (Hangers and Supports)
Hangers and Supports Pipe Rack Sorted by Name - Export to Icarus (Hangers and Supports)
Equipment Piping Trim (Piping)
HVAC Material Take-Off (HVAC)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 321

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Piping Fittings - Export to Icarus

Piping Material Take-Off (Piping)
Piping Pipe Line List (Piping)

Place a Label Command

Manually labels items on a drawing. This command is available when you are editing a 3D
drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
You may want to manually place labels to identify or emphasize objects beyond what is provided
by automatic labeling. You can choose one of the delivered label rules, or you can customize
your own label rule.
You can select a single object and place a label for the object.

With an applicable label rule, you can also select multiple objects, and then place a group of
labels. The following figure shows grouped labels aligned to each other and consolidated by
label types with optional leaders and bubble labels. For more information, see Group Labels (on
page 326).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 322

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

When you place labels using this command, the software automatically saves the labels to the
DwgTemplate layer so they are preserved when you update the drawing document.

 To move a label after it has been placed, click and drag the label by its origin point,
identified by the green circle in the middle of the label object. In the following example, the
Drum label is moved.

 Snapping behavior is automatic. In the previous example, if you click and drag the Drum
label by its origin point and hover over another label, then release the Drum label, it snaps
to the new position.

Place a Label Ribbon (on page 323)

Place a Label Ribbon

Sets options for manual label placement on a drawing. To access this ribbon, click Place a
Label .
When you place labels using this command, make sure you are on the DwgTemplate
layer of the drawing so the software preserves the manually placed labels when you update the
drawing.
Object Selection Filter
Specifies what type of objects can be selected in the drawing when placing a label. The list
displays only object types in the drawing. Select one or more object types, or select All to
select all object types. Click Close to close the list. All is the default value.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 323

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Label Name
Specifies a label rule. The label rule defines the label type:
 A single or a group label
 Inclusion and type of leaders
 Inclusion and type of bubble labels
Label rules are located in the [Reference Data
Folder]\SharedContent\Drawings\Catalog\Rules\LabelRules folder.
Click More to select a label rule from a hierarchical list.
Font
Defines the text font in the label.
Text Size
Defines the text size in the label.
Text Color
Defines the text color in the label.
Bold
Applies bold formatting to the label text.
Italic
Applies italic formatting to the label text.
Underline
Underlines the text.
Shape
Defines a shape for the label border.

/ Orientation
Specifies the positioning and direction of text in the label. Select Horizontal or Vertical
.
Leaderline On/Off
Specifies whether you want a leader line pointing to the object.
Leaderline Jog On/Off
Specifies whether a jog in the leader line is acceptable.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 324

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Leader Color
Defines the color of the leader line. The leader line color can be different than Text Color
.
/ Boundary
Specifies whether the leader terminator originates inside or at the boundary of the object.
Select Boundary or Inside .
Tolerance Zone
Specifies the required distance between the labeled object and the label before a leader
appears. For example, if the leader tolerance value is set to 10 mm, then the label must be
at least 10 mm away from the labeled object before a leader appears.
/ / / Dimensioned Label
Places a label in a dimension format. Choose from Distance Between , Coordinate
Dimension , SmartDimension , and Angle Between . A label displays instead of
a dimension value. For more information, see Dimensioned Label Command (on page 335).

Pipe BOP
Places a label that displays the elevation or inverted elevation value of a pipe route object.
For more information, see Elevation Label Command (on page 337).
As Drawn
Specifies that the label be shown using default values in the label rule. The software ignores
font, text size, text color, and other formatting options.

Place a Manual Label

1. Right-click a drawing, and click Edit on the shortcut menu. The drawing opens for editing in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

2. On the Drawings Compose toolbar, click Place a Label .

3. Click Object Selection Filter and select the types of objects available for selection. For
example, selecting Physical Connections only allows you to select physical connections.
Click Close.
4. Select an object in a drawing view to label. If you are placing a group label, select two or
more objects in a drawing view.
5. In the Label Name box, select a label rule.
 Select a label rule applicable to the selected objects.
 To pick from a hierarchical list:
i. Select More.
The Select Label dialog box displays.
ii. Select a label template folder in the left pane of the dialog box, select a specific
label name in the right pane, and then click OK.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 325

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

 With an applicable label rule, you can place a group label. For more information, see
Group Labels (on page 326).
6. Make the required typeface selections in the Font, Text Size, and Text Color boxes.
7. Click Bold , Italic , and Underline to achieve the required formatting.
8. Click Shape , and select the shape of the label border.
9. Click Orientation to specify horizontal or vertical text.
10. Make the required leader line selections in the Leaderline On/Off , Leaderline Jog
On/Off , and Leader Color boxes.
11. Click Boundary to clip the leader at the object boundary, or click Inside to extend the
leader to the inside of the object.
12. Type a value in the Tolerance Zone box. This value determines the distance required for a
leader to display.
13. Select a dimension label in order to place a dimension-like label. For more information,
see Dimensioned Label Command (on page 335).

14. Select an elevation label if you want to place a label that displays the elevation of a
piping object. For more information, see Elevation Label Command (on page 337).
15. Select As Drawn if you want the label appearance to reflect the label rule definition
only, ignoring any formatting overrides.
16. Click the drawing to place the label.
During placement, the label will automatically align to the left or right side of an
existing label. You can also align the label to any object keypoints in the drawing. For more
information on using alignment settings, see Align Dimensions Command in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
17. Continue placing labels on the drawing if required.
18. Right-click to end the command.
19. Save your changes before exiting SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
You can remove manual edits from a drawing using Clear Manual Edits in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For more information, see Clear Manual Edits Command (on
page 379).

Group Labels
The software delivers Name_None_CA_JL as an example label rule that places
single or group labels. See your administrator for other customized group label rules that may be
in your catalog.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 326

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

A group label allows selection of multiple objects and groups the labels for the objects.
Optionally, the group label also places leaders and bubble labels.

1 - Group label
2 - Leaders
3 - Bubble labels
You can add a group label as an option to any manually placed label. The Place a Label
command places a single label when you select one object or a group label when you select
multiple objects. The software delivers the Name_None_CA_JL label template as an example
implementation of single and group labels. You can find the Name_None_CA_JL.xml file in the
[Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\Drawings\Catalog\Labels\Templates folder.

Defining a group label

You must have already defined the view style type and the View Style Properties
dialog box must be displayed. For more information, see Define View Style Dialog Box and View
Style Properties Dialog Box.
1. Select Name_None_CA_JL in the Select Label Rule dialog box, as shown below.

2. Click Properties.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 327

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

The Label Rule Manager opens the Name_None_CA_JL template, as shown below.

3. To change the distance between grouped labels, type a new value in the Group Label
Clearance box.
4. To suppress the bubble the software draws around grouped labels, select NONE from the
Group Bubble Label list.
5. Click Save & Close to exit the Label Rule Manager.
Group Bubble Label
Defines the bubble label template and symbol used by the group label. If you select NONE,
then the software places the group labels without bubble labels.
Group Label Clearance
Specifies the distance between labels in the group.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 328

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Leaders
Leaders jog as needed based on the position of the label group to the objects, as shown in the
following examples.
Group label with horizontal leader

Group label with vertical leader

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 329

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Group label with fanned leader

Group label with no leader

Sorting and Alignment

The software sorts the labels according to the relative location of the objects (as defined by the
object center points) and the type of leaders.

Leader Type Sorting

Horizontal Left to right

Vertical Top to bottom

Fanned To minimize crossing of leaders

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 330

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Leader Type Sorting

None Top to bottom or left to right

Labels align to the leader connection side.

Right side alignment

Left side alignment

Selecting multiple objects for the group label

Use one of the following methods to select objects in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
 Press CTRL and select each object individually in a drawing view.
 Click and drag in a drawing view to create a selection window. The software selects all
objects completely within the selection window.
 Press CTRL and then click and drag in a drawing view to create a line selection. The
software selects all objects overlapping the line.

Moving a label in a group

You can select and move a label to separate it from the group label.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 331

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Deleting a label in a group

You can select and delete a label. The software also deletes the leader and bubble labels, but
the remaining bubble labels are not renumbered.

Limitations
Group labels have the following label parameter limitations:
 Orientation / is ignored. Group label text is always horizontal.

 Boundary / is ignored.
 Tolerance Zone is ignored.
The following values for Shape cannot be used as the label border: Cloud , Pentagon ,
Triangle Up , and Triangle Down .
For more information on label parameters, see Place a Label Ribbon in Place a Label Command
(on page 322).

Place a Manual Weld Label

1. Right-click a drawing, and click Edit on the shortcut menu. The drawing opens for editing in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

2. On the toolbar, click Manually Place Labels .

3. (This step is only for marine mode) Use the Object Filter to enable only certain objects for
selection. For example, selecting Physical Connections in the Object filter list only allows
you to select physical connections.
4. In the Label Name drop-down menu, select a label rule.
The label rules are located on the application server in the
\Symbols\Drawings\Catalog\Labels\Templates folder.
5. To pick from a hierarchical list, select More.
The Select Label dialog box displays.
6. Select a label template folder in the left pane of the dialog box, select a specific label name
in the right pane, and then click OK.
7. Click on a physical connection.
The correct weld symbol automatically displays based on the physical connection
properties.
8. In the Font box, specify the font.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 332

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

9. In the Text size box, specify the size of the text.

10. Click Text Color , and select a color for the label text.
11. Click the Bold , Italic , and Underline buttons to achieve the necessary formatting.
12. Click Orientation to specify horizontal or vertical text.
13. Select a leader and leader jog.
14. Click Leader Color , and select a color for the leader.
15. Choose the Boundary option to clip the leader at the object boundary, or choose the
Inside option to extend the leader to the inside of the object.
16. Key in a value for the Leader Tolerance value. This value determines the distance required
for a leader to display. For example, if the leader tolerance value is set to 10mm, the label
must be at least 10mm away from the labeled object before a leader displays.
17. Choose a dimension label in order to place a dimension that acts as a label. For more
information, see Dimensioned Label Command (on page 335).

18. Select As Drawn if you want the label appearance to reflect the label definition only and
not have any formatting overrides.

 If you select As Drawn, the label appearance is determined by the label definition. You
cannot set the font, text size, text color, and so forth for the label.
 Click the drawing to place the label. If you hover directly over the physical connection,
the label will snap to the physical connection line, but will not align.
 To move the label after it has been placed, click and drag the label by its origin point,
identified by the green circle in the middle of the label object. In the graphic below, the
weld symbol is moved.
 To rotate the label after it has been placed, select the label and click the green circle
located on the outside of the label. Drag the green circle until the label is aligned
correctly to the physical connection.

19. Continue placing labels on the drawing if necessary.

20. Right-click to end the command.
21. Save your changes before exiting SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
You can remove manual edits from a drawing using Clear Manual Edits in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For more information, see Clear Manual Edits Command (on
page 379).
See Also
Place a Manual Label (on page 325)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 333

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Place a Manual Flow Arrow on an Orthographic Drawing

You can place flow arrows on pipe objects in orthographic drawings with the Place a Label
command in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
You can also add flows arrows as part of the drawing view style definition. For more information,
see Add Flow Arrows to Orthographic Drawings in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data
Guide.
1. Right-click a drawing, and click Edit on the shortcut menu. The drawing opens for editing in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

2. On the toolbar, click Manually Place Labels .

3. Click an object in a drawing view to label.
4. In the Label Name drop-down menu, select More to display the Select Label dialog box.
5. Select a flow label template folder in the left pane of the dialog box, select a specific label
name in the right pane, and then click OK.
6. Select a pipe object in the drawing to place the label.

If the arrow has a red-crossed circle over it, the selected pipe does not have flow direction
defined.

7. Right-click to end the command.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 334

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

8. Save your changes before exiting SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

 To move the flow arrow after it has been placed, click and drag the arrow by its origin point,
identified by the green circle in the middle of the flow arrow object.
 You can remove manual edits from a drawing using Clear Manual Edits in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For more information, see Clear Manual Edits Command (on
page 379).
 Centerlines must display for pipelines before flow arrows can be placed.

Dimensioned Label Command

Places a label with dimension formatting. The dimension displays the label instead of a
dimension value. Dimensioned Label is an option on the Place a Label ribbon. You can
select Distance Between , Coordinate Dimension , SmartDimension , or Angle
Between . For more information on the formatting of each dimension type, see Distance
Between Command, Coordinate Dimension Command, SmartDimension Command, and Angle
Between Command in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
Before selecting Dimensioned Label, you must select an appropriate label from Label
Specification on the Place a Label ribbon. The following example shows a dimensioned
label on a composed drawing. A Distance Between dimension is placed between two
pumps with the Equipment_Plane Equipment_Name label selected.

Only two objects can be selected with Dimensioned Label. The label placed is
determined by the first object you select, not the second.
See Also
Place a Dimensioned Label (on page 336) (Marine mode only)
Place a Dimensioned Label (on page 335) (Plant mode only)

Place a Dimensioned Label

This workflow places a dimensioned label on a composed drawing.
1. Right-click a drawing, and click Edit on the shortcut menu.
The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. On the toolbar, click Manually Place Labels.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 335

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

3. In the Label Name drop-down menu, select the Structural Framing Elevation_Grid
Line_TOS label from the delivered folder.
To pick from a hierarchical list, select More.

4. Select Coordinate Dimension from the dimension label drop-down menu. The
dimensioned label ribbon displays.
You can select any of the dimension commands from the drop-down menu.
5. Select a structure member to label.
6. Click to place the Coordinate Dimension label.

You can use custom dimension styles when placing dimension-like labels. For more
information, see Dimension Properties Dialog Box in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor User's
Guide.
7. Continue placing labels if necessary.
8. Right-click to end the command.
9. Save your changes and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

See Also
Dimensioned Label Command (on page 335)
Place a Manual Label (on page 325)

Place a Dimensioned Label

This workflow demonstrates the ability to place a dimensioned label on a marine mode Steel
Order drawing by placing a dimension-like label on two edges of a plate. For more information
on dimensioned labels, see Dimensioned Label Command (on page 335).
1. Right-click a Steel Order drawing, and click Edit on the shortcut menu. The drawing opens
in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

2. On the toolbar, click Place a Label .

3. Use the Object Filter to enable only Plate Parts for selection.
4. In the Label Name drop-down menu, select the Block Parent label from the delivered Steel
Order folder.
To pick from a hierarchical list, select More.

5. Select the Distance Between dimension label command from the drop-down menu.
The dimensioned label ribbon displays.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 336

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

6. Select the edge of a plate that you want to label.

The first selected object is labeled, not the second.
7. Select a second edge. For example, select the opposite edge of the plate you selected.
The second point only determines how long the dimension line will be.
8. After selecting the second object, the correct label will display.

You can use custom dimension styles when placing dimension-like labels. For more
information, see Dimension Paper Space Objects for 3D Drawings (on page 268) in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor User's Guide.
9. Continue placing labels on the drawing if necessary.
10. Right-click to end the command.
11. Save your changes before exiting SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
See Also
Dimensioned Label Command (on page 335)
Place a Manual Label (on page 325)

Elevation Label Command

Pipe BOP places a label that displays the elevation or inverted elevation value of the route
object. For more information, see Elevation versus Invert Elevation below.
The Pipe BOP is available only if you select one of the following templates:
 Piping Plan_Routable_Center Elev_M - Select to place a label for the center elevation of
the pipe.
 Piping Plan_Routable_INV Elev_M - Select to place a label for the inverted elevation of
the pipe.
 Piping Plan_Routable_WPBOP Elev_M - Select to place a label for the working point of
the pipe.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 337

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

The following example shows an elevation label being used on a composed drawing. An
inverted elevation is placed on a pipeline with the Piping Plan_Routable_INV Elev_M template
selected.

Elevation labels support only manual placement and label templates for piping
disciplines. To apply these templates to other disciplines, such as HVAC, cable tray, and
conduit, modify and use these templates or create a new label template based on these
templates.

Elevation versus Inverted Elevation

Inverted elevation is the inside elevation of a pipe, HVAC, cable, or conduit route object.
Elevation and inverted elevation can be calculated at following locations:

Location INV (Inverted Elevation) Elev (Elevation)

Top 4 Z of route object + 5 Z of route object + (OutDiameter/2)

(OutDiameter/2 - Thickness)

Center 3 Z of route object 3 Z of route object

Bottom 2 Z of route object - 1 Z of route object - (OutDiameter/2)

(OutDiameter/2 - Thickness)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 338

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Leader Point Connection

When you click on the route object the leader point is automatically placed near port point,
working point or clipping point, whichever is nearest to where you clicked. For example, if you
click at the red point the leader point is moved to nearest clipping point (1). If you click at the
green points, the leader point is moved to the nearest working point (2). If you click at the cyan
points, then the leader point is moved to nearest port point (3).

Place an Elevation Label

This workflow places an elevation label on a composed drawing.
1. Right-click a drawing, and click Edit on the shortcut menu. The drawing opens in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

2. On the horizontal toolbar, click Manually Place Labels.

3. In the Label Name drop-down menu, select the needed label. For example, to place an
inverted elevation label select Piping Plan_Routable_INV_Elev_M.

The Pipe BOP command gets activated after you select the label template.
To pick a label template from a hierarchical list, select More.
4. Select a route object to label.
5. Click on any point in the empty space to place the elevation label.
6. Continue placing labels if necessary.
7. Right-click to end the command.
8. Save your changes and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
See Also
Elevation Label Command (on page 337)
Place a Manual Label (on page 325)

Group Selected Labels

Groups existing labels so that you can move them as a unit. You can choose to stack the
labels directly above one another, or stack them diagonally. This simplifies the final formatting of
labels that Smart 3D generates automatically.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 339

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Group Selected Labels Ribbon

Select by Labels
Indicates that the software selects labels to form the group. You can select the labels
individually, by fence, or by dragging a line through the labels.
Select by Objects
Indicates that the software selects objects to form the label group. You can select the
objects individually, by fence, or by dragging a line through the objects.
Labels Selection Filter
Specifies a filter to limit the labels you can select. The default option is All, which lets you
select any label to add to your group. To refine the filter, select as many of the filters from
the list as you need. You can select only those labels that match the filter.
Leaderline On/Off
Specifies whether you want a leader line pointing to the object.
Leaderline Jog On/Off
Specifies whether a jog in the leader line is acceptable.
Leader Color
Defines the color of the leader line.

Selecting the Labels to Group

You have several options to select the labels to group. If you click Select by Labels , the
software only lets you select labels. Click Select by Objects to select objects.
 Press CTRL, and then individually click the labels or objects to group.

 Drag a fence around the labels or objects to group. The fence must start and stop in empty
space.

 Press CTRL, and then drag a line through the labels or objects to group. The line must start
and stop in empty space.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 340

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

The software places the group of labels without crossing the leader lines, even if the heights
of the labels differ, and aligns the labels to the leader connection side.

Left Right
The software sorts the labels so that no leaders in the group cross.
To change the distance between each label in the stack, your administrator can add a
<clearance> tag to the label template.

Clearance value of 0.0 Clearance value of 0.002

Group existing labels

1. In the Drawings console, right-click a drawing, and click Edit on the shortcut menu.
The drawing opens for editing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. On the Drawings Compose toolbar, click Group Selected Labels .
The Label Filter displays on the ribbon.
3. Click Select by Labels or Select by Objects to indicate how you want to make the
selections for the group.
4. If necessary, select filters to refine the Label Filter, and then click Close.
5. Use the tools on the ribbon to specify the leader for the labels. For more information, see
Group Selected Labels (on page 339).
6. Select the labels or objects to group. You can use any of the following techniques:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 341

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

 Press CTRL, and then individually click the labels or objects to add to the group.

 Drag a fence around the labels or objects to group. The fence must start and stop in
empty space.

 Press CTRL, and then drag a line through the labels or objects to group. The line must
start and stop in empty space.

The software displays a blue preview outline to give you an approximation of the size of the
stacked labels. The preview moves with the cursor.

7. If necessary, press CTRL to change the preview from stacked to diagonal.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 342

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

8. Click the location for the relocated labels.

To diagonally space the labels, press CTRL and click to indicate the location.

Place Detail Envelope Command

Creates a detail view for an existing drawing view. Detail views are more than enlargements
of the main drawing view. They often contain additional graphical information that is not visible in
the main drawing view, such as weld or chalk information. You specify the detail view by
drawing a circle or polygon around a portion of the main drawing view. The shape created is
called the detail envelope. The Place Detail Envelope command is only available in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you create a new Composed drawing or open an existing
Composed drawing from a 3D task. For example, the following graphic shows the main drawing
view and a detail view:

When you select an existing detail envelope, it highlights within the drawing view and the Edit
ribbon appears so you can make modifications to the selected cutting plane. To place a detail
envelope, select a drawing view and click the Place Detail Envelope command.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 343

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Callouts
Detail envelopes use callouts, or labels, that match the caption for the associated detail view. By
default, the command places callouts in a fixed position on the main drawing view when you
place the detail envelope. You can click-and-drag the callout to a new position, if necessary.
Callouts do not highlight when you select the detail envelope. You select callouts separate from
the detail envelope.

Handles
Handles help you modify the shape and placement of the detail envelopes. Circle detail
envelopes have two handles, a center point and an edge handle. The center point handle allows
you to move the circle, while the edge handle allows you to change the size and shape of the
circle. Polygon shapes have handles at each vertex. You can use the handles to move and
change the shape of the polygon shape.

After you modify a detail envelope, click Finish to save the changes.

Delete Behavior
To delete a detail envelope, select it and press Delete. Deleting the detail envelope does not
affect the drawing view. However, if there is an associated detail view, a message displays,
asking if you want to convert the detail view to a normal drawing view or delete it with the detail
envelope.
You can place detail envelopes inside section views and detail views.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 344

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

See Also
Place Cutting Plane Ribbon (on page 347)
Place Detail Envelope Command (on page 343)
Place Detail Envelope Ribbon (on page 345)
Edit Detail Envelope Ribbon (on page 345)

Place Detail Envelope Ribbon

Sets options when placing a new detail envelope. This ribbon displays when you select a
drawing view, then click Place Detail Envelope in the toolbar area.
If you are editing an existing detail envelope, the Edit Detail Envelope ribbon appears. For
more information, see Edit Detail Envelope Ribbon (on page 345).
Circle
Specifies that you want to draw a round detail envelope shape.
Polygon
Specifies that you want to draw a polygon detail envelope shape.
Reference mark
Displays the reference text below the detail view and on the detail view callout on the main
drawing view.
Additional callout text
Provides a second line of text for the detail view callout.
See Also
Place Detail Envelope Command (on page 343)

Edit Detail Envelope Ribbon

Sets options when editing an existing detail envelope. This ribbon displays when you select a
detail envelope on the drawing sheet, then click Place Detail Envelope in the toolbar area.
If you have more than one detail envelope selected, this ribbon is disabled.
If you are placing a new detail envelope, the Place Detail Envelope ribbon appears. For more
information, see Place Detail Envelope Ribbon (on page 345).
Reference mark
Displays the reference text below the detail view and on the detail view callout on the main
drawing view.
Additional callout text
Provides a second line of text for the detail view callout.
The Reference mark and Additional callout text always show the current values for
the detail envelope. The fields are disabled if the detail envelope is associated with a detail view.
See Also
Place Detail Envelope Command (on page 343)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 345

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Place a Detail Envelope

The following steps describe the basic workflow for placing a detail envelope on a drawing view.
1. In the 3D application, edit a drawing document. The drawing opens in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor.
2. In the drawing document, select a drawing view. Zoom in on the area of the main drawing
view to the location you want to place the detail envelope geometry.
3. In the toolbar area, click Place Detail Envelope . The Place Detail Envelope ribbon
appears in the toolbar area.
4. Click Circle or Polygon so you can begin placing points to define the detail
envelope. For more information, see Place Detail Envelope Ribbon (on page 345).
5. Click points as needed to create the detail envelope geometry. If you are creating a polygon
shape for your detail envelope, complete the polygon by moving the cursor over the starting
point until the Close Polygon symbol appears, then click to close the polygon.

Edit a Detail Envelope

To edit an existing detail envelope, select the detail envelope. The Edit Detail Envelope ribbon
appears so you can edit the settings on the detail envelope.
For more information on working with detail envelopes, see Place Detail Envelope Command
(on page 343).

Place Cutting Plane/Section View Command

Creates a cutting plane on a drawing view. The cutting plane is an annotation marker that
indicates where to slice a group of objects and from which direction to look at that slice. Cutting
planes are made of one or more line segments. When comprised of multiple line segments,
cutting planes are also referred to as "jogged" cutting planes. The Place Cutting Plane
command is only available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you create a new drawing or
edit an existing drawing from a 3D task. For example, the following graphic shows a drawing
view, a cutting plane, and a derived section view:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 346

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

You can only create section views from cutting planes drawn on valid graphical views. Valid
graphical views include normal drawing views, section views, detail views, and snapshot views,
but exclude keyplan views. Valid graphical views must already be associated to a volume in the
model and updated at least once). If you delete a drawing view that has cutting planes, the
cutting plans are also deleted. A confirmation message asks if you want to convert associated
section views to normal drawing views or delete them as well.
After a cutting plane has been defined, a drawing view appears on your cursor. Click to place
the view on the drawing sheet. For more information, see Place a Cutting Plane/Section View
(on page 350).
When you select a cutting plane, it highlights within the drawing view and the Edit ribbon
appears so you can make modifications to the selected cutting plane. To place a cutting plane,
select a valid drawing view and click the Place Cutting Plane command. You can also click
the command first and then select the view.
Single-segment and Jogged cutting planes have handles at the end-points, mid-points, and
depth-points. You can change the geometry of the selected cutting plane by dragging its
handles. Dragging a mid-point handle moves the associated line segment, maintaining its length
and slope while altering any adjacent line segments. Dragging a vertex or end-point alters the
length and/or slope of the attached line segment(s). Dragging a depth handle alters the depth of
the associated section view.
You can move a single-segment cutting plane by clicking and dragging its mid-point handle to
the new position. You can move a jogged cutting plane by clicking on a point of the line segment
and dragging it; do not click a handle to move the jogged cutting plane.
After modifying a cutting plane, click Finish to save the changes. Selecting the Update section
check box will cause an update of the related section view when the Finish button is clicked.
The Update section option is remembered globally for all section views.
To delete a cutting plane, select it and press the DELETE key. Deleting the cutting plane does
not affect the drawing view, but if there is an associated section view, you are asked if you want
to convert the section view to a normal drawing view or delete it as well.

Shortcut Menu
When you select an existing cutting plane, you can right-click to get the cutting plane shortcut
menu. The shortcut menu allows you to make the following modifications to the cutting plane:
Bring to Front, Send to Back, Pull Up, and Push Down.

See Also
Place Cutting Plane Ribbon (on page 347)
Place a Cutting Plane/Section View (on page 350)
Section View Orientation Rules in Drawings by Rule (on page 409)

Place Cutting Plane Ribbon

Sets options when placing a cutting plane. This ribbon displays when you select a drawing view.
Click Place Cutting Plane command to place a new cutting plane.
Reference 1
Displays the text shown for the first arrow of the cutting plane.
Reference 2
Displays the text shown for the second arrow of the cutting plane.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 347

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

The Reference 1 is always assigned to the point of the cutting plane that you
placed first, while the Reference 2 text is always assigned to the point of the cutting plane
that you placed last.

Depth
Sets the depth of the cutting plane. This box only accepts positive values.
See Also
Place Cutting Plane/Section View Command (on page 346)
Place Section View Ribbon (on page 348)
Place a Cutting Plane/Section View (on page 350)

Place Section View Ribbon

Sets options when placing a section view. This ribbon displays after you have completed the
placement of a cutting plane.
Update section
When checked, the section view updates after it is placed. This option is unchecked by
default, but the last setting is saved as a session file preference.
View Style
Specifies a view style, which includes rules for filters, updates, and graphics. The view style
controls the output characteristics of the view on the generated drawing. The list displays
the 10 most recently used view styles in the session. Click More... to display the Select
View Style dialog box.
Changing the view style for the section view can result in symbology different
from that used in the parent view.
View Scale
Sets the scale family and scale used for the section view. The default scale setting is
inherited from the parent view.
See Also
Place Cutting Plane/Section View Command (on page 346)
Place Cutting Plane Ribbon (on page 347)
Place a Cutting Plane/Section View (on page 350)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 348

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Edit Cutting Plane Ribbon

Sets options when editing a cutting plane. This ribbon displays when you select an existing
cutting plane that is associated with a section view.
Finish
Saves the changes to the cutting plane. If the cutting plane is associated with a section
view, the section view contents change if the Update section check box is selected.
Update section
When checked, the section view updates after it is placed. This option is not checked by
default, but the last setting is remembered as a session file preference.
Reference 1
Displays the text shown for the first arrow of the cutting plane.
Reference 2
Displays the text shown for the second arrow of the cutting plane.
Depth
Sets the depth of the cutting plane. This box only accepts positive values.
See Also
Place Cutting Plane/Section View Command (on page 346)
Place Cutting Plane Ribbon (on page 347)

Edit Section View Ribbon

Sets options when editing a section view. This ribbon displays when you select a section view.
Properties
Opens the Drawing View Properties dialog box, allowing you to change the properties of a
drawing view. For more information, see Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Place View
Command) - Steel Order Drawings (on page 281).
Finish
Saves the changes to the section view.
Update section
When checked, the section view updates when you select Finish. This option is unchecked
by default, but the last setting is remembered as a session file preference.
View Style
Specifies a view style, which includes rules for filters, updates, and graphics. The view style
controls the output characteristics of the view on the generated drawing. The list displays
the 10 most recently used view styles in the session. Click More... to display the Select
View Style dialog box.
Changing the view style for the section view can result in symbology different
from that used in the parent view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 349

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

View Scale
Sets the scale family and scale used for the section view. The default scale setting is
inherited from the parent view.
Rotate
Rotates the section view clockwise by multiples of 90 degrees. When the view is rotated,
user-placed and user-modified dimensions in the section view are deleted.
To rotate a section view, you must bulkload the following files to the database:
 [Product
Folder]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\AdditionalDataFiles\Delta2009.1to2011\1_AMD_Delta_2
009.1_2011_Drawings.xls
 [Product
Folder]\ShipCatalogData\BulkLoad\AdditionalDataFiles\DeltaSMV2011toV2011SP1\1_A
MD_Delta_V2011_2011SP1_SM_ShipDrawings.xls. (Marine mode only)
See Also
Place Cutting Plane/Section View Command (on page 346)
Place Section View Ribbon (on page 348)

Place a Cutting Plane/Section View

Follow the general steps below to place a cutting plane on a drawing view.
1. In a 3D application, edit a drawing document. The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing
Editor.
2. In the drawing document, select a drawing view.
3. In the toolbar area, click Place Cutting Plane . The Place Cutting Plane ribbon appears
in the toolbar area. For more information, see Place Cutting Plane Ribbon (on page 347).
4. On the Place Cutting Plane ribbon, type the names for the reference text string you want
shown on the cutting plane.
5. Click the first point in the line string, then proceed selecting as many points as you need to
define the cutting plane geometry.
Jogged cutting planes are not supported in Ruleset drawings.
6. Right-click when you have finished defining the cutting plane line segments and are ready to
define the depth of the cutting plane.
7. To change the view direction, move the cursor to the appropriate side of the cutting plane.
The direction automatically changes according to which side of the cutting plane segment
the cursor is on.
8. Click to define the section depth and view direction. You can also key in a value in the
Depth field and click to define the view direction. The value displayed in the Depth field is
defined in model space, not paper space.
The drawing view automatically appears on your cursor.

 Selecting the Update section check box will cause an update of the related section view
when the view is placed. This option is not checked by default, but the last setting is saved
as a session file preference.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 350

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

 The section view inherits the scale from the parent view by default.
You can change the View Style or View Scale before placing the view.
1. Click to place the view on the sheet.

Edit a Cutting Plane

 To edit an existing cutting plane, select the cutting plane. The Edit Cutting Plane ribbon
appears so you can edit the settings on the cutting plane. For more information, see Edit
Cutting Plane Ribbon (on page 349).

Edit a Section View

 To edit an existing section view, select the section view. The Edit Section View ribbon
appears so you can edit the settings on the section view. For more information, see Edit
Section View Ribbon (on page 349).

Delete a Cutting Plane or Section View

 To delete a cutting plane, select it and press the DELETE key. If the cutting plane has an
associated section view, a confirmation box appears allowing you to either convert the
section view to a normal drawing view or delete the section view with the cutting plane.
 To delete a section view, select it and press the DELETE key. The associated cutting plane
line remains, but only as a paper space graphic.
For more information on working with cutting planes, see Place Cutting Plane/Section View
Command (on page 346).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 351

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Section View Orientation Rules in Orthographic Drawings

Section View Orientation Behavior
The software automatically determines the "up" direction for section views. In most cases, the
up direction is "up," or +Z. In cases where using +Z is impossible (for example, if the section
view direction is Looking Plan or Looking Up.), the software orients the view to the North
direction.
The following examples outline common section view orientations:

Looking Plan

P1 Cutting Plane P2 Cutting Plane P3 Cutting Plane

Looking East Looking South Looking South, East

Up direction is up. Up direction is up. Up direction is up.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 352

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Looking North

E1 Cutting Plane E2 Cutting Plane E3 Cutting Plane

Looking South Looking Plan Looking South, Plan

Up direction is up. Up direction is North. Up direction is up.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 353

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Looking East

E4 Cutting Plane E5 Cutting Plane E6 Cutting Plane

Looking South Looking Plan Looking South, Plan

Up direction is up. Up direction is North. Up direction is up.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 354

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Place a Section View

The following procedure describes editing a drawing document to add a section view.
Section views are extracted from main drawing views or other section views. Section views are
similar to detail views, except that they display information in an orientation that is different from
that of the originating view. The cutting plane is an annotation marker that indicates where to
slice a needed group of objects and from which direction to look at that slice. The cutting plane
is comprised of one or more line segments. When comprised of multiple line segments, cutting
planes are referred to as "jogged" cutting planes.

 For more information on the SmartSketch Drawing Editor commands used in this
procedure, see Place Detail Envelope Command (on page 343) and Place Cutting
Plane/Section View Command (on page 346) in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
 For information on the toolbar used in this procedure, see Drawings Compose Toolbar (on
page 275) in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
 For information on the 2D commands available for editing, see the SmartSketch Drawing
Editor Help.

Place a Cutting Plane

The following steps describe the basic workflow for placing a cutting plane on a drawing view
used in creating a section view.
1. Open a drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. Click Cutting Plane on the toolbar.
3. In the drawing document, select a drawing view.
4. Type in text for the first arrow of the cutting plane in Reference 1. Type in text for the
second arrow of the cutting plane in Reference 2.
5. To define the length of the cutting plane segment, click in the view to define the location of
the first point, then click to define the location of the second point.
The cutting plane segment displays on the drawing, with arrows showing the default view
direction.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 355

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

6. To jog the cutting plane, click to define additional line segments. When you are ready to
define the depth, right-click to proceed to the next step.
The cutting plane jogging behavior is not available in Ruleset drawings.
7. To change the view direction, move the cursor to the appropriate side of the cutting plane.
The direction automatically changes according to which side of the cutting plane segment
the cursor is on.
The view direction is always perpendicular to the first cutting plane segment.
8. To define the section depth, click to define the distance and view direction. You can also key
in a value in Depth and click to define the view direction.
The section depth is defined in model space, not paper space.
The drawing view automatically displays on your cursor.

Selecting the Update section check box causes an update of the related section
view when the view is placed. The Update section option is remembered globally for all
section views.
You can change the View Style or View Scale before placing the view.
9. Click to place the view on the sheet.
The child view inherits the scale from the parent view by default.

Modify the Width, Depth, and Location of a Cutting Plane

The following steps describe the basic workflow for modifying the width of a cutting plane.
1. Open a drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. Click on an existing cutting plane.
The Edit Cutting Plane ribbon displays in the toolbar area.
3. Click and drag the outside handles of the cutting plane segment in order to change its
length.

 The cutting plane handles correspond to the sides of the section view that are opposite
to the section view depth handles. Changing the overall length of a cutting plane
changes the corresponding sides of the related section view.
 In the case of a jogged cutting plane, each cutting plane segment will have its own
modification handles.
4. To change the location of the cutting plane segment, click and drag the middle handle that
lies between the width handles.
To change the location of an entire jogged cutting plane, click and drag the line
segment; do not click a handle to move the jogged cutting plane.
5. Click and drag the handle opposite of the location handle to modify the cutting plane depth.
You can also key in a value in Section depth and click in the view to define the view
direction.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 356

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Single Cutting Plane

Jogged Cutting Plane

Selecting the Update section check box causes an update of the related section
view when the Finish button is selected. The Update section option is remembered
globally for all section views.
6. When the appropriate changes have been made to the cutting plane, select Finish in the
Edit Cutting Plane ribbon.
7. In plant mode, right-click the view and select Update.
-OR-
In marine mode, right-click on the section view in the Drawings View Explorer and select
Update.

Modify the Size of a Section View

The following steps describe the workflow for modifying the size of an existing section view.
1. Open a drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 357

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

2. Click on an existing section view.

The Edit Section View ribbon displays in the toolbar area.

The ribbon allows you to change the View Style and View Scale, as well as edit
the View Properties.
3. Click and drag the handles on the top and bottom (or left and right sides) of the section view
in order to change the view size.
Selecting the Update section check box causes an update of the section view
when the Finish button is selected. The Update section option is remembered globally for
all section views.
4. When the appropriate changes have been made to the volume size, select Finish in the
Edit Section View ribbon.
5. In plant mode, right-click the view and select Update.
-OR-
In marine mode, right-click on the section view in the Drawings View Explorer and select
Update.

Place Detail View Command

Creates a detail view based on the selected detail envelope. A detail view is extracted from a
main drawing view, a section view, or another detail view.
The drawing view style defines how objects appear in the detail views.
Detail views are based on detail envelopes. For more information, see Place Detail
Envelope Command (on page 343).

Edit Detail View Properties

You can edit the properties associated with the detail view. When you access the properties
through one of the following methods, the Drawing View Properties dialog box appears. For
more information, see Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Drawing View Shortcut Menu) (on
page 382).
 Right-click the view and select Properties on the shortcut menu.
 Select the view, then select Edit > Properties.

Delete Behavior
To delete a detail view, select it and press Delete. Deleting the detail view does not delete the
corresponding detail envelope.
See Also
Place Cutting Plane Ribbon (on page 347)
Place a Detail View (on page 359)
Place Detail View Ribbon (on page 359)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 358

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Place Detail View Ribbon

Sets options when placing or editing a detail view. This ribbon displays when you select a detail
envelope, then click Place Detail View .
For information on placing detail envelopes, see Place Detail Envelope Command (on page
343).
Sheet Name
Indicates the drawing sheet where the detail view is placed. By default, the detail view is
placed on the same sheet as the main drawing view.
View Style
Specifies a view style, which includes rules for filters, updates, and graphics. The view style
controls the output characteristics of the view on the generated drawing. The list displays
the 10 most recently used view styles in the session. Click More... to display the Select
View Style dialog box.
Changing the view style for the detail view can result in symbology different from
that used in the parent view.
View Scale
Sets the scale family and scale used for the detail view. The default scale setting is inherited
from the parent view.
See Also
Place Detail View Command (on page 358)

Place a Detail View

The following procedure steps you through editing a drawing document to add a detail view.
A detail view is extracted from a main drawing view, a section view, or another detail view. Detail
views are more than enlargements of the main drawing view. They often contain additional
graphical information that is not visible in the main drawing view, such as weld or chalk
information. You specify the detail view by drawing a circle or polygon around a portion of the
main drawing view. The shape created is called the detail envelope.

 For more information on the SmartSketch Drawing Editor command used in this procedure,
see Place Detail Envelope Command (on page 343).
 For information on the toolbar used in this procedure, see Drawings Compose Toolbar (on
page 275).
 For information on the 2D commands available for editing, see the SmartSketch Drawing
Editor Help.

Place a Detail Envelope

The following steps describe the basic workflow for placing a detail envelope on a drawing to be
used in creating a detail view.
Detail Envelope is only available when you create or open a Composed drawing
from a 3D task.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 359

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

1. Right-click a Composed drawing document in the Detail View and select Edit.
The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. Click Detail Envelope on the toolbar.
The Place Detail Envelope ribbon bar displays.
3. In the drawing document, select a drawing view. Zoom in on the area of the main drawing
view to the location you want to place the detail envelope geometry.
4. Click Circle or Polygon so you can begin defining the detail envelope.
5. Type the text for the detail view name in Reference mark. If a second line of text is needed,
type the text in Additional callout text.
6. For a Circle detail envelope, click at the center of the circle, drag for the radius, and click
again to set the radius.
7. For a Polygon detail envelope, click points as needed to create the detail envelope
geometry. Complete the polygon by moving the cursor over the starting point until the Close
Polygon symbol displays, then click to close the polygon.
8. You can now use this detail envelope to place a detail view in the drawing.

Place a Detail View

The following steps describe the basic workflow for placing a detail view based on a detail
envelope.
1. Right-click a drawing document in the Detail View and select Edit.
The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. In the drawing document, select a detail envelope to place a detail view. Select from the
drawing area or in the Drawing View Explorer.
3. Click Place Detail View on the toolbar.
The Place Detail View ribbon bar displays.
4. On the Place Detail View ribbon, make sure the settings are appropriate for your new detail
view:
 Sheet Name is disabled. By default, the view must be on the same sheet as the detail
envelope.
 Specify the View Style used for the view contents. Select More in the View Style list to
view more style options.
 Set the View Scale as needed. By default, the scale for the detail view is Fit to Scale.
5. Drag the preview outline of the view in the drawing area to the needed location. Click to
place the view.

An outline of the view is placed. For marine mode, the view is also out-of-date in the
Drawing View Explorer.
6. In plant mode, right-click the view in the drawing area and select Update View.
-OR-
In marine mode, right-click the view in the Drawing View Explorer and select Full Update.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 360

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Geometry, labels, and other annotations as defined by the view style display in the view.
7. Crop the view as needed by selecting the view and dragging the handles on the sides of the
view.

Delete a Detail Envelope from a Drawing

1. Right-click a drawing document in the Detail View and select Edit.
The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. If a detail view has not been created, right-click a detail envelope in the Drawing View
Explorer and select Delete.
3. If a detail view has been created, right-click the detail envelope and select Delete.
The Convert or Delete dialog box displays.
4. To convert the existing view(s) associated to the detail envelope to an independent view(s),
select the Convert to independent drawing view(s) option and click OK. To delete the
existing drawing view(s) associated to the detail envelope, select the Delete option and click
OK.

Delete a Detail View from a Drawing (Marine mode only)

1. Right-click a drawing document in the Detail View and select Edit.
The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. In the Drawing View Explorer, right-click a view assigned to a drawing and select Delete.
3. Select Delete to delete the view permanently, or select Unassign to move the view in the
Unassigned Folder.

 You can either move a view created by rules to the Unassigned Folder or permanently
delete a view.
 If you delete a view that is a parent of other views, such as a detail or section view, the
Convert or Delete dialog box displays. Select Convert to independent drawing view(s) to
save the child view as an independent drawing view, or select Delete to delete the child
view. The view is deleted.

 When a view is out-of-date, the view icon looks like this: .

 When a view is up-to-date, the view icon looks like this: .
 When a view is unassigned and in the Unassigned Folder of Drawing View Explorer, the
view icon looks like this: .

2D/3D Selection Command

Allows you to move back and forth between the SmartSketch Drawing Editor application
window and the 3D window. This command is only available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor
when you create a new drawing or open an existing drawing from a 3D task. This command is
turned off by default when you open a document in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 361

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Behavior while Turned On (Object Select/Highlight Mode)

When the command is on, you can select geometry in a drawing view, and the software
highlights and selects the corresponding object in the 3D model. The object is selected even if it
is not currently visible or displayed in the 3D workspace. If you select an object in the 3D task
window, the software highlights the corresponding geometry in the drawing view in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor. However, if the object is not included in the drawing view, no geometry
highlights. The filters in the drawing view style dictate the content of the drawing view.
You can also multi-select 2D objects (groups and views) using the CTRL key.
If you select a drawing view (instead of geometry in the view), the 2D/3D Selection
command turns off automatically and the Associate Objects to View command is
active. You can then modify the volumes or views associated to the selected view. For more
information, see Associate Objects to View Command (on page 300).

Behavior while Turned Off (View Input Mode)

The command is off by default when you open a drawing.
When this command is off, geometry selected in a view is not actively linked to its 3D model
object and the drawing document is in view input mode. You can modify the layout and contents
of the drawing sheet and the properties of the drawing views.
When 2D/3D Selection is off, you can click Associate Objects to View , then
move back and forth between the 3D application and SmartSketch Drawing Editor to associate
drawing views to volumes in the model. For more information, see Associate Objects to View
Command (on page 300).

Considerations for Using the 2D/3D Selection Command

 2D/3D Selection , by default, only allows selection of 2D group elements that correspond
to 3D model objects.
 You can use the spacebar key to toggle the selected drawing view when this command is
used to associate objects to objects in the model. For more information, see Associate
Objects to View Command (on page 300).
 Selecting a smart label in a SmartSketch Drawing Editor document selects the associated
3D object in the 3D application.
 Selecting a volume in the 3D application selects the associated views in the SmartSketch
Drawing Editor document.
 The 2D select set is cleared when you close the drawing document.

Compare 2D Drawing Object to 3D Model Object

The following steps show you how to compare drawing objects to 3D model objects.
1. In a 3D modeling task, such as Common, select Tools > Drawings Console.
2. Right-click a drawing document and select Edit to open a drawing document in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
3. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, zoom into a drawing view to select the drawing object you
want to compare to the 3D model.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 362

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

4. Click 2D/3D Selection to move focus to the 3D application. The 3D model object
selects and highlights in the graphic windows.

Considerations for Using the 2D/3D Selection Command

The 2D/3D Selection command, by default, only allows selection of 2D group elements that
correspond to 3D model objects.
 You can use the spacebar key to toggle the selected drawing view when this command is
used to associate objects to objects in the model.
 Selecting a SmartLabel in SmartSketch Drawing Editor document selects the associated
3D object in the 3D application.
 Selecting a volume in the 3D application selects the associated views in the SmartSketch
Drawing Editor document.
 The 2D select set is cleared when you close the drawing document.
For more information on the commands available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor, see the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help. You can also refer to the Common User's Guide for
information on the Tools > Drawings Console command.

Using Scaled Sketching

In drawings, you can have multiple embedded views on a drawing sheet that are at different
model scales (e.g. 1/4" = 1' and 1/8" = 1'). You can add graphics to the views and treat them as
if they were actual model graphics. Use the Scaled Sketching command to draw all graphics at a
consistent scale factor. The scale factor used is based on a user-selected SmartFrame.
For more information, see Dimensioning Drawing Elements in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
User's Guide.
See Also
Scaled Sketching Command (on page 365)
Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 365)
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 363)
Move a View with Scaled Sketching Objects (on page 365)

Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor

Follow the steps below to use the Scaled Sketching command to draw or edit objects at a
specific scale factor.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 363

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Make sure you have added the Scaled Sketching command to your Smart 3D toolbar.
See Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the Smart 3D Toolbar.
1. Click Scaled Sketching to open the Scaled Sketching ribbon.

Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 365)

2. To set the color of any objects not being edited using the scale factor, click Select color for
referenced data . Click on the required color from the color palette.

3. Insert a SmartFrame (see Working with Object, Linking and Embedding) and set the scale
factor of the SmartFrame, or click on an existing SmartFrame. The scale is read and taken
from that SmartFrame. The selected scale type is displayed in the Scaled Sketching
ribbon.

 Do not create or edit any layers when using the scaled sketching command.
 To get accurate dimensional data about scaled objects, be sure to dimension them
while in scaled sketching mode. The dimensions are automatically configured to display
at the value in which they were drawn.
4. Click Enter Scaled Sketch mode to start drawing at the selected scale.
The system scales the drawing sheet to match the specified scale value.
5. Use the application's drawing/editing commands to draw the required graphics.
6. Click Finish to end the selected scale mode.

 The only way to exit scaled sketching is to click Finish. All modifications you made in the
document are retained.
 Whenever you finish using scaled sketching, the undo history is cleared and you cannot
undo any previous edits. Undo is available after you continue working in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor.
 Leaders must be placed on objects (Labels, Text Boxes, and so forth) that were placed
during Scaled Sketch mode. If the objects were not placed during Scaled Sketch mode, the
leader is not remembered in the SmartFrame after the view is updated.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 364

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Scaled Sketching Command

Enables you to edit or draw new objects at a scale that is different from the drawing scale for
the active sheet. You can select a SmartFrame in the current document. The system then uses
the scale factor of that SmartFrame.
See Also
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 363)
Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 365)

Scaled Sketching Ribbon

The Scaled Sketching ribbon displays when you click Scaled Sketching on the Smart 3D
Drawings Compose toolbar.
Select color for referenced data - displays a color palette for you to set the color of any
objects not being edited using the scale factor.

Scale Setting
Displays the scale taken from the selected SmartFrame.
Enter Scaled Sketch Mode
Starts the system in using the scale factor for objects being drawn or edited.
Finish
Ends the scale mode.
See Also
Scaled Sketching Command (on page 365)
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 363)

Move a View with Scaled Sketching Objects

Follow the steps below to move a View that has objects drawn with the Scaled Sketching
command.
1. If you are using the Scaled Sketching command, exit the command.
You cannot move a view while using the Scaled Sketching command.
2. Press ALT and click on the view you want to move.
3. Release ALT.
4. Move the view to a new location.
When you press and release ALT while clicking on the view, all of the Scaled Sketching objects
move with the view.

Draw a Grate Opening with Scaled Sketching

Follow the steps below to use the Scaled Sketching command to draw a grate opening in a
slab at a specific scale factor.
1. From the Drawings environment, open a drawing. In this example, the drawing contains
equipment.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 365

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

2. Click Scaled Sketching to open the Scaled Sketching ribbon.

3. Click Select color for referenced data to set the color of any objects not being edited using
the scale factor.
4. Click the SmartFrame in which you would like to sketch. The scale automatically matches
the SmartFrame scale.

 Do not create or edit any layers when using the scaled sketching command.
 To get accurate dimensional data about scaled objects, be sure to dimension them
while in scaled sketching mode. The dimensions are automatically configured to display
at the value in which they were drawn.
5. Click Enter Scaled Sketch mode to start drawing at the selected scale.
The system scales the drawing sheet to match the specified scale value.
6. Use the Rectangle tool to draw an opening on the slab.

7. Use the Fill tool to place a Grid fill in the opening.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 366

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

8. Click Finish to end the selected scale mode.

 Any objects drawn while in Scaled Sketching mode will move with the view if it is moved.
 The only way to exit scaled sketching is to click Finish. All modifications you made in the
document are retained.
 Whenever you finish using scaled sketching, the undo history is cleared and you cannot
undo any previous edits. Undo is available after you continue working in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor.

Draw a Centerline with Scaled Sketching

Follow the steps below to use the Scaled Sketching command to draw a centerline on an
equipment object at a specific scale factor.
1. From the Drawings environment, open a drawing. In this example, the drawing contains
equipment.
2. Click Scaled Sketching to open the Scaled Sketching ribbon.
3. Click Select color for referenced data to set the color of any objects not being edited using
the scale factor.
4. Click the SmartFrame in which you would like to sketch. The scale automatically matches
the SmartFrame scale.

 Do not create or edit any layers when using the scaled sketching command.
 To get accurate dimensional data about scaled objects, be sure to dimension them
while in scaled sketching mode. The dimensions are automatically configured to display
at the value in which they were drawn.
5. Click Enter Scaled Sketch mode to start drawing at the selected scale.
The system scales the drawing sheet to match the specified scale value.

6. Use the Line tool to draw a centerline on the equipment.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 367

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

7. Use the Distance Between tool to place a dimension between the two equipment
centerlines.

8. Click Finish to end the selected scale mode.

 Any objects drawn while in Scaled Sketching mode will move with the view if it is moved.
 The only way to exit scaled sketching is to click Finish. All modifications you made in the
document are retained.
 Whenever you finish using scaled sketching, the undo history is cleared and you cannot
undo any previous edits. Undo is available after you continue working in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor.

Draw a Textured Fill with Scaled Sketching

Follow the steps below to use the Scaled Sketching command to draw a grate opening in a slab
at a specific scale factor.
1. From the Drawings environment, open a drawing. In this example, the drawing contains
equipment.
2. Click Scaled Sketching to open the Scaled Sketching ribbon.
3. Click Select color for referenced data to set the color of any objects not being edited using
the scale factor.
4. Click the SmartFrame in which you would like to sketch. The scale automatically matches
the SmartFrame scale.

 Do not create or edit any layers when using the scaled sketching command.
 To get accurate dimensional data about scaled objects, be sure to dimension them
while in scaled sketching mode. The dimensions are automatically configured to display
at the value in which they were drawn.
5. Click Enter Scaled Sketch mode to start drawing at the selected scale.
The system scales the drawing sheet to match the specified scale value.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 368

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

6. Use the Fill tool to place an Earth fill texture inside a shape.
Earth

You can also draw your own fill using Scaled Sketching. Below is an example of a
manually drawn concrete fill.

7. Click Finish to end the selected scale mode.

 Any objects drawn while in Scaled Sketching mode will move with the view if it is moved.
 The only way to exit scaled sketching is to click Finish. All modifications you made in the
document are retained.
 Whenever you finish using scaled sketching, the undo history is cleared and you cannot
undo any previous edits. Undo is available after you continue working in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor.
 Fills can be placed while in scaled sketching mode if they are bounded by view objects,
scaled sketch objects, or a combination of both.
 Fills are automatically deleted when you click Finish on the Scaled Sketching toolbar and:
 Use scaled sketching for view A and place a fill on a scaled sketch object in view B.
 Use scaled sketching for view A and place a fill on an object in view B.
 Use scaled sketching for a view and place a fill on a non-scaled sketch, manually-drawn
graphic.

Draw Rebar with Scaled Sketching

1. From the Drawings environment, open a drawing. In this example, the drawing contains
equipment.
2. Click Scaled Sketching to open the Scaled Sketching ribbon.
3. Click Select color for referenced data to set the color of any objects not being edited using
the scale factor.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 369

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

4. Click the SmartFrame in which you would like to sketch. The scale automatically matches
the SmartFrame scale.

 Do not create or edit any layers when using the scaled sketching command.
 To get accurate dimensional data about scaled objects, be sure to dimension them
while in scaled sketching mode. The dimensions are automatically configured to display
at the value in which they were drawn.
5. Click Enter Scaled Sketch mode to start drawing at the selected scale.
The system scales the drawing sheet to match the specified scale value.
6. Use the tools in the Draw toolbar to draw rebar-reinforced concrete.

7. Click Finish to end the selected scale mode.

 Any objects drawn while in Scaled Sketching mode will move with the view if it is moved.
 The only way to exit scaled sketching is to click Finish. All modifications you made in the
document are retained.
 Whenever you finish using scaled sketching, the undo history is cleared and you cannot
undo any previous edits. Undo is available after you continue working in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor.

Draw an Opening in a Plate with Scaled Sketching

Follow the steps below to use the Scaled Sketching command to draw an opening in a plate at
a specific scale factor.
1. From the Drawings environment, open a drawing. In this example, the drawing contains
equipment.
2. Click Scaled Sketching to open the Scaled Sketching ribbon.
3. Click Select color for referenced data to set the color of any objects not being edited using
the scale factor.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 370

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

4. Click the SmartFrame in which you would like to sketch. The scale automatically matches
the SmartFrame scale.

 Do not create or edit any layers when using the scaled sketching command.
 To get accurate dimensional data about scaled objects, be sure to dimension them
while in scaled sketching mode. The dimensions are automatically configured to display
at the value in which they were drawn.
5. Click Enter Scaled Sketch mode to start drawing at the selected scale.
The system scales the drawing sheet to match the specified scale value.
6. Use the Circle tool to draw an opening on the plate.
7. Use the Fill tool to add a Mesh fill to the opening.

8. Click Finish to end the selected scale mode.

 For information on how to move a view that contains objects drawn using the Scaled
Sketching command, see Move a View with Scaled Sketching Objects (on page 365).
 If a view is deleted and moved to the UnAssigned Folder, any sketches made in Scaled
Sketching mode reside in the view. If the view is reassigned to a drawing, your sketches will
appear in the view.
 The only way to exit scaled sketching is to click Finish. All modifications you made in the
document are retained.
 Whenever you finish using scaled sketching, the undo history is cleared and you cannot
undo any previous edits. Undo is available after you continue working in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor.
See Also
Using Scaled Sketching (on page 363)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 371

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Retain Edits made inside a Drawing View

1. Double-click a drawing view's border to open the drawing view.
2. Make the required changes to the drawing view.
3. Click File > Update to save the changes.
4. Click File > Close.
5. Repeat the steps above as required for all other views.
6. Save and close the document.
The changes that are saved include:
 Layer-related changes (creating new layers, modifying a graphic's layer, and changing how
layers are displayed using the Display Manager Dialog Box).
 Using the Drawing Editor to sketch new graphics, copy intelligent graphics, add text boxes,
place fills, or place symbols.
When a drawing view is opened, the new window is maximized to fit the graphics within the
view. Like the Scaled Sketching command, the sheet scale changes to match the view scale. If
the view scale is not Fit to Scale, manual graphics drawn outside of the rectangle, enclosing the
graphics within the view, are not visible after the next update.

 Particular changes made to intelligent graphics affects what is retained when a drawing view
is updated:
 Copies of intelligent graphics are treated as manual graphics.
 When no graphic rule is specified for a filter, or when the graphic rule does not specify a
layer, intelligent graphics are placed onto the Default layer.
 Intelligent graphics remain intelligent graphics after their layer is changed. If the
corresponding 3D object is deleted, the layer change operation is lost.
 It is recommended that you include any dimensions or leaders in the drawing sheet,
instead of the drawing view, as dimensions and leaders connected to intelligent
graphics are not retained when the view is updated.
 Intelligent graphics that are deleted will reappear after the drawing view is updated.
Select Hide to temporarily remove intelligent graphics.

Hide/Show Object Command

Hides or displays objects in the drawing view. You can hide certain objects from the drawing
view by selecting object types from a list. You can also show objects that you have hidden using
the same command.
When objects are hidden, they are added to a different drawing layer that is created
automatically. When the objects are shown, they are restored to their original drawing layer and
all annotations are restored.
You can also hide/show symbol objects that have Replace Object(s) with Symbol
rule applied on them.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 372

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

See Also
Hide/Show Object Ribbon (on page 373)
Hide an Object (on page 373)
Show an Object (on page 374)
Copy an Object (on page 374)

Hide
Subtracts objects from the view.

Show
Adds objects to the view.
View Name
Displays the selected view name.
Hide Options
Displays the list of hide options available in the selected drawing view. The default option is
All.
 All - Hides graphics, labels and dimensions.
 Graphics only - Hides only graphics.
 Graphic/Labels - Hides graphics and corresponding labels.
 Graphic/Dimensions - Hides graphics and related dimensions.
Object Filter
Displays a list of object types in the selected drawing view. The default option is All. When
you select an object in the drawing, the Object Filter displays associated object type
automatically.
Copy Graphics
Copies only graphics into the smart frame. Ignores any applied hide options. By default it is
disabled. Click Hide to enable this command.
Finish
Saves and exits the Hide/Show command. Click on the drawing view to enable this
command.
You must update the drawing after hiding or showing objects.

Hide an Object
1. In the Draw toolbar, click Hide/Show .
The Hide/Show ribbon appears in the toolbar area.

The Hide mode is selected by default.

2. Select a drawing view.

Hide gets disabled.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 373

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

3. Select an hide option from the Hide Options list.

4. Select an object type from the Object Filter list.
5. Select the objects you want to hide.
As you select the objects, the Finish command is enabled, and the selected objects are
highlighted in the drawing view depending on the hide option. For example, if the hide option
is Graphics/Labels, the selected graphic and related labels are highlighted in the drawing
view.
6. Click Finish to save your changes.
You must update the drawing after hiding objects.

Show an Object
1. In the Draw toolbar, click Hide/Show .
The Hide/Show ribbon appears in the toolbar area.

2. Click Show .
3. Select a drawing view.

All hidden objects in the selected view are highlighted. Except for Show , the remaining
options on the ribbon bar are disabled and set to their respective default values.
4. Select the objects you want to hide. Only highlighted objects are displayed in the drawing
view.
The Finish command is enabled.
5. Click Finish to save your changes.
You must update the drawing after showing objects.

Copy an object
1. In the Draw toolbar, click Hide/Show .
The Hide/Show ribbon appears in the toolbar area.

The Hide mode is selected by default.

2. Select a drawing view.
3. Click Copy Graphics .
4. Select an object to copy.
5. Click Finish to save your changes.
You can see the copied object with no labels.
To view the copied object, double-click the drawing view. Move the copied object, and
then turn on the hidden layer. For more information on layer display, see Layers Command in
the SmartSketch Drawing Editor User's Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 374

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Copy and Paste View Command

Copies an orthographic drawing view and places the copy on the same sheet.
1. Select an orthographic drawing view, and then click Copy and Paste View .
2. On the target drawing sheet, click Paste .
The view displays.
3. Drag the drawing view to a new location on the sheet.
You must use Copy and Paste View rather than the traditional Cut, Copy, and
Paste commands on views if you want to maintain the associations.
 If you try to drag and drop a view using a CTRL key operation, or if you try to cut a view,
Smart 3D displays a message asking you to use Copy and Paste View instead.
 If you try to copy a view, the software displays a message telling you that the copied view
will be an unassociated view. You then have the choice to continue or not.

Move View Command

Moves one or more views from a composed drawing document to another composed
drawing document. The new drawing can be in the same component or in a different
component.
A moved section view keeps its association with its cutting plane in the parent view, even when
the parent view is in a different drawing. A moved detail view keeps its association with its
envelope in the parent view, even when the parent view is in a different drawing.
Report and key plan views are moved automatically if the parent view is also moved. Dependent
report and key plan views cannot be moved if the parent view is not moved.
Views cannot be moved to a drawing that is being edited or to a drawing to which you do not
have write permissions.

 Views cannot be moved in orthographic drawings by query or volume (spatial) drawings.

 For a marine mode drawing by rule, views cannot be moved to a document in a different
component with Move View . Views can be moved to a document in the same
component, and to a different sheet in the same document.

Move View Dialog Box (on page 376)

What do you want to do?

 Move a view to a different drawing (on page 375)
 Move multiple views to a different drawing (on page 376)

Move a view to a different drawing

1. Click Move View .
2. Select a view in the drawing area.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 375

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Alternatively, select the view first, and then click Move View .
The Move View dialog box appears.
3. Expand the appropriate folder and component, and select the destination drawing
document.
4. Click OK.
The selected view is moved to the destination drawing.

Move multiple views to a different drawing

1. Select two or more views in the drawing area.
2. Click Move View .
The Move View dialog box appears.
3. Expand the appropriate folder and component, and select the destination drawing
document.
4. Click OK.
The selected views are moved to the destination drawing.

Move View Dialog Box

Displays the Drawings and Reports tree view of folders, components, and drawings in the
model. The tree view displays only drawings to which you have write permissions. Expand the
appropriate folder and component, and then select the drawing to which you want to move your
selected views.
OK
Closes the dialog box and moves the view to the selected drawing document.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without moving the view.
For drawings by rule, you can only move the selected view to drawings and drawing
sheets under the same component as the selected view. Only the drawings and sheets in that
component are displayed.

Highlight Annotations Command

Highlights labels, dimensions, and customized graphics based on the options that you
select. The options display on the left side of the drawing window.
This command is useful when you are troubleshooting labels and dimensions, such as when you
update a drawing and are looking for certain label or dimension types.
Highlight Dialog Box (on page 377)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 376

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Highlight Dialog Box

Allows you to specify label and dimensions that you want to see highlighted on a drawing. This
dialog box appears docked on the left side of the drawing by default. You can undock it if
needed.
To see all of the options, use the scroll bar on the right side of the dialog box.
Highlight
Click this button to highlight the specified items in the drawing.
Clear
Clears all highlighted items on the drawing and removes all the items in the select set.
Clear Options
Clears all options on this dialog box.
Close
Ends this command.
Add to Select Set
Adds the highlighted items to the set of all selected items.

Choose Highlight Color

Specifies the color of the selected items on the drawing.

Labels
Unmodified System Placed
Highlights labels that have not been modified on the drawing and that were placed by the
software.
User Placed
Highlights labels that a user placed on the drawing.
Modified System Placed
Highlights labels that have been modified on the drawing and that were placed by the
software.
Deleted
Highlights labels that have been deleted.
Unassociated
Highlights manual labels that are no longer associated to at least one of their original
geometry elements. Loss of association can occur after a view update when the Default
Graphics or Drawable Default Graphics custom graphic modules are used in a view style.
For more information, see Default Graphics and Drawable Default Graphics in the Drawings
and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 377

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Additional Label Filters

Labels By Name
Click this option in order to choose a specific label type. When you check this box, the
dropdown list is enabled. You can choose More in the dropdown list to view all label types in
the current drawing.
Corrupt
Highlights labels that have a problem, such as not being connected to the correct object.

Include
Include Related Leaders
Highlights leaders that are related to the specified labels.
Include Other Relations
Highlights cutting planes or detail envelopes that are related to the specified labels.
Include Related Lines
Highlights lines that are related to the specified labels.

Dimensions
Unmodified System Placed
Highlights dimensions that have not been modified and that were placed by the software.
User Placed
Highlights dimensions that a user placed on the drawing.
Modified System Placed
Highlights dimensions that have been modified and that were placed by the software.
Deleted
Highlights dimensions that have been deleted.
Paper To Model
Highlights dimensions from an object drawn on the paper to an object that is in the model.
Unassociated
Highlights manual dimensions that are no longer associated to at least one of their original
geometry elements. Loss of association can occur after a view update when the Default
Graphics or Drawable Default Graphics custom graphic modules are used in a view style.
For more information, see Default Graphics and Drawable Default Graphics in the Drawings
and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Additional Dimension Filters

Dimensions By Name
Click this option in order to choose a specific dimension type. When you check this box, the
dropdown list is enabled. You can choose More in the dropdown list to view all dimension
types in the current drawing.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 378

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

User Graphics
User Graphics
Highlights items, such as lines, that a user placed on the drawing.
User Scaled Dimensions
Highlights dimensions on the items that a user placed on the drawing.

Leaders
Disconnected Leaders
Highlights leaders that are disconnected from labels on the drawing.
See Also
Highlight Annotations Command (on page 376)

Clear Manual Edits Command

Permanently clears all manual edits made to labels and dimensions in the selected views.
You must first select one or more views before clicking this command.

Associate Graphics to Graphic View Command

Associates and disassociates manually drawn objects, such as lines, circles, symbols, and
text boxes, to graphic views. You can use Associate Graphics to Graphic View in
composed drawings and Drawings by Rule components. You cannot associate objects with a
report view or a pasted view, or if the objects are already associated with another view. To
associate the objects to another view, you must first dissociate the objects.

 You can use Move View to move the view and the associated objects.
 To view all objects that are associated with a graphic view, press ALT and select the graphic
view.

What do you want to do?

 Associate Graphics to Graphic View (on page 379)
 Disassociate Graphics from Graphic View (on page 380)

Associate Graphics to Graphic View

1. Select a graphic view.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 379

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

2. In the selected graphic view, select the objects to associate to the graphic view.

3. Click Associate Graphics to Graphic View .

A message displays the number of associated objects.
4. Click OK.

Disassociate Graphics from Graphic View

1. Select the objects to disassociate from the graphic view.

2. Click Associate Graphics to Graphic Views .

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 380

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

A warning message displays.

3. Click Yes to remove all associated inputs from each object.
A message displays the number of disassociated objects.
4. Click OK.

Template Toolbar
This toolbar is available when you click Edit Template on a component shortcut menu.

Place Drawing View Command (Template Toolbar)

Places a two-dimensional drawing view for 3D volume drawings. This command is available
when you use the Edit Template command available on the shortcut menu for a volume
drawing component in the Drawings and Reports task.
When you place drawing views, the software automatically saves the views to the
DwgTemplate layer when you save the document.

See Also
Manual Place View Ribbon (on page 385)
Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Drawing View Shortcut Menu) (on page 382)

Place a Drawing View for Volume Drawings

Before placing a drawing view for a volume drawing, you must have a View Style. For more
information, see Define View Style Command (Tools Menu) in the Drawings and Reports
Reference Data Guide, accessible using the Help > Printable Guides command in the
Drawings and Reports task.
1. Right-click a volume drawing component in the Management Console, and then click Edit
Template on the shortcut menu.
2. Select a template on the Select Template dialog box and click OK. The drawing template
opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
3. Click Place Drawing View on the toolbar.
4. Click a point on the drawing sheet to define the first corner of a rectangle, and hold the
mouse button down while dragging the mouse diagonally. Release the button at a second
point.

You can use PinPoint ( or ) to place views precisely.

The drawing view highlights on the drawing and the Drawing View Properties dialog box
displays.
5. On the Drawing View Properties dialog box, define the necessary information on the View
tab in the Name and Description boxes.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 381

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

6. In the Style box, select a view style.

7. In the Orientation box, select an orientation such as Looking Plan.
8. In the Scale box, select a scale, or choose Custom and define the values in the boxes to
the right.

 If you choose Custom, you must type values that are greater than zero in the boxes at
the right.
 The software converts the values that you type to the default unit of measure. For
example, if you type values of 1 in to 1 ft, the software may convert those values to mm.
9. Specify additional information as necessary on the Format tab.
10. Click OK.
11. Click File > Save and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

 To associate volumes with the view, switch to the Space Management task and click one of
the Place Drawing Volume commands.
 You can resize a drawing view by dragging its handles.
 You cannot undo a drawing view delete operation. A message box displays when you press
Delete for a selected view, providing a chance to cancel the operation.

Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Drawing View Shortcut

Menu)
Sets drawing view properties for a 3D volume drawing. This dialog box appears when you select
a drawing view in a volume drawing then right-click and select Properties on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Place Drawing View Command (Template Toolbar) (on page 381)
Info Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 382)
Format Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 383)
View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 383)

Info Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about the frame around a drawing view. This information is view-only. You
cannot make changes.
Type
Displays the category of the selected element.
Sheet
Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the selected element.
Layer
Shows the layer that contains the selected element.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 382

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Origin
Specifies the coordinates, or location, of an element along the X- and Y-axes.
See Also
Place Drawing View Command (Template Toolbar) (on page 381)
Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Drawing View Shortcut Menu) (on page 382)

Format Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box)

Formats the frame around a drawing view.
Show Border
Displays the frame around the object.
Color
Sets the color of the frame.
Line Width
Sets the line thickness on the frame.
Line Type
Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line style for
an element or a linked object.
See Also
Place Drawing View Command (Template Toolbar) (on page 381)
Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Drawing View Shortcut Menu) (on page 382)

View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box)

Sets the drawing view style and other properties for a selected drawing view in a 3D volume
drawing.
If the drawing document is a 3D composed drawing, refer to Drawing View Properties
Dialog Box (Place View Command) - Steel Order Drawings (on page 281) for information on the
properties shown on this tab.
Name
Specifies a name for the view. You must type a name in order to create a view.
Description
Describes the content of the view. This description is optional.
Style
Specifies a view style, which includes rules for filters, updates, and graphics. The view style
controls the output characteristics of the view on the generated drawing. The list displays
the 10 most recently used view styles in the session. Click More... to display the Select
View Style dialog box.
Orientation
Positions the view in the model. For example, the view can look north, south, east, or west
in the model.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 383

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Use object coordinate system

Specifies that the drawing takes its viewing direction directly from the object within the
drawing view, not from the orientation of the drawing view.
Scale
Sizes the view as a ratio of drawing size to actual model size. If you select Custom for the
scale, you must type values that are greater than zero in the boxes at the right to set the
scale-to-scale ratio for object-to-drawing view.

 For Custom scale, the default is to the document's unit of measure setting. For
example, if you define values of 1 in to 1 ft, the values are converted to mm if that is
the default unit of measure.
 Do not use negative values when defining custom scale values.
 For volume drawings, if the volume is too big for the drawing view, the software centers
the volume in the drawing view.
Navigation rule
Specifies the navigation rule to use to traverse elements to be included in the range for
Orthographic Drawings by Query. This dropdown only appears when you are placing views
on drawings created by the Orthographic Drawings by Query component in the Drawings
and Reports 3D task. The navigation rule can also optionally return separate object
collections, whose range is included in the 3D object range. If no navigation rule is specified,
the drawing object collection includes everything in the 3D object range. The delivered rules
are:
 HngSupSimpleNavigator.dll - Specific to Hanger and Support objects. Returns the
HangersSupport objects, support components, supporting objects, supported objects,
and the design children (recursively). It also returns the control points on the
HangerSupport objects and support components.
 HngSupRangeNavigator.dll - Same as HngSupSimpleNavigator.dll with design
children collection to extent the HangerSupport range.
 DrawingSpoolNavigator.dll - Specific to Spools. Returns the Spool, its connected
parts, and their features.
 AssemblyNavigator.dll - Specific to Assemblies. Returns the assemblies, pipe spool,
penetration spool, its connected parts, and their features.
Convert report output to text boxes (no Excel)
Specifies that any report associated with this drawing view will be converted automatically to
native text box format, even if the report is an Excel spreadsheet report. For information on
converting Excel spreadsheet reports, see Convert Excel Spreadsheet Reports to Native
Text Box Format Custom Command (on page 403).
Flush Threshold
Sets a parameter for memory management. When the number of objects processed for a
drawing document reaches the Threshold value, they are removed from memory. If they
are needed later, they are recalled from the database. This property helps improve drawing
update performance. The Flush Threshold property is only available for composed drawing
documents. The default value is 2000, with a range of 5-5000. The higher number is faster
but uses more memory, which is acceptable for smaller drawings. Lower numbers are

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 384

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

slower but allow larger drawings to complete faster.

If a drawing document does not successfully update in the Drawings and Reports
3D task, check the error log for the drawing document. If the error log shows memory
overflow errors, lower the Flush Threshold value.
VHL Precision
Sets a parameter for Hidden Line removal processing to consider two lines as identical. This
property setting has a direct impact on the visibility of the lines in the drawing. It improves
drawing update performance, but it may reduce drawing quality. The VHL precision
property is only available for composed drawing documents. The default value is 0.000001,
with a range of 0.001 to 0.000001. The smaller the number, the more accurate the graphic
elements are in the 2D view.
If some intersections of complex surfaces appear on/off along the curve, the
precision of the VHL may be too restrictive compared to the precision by which the surfaces
were created. Lowering the VHL Precision value may help the display of the intersections,
but lowering the value too much could degrade the overall quality and the visibility of the
drawing details.
Geometry Validation
Sets a parameter for drawing completion and quality to improve drawing update
performance. The Geometry Validation property is available for composed drawing
documents only. The default value is Off. When set to Off, the drawing document
completes, but invalid geometries are left out. If set to On, the drawing document does not
complete if invalid geometries are encountered during update.
Tag
Identifies the reference mark for the selected detail view. This property is only available
when a detail or section view is selected.
Caption
Identifies the callout text assigned to the selected detail view. This property is only available
when a detail or section view is selected.
See Also
Place Drawing View Command (Template Toolbar) (on page 381)
Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Drawing View Shortcut Menu) (on page 382)

Manual Place View Ribbon

Sets options for placing a snapshot drawing view. These options include the view name, style,
and scale.
View Name
Displays the name of the view you created in a 3D task.
View Style
Specifies a view style, which includes rules for filters, updates, and graphics. The view style
controls the output characteristics of the view on the generated drawing. The list displays
the 10 most recently used view styles in the session. Click More... to display the Select
View Style dialog box.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 385

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

View Scale
Specifies a scale. You can choose No Scale if the view is not to scale. Choose Custom if
you want to specify your own scale and then type values in the two boxes at the right of the
ribbon. If you choose Custom for the scale, you must type values that are greater than zero
in the boxes at the right.
See Also
Place Drawing View Command (Template Toolbar) (on page 381)

Place Report Command (Template Toolbar)

Embeds a report in a drawing view on a 3D drawing. You must select a drawing view on the
drawing before you can embed a report.
The report queries on the items in the drawing view.
When you place reports, the software automatically places them on the DwgTemplate layer so
that they will be preserved when you update the drawing document.

 For embedded reports to run on computers with Microsoft Office XP, you must modify the
security settings in Excel to allow Visual Basic projects to run. To change this setting, open
Excel, and click Tools > Macros > Security. On the Trusted Sources tab, select Trust
access to Visual Basic Project. This setting must be modified before you update the
drawing and generate the report within it.
 When defining embedded report layout (sizing of columns and rows), consider the report
usage first. Because of a Microsoft limitation concerning the size of Windows metafile
objects within other applications, the data displayed may be incomplete. Therefore, no
column should be out of screen when using 100 percent zoom for the report. Otherwise
some columns are ignored when the report is embedded within the drawing. The same
limitation exists for rows. To preserve the maximum number of rows displayed, the total
header row(s) height should be a minimum of the overall report. Using Microsoft Excel
default settings, the maximum number of columns is approximately 20 and the maximum
number of rows is approximately 75 (including header rows). For more information on setting
the defaults in Microsoft Excel, see your Microsoft Excel documentation.
See Also
Report Properties Dialog Box (Place Report View Command) (on page 320)

Place an Embedded Report in a Volume Drawing

1. For volume drawings, right-click the volume drawing component in the Drawing Console
and select Edit Template.
2. Select a template on the Select Template dialog box and click OK. The drawing template
opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

3. Click Place Report , and then click on the drawing view border.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 386

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

4. On the Select Template dialog box, select a report template from the hierarchy. For
example, you can select Piping Pipelines Sorted by Name report.

5. Click OK on the dialog box.

6. In SmartSketch Drawing Editor, click to place the report.

 Only one report per drawing view is permitted.

 For more information about Microsoft Office and service packs, refer to the Microsoft web
site (http://www.microsoft.com/) (http://www.microsoft.com/).
 If you are using Office 2003, in Microsoft Excel under Tools > Macro > Security > Trusted
Publishers tab, check the Trust Access to Visual Basic Project option.
 If you are using Office 2007 and Office 2010, click the Microsoft Office button to access
Excel Option. Go to the Trust Center category and select the Trust Center Settings
button. Select the Macro Settings category and check Trust access to the VBA project
object model.
 When defining embedded report layout (sizing of columns and rows), consider the report
usage first. Because of a Microsoft limitation concerning the size of Windows metafile
objects within other applications, the data displayed may be incomplete. Therefore, no
column should be out of screen when using 100 percent zoom for the report. Otherwise
some columns are ignored when the report is embedded within the drawing. The same
limitation exists for rows. To preserve the maximum number of rows displayed, the total
header row(s) height should be a minimum of the overall report. Using Microsoft Excel
default settings, the maximum number of columns is approximately 20 and the maximum
number of rows is approximately 75 (including header rows). For more information on setting
the defaults in Microsoft Excel, see your Microsoft Excel documentation.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 387

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Select Report Template Dialog Box

Selects a report template. This dialog box appears when you click Place Report when
editing a 3D drawing template. By browsing through the hierarchy, you can find any report
template in the Catalog database. After you select a template, the software generates the report.
You can resize the dialog box and the columns to view the information more clearly.

Properties
Displays the properties of the selected item. All properties on the Properties dialog box are
read- only.

List View
Sets the dialog box to display items in a list view.

Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display items in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
The Place Report commands creates reports based on a selected report template.
You can also select a report template and view its properties. The buttons that are grayed out
are not available when using these commands.

Place Key Plan Command (Template Toolbar)

Places a key plan on a drawing template. The Place Key Plan command is enabled when
you select a drawing view. The command displays the Select Key Plan dialog box to specify a
key plan type to associate with the selected drawing view.
When you place key plan views, the software automatically places them on the DwgTemplate
layer so that they will be preserved when you update the drawing document.
A key plan is a small graphical representation of a drawing volume you defined in the
geographic area where engineering is taking place. One key plan may serve for an entire
project. Multiple key plans may be established per discipline. One drawing view may have
multiple key plans.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 388

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

See Also
Select Key Plan Style Dialog Box (on page 389)

Select Key Plan Style Dialog Box

Specifies a style for the selected key plan on a volume- drawing template. Select a style from
the Rule Name hierarchy.
See Also
Key Plan Properties Dialog Box (on page 389)
Place Key Plan Command (Template Toolbar) (on page 388)

Key Plan Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for a key plan on a drawing template.
See Also
Place Key Plan Command (Template Toolbar) (on page 388)
Info Tab (Key Plan Properties Dialog Box) (on page 389)
Format Tab (Key Plan Properties Dialog Box) (on page 389)
Key Plan Tab (Key Plan Properties Dialog Box) (on page 390)

Info Tab (Key Plan Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about a key plan. This information is read-only. You cannot make changes.
Type
Displays the category of the selected element.
Sheet
Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the selected element.
Layer
Shows the layer that contains the selected element.
Origin
Specifies the coordinates, or location, of an element along the X- and Y-axes.
See Also
Key Plan Properties Dialog Box (on page 389)
Place Key Plan Command (Template Toolbar) (on page 388)

Format Tab (Key Plan Properties Dialog Box)

Formats the frame around a key plan.
Show Border
Displays the frame around the object.
Color
Sets the color of the frame.
Line Width
Sets the line thickness on the frame.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 389

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Line Type
Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line style for
an element or a linked object.
See Also
Place Key Plan Command (Template Toolbar) (on page 388)
Key Plan Properties Dialog Box (on page 389)

Key Plan Tab (Key Plan Properties Dialog Box)

Sets the properties for a selected key plan.
Name
Specifies a unique name for the key plan.
Description
Describes the key plan contents.
Style
Indicates the key plan view style used. Select More to display the Select Key Plan Style
dialog box. For more information, see Select Key Plan Style Dialog Box (on page 389).
Scale
Indicates the scale assigned to the key plan with regard to the associated drawing view. If
you select Custom for the scale, you must type values that are greater than zero in the
boxes at the right to set the scale-to-scale ratio for key plan-to-drawing view.

 For Custom scale, the default is to the document's unit of measure setting. For example, if
you define values of 1 in to 1 ft, the values are converted to mm if that is the default unit of
measure.
 Do not use negative values when defining custom scale values.
 Orientation of the key plan graphic is specified as part of the key plan style.
See Also
Key Plan Properties Dialog Box (on page 389)
Place Key Plan Command (Template Toolbar) (on page 388)

Place a Key Plan

1. In the Management Console, right-click a volume drawings component, then click Edit
Template.
2. If no template is defined for the volume drawings component, select a template in the Select
Template dialog box, and click OK.
3. Select a drawing view on the template.
4. On the Template toolbar, click Place Key Plan .

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 390

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

5. Click two points to place the key plan view.

On the second click, the software displays the Key Plan Properties dialog box.
6. On the dialog box, specify the settings for the key plan.

 Multiple key plans can be associated with a single drawing view.

 For Custom scale, the default is to the document's unit of measure setting. For example, if
you type values of 1 in to 1 ft, the values are converted to mm if that is the default unit of
measure.
 Do not use negative values when typing custom scale values.
 Orientation of the key plan graphic is specified as part of the key plan style. For more
information, see "Define View Style Command (Tools Menu)" in the Drawings and Reports
Reference Data Guide.
For more information, see Key Plan Drawing Requirements and Key Plan View Styles in the
Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Edit Border Template Toolbar

Available when you click Tools > Edit Border Template in the Drawings and Reports task.

Place Drawing Property Label Command (Drawing Labels

Toolbar)
Positions drawing property labels in the title block of a template. The command allows you
to place drawing properties defined in the 3D drawing XML schema file as title block information
on the drawing. When you click Place Drawing Property Label , the Place Drawing
Property Label ribbon appears in the toolbar area.
Place Drawing Property Label Ribbon (on page 392)
When placing drawing property labels, zoom into the border area where you want to place the
label for more precise placement.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 391

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Place Drawing Property Label Ribbon

Sets options for drawing property label placement on a border template. You can access this
ribbon when you click the Place Drawing Property Label command when editing a border
template in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
When you place drawing property labels, the software automatically makes the DwgTemplate
layer active. The labels need to be on this layer so that they are preserved when you update the
drawing.

You set options as needed within the Place Drawing Property Label ribbon, then place the
label in the drawing border title block area.
Label Set
Specifies a property category. This list shows the categories of drawing properties available
for the current drawing. The label set controls the fields listed in the Field dropdown list and
the enabling of other options on the ribbon.
Fields
Lists the properties available in the selected Label Set. This is the information you are
placing on the title block of the drawing.
Function
Provides positioning functions for the label. The options available are Index, First, and
Last. This control works with the Function Operator and Function Argument fields to set
the position of the label within the title block area.
Function Operator
Works with the Function and Function Argument fields to set the position of the label
within the title block area. The value is controlled by the Function selection. This field is not
editable.
Function Argument
Sets a value to add or subtract from the First or Last settings in the Function field. This
field works also works with the Function Operator field to set the position of the label within
the title block area.
Alternative Text Value
Specifies alternative text to use if the selected property has no current value.
Display Label Names
Turns the label names on/off in the open border template:

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 392

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

More
Expands the ribbon to include additional formatting controls.

The controls on the expanded ribbon include:

Style
Sets the overall style used within the label.
Font
Sets the font for the label text.
Font Size
Sets the font size for the label text.
Textbox Width
Specifies the width of the text box.

Place a Drawing Property Label on a Template

If you want to place a custom attribute label on a template, see Place a Custom Drawing
Property Label on a Template (on page 394).
1. Click Tools > Edit Border Template.
The Select Template dialog box displays.
2. Select a template, and click OK.
The template opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
3. On the Drawing Labels toolbar, click Place Drawing Property Label .
The Place Drawing Property Label ribbon displays.

Click Display Label Names to show the labels names as they apply to the open
border template:

4. In the Label Set list (the first dropdown on the ribbon), select a label set (set of drawing
properties). The list reflects the label sets within the drawing XML schema. The Label Set
selection controls the contents of the Fields list and the enabling of other controls on the
ribbon.
5. In the Fields list (the second dropdown on the ribbon), select a field to use as your title
block label.
6. Specify a Function, setting the Function Argument if needed.
7. Provide alternative text for cases when the label property could be blank.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 393

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

8. Click More to expand the ribbon and set formatting options. Select the Style, Font,
Font Size, Text Color, Textbox Height, and Textbox Width.
9. Zoom into the area of the border where you want to place the drawing property label. Click
the template to place the label.

10. Continue placing labels on the template as necessary. For example, the following border
shows that the General label for the Location property has been placed as Huntsville.

11. Right-click to end the command.

12. Save the changes to the template before closing SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
See Also
Publishing Title Blocks (on page 425)

Place a Custom Drawing Property Label on a Template

The following steps show how to add a custom attribute drawing property label to a drawing
template. To add non-custom property labels to the template, see Place a Drawing Property
Label on a Template (on page 393).
1. Create a Custom Attribute workbook using Excel. This is the bulkload file for the custom
attribute and names the attribute. For example, you could create a file called
CustomAttributes.xls that contains the definition for a custom attribute. For more information
on the format for the workbook, see Drawings-ExtendCustomAttributes Workbook in the
Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.
2. Bulkload the Custom Attribute workbook. For more information on populating Excel
workbooks and bulkloading, see the Reference Data Guide available from Help > Printable
Guides.
3. Create an .xsd file and add a line that defines the attribute in the dropdown list when you
edit a template and use the Place Drawing Property Label command. For example, using

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 394

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

DrawingCustom1 as the attribute name, the line would be <xs:element

name="DrawingCustom1">.
You can only use letters, numbers, and underscores when defining the element
name. The name must also begin with a letter.
4. Add a line that points to the AttributeName property of the bulkloaded attribute. For
example, using the above attribute name, the necessary line would be <pk
name="DrawingCustom1"/>. Your .xsd file would look similar to the following:
</xs:element>
<xs:element name="DrawingCustom1">
<xs:annotation>
<xs:appinfo>
<pk name="DrawingCustom1">
</xs:appinfo>
</xs:annotation>
</xs:element>
The pk name in the Custom.xsd file must match the related AttributeName
property of the bulkloaded attribute.
5. Make sure the .xsd file is in the \Symbols\Drawings\Catalog\Labels\Border\Schema folder.
6. In the Drawings and Reports task, click Tools > Edit Border Template.
7. On the Select Template dialog box, select a template, and click OK. The template opens in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
8. In the Label Set list (the first dropdown on the ribbon), select Custom.
9. In the Fields list (the second dropdown on the ribbon), select the Custom attribute property
to use as your title block label.
10. Zoom into the area of the border where you want to place the drawing property label. Click
the template to place the label.
11. Continue placing labels on the template as necessary.
12. Right-click to end the command.
13. Save the changes to the template before closing SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
14. Update any drawing documents associated with the modified template. For more
information, see Updating Documents (on page 78) in the Drawings Help.
15. Right-click the drawing and select Properties.
16. Go to the Custom tab. The new Custom attribute property is shown on the tab.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 395

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

17. To verify the custom drawing property is added to the drawing title block, right-click the
drawing and select Open. The custom drawing property includes the Custom Property
attribute in the title block.

Place Drawing Area Command

Places a drawing area for drawing border templates. This command is available when you
are editing a drawing border template for which a drawing area is not defined. If a drawing area
already exists, an error messages displays. You can delete the existing drawing area and place
a new one.
A drawing area is a property of the border template that defines the "useful" area of a drawing
sheet. During the creation of a new composed drawing, the layout template containing the
managed views fits inside the drawing area of the border template.
By defining a drawing area in each border template, a single layout template can be fit into any
size border. The proportion of the drawing area devoted to a particular region in the layout does
not change when the border template changes. For example, if you apply a region to the bottom
half of a layout (and the layout is merged into a border template), the region always consumes
the bottom half of the drawing, regardless of how it is stretched or resized by different border
templates.
After you click Place Drawing Area , click and drag to place the drawing area.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 396

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Save the border template file and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor. You can use the border file
to create new 3D composed drawings. For more information, see the Drawings and Reports
User's Guide or the Common User's Guide.

 Editing a border template on the Symbols share does not affect an existing drawing
because the border template associated to a drawing is stored in the database. To change
the border template used by an existing drawing, you must replace the stored border
template using the Switch Border command.
 If no drawing area exists in the border template used to create a composed drawing, one is
computed based on the white space in the border template. This computed drawing area is
not saved with the border template.
 The existence of a drawing area in the border template associated to a drawing has an
impact on the behavior of the Switch Border command.
See Also
Switch Border (on page 210)

Change the Border for an Individual Drawings by Rule Sheet

The following procedure steps you through changing the border for an individual sheet to a
template different from the border template defined in the Drawings by Rule component. For
example, you may want the first sheet of drawing to use a different border template than all
other sheets.
For more information on SmartSketch Drawing Editor commands used in this
procedure, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.

Change the Border Template for an Existing Sheet

1. Right-click a drawings by rule document in the Detail View and select Edit.
The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. Select a sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing view.
3. Click Edit Sheet Properties on the toolbar.
The Sheet Properties dialog box displays.
4. On the Current Sheet tab, select a new value for Border Template.
5. Click OK.
The new border template is applied to the sheet.
Layout Template is inactive, and cannot be changed for an existing sheet.

Apply a Border and Layout Template to a New Sheet

1. Right-click a drawings by rule document in the Detail View and select Edit.
The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. Right-click a sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing view and select Insert.
A new sheet is created and the Sheet Properties dialog box displays.
3. On the Current Sheet tab, select a value for Border Template and Layout Template.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 397

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

4. Click OK.
The border and layout templates are applied to the new sheet.
A sheet cannot be deleted unless all views on the sheet are removed first.

Edit Layout Template

Available when you click Tools > Edit Layout Template in the Drawings and Reports task.

Edit Border Family Command

Allows you to change the border family associated with the current layout template. This
command is available when you edit a layout template.
When you click Edit Border Family , the Select Border Family dialog box appears so that
you can select border templates to associate to the current layout template.
See Also
Select Border Family Dialog Box (on page 398)

Select Border Family Dialog Box

Specifies the border templates to associate with the current layout template. This dialog box
displays when you click Edit Border Family , which is only available in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor. You can multi-select borders by holding down the CTRL key while selecting
borders from the hierarchy.

See Also
Edit Border Family Command (on page 398)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 398

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Preview Layout Command

Shows a preview of the drawing document based on the current layout. A preview is shown
for each of the borders chosen in the Border Family for the layout template.

This command is only available in SmartSketch Drawing Editor when you edit a layout
template.

Shortcut Menus
Commands available when using right-click shortcut menus.

Update View Command

Updates the contents for the selected drawing, report, key plan, snapshot, or detail/section view.
This command is available for composed drawing views only. Right-click a selected view and
select Update View on the shortcut menu. The view contents update against the current 3D
model. When working with the Update View command:
 If the software encounters a problem before or during the drawing update, it stops updating,
displays either an error status or error message, and saves the errors to the log file. For
more information, see Conditional Drawing Update (on page 86) in the Orthographic
Drawings User's Guide.
 You cannot multi-select views. The command is not available on the shortcut menu if more
than one view is selected.
 The inputs for the view (the associated volume or drawing view) must be defined and valid.
 If a report is defined as part of a drawing view definition, the Update View command is not
available.
 If the drawing document is read-only, the Update View command is not available.

 To remove associated inputs from a view, use the Remove Associated Inputs
command. For more information, see Remove Associated Inputs Command (on page 319).
To associate a view to a volume or another drawing view, use the Associate Objects to

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 399

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

View command. For more information, see Associate Objects to View Command (on
page 300).
 For composed drawings, views that are too small to display the volume are automatically
sized larger on update to fit unless the view is set to Fit to Scale or is managed by a region.
Likewise, views that are larger than the volume are automatically resized to fit unless the
view is set to Fit to Scale or is managed by a region. The view size grows or shrinks from
the center of the view and view proportions may change after the resize. The drawing must
be saved to make the resize of the view permanent. For more information, see Automatic
Resize Behavior of Composed Views (on page 285).
See Also
Place View Command (on page 275)
Associate Objects to Views (on page 314)
Place Snapshot View Command (on page 299)
Place Report View Command (on page 319)

Switch Border
Allows you to switch the border template associated with the composed drawing documents
selected in the Detail View. This command is available on the shortcut menu when you select a
composed drawing document. It displays the Drawing Sheet Properties dialog box so you can
change the associated border template.
Editing a border template in the SharedContent folder does not affect an existing drawing
because the border template associated to a drawing is stored in the database. To change the
border template used by an existing drawing, you must replace the stored border template using
the Switch Border command.
After switching the border template, the software computes a new position and size for any
regions and managed views contained in the drawing. The shift and resize of the view is
proportional to the size of the drawing areas in the border templates. If the border template does
not contain a drawing area, the drawing boundary is computed automatically.
The software does not distinguish between different types of drawing views (report, key plan,
and graphic views) when switching the border.

 If you switch the border template of a drawing, views may resize or reposition with the new
border template based on the following conditions:
 Managed views are proportionately resized and repositioned according to the size of the
new border template.
 Unmanaged views are not resized and repositioned.
 Drawings must be updated after switching the border template in order to ensure all
automated annotation is positioned correctly on the drawing.
 For views that are resized after the border template switch, drawing views using Fit to Scale
show the same content. Views with a scale may have content clipped out if the view is made
smaller after the switch.
For more information, see Place Region Command (on page 296).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 400

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Drawing Sheet Properties Dialog Box

Shows the drawing sheet properties associated with the selected drawing document(s) and
allows you to change the border template file. When displayed for the Switch Border command
on selected composed drawing documents, the only property available is Border Template.
Select More in the Value field to display the Select Template dialog box and specify a new
border template. Click OK to associate the new border template file to the selected drawing
documents.

You need to update the drawings to regenerate them with the new border template file.
See Also
Switch Border (on page 210)

Add a Sheet to Drawing

In this workflow, you change the border for an individual sheet to a template different from the
border template defined in the component. For example, you may want the first sheet of drawing
to use a different border template than all other sheets.
1. Right-click a drawings by rule document in the Detail View and select Edit.
The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. Right-click a sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing view and select Insert.
A new sheet is created and the Sheet Properties dialog box displays.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 401

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

3. On the Current Sheet tab, select values for Border Template and Layout Template. Click
Use Default to apply the default values for the drawing, as shown on the Default tab.
4. Click OK.
The border and layout templates are applied to the new sheet.

Layers (SmartSketch Drawing Editor Tools Menu)

Layers are used to distinguish between graphics within a template or drawing. You can create
layers in SmartSketch Drawing Editor with the Tools > Layers command.
Objects like drawing views, key plan views, report views, and drawing property labels are placed
on the DwgTemplate layer when you save the drawing document. You should not place manual
markups on the DwgTemplate layer.
When placing manual markups, such as graphics or company logos, place them in paper space
within the drawing layers, not in model space (inside a drawing view). Markups placed within
model space are not preserved. When a graphic rule does not specify a layer, intelligent
graphics are placed on the Default layer.

Composed Drawings
When you create composed drawings, you can place manual markups on any layer of the
drawing.

Volume (Spatial) and Orthographic Drawings by Query Drawings

For volume drawings, manual markups are preserved on any layer of the drawing, except the
DwgTemplate layer. The DwgTemplate layer is reserved for system use. If you placed manual
markups on the DwgTemplate layer, they will be lost when you update the drawing document.

Isogen Isometric Drawings

If you intend to create manual markups within an Isogen Isometric drawing, place your markups
on the Default layer. The software preserves this layers when you update drawings. Other
layers are not preserved.
If named layers do not exist in the template, the software creates them using the symbology
specified in the style XML file. In ISOGEN Configuration, use the options in the Drawing Area >
Graphics > Layers style group to create new layers within the style XML file. Map definitions to
the layers under Drawing Area > Graphics > Definitions.
If the named layers do exist in the template, use Tools > Display Manager in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor to change the symbology used within the template.

Modify an Existing Border File

You can create an isometric drawing border from scratch using SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
You use the commands available within SmartSketch Drawing Editor to place graphics and
create appropriate layers.
You should name new border files with the name of the needed isometric style, such as
Iso_Pipeline or Iso_Piperun.
1. Navigate to [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\PmfgIsoStyleData folder, and copy the
appropriate existing border igr file to the [Reference Data

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 402

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Folder]\SharedContent\Drawings\Catalog\Templates folder. You can create a subfolder for

the new file.
2. Rename the copied file with the .sha extension.
3. Open the copied .sha files with SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
4. Fit the view.
5. Select Tools > Layers.
The Layer ribbon displays.
6. Select Tools > Display Manager. On the Layers tab, scroll down to see the values
currently set in the .sha file. These are the color, line type, and width values for the named
layers.
7. Make changes as needed, save the file, and exit SmartSketch Drawing Editor. The next time
you use this .sha file as your drawing border template, the graphics will show the changes
you made.

Custom Commands
Custom commands used in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Convert Excel Spreadsheet Reports to Native Text Box

Format Custom Command
The SP3DConvertExcelEmbedded.dll is a delivered custom command that allows you to
convert an Excel spreadsheet report to the native text box format for use in 3D Drawings. The
DLL to execute this command is located on the client machine in the [Product
Folder]\Drawings\Client\Bin folder. To run this custom command, select Tools > Custom
Commands in an open drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor, and browse to the DLL location
on the computer. For additional information on any of the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
commands mentioned in this procedure, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
To convert an embedded report, you must set the properties correctly on the associated views.
For a 3D composed drawing, set the Report Output property for a report view as needed. For
more information, see Report Properties Dialog Box (Place Report View Command) (on page
320). For a 3D volume drawing, select the Convert report output to text boxes (no Excel)
property for the drawing view associated to the report view. For more information, see View Tab
(Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 383).
When you run this command, the Convert dialog appears so you can specify the appropriate
options for the convert operation:
Convert embedded Excel spreadsheet
Indicates that the specified report will be converted to native text box format.
Convert and embed an Excel spreadsheet
Indicates that the specified report will be converted to native text box format and then
embedded in the current drawing document.
Replace converted spreadsheet with a new converted version from Excel
Specifies that a converted spreadsheet report will be replaced with a new version of the
same report.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 403

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

File
Indicates the report file to convert. Click the ellipsis button to browse to the appropriate file.
See Also
Region Properties Dialog Box (on page 298)

Edit a Composed Drawing

This procedure steps you through editing a composed drawing from either the Drawings and
Reports task Management Console or from a 3D modeling task using the Tools > Drawings
Console command. For additional information on any of the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
commands mentioned in this procedure, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.
1. Right-click an existing composed drawing in the Management Console or the Drawings
Console. The document opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. You can use the editing
tools in SmartSketch Drawing Editor to modify the appearance of your drawing. You can
also use the Composed Drawing tools to place new regions, drawing views, report views,
and snapshot views on the drawing area. You can also place labels manually on the
drawing.
When you place objects like drawing views, key plan views, report views, and
drawing property labels, the software automatically places them on the DwgTemplate layer
when you save the drawing document. You should not place manual markups on the
DwgTemplate layer.
If you use other native SmartSketch Drawing Editor. commands (such as Place Line or
Place Dimension) to add manual markups to the template, put them on the Default or a
layer with "User" as the prefix (for example, a layer named UserAnnotationLayer to
preserve the changes when you update drawings. For more information on layers, see
Layers (SmartSketch Drawing Editor Tools Menu) (on page 402).

2. To place a new region in the drawing area, use the Place Region command. Regions
are used to manage drawing views. Click and drag to place the new region. The Region
Properties dialog box displays after you place the region shape. Specify the properties for
the region you are adding and click OK to complete the creation.
3. To place a new drawing view, use the Place View command. If you want your new
region to manage this drawing view, place the new drawing views within or touching the
region. You can also place "unmanaged" views outside existing regions. Click and drag to
create the drawing view shape. The Drawing View Properties dialog box displays so you
can define the drawing view. For more information on the Drawing View Properties dialog
box, see Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Place View Command) - Steel Order
Drawings (on page 281). For more information on how regions and views work together, see
Composed Drawings (on page 201) in the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 404

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

4. To place a report view, click Place Report View . The drawing view you select can be
managed by a region or unmanaged (outside all regions). Click and drag to place the report
on the drawing area. The Report Properties dialog box displays so you can specify the
properties for the report. Click More in the Report Template property box to select from
available reports. You can set the output format of the report using the Report Output
Format and Report Justification properties on this dialog box. For more information, see
Report Properties Dialog Box (Place Report View Command) (on page 320).

 The report view you create is empty. Use the Associate Objects to View command
to associate a drawing view to the new report view. For more information, see Associate
Objects to View Command (on page 300). The drawing view you select must already be
associated with a volume in the model.
 You can associate multiple reports to the same view, but you cannot, in the current
release, associate multiple views to the same report.
5. You can also place snapshot views on your composed drawing. You create the snapshot
view content in a 3D task using the Tools > Snapshot View command. For more
information on creating the snapshot view, see Snapshot View Command in the Common
User's Guide available from Help > Printable Guides.
To place the snapshot view on the composed drawing, use the Place Snapshot View
command. Click and drag to place the snapshot view shape. The Drawing View Properties
dialog box displays so you can specify the properties for the snapshot view.

6. You can place manual labels on the composed drawing using the Place Label
command. For more information on placing labels manually, see Place a Manual Label (on
page 325).
7. If a view association is incorrect, click Remove Associated Inputs . This command
allows you to select a view and remove all associations to volumes, folders, and other
views.
8. If you decided to delete a drawing view, a message box displays when you press Delete for
a selected view, providing a chance to cancel the operation. After a drawing view is deleted
from the drawing, the operation cannot be reversed.
9. To update the contents of a view, select and right-click the view then select Update View on
the shortcut menu. The view is updated with the associated 3D model objects or report,
depending on the association you made with the Associate Object to View command.
10. Save your drawing changes before exiting SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
11. Update the modified drawing to incorporate the changes. You can open the drawing to
check the new layout and view content.
See Also
Composed Drawings Common Tasks (on page 203)
Create a new composed drawing (on page 205)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 405

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Edit the Drawing Template

1. Right-click the component and select Edit Template. SmartSketch Drawing Editor and the
Sheet Properties dialog box displays.
2. On the Sheet tab, select values for Sheet Assignment Rule, Sheet Naming Rule, Border
Template, and Layout Template. These values are used for the first sheet when a drawing
document is created.
3. On the Document tab, select values for Document Assignment Rule, Document Naming
Rule, Border Template, and Layout Template. These values are used for sheets added to
a drawing document after it is created.
You can also click Edit Sheet Properties on the Edit Template ribbon
toolbar to change values in the Sheet Properties dialog box.
4. Click File > Save.
5. Click File > Exit. The SmartSketch Drawing Editor window closes.

Modify View Ribbon

Modifies the view size. This ribbon displays after a view is selected in SmartSketch Drawing
Editor.
Finish
Saves changes to the view.
Update View
Select to update the view (Drawing) gets updated along with the parent volume in the
model.
Undo Crop
Select to remove an existing crop on the view. The view returns to its original boundaries.
This option is not available for a view that cannot be cropped, such as a composed drawing
view.
Removal of cropping with Undo Crop is not visible on a view until the view is
updated. Select Update View, and click Finish to see the results immediately. The results will
also be visible after using Update or Batch Update in the Drawings and Reports task at a later
time.

Crop a Drawings by Rule 2D Drawing View and the 3D Model

Volume
When an orthographic steel order view in a drawings-by-rule drawing is based on a volume in
the model, you can crop the view, and also resize the model volume to match the cropped view.
1. Select the view in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 406

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Four handles display on the view frame and Modify View ribbon displays.

2. Drag the handles to resize the view to the needed size.

3. To immediately update the view, select Update View.

4. Click Finish.
The cropped view is saved and parent volume in the model is resized.

 To cancel the changes to the view size, click outside of the view without clicking Finish.

 If Update View is not selected, the view is marked out-of-date in the Drawings View

Explorer. You can right-click the view and select Update.

 The 2D view and the 3D volume maintain the cropped size with subsequent updates.
 Shell expansions are not based on a volume and cannot be cropped. For more information,
see Create a shell expansion drawing (on page 173) in the Orthographic Drawings User's
Guide.
 Section and Detail views use their own commands for cropping. For more information, see
Place a Section View (on page 355) and Place a Detail View (on page 359).
See Also
Drawings View Explorer (on page 256)

Remove Cropping on a Drawings by Rule View

1. Select a previously-cropped view in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 407

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Four handles appear on the view frame and Modify View ribbon displays.

2. Select Undo Crop and Update View.

3. Click Finish.
The view (and the parent volume in the model) changes to its original size.

Place an Unassigned View

The following steps describe the basic workflow for placing an existing view that is not assigned
to a drawing.
1. Right-click a drawing document in the Detail View and select Edit. The drawing opens in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

2. Drag an unassigned view from the Unassigned Folder in the Drawings View Explorer
to the graphics view of the drawing.

The view displays in the graphics view and the view icon ( or ) displays under the
drawing sheet in the Drawings View Explorer.

Dragging more than one view onto an existing drawing may require:
 Deleting the existing drawing region, and dragging the views onto the drawing without a
region.
 Deleting the existing drawing region, and adding a new region that supports the number of
views needed. For more information, see Edit Template (Drawings by Rule) (on page 128) in
the Orthographic Drawings User's Guide and Layout Style Rules in Orthographic Drawings
in the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 408

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Section View Orientation Rules in Drawings by Rule

Plant Mode Section View Orientation Behavior
The software automatically determines the "up" direction for section views. In most cases, the
up direction is "up," or +Z. In cases where using +Z is impossible (for example, if the section
view direction is Looking Plan or Looking Up), the software orients the view to the North
direction.
The following examples outline common section view orientations:
Looking Plan

P1 Cutting Plane P2 Cutting Plane P3 Cutting Plane

Looking East Looking South Looking South, East

Up direction is up. Up direction is up. Up direction is up.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 409

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Looking North

E1 Cutting Plane E2 Cutting Plane E3 Cutting Plane

Looking South Looking Plan Looking South, Plan

Up direction is up. Up direction is North. Up direction is up.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 410

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Looking East

E4 Cutting Plane E5 Cutting Plane E6 Cutting Plane

Looking South Looking Plan Looking South, Plan

Up direction is up. Up direction is North. Up direction is up.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 411

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Marine Mode Section View Orientation Behavior

The software automatically determines the "up" direction for section views. In most cases, the
up direction is "up," or +Z. In cases where using the z-axis is impossible (for example, if the
section view direction is Looking Plan or Looking Up), the software orients the view to the Port
direction.
Additionally, angled sections of elevation views, and any section of a non-standard view
direction (in which it is possible) uses Port orientation.
The following examples outline common section view orientations:
Looking Plan

P1 Cutting Plane P2A-P2B Cutting Plane P3 Cutting Plane

Looking Fore Looking Starboard Looking Fore, Starboard

Up direction is up. Up direction is up. Up direction is up.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 412

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Looking Aft

E1 Cutting Plane E2 Cutting Plane E3 Cutting Plane

Looking Port Looking Plan Looking Port, Plan

Up direction is up. Up direction is Port. Up direction is Port.

Looking Port

E4 Cutting Plane E5 Cutting Plane E6 Cutting Plane

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 413

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Looking Fore Looking Plan Looking Fore, Plan

Up direction is up. Up direction is Port. Up direction is Port.

For more information, see Orientation Rules in Drawings by Rule in the Drawings and Reports
Reference Data Guide.

Update and Full Update Commands

The Update and Full Update commands are available when you right-click a drawing view in
the Drawings View Explorer.
Full Update performs a full update of all geometry in the view. It does not consider whether the
model objects associated with the geometry has changed.
Update performs a smart update of the view or a set of selected views from the same sheet. If a
set of criteria is met, then an incremental update is performed only for the geometry of added,
modified, and deleted objects. If the criteria are not met, then a full update — the equivalent of
Full Update — is performed.
All of the following criteria must be met for Update to trigger an incremental update:
 The view has had at least one full update previously performed.
 The only view properties that have changed are name and description. For more
information, see View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 277).
 The numbers of added, modified, or deleted objects are less than set quantities.
 The software allows incremental updates for the selected view type.
Any one of the following criteria cause Update to trigger a full update:
 The view is new and has never had a full update.
 The view is a section or detail view. For more information, see Place Detail Envelope
Command (on page 343) and Place Cutting Plane/Section View Command (on page 346).
 The view has been cropped. For more information, see Crop a Drawings by Rule 2D
Drawing View and the 3D Model Volume (on page 406).
 The view style, scale, orientation, or coordinate system have changed. For more
information, see View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog Box) (on page 277).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 414

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

 A primary plate object in the view has been spit or unsplit.

 The numbers of added, modified, or deleted objects are greater than a set percentage of the
total number of objects.
 The software does not allow incremental updates for the selected view type.

 An incremental update is usually faster than a full update, but still results in completely
up-to-date geometry for the view.
 The View Log command displays a log of the results from the last update performed on the
view with the Update or Full Update commands.
See Also
Drawings View Explorer (on page 256)

Run Update or Full Update

You run Update or Full Update after structure displayed in a view has been modified in other
tasks, such as Molded Forms or Structural Detailing.
1. Right-click a drawing document in the Drawing Console or the Detail View of the Drawings
and Reports task, and select Edit.
The drawing opens in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
2. If you know that objects in a view have changed, even if the view is still marked as
up-to-date in the Drawings View Explorer, right-click the view in the Drawings View
Explorer and select Update or Full Update.
A progress bar displays, detailing the update process.
You can update multiple views in the same sheet by selecting the sheet node or the
individual sheets.
1. If you do not know if objects in a view have changed:
 Right-click the view in the drawing area or the Drawings View Explorer, and select

Refresh. The view is marked out of date in the Drawings View Explorer if
objects have changed.
 Right-click the view in the Drawings View Explorer, and select Update or Full Update.
2. Optionally, right-click the view in the Drawings View Explorer, and select View Log to
check the results of the update.

Delete Views
Delete Views Placed by the Place View Command
1. Right-click a view placed by using Place View .
2. Select Delete.
The Delete Views dialog box displays.
3. Select Yes to delete the view permanently. To cancel the operation, click No.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 415

 Working with Drawings and Reports and SmartSketch Drawing Editor

Delete Views Placed by Rules

1. Right-click a view in Drawing View Explorer.
2. Select Delete.
The Delete Views dialog box displays.
3. Select Delete to delete the view permanently.

 The UnAssign option moves the view to the UnAssigned Folder. The Cancel option
cancels the operation.
 If you delete a view that is a parent of other views, such as a detail or section view, the
Convert or Delete dialog box displays. Select Convert to independent drawing
view(s) to save the child view as an independent drawing view, or select Delete to
delete the child view.

Delete Views from the UnAssigned Folder

1. Right-click a view from the UnAssigned Folder.
2. Select Delete.
The Delete Views dialog box displays.
3. Select Yes to delete the view permanently. To cancel the operation, click No.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 416

SECTION 20
Save as SmartPlant Review File
You can view your 3D Model Data in SmartPlant Review (SPR) even if your model has not been
registered using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard. When you create a 3D Model Data
component, you set it up to save as a SmartPlant Review file. This enables the Save As
SmartPlant Review command on the right-click menu for the 3D Model Data documents after
they are created and up-to-date.
The Save As SmartPlant Review command is not available if you setup the 3D Model Data
component to save to Disk Only or if you selected the Generate CAD output (.sat file) option
on the Setup dialog box.
Before you can use the Save As SmartPlant Review command, you must install the
SmartPlant Schema Component on the local client machine. For more information, see the
Intergraph SmartTM 3D Installation Guide, available from the Help > Printable Guides
command.
SPR shows the objects from the VUE file using global coordinates. Before you save the 3D
Model Data component documents as SmartPlant Review (SPR) files, right-click the component
and select Properties to check the Style tab Coordinate System property setting. You want to
make sure the Plant Monument Coordinate Offset is passed correctly to SPR when creating
the VUE file. The offset value allows you to see the original coordinates relative to the new SPR
coordinate system.
The 3D Model Data documents use surface styles and aspects as part of their property
definition so that they can be used in SPR. You set the properties at the 3D Model Data
document level. For more information, see Set surface styles and aspects for 3D model data
documents (on page 48).
The Save as SmartPlant Review command saves a 3D Model Data document as a SmartPlant
Review file. The file can then be viewed in SmartPlant Review. This command is available when
you right-click an up-to-date 3D Model Data document if it was setup to save as a SmartPlant
Review file. For more information, see Setup a 3D Model Data component (on page 191). The
Save As SmartPlant Review command is not available if you set up the 3D Model Data
component to save to Disk Only or if you selected the Generate CAD output (.sat file) option
on the Setup dialog box.
The command creates both a property data file in XML format and a graphics file in VUE format
(.vue).
For more information, see Save as SmartPlant Review Dialog Box (on page 419).

Recommendations for Exporting to SmartPlant Review

 The number of objects generated by a 3D Model Data component and exported successfully
to a SmartPlant Review file depends largely on the type of objects and your hardware
resources. The more objects in your file, the more processing time the software requires. It
is possible to have so many objects in the file that the software uses up all of the available
memory. Larger models can take hours to process, so batch updating is recommended.
 Monitor the error logs regularly for resource issues, even if the specified filter worked
initially. You can add more objects to the model meeting the filter criteria.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 417

 Save as SmartPlant Review File

 SmartPlant Review (SPR) version 6.1.0.15 (or higher) allows you to open multiple VUE files
simultaneously. Refer to your SmartPlant Review documentation for more information. When
you open VUE and XML files in SPR for the first time, SPR builds a database containing the
tag information for the files. This process may take a significant amount of time. After the
multiple VUE files are opened in SPR, you can create SVF files for future loading of VUE
files.
 SmartPlant Review (SPR) version 6.2.0.29 (or higher) supports turning Smart 3D aspects on
and off. All aspects are turned on by default in SPR. The SPRSchema.txt file can be
customized to add aspects.

 You can use SmartPlant Review to review each resulting model of Save as SmartPlant
Review action. However, you cannot review multiple models.
 Before you can use the Save as SmartPlant Review command, you must install
SmartPlant Schema Component on the local client machine. For more information, see the
Intergraph SmartTM 3D Installation Guide, available from the Help > Printable Guides
command.
 The Save as SmartPlant Review command also looks for the EFSchema file
(P3DComponent.xml). If your model has been registered using the SmartPlant Registration
Wizard, the software retrieves the file from the integrated environment. If your model has not
been registered using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, the software looks for the file in
the SharedContent share.
 You can publish .zvf files and launch SmartPlant Review to view the .zvf files. You can also
view the .zvf file using View and Markup if you have SmartPlant Markup Plus installed. You
do not have to use the Save as SmartPlant Review command to use the SmartPlant
Review features.
 The 3D View Control used for viewing the published graphics in SmartPlant Markup Plus
does not currently support turning aspects on and off.

Save 3D model data for SmartPlant Review

Before you can use the Save as SmartPlant Review command, you must install the SmartPlant
Schema Component on the local client machine. For more information, see the Intergraph
SmartTM 3D Installation Guide, available from the Help > Printable Guides command. The
Save as SmartPlant Review command also looks for the EFSchema file (P3DComponent.xml).
If your model has been registered using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, the software
retrieves the file from the integrated environment. If your model has not been registered using
the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, the software looks for the file in the SharedContent share.
The Save as SmartPlant Review command is available on the right-click menu for the 3D
Model Data documents when they are set up to save as a SmartPlant Review file. For more
information, see Setup a 3D Model Data component (on page 191).

Recommendations for Exporting to SmartPlant Review

 The number of objects generated by a 3D Model Data component and exported successfully
to a SmartPlant Review file depends largely on the type of objects and your hardware
resources. We recommend you limit each 3D Model Data component filter to approximately
30,000 objects if using Smart 3D version 6.1 Service Pack 1 or later (approximately 20,000
objects is using an earlier version).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 418

 Save as SmartPlant Review File

 Monitor the error logs regularly for resource issues, even if the specified filter worked
initially. You can add more objects to the model meeting the filter criteria.
 SmartPlant Review (SPR) version 6.1.0.15 (or higher) allows you to open multiple VUE files
simultaneously. Refer to your SmartPlant Review documentation for more information. When
you open VUE and XML files in SPR for the first time, SPR builds a database containing the
tag information for the files. This process may take a significant amount of time. After the
multiple VUE files are opened in SPR, you can create SVF files for future loading of VUE
files.
 SmartPlant Review (SPR) version 6.2.0.29 (or higher) supports turning Smart 3D aspects on
and off. All aspects are turned on by default in SPR. The SPRSchema.txt file can be
customized to add aspects.
The 3D View Control used for viewing the published graphics in SmartPlant Markup
Plus does not currently support turning aspects on and off.
1. Before you save your 3D Model Data component documents as SmartPlant Review files,
right-click the component and select Properties and go to the Style tab to make sure the
Coordinate System property is set appropriately so that the Plant Monument Coordinate
Offset is passed correctly to SPR when creating the VUE file. This is because SPR shows
the objects from the VUE file using global coordinates. The offset value allows you to see
the original coordinates relative to the new SPR coordinate system. For more information on
3D Model Data components, see 3D Model Data (on page 188). For information on saving
to SPR, see Save as SmartPlant Review File (on page 417).
2. You should also make sure that the Surface Styles and Aspects properties are set
correctly on the 3D Model Data documents before saving them for viewing in SmartPlant
Review.
Set surface styles and aspects for 3D model data documents (on page 48)
3. Right-click an up-to-date 3D Model Data document and select Save As SmartPlant
Review.
4. On the Save as SmartPlant Review dialog box, specify a property data file. This file will be
an XML format file.
5. Specify a graphics file. This file will be a VUE format file (.vue).
6. Click OK save the SmartPlant Review files to the specified names and locations.

Save as SmartPlant Review Dialog Box

Specifies the files needed to save documents for viewing in SmartPlant Review.
You can publish .zvf files and launch SmartPlant Review to view the .zvf files. You
can also view the .zvf file using View and Markup if you have SmartPlant Markup Plus installed.
You do not have to use the Save as SmartPlant Review command to use the SmartPlant
Review features.
Data file
Specifies the XML file that contains all the objects and property data that the application
publishes for viewing and that meet the filter query specified for the 3D Model Data
component. For more information on the property data that is published, see The Integration
Reference Guide located in Help > Printable Guides.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 419

 Save as SmartPlant Review File

Graphics file
Specifies the VUE file (.vue) to which the document graphics are saved. This is the file you
would select in SmartPlant Review with the File > Open command.
You can browse for either file using the ellipsis button next to the field.
See Also
Save as SmartPlant Review File (on page 417)
Save 3D model data for SmartPlant Review (on page 418)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 420

SECTION 21
Revising
The document revision process is separate from the publishing process, making it possible to
revise a document locally and save it to the database without re-publishing it. The Revise
command is available on the right-click menu for drawings, reports, and 3D Model Data
documents. In an integrated environment, all revisions are handled by SmartPlant Foundation.
Revising and publishing are two separate actions. You specify the document revision using the
Revise command, which creates a Revision for the document with Major and Minor set,
depending on the revision schema selected. If you are working in an integrated environment,
you can modify the other revision information on the document.
After setting the revision number, right-click the document and select Properties. Select the
Revision tab and edit the Revision fields. You should update documents to include any new
title block information.
You can now re-publish the document with the new revision information.

 You can use the Revise command if your model has been registered using the SmartPlant
Registration Wizard. For more information on registering, see the Project Management
User's Guide under Help > Printable Guides.
 If the drawing document that you are looking at in the Detail View has a yellow icon (for
example: ), the drawing document is a version 6.1 legacy Snapshot drawing. You should
use the Tools > Convert Legacy Snapshots command to convert this document to a
Composed Drawing for use in the current version of the software. If you do not convert the
legacy snapshot drawing, you cannot perform edit operations on the drawing, including
update, revise, and publish.
See Also
Publishing Documents (on page 424)
Revise (on page 421)
Revise a document (on page 422)
Convert Legacy Snapshots (on page 240)

Revise
Revising and publishing are two separate actions. You specify the document revision using the
Revise command, which creates a Revision for the document with Major and Minor set,
depending on the revision schema selected. If you are working in an integrated environment,
you cannot modify the Major and Minor revision data, but you can modify the other revision
information on the document.
After reserving the revision number, right-click the document and select Properties. Select the
Revision tab and edit the Revision fields. You should update documents to include any new
title block information.
You can now re-publish the document with the new revision information.
Revise Dialog Box (on page 422)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 421

 Revising

You can use the Revise command if you have registered your model using the
SmartPlant Registration Wizard. For more information on registering, see the Project
Management User's Guide under Help > Printable Guides.

Revise a document
You can revise drawings, reports, and 3D Model Data documents if you have registered your
model using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard. For more information about using the
SmartPlant Registration Wizard, see the Project Management User's Guide under Help >
Printable Guides.
1. Right-click a document and select Revise. The Revise dialog box displays.

 You can also multi-select documents in the Detail View, or you can select a folder in the
Management Console hierarchy to select all of the documents within the folder if they
all have the same revision level.
 If the Revise command is not available on the shortcut menu, check the properties on
the document. Right-click the document and select Properties. Go to the WBS tab and
make sure that you have a Document type and Discipline set for the document. For
more information, see Set properties for publishing documents (on page 428).
2. For a new document or a document that does not yet have a defined revision scheme,
select the revision scheme that you want to use from the Revision Scheme list.
Only revision schemes that are applicable to the configuration (plant) or
classification (document type) are available in the shortcut menu. The revision schemes
related to a configuration or classification are not available for any other configurations or
classifications. If none of the revision schemes are related to the configuration or
classification, then all revision schemes are available unless they are related to any other
configuration or classification. For more information on revision scheme configuration, see
Configuring Different Revision Scheme Strategies in the How to Configure Document
Management guide.
3. In the Revise in Tool section, select the next available major and minor revision numbers.
4. Click OK. The document is saved to the model database. The command creates a revision
record by adding it to the document Revision properties. The command also reserves the
revision number.
5. Right-click the document and select Properties.
6. Go to the Revision tab and edit the values in the new revision row.
7. Update the document to update any document property title block information. For more
information, see Updating Documents (on page 78).
8. Re-publish the document. The stored document is not updated until you publish it.

Revise Dialog Box

Allows you to revise a document in the database of the authoring tool without publishing it.
Fields with a shaded background are read-only fields and cannot be edited.
Selected documents
Displays a list of the documents selected to be revised or for which you want to reserve a

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 422

 Revising

set of revision numbers. You populate this list by selecting documents before you use the
Revise command.
Engineering Tool
Opens an authoring tool-specific dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to
the Selected documents list. This option is not available in Smart 3D.
Revision Scheme
If you have selected a new document or a document for which no revision scheme has been
selected, choose the revision scheme to be applied from the list of available options. Only
revision schemes that are applicable to the configuration (plant) or classification (document
type) are available in the shortcut menu. The revision schemes related to a configuration or
classification are not available for any other configurations or classifications. If none of the
revision schemes are related to the configuration or classification, then all revision schemes
are available unless they are related to any other configuration or classification. For more
information on revision scheme configuration, see Configuring Different Revision Scheme
Strategies in the How to Configure Document Management guide.
Current Revision in Tool Major
For existing documents, this field displays the current major revision of the document, as
defined in the authoring tool, in a read-only format. For new documents, this field is empty.
Current Revision in Tool Minor
For existing documents, this field displays the current minor revision of the document, as
defined in the authoring tool, in a read-only format. If the revision scheme does not use
minor revision, or if the selected document has not yet been revised, this field is empty.
Revise in Tool Major
From this list box, choose the next available major revision number for the document to
revise it locally, without publishing the new information. If you do not want to revise the
document at this time, in other words, if you want to reserve revisions numbers without
revising the document, leave this field empty.
Revise in Tool Minor
From this list box, choose the next available minor revision number for the document to
revise it locally, without publishing the new information. If you do not want to revise the
document at this time, in other words, if you want to reserve revisions numbers without
revising the document, leave this field empty. If minor revisions are not supported for the
document, no options are available in this list.
If you do not use the Minor field when revising a document for the first
time, the minor revision option will never be available for that document for future revisions.
Next Major
Updates the document revision to the next major revision.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 423

SECTION 22
Publishing Documents
When you work in an integrated environment with SmartPlant Enterprise, you must publish
documents containing the drawing data and relationships before other authoring tools can share
this information. You can publish your documents from the Drawings and Reports task
Management Console or from a 3D modeling task by using the Tools > Drawings Console
command.
Before you can publish documents in the software, you must install the SmartPlant Client and
the SmartPlant Schema Component, then register the model using the SmartPlant Registration
Wizard.
In a 3D task, you can use SmartPlant > Retrieve to create and update the Design Basis
objects.
The software allows you to publish modified and new objects with the Changes Only option.
Publish tasks processed through the Changes Only workflow are smaller compared to All
publishes, and are queued to Load and Consolidate before the merge operation. The merge
operation combines the delta data with the previous complete publish data. After the merge
operation succeeds, the information is retrievable. The Changes Only publishes are not
retrievable. To retrieve a Changes Only publish, you must perform an All publish, which only
happens after the load and consolidate processes.
The Publish and Update and Publish commands are available for the following document
types:
 3D Model Data (SmartPlant Review file type)
The 3D Model Data component is capable of publishing many object types (for
example: Piping, Equipment, Cable Trays) depending on the definition of the filter during
component setup.
 Orthographic Drawings (viewable file with links to data)
 Isogen Isometric Drawings (viewable file with links to data)
The software supports publishing additional files (for example: PCF, POD) along
with the SHA drawing. For more information, see Enterprise Data in the Isometric Drawing
Options Reference Guide. You can access this document using the Help > Printable
Guides command in the software.
 Reports (viewable file with links to data)

 The viewable files created when you publish drawings and reports provide relationship links
to the 3D Model Data. You must also publish the 3D Model Data to provide the navigation
between the viewable files and the 3D Model Data.
 The Publish > Update and Publish command updates and then immediately publishes the
selected documents in one step. This command is available only if the model is registered
with SmartPlant Foundation.
 For a list of common tasks related to publishing, see Publish Common Tasks (on page 426).

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 424

 Publishing Documents

 If you are publishing 3D Model Data documents, set the surface style rules and aspects
before publishing the documents.
 Every time you generate drawings and reports from Smart 3D in an integrated environment,
a SmartPlant Foundation token is used.
When you publish documents, the software:
 Publishes a visual representation of the document that you can view without Smart 3D. For
drawings, this is an Intergraph proprietary file, called a RAD file (.sha). For reports, the
viewable file is a Microsoft Excel workbook. You can review and mark up the visual
representation of the document using SmartPlant Markup Plus or SmartSketch.
 Places the published XML file and any viewable files in the appropriate SmartPlant
Foundation vault. This XML file can be retrieved when you are in other authoring tools.

Reasons to Publish
You publish documents and associated data for several reasons:
 Exchanging of data with other tools
 Sharing common data between tools
 Providing enterprise-wide accessibility to published documents
 Managing change, including workflow history, document revisions, and title block
information

Revisions and Versions of Published Documents

The first time that you publish a document, the software creates a new document master and
the first revision. A revision (major) is an officially recognized change to a document. A version
(minor) is an intermediate update that you have published. Revisions can be published for
sharing or they can go through an approval process, depending on your needs. Each revisions
of a document can have multiple versions.
You can also include revision information within the title block of a drawing by placing drawing
property labels within the drawing template.
When you publish data from any authoring tool, you may not be able to view all of the
properties that you published in the SmartPlant Client. You can customize view definitions to
allow you to see additional properties. For more information on defining view definitions in the
SmartPlant schema, see the SmartPlant Schema Editor User's Guide. For further assistance
with viewing data, contact Intergraph Support Services. You can find support information on our
web site, http://support.intergraph.com (http://support.intergraph.com/).

Publishing Title Blocks

The title block is generally displayed at the bottom of a drawing template. It can include
signatures, revision and issue information, and other properties associated with the drawing.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 425

 Publishing Documents

You add drawing properties, such as revision information or issue requests, to the title block
using the Place Drawing Property Label command when editing a template.
When you update the revision information or receive an issue request on a drawing document,
the associated properties must be updated. You update the drawing document to incorporate
the property changes for any drawing property labels included in the title block.
After you update the drawing document, you can re-publish it and the appropriate title block
information is recorded in SmartPlant Foundation. Publishing your drawing document helps you
manage the changes, including workflow history, document revisions, and title block information.
The general workflow for including information in the drawing title block is:
1. Edit a template and include drawing property labels for revision or issue request - Place a
Drawing Property Label on a Template (on page 393).
2. Create drawing documents using the template.
3. Publish the drawings - Publish documents (on page 431).
4. Revise the drawing document or receive an issue request from SmartPlant Foundation -
Revise a document (on page 422) or Issue request documents (on page 434).
5. Update the drawing documents to include the new revision, issue, or other drawing property
information in the title block.
See Also
Delivered Drawing Types (on page 21)
Publishing Documents (on page 424)
Updating Documents (on page 78)

Publish Common Tasks

The following tasks are used to publish documents. If the documents are drawings or reports,
the Publish command publishes a viewable file with links to the data. If publishing a 3D Model
Data document, the software creates a SmartPlant Review file and publishes it.
The viewable files created when you publish drawings and reports provide
relationship links to the 3D Model Data. You must also publish the 3D Model Data to provide the
navigation between the viewable files and the 3D Model Data.

Setting Properties for Publishing

 Before using the Publish command, you should set certain properties on your documents.
If you are publishing 3D Model Data documents, set the surface style rules and aspects as
needed before publishing.

Creating and Reserving Revision Numbers

You should create your documents by right-clicking them and selecting Create Document(s).
After they are created, if you require revision numbers for the documents, use the Revise
command to reserve the revision numbers.

Update the Documents

Update the documents, right-click the component and select the appropriate Update command.
You can also use Batch > Update if you are configured to use a batch server.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 426

 Publishing Documents

Publish Data
If you have registered your model using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, you can publish
your documents for retrieval and use in other tools. You can use the Publish > Update and
Publish command to update drawings and publish them in one step. You can also use the
SmartPlant > Find Documents to Publish command to generate a list of documents that need
to be published and to publish terminations for deleted drawings, isos, and so on.

Publish
Publishes the information in the selected documents. You can access the Publish Documents
command by right- clicking a component or document.
The Publish and Update and Publish commands are available for the following types of
documents:
 3D Model Data (SmartPlant Review file type)
 Orthographic Drawings, including Volume and Composed drawings (viewable file with links
to data)
 Isogen Isometric Drawings (viewable file with links to data)
 Reports (viewable Microsoft Excel workbook file with links to data)

 The viewable files created when you publish drawings and reports provide relationship links
to the 3D Model Data. You must also publish the 3D Model Data to provide the navigation
between the viewable files and the 3D Model Data.
 The Publish > Update and Publish command updates and then immediately publishes the
selected documents in one step. This command is available only if the model is registered
with SmartPlant Foundation.
When you publish a 3D model, you must now enable the Scheduler and
Loader in SmartPlant Foundation to make the 3D model data document retrievable. The load,
consolidate, and merge tasks must complete successfully before the 3D model document can
be retrieved.
Define the Discipline and Document Type properties to enable publishing for the documents.
For more information see Set properties for publishing documents (on page 428).
For 3D model data, the Discipline and Document Type properties are already
populated.
You may also want to specify documents to be revised, not published, or reserve revision
numbers. For more information, see Revising (on page 421).
To generate a list of documents that need to be published, you can use SmartPlant > Find
Documents to Publish. For more information, see Find Documents to Publish (on page 441).
You can publish isometric drawings to SmartPlant Foundation in additional file formats other
than the SHA drawing file format. These additional files along with the SHA drawing are
generated by the update process. When publishing isometric drawings you can also publish
other available data files and reports generated by the update process. For more information,
see Published Files (S3D Supplementary).
Publish Dialog Box (on page 435)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 427

 Publishing Documents

Set properties for publishing documents

1. In the Console, right-click an item in the hierarchy, then select Properties on the shortcut
menu.
2. Go to the WBS Tab.
3. Set the Document Type property as needed, such as Civil Plan. This property specifies the
document subtype when published.
4. Set the Document Style property as needed, such as Ortho for an orthographic drawing.
5. Set the Discipline property. If your model has been registered using the SmartPlant
Registration Wizard, this property adds the Publish command to the right-click menu for the
selected document or documents. For a 3D Model Data document, the property is set to
SmartPlant Review Document. For a drawing or report document, set the discipline to
match the type of document.
6. Set the Allow Publish property to Yes.

 If you do not want an item to acquire a property from its parent, select the Override column
on the Properties dialog box, then type a new value. This value propagates to other items
deeper in the hierarchy.
 The software treats blank or cleared property values as overrides.
 Before you can publish documents, you must:
 Install the SmartPlant Client and the SmartPlant Schema Component.
 Register your model using the SmartPlant Registration Wizard.
 Revise and update each document.
For more information about configuration, see the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Installation Guide,
available from Help > Printable Guides.

Support for Handling Large Publishes

The number of objects published from Smart 3D can become so large that the normal update
and publish processing uses up the resources such as memory and address space on the client
and server computers. To address these resource issues, Smart 3D now supports the concept
of using a cache to keep track of objects that have changed and to only publish these objects.
Thus, the software avoids processing objects that have not changed. The mechanisms for doing
this are called parallel update, delta publish, and auto-scoping. These processes are not visible
to the user.
 Parallel update - Updates all the objects. The update process determines the number of
processors on the system and uses this information to partition the objects so that multiple
updates can happen at the same time. Because the updates are happening in parallel, the
system can update a larger number of objects faster.
 Delta publish - Leverages the cached information provided by parallel update to determine
which objects must be published. Because only changes are published, you can produce
larger files in the data warehouse.
Because the complete set of objects will not be published each time, it is up to Smart 3D to
keep track of deleted and moved objects. These moved or deleted objects will be sent with

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 428

 Publishing Documents

the published objects, eliminating the need to probe the adapter for the existence of missing
objects.
When you publish a 3D model, you must now enable the Scheduler and
Loader in SmartPlant Foundation to make the 3D model data document retrievable. The
load, consolidate, and merge tasks must complete successfully before the 3D model
document can be retrieved.
Both parallel update and delta publish can publish larger documents by automatically splitting
the data into smaller sections in Smart 3D. If your publish data is split into smaller sections, the
document version number increments for each section.
For example, if you publish a document that is split into four smaller sections, the Version field
contains all resulting version numbers. In the following dialog box, the published documents are
published to SmartPlant Foundation as 4 different versions (11-14). The last version contains all
of the updated information from the publish.

Published Documents - Load, Consolidated, and MergeDelta

Tasks (S3D)
A tool published document results in a document version object in SmartPlant Foundation. A
document version has four files attached to it.
1. Data XML file – Contains published objects, relationships and correlations (SameAs
relationships).
2. Meta data XML file – Contains meta data about the published document version.
3. Instructions XML file – Contains instructions for deleted objects and relationships. Also
contains resurrect instructions for objects that were deleted previously and resurrected as a
result of restoring a tool database.
4. View file – This is a file in the tool format that represents the (graphical) view of the
published document.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 429

 Publishing Documents

When a document is submitted to a workflow that has a load process step, the following tasks
are created.
If the document is not published to such a workflow, and when the Load document
command in SmartPlant Foundation Desktop Client is run on the published document, the same
tasks are created.
 Load Task - This task processes the objects and relationships in the data XML by loading
them into a publish domain. This task also processes the instructions in an Instructions XML
file. For example, the delete instruction would result in termination of the object referenced in
the delete instruction.
 Consolidate Task - This task processes the correlations (SameAs relationships) in the data
XML file. A SameAs is a correlation relationship published by tools indicating that a
published object is identical to an object published by another tool. The correlation of the
object in the current publish domain (say, local object) to the external object (object
published by another tool in another publish domain) is done by creating a shared object in
the Data Warehouse domain. The local and external objects are linked through
SPFComprisedOf relationships; for example, one SPFComprisedOf relationship between the
local object and the shared object, and a second SPFComprisedOf relationship between the
external object and the shared object.
An object that is not correlated also has a shared object created in the Data
Warehouse domain in preparation for future correlation.
The consolidate task also creates a hidden file, known as graphical mapping file, which has
mappings between objects in the database and graphical elements in the view file. This file
is used by SmartPlant Foundation Desktop Client for navigation between published objects
in the list view and their graphical representations in the view file.
 MergeDelta Task - This is a task created for delta publishes of Smart 3D. A delta publish
contains new, modified and deleted objects in a document since the last publish of that
document. Only Smart 3D has the capability to do a delta publish. Other tools publish full
data where every object is published whether it is modified or not since last publish.
Because a delta published data XML file and view file only contains the delta, it is required
that it becomes a full data XML and full view file for complete view of the data and graphics
of that document. The MergeDelta task converts the delta data XML file into a full XML file
by merging data from the previous full XML file into the delta XML file.
When you publish a 3D model, you must enable the Scheduler and
Loader to make the 3D model data document retrievable. The load, consolidate, and merge
tasks must complete successfully before the 3D model document can be retrieved. For more
information, see Schedulers and Queue Management.
If you are using SmartPlant Basic Integrator, only the merge task must
complete successfully before the 3D model document can be retrieved. For more
information, see Schedulers and Queue Management.
The merge involves the following:
a. Replace modified objects and relationships in the full publish XML, view file, and the
hidden graphic map file.
b. Delete objects and relationships that are identified in the delete, and move instructions
in the delta instructions XML file, view file, and the hidden graphic map file.
c. Add new objects and relationships to the full publish XML, view file, hidden graphic map
file.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 430

 Publishing Documents

d. Replaces the delta XML file in the vault with the updated full publish XML file, view file,
and the hidden graphic map file.

Set SmartPlant Foundation to Tolerate Failed Loads

For working in any integrated environment, a new site configuration flag in SmartPlant
Foundation Server Manager allows the SmartPlant Foundation Loader to skip a published
document that failed during load and continue processing other documents in the queue.
In SmartPlant Foundation Server Manager, set the SkipFailedDocumentsInLoad flag to True
to allow failed documents to be skipped and other documents to continue processing. Typical
behavior is that after a document is successfully loaded, any previous failed document is
removed from the queue.
The behavior during a Smart 3D publish is different. If any Smart 3D publish, either a full publish
or delta publish, fails to load, the failed versions remain in the load queue until a full publish
successfully loads. If a delta publish loads successfully following these failures, it does not
remove any previous failed version from the queue because the data in delta publishes is
different from version to version, so a failed previous version needs to stay in the queue until
you resolve the failure or a full publish is loaded. A second reason is this gives an indication to
you that a full publish is needed. When a full publish is loaded, all failed delta publishes are
removed from the queue.

Publish documents
Before you can publish documents, you must ensure that your computer is configured properly.
The configuration includes installing the SmartPlant Client and the SmartPlant Schema
Component and registering the model through the SmartPlant Registration Wizard.
You must use the SmartPlant > Retrieve command in one of the 3D tasks to import published
data.
When you publish a 3D model, you must now enable the Scheduler and
Loader in SmartPlant Foundation to make the 3D model data document retrievable. The load,
consolidate, and merge tasks must complete successfully before the 3D model document can
be retrieved.
The SmartPlant menu is not available in all tasks.
1. Right-click a component and select Publish. The Publish dialog box displays.

 If the Publish command is not available on the shortcut menu for the component or
document, check the document properties and make sure that the documents are
up-to-date and have been revised first.
 You can use the Publish > Update and Publish command to update drawings and
publish them in one step. This command is available only if the model is registered with
SmartPlant Foundation.
2. Edit information as necessary for the selected documents.
When multiple documents are selected, only property values shared by all of the selected
documents display in the table. Changing a value in the table changes that value for all of
the selected documents.
3. Select the Publish Type.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 431

 Publishing Documents

 Smart 3D supports Publish Type for delta publish.

 The default setting for Publish Type is Changes Only. If the 3D model has not
been published before, the software automatically selects All and performs a
complete publish to ensure all filtered data is published and loaded into SmartPlant
Foundation.
 For subsequent publishes, select All to publish all filtered data in the 3D model,
even if it is unchanged. Select Changes Only to publish only the changes in the 3D
model since the last successful publish.
 If the 3D model does not publish successfully during a delta publish, select All so
that data from the previous publish is published and loaded into SmartPlant
Foundation.
 Other SmartPlant applications do not support Publish Type. For these SmartPlant
applications, the default setting for Publish Type is All, and it cannot be changed.
4. Select one of the following operations:
 Publish to publish the selected documents immediately.
 Background publish to publish as a separate process so that you can continue
working in the application.
 Scheduled publish to publish in the batch mode by the authoring tool. The documents
are not published immediately. Instead, the selected documents are scheduled for
publish at a later time and may be scheduled as a recurring operation.
5. Click OK to publish the selected documents.

 You can verify the publishing process by starting the SmartPlant Client on your computer
and searching for the published document.
 When publish is complete, the following message displays: Documents have been
published successfully. If the View Log button is enabled, messages are available
concerning the operation. These messages include errors, warning, and informational
messages. Click View Log to review these messages.

Publish Workflows
When a SmartPlant application publishes, the user can publish documents using a workflow.
The following list describes the delivered publish workflows and use cases for the workflows.

Workflow Workflow Description Workflow Use Cases

Auto-Correlate Compares the objects in a Use Auto-correlate

published document to the objects
that are already in SmartPlant  When a publishing tool does not
have correlation functionality.
Foundation. If the object correlates
(by name) to an object with the  When a publishing tool does not
same shared object definition, retrieve.
SmartPlant Foundation
automatically correlates the objects.
 When using SmartPlant
Foundation to perform
If the object can correlate to more
consistency checking and the

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 432

 Publishing Documents

Workflow Workflow Description Workflow Use Cases

than one object through multiple authoring applications do not
shared object definitions, a task is retrieve.
placed in the To Do list to allow the
 When Shared Objects To
user to select the correlation. Correlate option is used to
configure which types of objects
are auto-correlated.

AutoLoadPublish Generates a document load task Use AutoLoadPublish when you

and consolidate task for the intend to load the published
publishing document. These tasks document data into SmartPlant
are performed by the SmartPlant Foundation.
Foundation Scheduler.

AutoLoadPublish Publish large 3D models. Creates Use AutoLoadPublishMerge when

Merge the published 3D document, loads you intend to view or navigate
the 3D data in SmartPlant multiple 3D models as one
Foundation, then merges these composite 3D model document in
object sets into a new composite one 3D view.
document that represents the entire
3D model.

Correlate Places published objects with Correlate works similar to

possible correlations in the To Do Auto-Correlate except you can view
list. From the To Do list, the user the possible correlations before the
manually correlates selected items. actual correlation takes place.
SmartPlant Foundation creates a
shared object.

Publish Takes the document through an Use Publish when you want the
approval step. Upon approval, it published document approved
creates the document load and before it is loaded into SmartPlant
consolidate tasks. Foundation. The approval step is
added to the To Do list.

PublishWithDocL Loads document into a document Use PublishWithDocLoad when you

oad configuration and submits want to view the document data in
document to approval step. Upon SmartPlant Foundation before
approval, it creates document the approval. The approval step is added
load and consolidate tasks. to the To Do list.

PublishForLoadO Generates a document load task Use PublishForLoadOnly when you

nly and consolidate task for the want to publish documents to view,
publishing document and makes the navigate and also for consistency
documents irretrievable by any tool. checking in SmartPlant Foundation
These tasks are performed by the without the possibility of the
SmartPlant Foundation Scheduler. document being retrieved by any
tool.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 433

 Publishing Documents

Publish a large 3D model to SmartPlant Foundation

Publishing large 3D models to SmartPlant Foundation has reached memory and file transfer
limitations. To make publishing 3D models more efficient, you can publish models in distinct
object sets that accommodate your memory resources. Distinct object sets mean that an object
in the 3D model must appear in only one published model. You publish these object sets using a
workflow called AutoLoadPublishWithMerge. This workflow has MergePublishedFile process
step configured. This workflow creates the published 3D document, loads the 3D data in
SmartPlant Foundation, then merges these object sets into a new composite document that
represents the entire 3D model. The name of the composite document is same as the name of
the workflow to which the Published 3D model is submitted. If you have existing published 3D
models in SmartPlant Foundation and want to merge these into one representative model
document, you can create a 3D composite document manually, and then relate the published
models to the document.
1. Create filters for segregating and selecting data that will be in the published model
documents. For example, you can create filters for equipment, piping, structural, and HVAC.
2. In the Drawings and Reports task, create your separate model documents.
3. Publish each model document separately.
The software publishes a new version of the 3D document, for example, a model
document called Equipment-1-001, to SmartPlant Foundation. This document is related to
AutoLoadPublishWithMerge, a zvf file, and a mapping file.
4. On the Publish tab on the Publish dialog box, select the AutoLoadPublishWithMerge
from the Workflow list.

Issue request documents

Before you can publish documents, you must ensure that your computer is configured properly.
The configuration includes installing the SmartPlant Client and the SmartPlant Schema
Component and registering the model with the SmartPlant Registration Wizard. For more
information, see the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Installation Guide available from Help > Printable
Guides. For more information on the steps involving the SmartPlant Foundation Desktop Client,
see the SmartPlant Foundation Desktop Client User's Guide.
This functionality is only available in project mode. It is not supported in integration
mode.
You must use the SmartPlant > Retrieve command in the Common task to import published
data.
1. Right-click a component and select Publish. The Publish dialog box displays.
If the Publish command is not available on the shortcut menu for the component
or document, check the document properties and make sure that the documents are
up-to-date. For more information, see Set properties for publishing documents (on page
428).
2. Click the Issue Request tab.
3. In the Issue to field, select the contract that you want to assign the document or documents.
4. Under Selected documents, select the documents that you want to associate with the
specified contract.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 434

 Publishing Documents

5. Click Add to add the documents to the Issue Request list. To remove documents from the
list, select them and click Remove. Click Engineering Tools to add documents from
engineering tools, such as P&IDs or PFDs. Click File System to add documents from
another file system, such as Microsoft Word documents or Microsoft Excel workbooks.
6. Click OK to issue the contract request for the selected documents.
7. Start SmartPlant Foundation Desktop Client on your computer and search for the published
document to verify the publishing process.
8. Right-click the document in the Desktop Client tree view and select Refresh.
9. Return to the Drawings and Reports task and update the document to incorporate the new
Issue information. For more information, see Updating Documents (on page 78).
10. Review the Issue properties. Right-click the document and select Properties. Select the
Issue tab to see the Issue information. You can also open the document to see the Issue
information in the title block if you added it.
11. Publish the document with the updated Issue information. For more information, see
Publishing Documents (on page 424).

 Only updated documents can be published.

 You can verify the publishing process by starting the SmartPlant Client on your computer
and searching for the published document.
See Also
Find Documents to Publish (on page 441)
Publish (on page 427)
Publish documents (on page 431)
Publishing Title Blocks (on page 425)

Publish Dialog Box

Provides a list of documents selected to publish.
Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box) (on page 435)
Issue Request Tab (Publish Dialog Box) (on page 439)
See Also
Publish documents (on page 431)
Find Documents to Publish (on page 441)
Publish (on page 427)
Document Properties Dialog Box (on page 440)

Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box)

Displays the properties of the selected document or documents. If only one document is
selected in the tree view, the properties displayed on this tab are the properties of that one
document. If multiple documents are selected, only the properties with the same value for all
documents display. Any properties with varying values across the documents display with blank
values in these fields.
You can change some of the values assigned to one or more documents by changing the value
displayed in the table. The value you type here overrides any existing values for all selected
documents.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 435

 Publishing Documents

Selected documents
Displays a list of the documents selected for publishing. You must populate this list by
selecting documents in the Management Console or Detail View before you use the
Publish command. For each document, this list displays the name, the type of document,
the workflow from which the document was last published, the revision and version
numbers, the revision scheme, and the date when the document was last published.
Engineering Tool
Opens a dialog box to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. This
functionality is not available in the current release.
File System
Opens a standard Microsoft dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the
Selected documents list. When you select a file with this Select File dialog box, the
Document Properties dialog box displays, allowing you to specify information about the
file, such as whether it is a new file; the category, type, and subtype of the document; and
the name, description, and title of the document.
Find
Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box, which allows you to search for
documents to add to the Selected documents list. For more information, see Find
Documents to Publish Dialog Box (on page 442).
Last Published
Indicates the date on which the document or documents were last published.
Name
Displays the name of the document.
Source
Indicates the authoring tool in which the document was created.
Type
Displays the type of document or documents selected.
Comment
Allows you to type information about the selected documents that are publishable.
Issue Only
Allows you to issue request documents without, necessarily, republishing them. Use this
option when no changes were made to a drawing and you only want to add it to a contract.

 Even with this option set, you can still publish the documents. If any of the documents
have never been published, they must be published, regardless of this setting.
 You will receive an error message if you select multiple documents and activate this
option when one or more of the selected documents cannot be changed. For example,
the error message displays if the selected set of documents includes both a new
document (for which this field can be set only to No) and current or locked documents
(for which this field can be set only to Yes). The error message prompts you to select a
smaller set of documents.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 436

 Publishing Documents

Owning Group
Select an owning group from the drop down list to which the document belongs.

 By default, the owning group selected for the previous version, if any, is shown.
 All the owning groups configured in SmartPlant Foundation are listed.
Revision
Displays the current revision number of the selected document or documents.
You will receive an error message if you attempt to change the value in this field
when you have selected one or more documents that have conflicting revision schemes or
different possible revisions. The error message prompts you to select a smaller set of
documents.
Revision Scheme
Displays the revision scheme applied to the selected document or documents.
Only revision schemes that are applicable to the configuration (plant) or
classification (document type) are available in the shortcut menu. The revision schemes
related to a configuration or classification are not available for any other configurations or
classifications. If none of the revision schemes are related to the configuration or
classification, then all revision schemes are available unless they are related to any other
configuration or classification. For more information on revision scheme configuration, see
Configuring Different Revision Scheme Strategies in the How to Configure Document
Management guide.
You will receive an error message indicating that this field cannot be edited if one or
more of the documents that you have selected are not new or will have a revision scheme
supplied by the authoring tool. The error message prompts you to select a smaller set of
documents.
Version
Indicates the current version of the document or documents.
Workflow
Indicates the workflow to which the selected document or documents are assigned.
Publish Type
Allows you to publish all data in a 3D model or only the changes to the model since the last
successful publish. If the 3D model has not been published before, the software
automatically selects All and performs a complete publish to ensure all filtered data is
published and loaded into SmartPlant Foundation.

Publishing documents Publish Type

All Changes Only

First publish after creating the document All objects All objects

Subsequent publish with no changes to the model All objects No objects

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 437

 Publishing Documents

Publishing documents Publish Type

Subsequent publish with changes to the model All objects Changed objects

Subsequent publish with no changes to the model All objects No objects

(after changing the Publish Type)

Subsequent publish with changes to the model All objects Changed objects
(after changing the Publish Type)

You will receive an error message indicating that this field cannot be edited if one or
more of the documents that you have selected have conflicting sets of possible workflows.
The error message prompts you to select a smaller set of documents.
Check and publish released claims for previously deleted items
Specifies that you want to resolve issues where deleted items were restored from an earlier
version and the claim on them was released. This check takes additional time and should
only be used when deleted items have been restored. This option is not supported in this
release.
This check box should also be activated when publishing after a backup is restored
or when releasing the claim on an object forces another tool to release the claim on a
related object that was previously deleted. In this specific case, the tool fetches the object
from As-Built again and releases the claim.
Operation
Specifies the operation to perform on the selected documents.
 Publish - Selected documents are published immediately.
 Background publish - Selected documents are published immediately as a separate
process, allowing you to perform other tasks at the same time.
 Scheduled publish - Selected documents are published in the batch mode by the
authoring tool. This option is available only for tools that support batch mode and are
processed by the authoring tool, not the SmartPlant Client. The documents are not
published immediately. Instead, the selected documents are scheduled for publish at a
later time and may be scheduled as a recurring operation.
If the software cannot make a SmartPlant Foundation server connection
when you use Scheduled Publish, you are prompted to provide a valid SmartPlant
Foundation login and password.
Custom
Opens the Custom dialog box. This functionality is available only if defined by your project
implementation team.
Check for deleted objects no longer on documents
Select Check for deleted objects no longer on documents option if you want to process
the move instructions while publishing.
See Also
Publish documents (on page 431)
Find Documents to Publish (on page 441)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 438

 Publishing Documents

Publish (on page 427)

Document Properties Dialog Box (on page 440)

Issue Request Tab (Publish Dialog Box)

Displays the documents associated with a specific issue request and allows you to add
documents to or remove documents from a request.
Selected documents
Displays a list of the documents selected for publishing. You must populate this list by
selecting documents in the Management Console or Detail View before you use the
Publish command. For each document, this list displays the name, the type of document,
the workflow from which the document was last published, the revision and version
numbers, the revision scheme, and the date when the document was last published.
Engineering Tool
Opens a dialog box to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. This option
is not supported in this release.
File System
Opens a standard Microsoft dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the
Selected documents list. When you select a file with this Select File dialog box, the
Document Properties dialog box displays, allowing you to specify information about the
file, such as whether it is a new file; the category, type, and subtype of the document; and
the name, description, and title of the document.
Find
Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box, which allows you to search for
documents to add to the Selected documents list.
Issue to
Contains a list of all objects (contracts) that can support issue requests. When you select an
item from this list, the names of any documents associated with that object display in the
table.
Add
Creates a new item in the table for any documents highlighted in the Selected documents
tree view.
Remove
Deletes a selected document from the table.
Document Name
Displays the names of all documents associated with the object in the Issue to field.
See Also
Publish documents (on page 431)
Find Documents to Publish (on page 441)
Publish (on page 427)
Document Properties Dialog Box (on page 440)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 439

 Publishing Documents

Document Properties Dialog Box

Provides details about a new or existing document selected for publishing. You can access this
dialog box using the following procedure:
1. Click File System on the Publish Dialog Box (on page 435). A Microsoft standard Select
File dialog box displays.
2. Select a file to display the Document Properties dialog box and specify information about
the file.
An asterisk (*) next to a field indicates that the field must be completed before the
software enables the OK button.
Selected file
Displays the name of the file that you selected on the Select File dialog box.
New document
Indicates that this document has not previously been published.
Published previously
Indicates that the file has already been published at least once before.
Document category
Select the category for the document.
Document type
Select the type of document. The options that display in this list are determined by the
selection that you make in the Document category field.
Document subtype
If applicable, select the subtype for the document. The options that display in this list are
determined by the selection that you make in the Document type field.
Name
Type the name of the file as it will be known in the integrated environment.
Descriptions
Type a brief description of the file. This description displays later to help you recognize the
file.
Title
Type the official title of the document.
See Also
Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box (on page 442)
Publish Dialog Box (on page 435)
Issue Request Tab (Publish Dialog Box) (on page 439)
Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box) (on page 435)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 440

 Publishing Documents

Find Documents to Publish

Generates a list of documents that either have not been published or have been modified and
need to be published again or have been deleted since the last publish. The command is found
on the SmartPlant menu in the Drawings and Reports task.
This command can also be accessed from using the Find button on the Publish tab of
the Publish dialog box. For more information, see Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box) (on page
435).
Documents must be up-to-date, and the required Discipline property must be defined in order
for the documents to be available for publishing. An error message displays if one or more of the
documents found by the Find Documents to Publish command do not meet this criterion. All
items matching the publish criteria continue through the process. For more information on
setting the appropriate properties, see Set properties for publishing documents (on page 428).
For more information on updating documents, see Updating Documents (on page 78).
The SmartPlant > Find Documents to Publish command looks for the following:
 Documents created but never published
 Documents modified since their last publish
 Documents deleted after being published
The command looks for documents that need to be republished in the active WBS project. For
example, if Project A is the active project, the Find Documents to Publish command looks for
documents in Project A only. You set the active WBS project in the Active Project box on the
main toolbar. For more information, see Manage Projects (on page 442).
Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box (on page 442)

Find documents to publish

Documents must be up-to-date, and the required Discipline property must be defined in order
for the documents to be available for publishing. An error message displays if one or more of the
documents found by the Find Documents to Publish command do not meet this criterion. For
more information on setting the appropriate properties, see Set properties for publishing
documents (on page 428). For more information on updating documents, see Updating
Documents (on page 78).
1. From the Drawings and Reports task, click SmartPlant > Find Documents to Publish.

 This command is available only if you have registered the model using the SmartPlant
Registration Wizard.
 This feature is also available by clicking the Find button on the Publish dialog box.
 The Find Documents to Publish command determines which documents need to be
published or re-published and displays the results of the search in the Find Documents
to Publish dialog box.
2. From the Select documents to publish list, check the boxes corresponding to the
documents that you want to publish.
You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All, or you can clear the
entire list by clicking Clear All.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 441

 Publishing Documents

3. Click OK to accept the selections. The documents selected for publishing now display in the
Documents to Publish list on the Publish dialog box and can be saved by publishing the
documents. For more information, see Publish documents (on page 431).

Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box

Allows you to search for documents that have been updated since they were last published.
Additionally, you can use this dialog box to terminate documents that were previously published
but no longer exist in the authoring tool. You can access the Find Documents to Publish
dialog in two ways:
 Select SmartPlant > Find Documents to Publish.
 Click Find on the Publish command dialog box.
Last Published
Displays the date when the files were last searched. The information displaying in the lists
on this dialog box was found on this specified date and time. This option is not available in
the current release.
Update
Displays the Update dialog box, which allows you to define new search criteria for finding
documents to publish. This option is not available in the current release.
Select documents to publish
Displays a list of files that were either updated since they were last published or files that
have not yet been published. For each file, this list displays the file name and type, and the
date on which the document was last published. If the file has not been published, the Last
Published field for the document is New.
Select documents to terminate
Displays a list of the files that were previously published but have since been removed from
the project. For each file, this list box displays the file name and type, and the date on which
the document was last published.
Select All
Selects all of the files in the associated list of documents.
Clear All
Clears any selected documents in the associated list.
See Also
Publishing Documents (on page 424)
Find Documents to Publish (on page 441)
Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box) (on page 435)

Manage Projects
The Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) project is shown in the dropdown at the upper left-hand
corner of the Drawings and Reports task window, next to the Permission Group dropdown. It
shows the current active project.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 442

 Publishing Documents

In the Common task, you can create new WBS items and projects or edit existing ones. For
more information, see the Common User's Guide.
You use projects in conjunction with publishing. The active project must be set before using the
Final Publish command on the SmartPlant menu.

See Also
Publishing Documents (on page 424)
Select Active Project Dialog Box (on page 443)

Select Active Project Dialog Box

Specifies the active project. You can access the Select Active Project dialog box by clicking
More in the Active Project box on the main toolbar. You define whether you want to look in the
local Workspace or in the Database for the project by selecting the options at the top of the
dialog box. The project hierarchy updates with the selection of the option.
See Also
Manage Projects (on page 442)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 443

APPENDIX A
Appendix: Troubleshooting Drawings
and Reports
This section describes Drawings and Reports error levels and error logging. You can use log
files to review activities and errors that occur when working with the software.

Error Levels
Run the [Product Folder]\Core\Tools\Administrator\Bin\EnableErrorLog.exe tool to enable
detailed error logging in the SP3DErrors.log. For more information, contact Intergraph Support
Services. You can find support information on our web site at http://support.intergraph.com
(http://support.intergraph.com/).
Generally speaking, the larger the number for the error level, the more exhaustive is the logging
of errors. The error levels are as follows:
1 - General user error. This is the default level. At this level, log files only contain error
messages for certain anticipated error conditions (such as a missing filter or a missing view
style), as well as some unanticipated error messages.
101 - Development-specific error level. At this level, log files include everything from the
previous error level, as well as certain development-specific error or informational messages.
201 - General Information. At this level, log files include everything from the previous error
levels, as well as informational messages about what projects and methods are being called.
251 - Batch Information. At this level, log files include everything from the previous error levels,
as well as special batch-specific informational messages.
999 - Exhaustive. At this level, log files contain all informational and error messages. When the
error level is set to 999, the error log files can become very large.

Log Files
There are three categories of orthographic drawings error log files. These files are all located in
your temporary (Temp) folder. For example, your Temp folder might be located at C:\Documents
and Settings\login name\Local Settings\Temp.
You can type %Temp% in the Address box at the top of Windows Explorer to go to
your Temp location.
The log files are:
 %TEMP%\Drawings.log and %TEMP\Errors.log - General purpose error log file. Most of the
errors encountered in Drawings and Reports are logged here.
 C:SP3DBatchSvcTemp\Drawings_Batch.log - The batch service-specific error log file. Any
errors or information messages related to the batch service are found here.
 C:SP3DBatchSvcTemp\DwgBatchServer_< Process ID >_< yyyy_mm_dd_hh_nn_ss >.log -
The batch server-specific error log files. Any errors or information messages related to the
batch servers are found here.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 444

 Appendix: Troubleshooting Drawings and Reports

 C:SP3DBatchSvcTemp\DwgBatchTier_< Process ID >_< yyyy_mm_dd_hh_nn_ss >.log -

The batch tier-specific error log files. Any errors or information messages related to the
batch tier services are found here.
 Generation-time error logs (for example, error log files generated during a drawing update
operation). You can easily view these files by right-clicking a drawing in the software and
selecting View Log on the shortcut menu.
The Temp location also includes .xml files. The software creates one .xml file for each
graphical view in a drawing as it processes the drawing.

Out of Memory Tips

If you are receiving Out of Memory errors when processing very large drawings, check the
following:
 Set the Intersection Edges option in the view style to Off. Sometimes, this option is set to
High Resolution for large drawings. High Resolution is typically useful for drawings of one
object, such as a hanger drawing or an equipment drawing, where you want to see detail
such as the coped intersection of a nozzle with a tank cylinder. If you have this option set
high in a large plan drawing, then the software examines every small beam, cylinder, or nut
and tries to draw coped intersections or rounded edges in the webs. This operation uses a
lot of time and memory.
 Make sure the Preserve Z Order option in the view style is turned off unless you really need
it. A case where you might need it is in a cable tray drawing where trays are stacked or
crossing in plan. However, for most drawings, this setting just leads to increased processing
time and high memory usage for little gain.
 Make sure multiple aspects have not been chosen in the VHL graphic rules.
 If you have a very large session active in the host and then update a drawing, the update
process starts at the large memory usage in the active session. So, if you limit your
workspace to a very small set of objects or even one object, the update process has a better
chance of succeeding. If you use batch updates instead of local updates, workspace is not
an issue unless you are using your local computer as the batch server.
 Decrease the Flush Threshold setting (the default is 2000). This setting is available on the
Drawing View Properties dialog box for a view in a composed drawing. In some instances,
increasing the number may help. During the update process, the Drawings software asks
Core for the monikers of all the objects it has to process. Core passes in the monikers and
Drawings binds them, thus using memory. The software binds up to 2000 of the objects
before it releases the memory and grabs the next 2000. If you reduce this number, say in
increments of 500, the memory gets released much more often and can lead to a successful
update. It is an iterative process to figure out a good number. This value should be from 5 to
5000 with a default of 2000.
 Set the Geometry Validation setting to ON (the default is OFF). This setting is available on
the Drawing View Properties dialog box for a view in a composed drawing or a marine
mode drawings-by-rule drawing. If the drawing has SAT or DGN files, there are sometimes
many invalid geometry errors that can use increasing amounts of memory. With this setting
as On, the software analyzes geometry, then discards and does not draw invalid geometry,
thus freeing up resources and reducing update time. The caveat is that the drawing may not
be 100% accurate because invalid geometries may represent legitimate items but are
removed from the drawing. If the reference file is there just as background, this situation
might be acceptable.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 445

 Appendix: Troubleshooting Drawings and Reports

 In general, you should not place huge SAT files as equipment shapes. If you must place
them as shapes, break them into smaller files.
 The range inside reference files should be kept as small as possible. For example, if the file
contains a pipe rack far away from the global origin, place the file in the model and then
move it to the appropriate position.

Isometric Drawings
The isometric drawing log files reside at the location specified in your Temp environment
variable. For example, the path to the log might be C:\Documents and Settings\login name\Local
Settings\Temp.
You can view message files (.mes), piping component files (.pcf), and .xml files for the isometric
drawing generation process.

VHL Precision
Objects can be displayed as Vector Hidden Line (VHL). There can be instances when you may
want the hidden line information for a model. For example, it may be useful to know how the
edges in the hidden line view are occluded. In general, VHL Precision should not be set, unless
you have some parts in the model that have been modeled with a precision different from rest of
the system. The values you can set impact the VHL calculations. The VHL Precision setting
must be a positive number between 0.001 and 0.000001. This setting is available on the
Drawing View Properties dialog box for a view in a composed drawing or a marine mode
drawings-by-rule drawing.

ISOKEEPFILES Variable
This variable exports XML settings to the location specified in your Temp environment variable.
An XML file contains the name of the isometric view style currently being used. This information
can be used to troubleshoot isometric drawing settings.
The XML file containing the isometric view style will be approximately 27 KB in size.
The ISOKEEPFILES variable is not a Drawings and Reports setting, it is a System Properties
setting.
1. Click Start and right-click My Computer.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Advanced tab.
4. Click Environment Variables.
The Temp environment variable is listed under User variables for username. If you are
unsure of where your Temp folder is, the location is noted in this box.
5. On the Environment Variables dialogue box, select New under the System variables box.
6. Type ISOKEEPFILES in the Variable box and type YES in the Value box.
7. Click OK.
You must set this variable before entering Drawings and Reports and creating the
isometric drawings.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 446

 Appendix: Troubleshooting Drawings and Reports

Reports
The log file for reports (SP3DReports.log) resides at the location specified in your Temp
environment variable. For example, the path to the log might be C:\Documents and
Settings\login name\Local Settings\Temp.
See Also
Drawings and Reports (on page 16)
Troubleshooting Linked Servers (on page 447)

Troubleshooting Linked Servers

If your Site/Catalog/Model database server is different from your Reports database server, you
can use linked servers for communication between the data sources. However, if linked servers
are not configured correctly, the login may fail when you run queries against a linked server.
For linked servers to work correctly, the following must be true:
 The database link must be created on the Site/Catalog/Model database server, not the
Reports database server.
 The linked server must support SQL Server and Windows Authentication Mode.
 You must be connected to SQL Server using Windows Authentication Mode on both
servers.
 Security account delegation must be available on the client and the sending server.
For more information about setting up linked servers, see Microsoft SQL Server documentation.
See Also
Appendix: Troubleshooting Drawings and Reports (on page 444)

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 447

Index
Browse for Folder Dialog Box • 256
2
2D/3D Selection Command • 387 C
Change the Border for an Individual
3 Drawings by Rule Sheet • 425
Change the Border Template for an Existing
3D Model by Query • 196 Sheet • 292
3D Model by Query Component Common Choose Label Dialog Box • 73
Tasks • 196 Clear Manual Edits Command • 405
3D Model Data • 201 Collation Rules • 130
3D Model Data Component Common Tasks Column Settings Dialog Box • 32
• 202 Compare 2D Drawing Object to 3D Model
Object • 388
A Component Shortcut Menu • 37
Add a component • 44 Components Overview • 95
Add a drawing document • 39 Composed Drawings • 214
Add a Drawings by Rule component • 44 Composed Drawings Common Tasks • 216
Add a folder • 43 Conditional Drawing Update • 92
Add a package of components • 44 Configuration Tab • 184
Add a Sheet to Drawing • 430 Configuration Tab (Properties Dialog Box) •
Add Actions to Queue • 260 71
Add Component Dialog Box • 45 Configuration Tab (Surface Style Rule
Add Custom Command Dialog Box • 268 Properties Dialog Box) • 65
Add custom commands • 267 Configure SmartPlant PDF Converter for
Analysis Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) • Windows • 49
178 Convert Excel Spreadsheet Reports to
Appendix Native Text Box Format Custom
Troubleshooting Drawings and Reports • Command • 432
475 Convert Legacy Snapshots • 257
Assembly Drawings • 137 Convert Legacy Snapshots Dialog Box •
Assembly Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) 258
• 176 Copy an item • 40
Associate Graphics to Graphic View • 406 Copy an object • 401
Associate Graphics to Graphic View Copy and Paste View Command • 401
Command • 405 Copy Command • 39
Associate Objects to a Drawings by Rule Create a backup to use for restoration • 93
View • 340 Create a drawing using WBS objects • 222
Associate Objects to View Command • 321 Create a hull lines drawing • 151
Associate Objects to Views • 336 Create a member part drawing • 188
Automatic Dimensioning • 277 Create a multiple profile sketch drawing •
Automatic Resize Behavior of Composed 157
Views • 305 Create a New Composed Drawing • 219
Create a pin jig drawing • 159
Create a pipe support drawing • 190
B Create a piping drawing • 193
Batch Commands • 39 Create a profile sketch drawing • 155
Batch Processing - Intergraph Smart Batch Create a search folder • 249
Services • 258 Create a shell expansion drawing • 187

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 448

 Index

Create a shell profile steel order scantling Draw a Centerline with Scaled Sketching •
drawing • 169 393
Create a Template • 261 Draw a Grate Opening with Scaled
Create a template set drawing • 161 Sketching • 391
Create a volume drawing • 245 Draw a Textured Fill with Scaled Sketching
Create an assembly drawing • 139 • 394
Create an assembly method drawing • 142 Draw an Opening in a Plate with Scaled
Create an assembly sequence drawing • Sketching • 397
144 Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale
Create an imported folder • 255 Factor • 389
Create automated major views for steel Draw Rebar with Scaled Sketching • 396
order scantling drawings • 164 Drawing Document Shortcut Menu • 38
Create custom commands • 266 Drawing Sheet General Properties Dialog
Create Drawing (MicroStation DGN Files) • Box • 223
208 Drawing Sheet Properties Dialog Box • 225,
Create Drawing (Volume Drawings) • 245 429
Create Drawing(s) Command • 41 Drawing View Properties Dialog Box
Create MicroStation DGN files • 209 (Drawing by Query) • 237
Create Orthographic Drawings by Query for Drawing View Properties Dialog Box
volumes • 235 (Drawing View Shortcut Menu) • 409
Create weld symbol with double bevel and Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Place
fillet • 171 View Command) - Composed Drawings •
Crop a Drawings by Rule 2D Drawing View 295
and the 3D Model Volume • 436 Drawing View Properties Dialog Box (Place
Current Sheet Tab • 293 View Command) - Steel Order Drawings
Custom Commands • 262, 432 • 300
Custom Commands Dialog Box • 268 Drawing View Properties Dialog Box
Custom Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 66 (Volume Drawings) • 247
Cut an item • 40 Drawings and Reports • 17
Cut Command • 40 Drawings and Reports Naming Rules • 101
Drawings Batch Dialog Box • 258
D Drawings by Query Filters • 229
Drawings by Rule • 108
Define Layout Style Dialog Box • 319 Drawings by Rule Components • 98
Defining Drawing Volumes • 244 Drawings by Rule Types • 24
Delete a custom command • 267 Drawings Compose Toolbar • 294
Delete an item • 42 Drawings View Explorer • 274
Delete Command • 41
Delete Views • 445
Delivered Custom Commands • 269 E
Delivered Drawing Types • 22 Edit a Composed Drawing • 433
Detail View (View Menu) • 30 Edit a custom command • 267
Dimension Paper Space Objects for 3D Edit a Drawings by Rule Template • 136
Drawings • 287 Edit a scantling drawing • 172
Dimensioned Label Command • 357 Edit a volume drawing template • 247
Dimensioning in 3D Drawings • 286 Edit Border Family Command • 426
Dimensions • 277 Edit Border Template Toolbar • 418
Disassociate Graphics from Graphic View • Edit Command • 42
407 Edit Custom Command Dialog Box • 269
Document and Sheet Naming Rules in Edit Cutting Plane Ribbon • 374
Drawings by Rule • 102 Edit Detail Envelope Ribbon • 370
Document Properties Dialog Box • 471 Edit Dimension Styles • 281
Document Tab • 292 Edit document properties • 51

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 449

 Index

Edit Layout Template • 426 Interface Overview • 25

Edit Section View Ribbon • 374 ISO Standards in Marine Drawings • 19
Edit Sheet Properties Command • 291 Issue request documents • 465
Edit Template (Drawings by Rule) • 135 Issue Request Tab (Publish Dialog Box) •
Edit Template (Volume Drawings 470
Component) • 246 Issue Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 67
Edit Template Command • 42
Edit the Drawing Template • 435 K
Elevation Label Command • 360
Export color and transparency styles • 200 Key Plan Properties Dialog Box • 416
Exporting 3D Model Graphics to Key Plan Tab (Key Plan Properties Dialog
MicroStation • 207 Box) • 417

F L
Filter Properties Dialog Box • 174 Layers (SmartSketch Drawing Editor Tools
Find documents to publish • 472 Menu) • 430
Find Documents to Publish • 472
Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box • M
473 Manage Projects • 474
Folder Shortcut Menu • 36 Manage View from Setup Dialog Box • 130
Format Tab (Drawing View Properties Management Console (View Menu) • 29
Dialog Box) • 296, 302, 410 Manual Dimensioning • 285
Format Tab (Key Plan Properties Dialog Manual Place View Ribbon • 412
Box) • 417 Manufacturing Drawings • 154
Menus and Toolbars • 26
G Modify an Existing Border File • 431
General Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 53 Modify View Ribbon • 435
General Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings Move a Drawing View • 316
by Rule) • 114 Move a view to a different drawing • 402
Generic Module Folder • 211 Move a View with Scaled Sketching Objects
Group existing labels • 365 • 391
Group Labels • 348 Move multiple views to a different drawing •
Group Selected Labels • 363 402
Move Sheet(s) • 276
Move View Command • 401
H Move View Dialog Box • 403
Hide an Object • 400
Hide/Show Object Command • 399 N
Highlight Annotations Command • 403
Highlight Dialog Box • 403 Named Space Tab (Filter Properties Dialog
Hull Lines Drawings • 146 Box) • 177
New • 38
New Command • 43
I New Drawing • 218
Icons for Components and Drawings • 26 Notes Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 66
Imported Folders • 254
Info Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog O
Box) • 295, 301, 409
Info Tab (Key Plan Properties Dialog Box) • Object Type Tab (Filter Properties Dialog
416 Box) • 179
Insert a note at a precise place on an Offshore Drawings • 188
isometric drawing • 87 Open a document • 45
Open Command • 45

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 450

 Index

Optional Schedule Properties Dialog Box • Place Detail View Command • 383
262 Place Detail View Ribbon • 384
Orientation Rules • 116 Place Drawing Area Command • 424
Orthographic Drawings by Query • 226 Place Drawing Property Label Command
Orthographic Drawings by Query Common (Drawing Labels Toolbar) • 419
Tasks • 227 Place Drawing Property Label Ribbon • 419
Override Dimension Styles • 283 Place Drawing View Command (Template
Toolbar) • 408
P Place Key Plan Command (Template
Toolbar) • 415
Paste an item • 47 Place Region Command • 316
Paste Command • 46 Place Report Command (Template Toolbar)
Paste Special Dialog Box • 47 • 413
Permission Group Tab (Filter Properties Place Report View Command • 341
Dialog Box) • 179 Place Section View Ribbon • 373
Permissions Overview • 28 Place Snapshot View Command • 320
Place a Custom Drawing Property Label on Place Snapshot View Ribbon • 320
a Template • 422 Place View command • 294
Place a Cutting Plane/Section View • 376 Point Cloud (Filter Properties Dialog Box) •
Place a Detail Envelope • 370 184
Place a Detail View • 384 Preface • 11
Place a Dimensioned Label • 358, 359 Preview Layout Command • 427
Place a Drawing Property Label on a Print a document • 48
Template • 421 Print a document as a PDF file • 48
Place a Drawing View for Volume Drawings Print Command • 48
• 408 Properties Command • 51
Place a Key Plan • 418 Properties Dialog Box • 52
Place a Label Command • 344 Properties Tab (Filter Properties Dialog
Place a Label Ribbon • 345 Box) • 182
Place a Manual Flow Arrow on an Publish • 457
Orthographic Drawing • 356 Publish a large 3D model to SmartPlant
Place a Manual Label • 347 Foundation • 465
Place a Manual View • 309 Publish Common Tasks • 457
Place a Manual View (By Parts) • 309 Publish Dialog Box • 466
Place a Manual View (By Reference Plane Publish documents • 462
and Block) • 310 Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box) • 467
Place a manual view by selecting a Publish Workflows • 463
reference plane or offset • 167 Published Documents - Load, Consolidated,
Place a manual view by selecting parts • and MergeDelta Tasks (S3D) • 460
166 Publishing Documents • 454
Place a Manual View for Non-Shell Plates • Publishing Title Blocks • 456
312
Place a Manual Weld Label • 354
Place a Section View • 380 Q
Place an Elevation Label • 362 Queries Tab (Setup Dialog Box - Drawings
Place an Embedded Report in a Volume by Rule) • 121
Drawing • 413
Place an Unassigned View • 437 R
Place Cutting Plane Ribbon • 372
Place Cutting Plane/Section View Reference 3D Tab (Filter Properties Dialog
Command • 371 Box) • 183
Place Detail Envelope Command • 368 Reference Tab (Filter Properties Dialog
Place Detail Envelope Ribbon • 369 Box) • 183

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 451

 Index

Refresh (Shortcut Menu) • 84 Section View Orientation Rules in Drawings

Refresh (View Menu) • 33 by Rule • 438
Refresh document status • 85 Section View Orientation Rules in
Region Properties Dialog Box • 319 Orthographic Drawings • 377
Remove Associated Inputs Command • 341 Select Active Project Dialog Box • 474
Remove Cropping on a Drawings by Rule Select Aspects Dialog Box • 61
View • 437 Select Border Family Dialog Box • 426
Rename an item • 73 Select Filter • 232
Rename Command • 73 Select Filter Dialog Box • 128
Repair Documents Custom Command • 269 Select Key Plan Style Dialog Box • 416
Report Properties Dialog Box (Place Report Select Module Dialog Box (Generic Module
View Command) • 342 Folder Component) • 213
Reports Compatible with Drawings • 343 Select Printer (File Menu) • 49
Restore • 93 Select Printer Dialog Box • 49
Restore a document from a backup model • Select Report Template Dialog Box • 415
93 Select Template Dialog Box • 224, 343
Retain Edits made inside a Drawing View • Set properties for publishing documents •
398 458
Retrieve piping component file data (PCF) • Set surface styles and aspects for 3D
76 model data documents • 51
Revise • 450 Set up a 3D Model By Query component •
Revise a document • 451 197
Revise Dialog Box • 452 Set up a Drawings by Query Manager
Revising • 450 component • 199, 233
Revision Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 69 Set up a Drawings by Rule package • 111
Root Shortcut Menu • 35 Setting Properties • 50
Run a custom command • 267 Setup (3D Model by Query Component) •
Run Query (Shortcut Menu) • 73, 234 197
Run Update or Full Update • 444 Setup (3D Model Data Component) • 203
Setup (Drawings by Query Manager
S Component Shortcut Menu) • 233
Setup (Drawings By Query Manager
Save 3D model data for SmartPlant Review Component) • 198
• 447 Setup (Drawings by Rule Component) • 110
Save a package • 82 Setup (Generic Module Folder Component)
Save As Command • 74 • 212
Save As Dialog Box • 80 Setup (Imported Folder) • 256
Save As MicroStation or AutoCAD Format • Setup (MicroStation DGN Files) • 207
289 Setup (Orthographic Drawing by Query
Save as SmartPlant Foundation (*.xml) • 78 Component) • 231
Save as SmartPlant Review Dialog Box • Setup (Search Folder) • 250
448 Setup a 3D Model Data component • 204
Save as SmartPlant Review File • 446 Setup an Orthographic Drawing by Query
Save Package Command • 82 component • 231
Save Package Dialog Box • 83 Setup Command • 83
Save to a file • 75 Setup Dialog Box (3D Model by Query
Scaled Sketching Command • 390 Component) • 198
Scaled Sketching Ribbon • 390 Setup Dialog Box (3D Model Data
Scantling Drawings • 163 Component) • 205
Schedule [Task] Dialog Box • 261 Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Query
Search Folder Filters • 250 Manager Component) • 234
Search Folders • 248 Setup Dialog Box (Drawings By Query
Manager Component) • 200

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 452

 Index

Setup Dialog Box (Drawings by Rule Use Dimension Templates • 280

Component) • 114 Use View Styles with Dimension Rules •
Setup Dialog Box (Generic Module Folder 278
Component) • 213 Using Scaled Sketching • 389
Setup Dialog Box (Imported Folder) • 256
Setup Dialog Box (MicroStation DGN Files) V
• 208
Setup Dialog Box (Orthographic Drawing by View Definition Dialog Box • 115
Query Component) • 232 View Log Command • 94
Setup Dialog Box (Search Folder) • 250 View Menu • 29
Sheet Properties Dialog Box • 292 View Naming Rules in Drawings by Rule •
Shell Expansion Drawings • 185 106
Shortcut Menus • 34, 427 View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog
Show an Object • 400 Box - Drawings View Explorer) • 302
Signature Area Tab (Properties Dialog Box) View Tab (Drawing View Properties Dialog
• 56 Box) • 237, 296, 410
Specify columns in the detail view • 31 Volume Drawings • 241
Style Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 58 Volume Drawings Common Tasks • 243
Support for Handling Large Publishes • 459 Volume Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) •
Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box • 181
63
Surface Style Rule Properties Tab (Surface W
Style Rule Properties Dialog Box) • 63 WBS Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 70
Surface Styles and Aspects Tab (Properties What's New in Drawings and Reports • 12
Dialog Box) • 59 Work Breakdown Structure Tab (Filter
Switch Border • 224, 428 Properties Dialog Box) • 178
System Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) • Working with Drawings and Reports and
176 SmartSketch Drawing Editor • 271
Workspace Explorer (View Menu) • 33
T
Template Toolbar • 407
Title Area Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 53
Tools Menu • 257
Transfer Ownership Dialog Box • 72
Troubleshooting Linked Servers • 478

U
Update • 89
Update a manual view • 173
Update a Manual View • 315
Update a report • 87
Update a single drawing • 87, 91
Update all drawings in a folder or a
component • 86, 91
Update and Full Update Commands • 443
Update Now • 85
Update View Command • 427
Updating Documents • 84
Use a Generic Module Folder component •
212
Use Dimension Rules • 279

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide 453